2k12avalanche PDF

Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual - 2012 - crc 2nd edition - 11/7/11 Black plate (1,1)
2012 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Performance and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-33
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Luggage/Load Locations . . . . . . . 4-2 Trademarks and License
Keys, Doors, and Additional Storage Features . . . 4-5 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-21
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-42 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Universal Remote System . . . . 5-50 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-30
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-44
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
2012 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-50 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-17
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-80 Special Application Vehicle Data Recording and
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Additional Maintenance
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Recommended Fluids, OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-11 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14 OnStar Additional
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Introduction iii
This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are Propriétaires Canadiens
options that you did not purchase or A French language copy of this
due to changes subsequent to the manual can be obtained from your
printing of this owner manual. dealer or from:
Please refer to the purchase
The names, logos, emblems, documentation relating to your On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
slogans, vehicle model names, and specific vehicle to confirm each of ce guide en français auprès du
vehicle body designs appearing in the features found on your vehicle. concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
this manual including, but not limited For vehicles first sold in Canada, suivante:
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, substitute the name “General
the CHEVROLET Emblem, Helm, Incorporated
Motors of Canada Limited” for Attention: Customer Service
AVALANCHE, and Z71 are Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
trademarks and/or service 47911 Halyard Drive
appears in this manual. Plymouth, MI 48170
marks of General Motors LLC,
its subsidiaries, affiliates, Keep this manual in the vehicle for
or licensors. quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20902915 B Second Printing 2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
Introduction v
Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure

Here are some additional symbols B : Engine Coolant Temperature g : Outside Power Foldaway
that may be found on the vehicle Mirrors
and what they mean. For more O : Exterior Lamps
information on the symbol, refer to # : Fog Lamps O : Power
the Index.
. : Fuel Gauge / : Remote Vehicle Start
0 : Adjustable Pedals + : Fuses > : Safety Belt Reminders
9 : Airbag Readiness Light 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
# : Air Conditioning Changer _ : Tow/Haul Mode
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) (: Heated Steering Wheel d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls j: LATCH System Child M : Windshield Washer Fluid
or OnStar® Restraints
$ : Brake System Warning Light *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
" : Charging System
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Passenger Sensing

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Rear Vision
Steering Wheel Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Throttle and Brake Pedal Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Initial Drive Information Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Universal Remote System . . . 1-24
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-15 Performance and Maintenance
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-26
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26
Midgate® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-27
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Vehicle Features Driving for Better Fuel
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Roadside Assistance
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-21 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Heated and Ventilated Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-21
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Head Restraint Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑10. J. Dome Lamp Override. See P. Steering Wheel Controls on
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7. page 5‑2.
See Turn and Lane-Change Instrument Panel Illumination Q. Climate Control Systems on
Signals on page 6‑5. Control on page 6‑6. page 8‑1 (If Equipped).
Windshield Wiper/Washer on Fog Lamps on page 6‑5 Dual Automatic Climate Control
page 5‑4. (If Equipped). System on page 8‑4
C. Instrument Cluster on K. Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped).
page 5‑10. Control (If Equipped). See R. Power Outlets on page 5‑8.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on Four-Wheel Drive (Single S. StabiliTrak® System on
page 6‑4 (Out of View). Speed Automatic Transfer page 9‑44.
Case) on page 9‑39 or
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed Pedal Adjust Control (If
Transmission on page 9‑30. Automatic Transfer Case) on Equipped). See Adjustable
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34 page 9‑35. Throttle and Brake Pedal on
(If Equipped). page 9‑21.
L. Data Link Connector (DLC)
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
Buttons. See Driver Information Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18. page 9‑50 (If Equipped).
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25. M. Cruise Control on page 9‑48. Power Assist Steps on
H. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8. page 2‑16 (If Equipped).
N. Steering Wheel Adjustment on
I. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 5‑2. T. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
page 6‑1. O. Horn on page 5‑4.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Information Operation on page 2‑3.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the Remote Vehicle Start
important features that may or may With this feature the engine can be
not be on your specific vehicle. started from outside of the vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer Starting the Vehicle
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual. 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry 2. Press and release Q.
(RKE) System K: Press to unlock the driver door.
3. Immediately after completing
The RKE transmitter is used to Press K again within three seconds
Step 2, press and hold / until
remotely lock and unlock the doors to unlock all remaining doors.
the turn signal lamps flash.
from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from Q: Press to lock all doors. Lock
When the vehicle starts, the parking
the vehicle. and unlock feedback can be
personalized. See Vehicle lamps will turn on and remain on as
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) long as the engine is running. The
on page 5‑42. doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
L : Press and release to locate The engine will continue to run for
the vehicle. Press L and hold for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
more than two seconds to sound the 10-minute time extension. Remote
panic alarm. Press L again to start can be extended only once.
cancel the panic alarm.
In Brief 1-5
Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks Midgate®

To cancel a remote start: Press Q or K on the RKE This vehicle is equipped with a
. Aim the RKE transmitter at the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Midgate and a removable rear glass
vehicle and press and hold / Entry (RKE) System Operation on panel. The Midgate allows you to
page 2‑3. extend the length of the vehicle's
until the parking lamps turn off.
cargo area.
. Turn on the hazard warning
For more information see Midgate®
flashers.
on page 2‑9.
. Turn the ignition on and then
back off. Tailgate
See Remote Vehicle Start on Use the Remote Keyless
page 2‑5. Entry (RKE) transmitter or power
door lock switch to lock and unlock
Door Locks the tailgate.
There are several ways to lock and Open the tailgate by lifting up on its
unlock the vehicle. handle while pulling the tailgate
From outside, use the Remote Power Folding Mirrors Shown, toward you.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or Other Models Similar To close the tailgate, push it firmly
the key in the driver door. upward until it latches. Push and
Q: Press to lock the doors.
pull on the tailgate to be sure it is
From inside, use the power door
locks or the manual door locks. To
K: Press to unlock the doors. latched securely.
lock or unlock the door with the See Door Locks on page 2‑7.
manual locks, push down or pull up
on the manual lock knob.
1-6 In Brief
Tailgate Removal The driver door has switches that Seat Adjustment
control all windows, the passengers
The tailgate is not to be removed. Manual Seats
door switch only control that
Removing the tailgate may cause
window. The power windows work
damage to the electrical connector
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
resulting in a loss of lock/unlock and
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
rear vision camera function.
Accessory Power (RAP). See
See Tailgate on page 2‑15. Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑26 for more information.
Windows Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
For more information, see:
. Windows on page 2‑23.
. Power Windows on page 2‑24.
To adjust the seat:
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
Power Folding Mirrors Shown, forth to be sure the seat is
Other Models Similar locked in place.
See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
In Brief 1-7
Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar

Manual Lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

To adjust the power lumbar support,
. Move the seat forward or if equipped:
rearward by sliding the control If equipped, increase or decrease . On vehicles with two-way
forward or rearward. manual lumbar support by turning
lumbar, press and hold the top
. If available, raise or lower the the knob forward or rearward.
or bottom of the control to
front or rear part of the seat See Lumbar Adjustment on increase or decrease lumbar
cushion by moving the front or page 3‑4. support.
rear of the control up or down. . On vehicles with four-way
. If available, raise or lower the lumbar, press and hold the front
entire seat by moving the entire or rear of the control to increase
control up or down. or decrease lumbar support.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑4.
1-8 In Brief
To raise or lower the height of 2. Move the seatback to the Power Reclining Seatbacks
the support, press and hold the desired position, and then
top or bottom of the control. release the lever to lock the
See Lumbar Adjustment on seatback in place.
page 3‑4. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Reclining Seatbacks
To return the seatback to the upright
Manual Reclining Seatbacks position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked. To adjust a power seatback,
if equipped:
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑5.
. Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
To recline a manual seatback: page 3‑5.
1. Lift the lever.
In Brief 1-9
Memory Features Storing Memory Positions See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 and
To save into memory: Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 5‑42.
1. Adjust the driver seat and
seatback recliner, both outside Easy Exit Driver Seat
mirrors, and the throttle and This feature can move the seat
brake pedals, if equipped. rearward to allow extra room to exit
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑20 the vehicle.
and Adjustable Throttle and B : Press to recall the easy exit
Brake Pedal on page 9‑21. seat position. The vehicle must be
Not all mirrors and adjustable in P (Park).
throttle and brake pedals will See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 and
have the ability to save and Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
recall their positions. Buttons) on page 5‑42.
On vehicles with the memory 2. Press and hold “1” until
feature, the controls on the driver two beeps sound. Second Row Seats
door are used to program and recall
memory settings for the driver seat, 3. Repeat for a second driver The rear seatbacks can be folded to
outside mirrors, and the adjustable position using “2.” provide more cargo space and
throttle and brake pedals, access to the midgate.
To recall, press and release “1” or
if equipped. “2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park). For detailed instructions see Rear
A single beep will sound. The seat, Seats on page 3‑10.
outside mirrors, and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals,
if equipped, will move to the
position previously stored for the
identified driver.
1-10 In Brief
Heated and Ventilated J: Press to heat the seat and Safety Belts
Seats seatback.
Press the button once for the
highest setting. With each press of
the button, the seat will change to
the next lower setting, and then to
the off setting. The lights indicate
three for the highest setting and one
for the lowest.
See Heated and Ventilated Front
Seats on page 3‑8.
Head Restraint
Adjustment Refer to the following sections for
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons
Do not drive until the head restraints important information on how to use
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons
for all occupants are installed and safety belts properly.
Similar
adjusted properly. . Safety Belts on page 3‑11.
If available, the buttons are on the
To achieve a comfortable seating . How to Wear Safety Belts
front doors. To operate, the ignition
position, change the seatback Properly on page 3‑12.
must be in ON/RUN.
recline angle as little as necessary
H: If available, press to cool while keeping the seat and the head
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑13.
the seat. restraint height in the proper . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
I: Press to heat the position. Children (LATCH System) on
seatback only. See Head Restraints on page 3‑2 page 3‑43.
and Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.
In Brief 1-11
Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

System Exterior Mirrors
The passenger sensing system,
if equipped, turns off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
under certain conditions. No other United States
airbag is affected by the passenger
sensing system.
If the vehicle has one of the
indicators pictured in the following
illustrations, then the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position.
Canada and Mexico
The passenger airbag status
indicator, if equipped, will be visible See Passenger Sensing System on With Power Folding Mirrors
on the overhead console when the page 3‑28 for important information.
To adjust the mirrors:
vehicle is started.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the
driver or passenger side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows
located on the control pad to
adjust the mirror.
1-12 In Brief
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that 2. Press one of the four arrows
the side of the vehicle and the located on the control pad to
area behind are seen. move the mirror in the desired
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to direction.
deselect the mirror. 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑20 for the side of the vehicle and the
more information . area behind are seen.
To power fold the mirrors: See Power Mirrors on page 2‑20 for
more information.
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out
to the driving position. Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to With Manual Folding Mirrors either outside mirror.
the folded position.
To adjust the mirrors: To manual fold the mirrors:
1. Move the selector switch located Fold the mirrors inward to prevent
above the four-way control pad damage when going through an
to the left or right to choose automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
either the driver side or mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
passenger side mirror. mirror outward, to return to its
original position.
In Brief 1-13
Heated Mirrors Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

Press 1 to heat the mirrors. Adjustment Adjustment
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Hold the rearview mirror in the
Dual Automatic Climate Control center and move it to view the
System on page 8‑4 or Climate area behind the vehicle.
Control Systems on page 8‑1 for
Manual Rearview Mirror
more information.
For vehicles with a manual rearview
Park Tilt Mirrors mirror, push the tab forward for
If the vehicle has the memory daytime use and pull it for nighttime
package, the exterior mirrors tilt use to avoid glare from the
to a preselected position when the headlamps from behind. See
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This Manual Rearview Mirror on
feature lets the driver view the curb page 2‑22 for more information.
when parallel parking. The mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview The tilt lever is located on the lower
return to the original position
Mirror left side of the steering column.
when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is For vehicles with an automatic To adjust the steering wheel:
turned off or to OFF/LOCK. dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull
will automatically reduce the glare
This feature can be programed the lever.
from the headlamps from behind.
through the Driver Information 2. Move the steering wheel up
The dimming feature comes on and
Center (DIC). See Vehicle or down.
the indicator light illuminates each
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
time the ignition is turned to start. 3. Release the lever to lock the
See Automatic Dimming Rearview wheel in place.
Mirror on page 2‑22 for more Do not adjust the steering wheel
information. while driving.
1-14 In Brief
Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting

Adjustment Dome Lamps
On vehicles with this feature, you The dome lamps are located in the
can change the position of the overhead console.
throttle and brake pedals.
They come on when any door is
opened and turn off after all the
doors are closed.
Turn the instrument panel
brightness knob located below k : Press the button in and the
the dome lamp override button, dome lamps remain off when a door
clockwise to the farthest position to is opened. Press the button again to
manually turn on the dome lamps. return it to the extended position so
The control used to adjust the
The dome lamps remain on until the that the dome lamps come on when
pedals is located on the instrument
knob is turned counterclockwise. a door is opened.
panel below the climate control
system. Dome Lamp Override Reading Lamps
Press the bottom of the control to The dome lamp override button is For vehicles with reading lamps in
move the pedals closer to your located next to the exterior lamps the overhead console, press the
body. Press the top of the control to control. button located next to the lamp to
move the pedals away. turn it on or off.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake The vehicle may also have reading
Pedal on page 9‑21. lamps in other locations. The lamps
cannot be adjusted.
In Brief 1-15
For more information about interior control to the off position again to Windshield Wiper/Washer
lamps, see: turn the automatic headlamps or
. Dome Lamps on page 6‑7. DRL back on.
. Reading Lamps on page 6‑7. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the off position will only work when
. Instrument Panel Illumination the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Control on page 6‑6.
AUTO: Automatically turns on
the headlamps, parking lamps,
Exterior Lighting instrument panel lights, license The front wiper control is located on
plate lamps, and taillamps. the turn and lane‐change lever.
; : Turns on the parking lamps, The windshield wipers are controlled
instrument panel lights, license plate by turning the band with z on it.
lamps, and taillamps.
8 : For a single wipe, turn to 8,
2: Turns on the headlamps, then release. For several wipes,
parking lamps, instrument panel
lights, license plate lamps, and hold the band on 8 longer.
taillamps. 9 : Turns the windshield
For more information, see: wipers off.
The exterior lamps control is located
on the instrument panel to the left of . Exterior Lamp Controls on
the steering wheel. page 6‑1.
P: Turns off the automatic . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
headlamps and Daytime Running on page 6‑3.
Lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp . Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.
1-16 In Brief
6: Turn the band up for more Climate Controls

frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes. The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of the vehicle can be
controlled with these systems.
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
L : Push the paddle at the top of
the lever to spray washer fluid on
the windshield.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 5‑4.
A. Fan Control E. Air Conditioning

B. Outside Air F. Driver and Passenger
C. Air Recirculation Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger

In Brief 1-17
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
If available, the Range Selection

Mode switch is located on the shift
lever.
A. Driver and Passenger H. Display
Temperature Controls To use the Range Selection feature:
I. Power Button
B. Fan Control 1. Move the column shift lever to
J. Rear Window Defogger the M (Manual) position. The
C. AUTO K. Air Conditioning current range will appear next
D. Defrost to the M. This is the highest
L. PASS attainable range with all lower
E. Air Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on gears accessible. As an
F. Outside Air page 8‑1 and Dual Automatic example, when 5 (Fifth) gear
Climate Control System on is selected, 1 (First) through
G. Air Delivery Mode Control
page 8‑4. 5 (Fifth) gears are available.
1-18 In Brief
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, Automatic Transfer Case The transfer case knob is located to
located on the steering column the left of the instrument panel
shift lever, to select the desired cluster. Use this knob to shift into
range of gears for current driving and out of the different Four-Wheel
conditions. See Manual Mode on Drive modes.
page 9‑33.
2 m : This setting is used for driving
While using Range Selection Mode, in most street and highway
cruise control and the Tow/Haul situations.
mode can be used.
AUTO: This setting is ideal for
Grade Braking is not available when use when road surface traction
Range Selection Mode is active. conditions are variable.
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34.
4 m : Use the Four-Wheel-Drive
Four-Wheel Drive Two Speed Transfer Case High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, roads or in most off-road situations.
you can send the engine's driving
power to all four wheels for extra 4 n : Vehicles with a two
traction. speed transfer case have a
Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. This
setting sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are
driving off-road in deep sand, deep
mud, deep snow, and while climbing
or descending steep hills.
Single Speed Transfer Case

In Brief 1-19
N (Neutral): Vehicles with a two Vehicle Features

speed transfer case have a
N (Neutral) position. Shift the Radio(s)
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 10‑85 or Towing the Vehicle
on page 10‑84.
See Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 9‑39 or Four-Wheel Drive (Two
Speed Automatic Transfer Case) on
page 9‑35.
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

and off. Turn to increase or FM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.
decrease the volume. f: Select radio stations.
1-20 In Brief
© SEEK or ¨ SEEK: Seek or scan Storing Radio Stations 3. Press the softkey located under
stations. any one of the labels to be
A maximum of 36 stations can be
changed.
4: Press to switch the display stored as favorites using the six
between the radio station frequency softkeys located below the radio 4. To increase or decrease the time
and the time. While the ignition is station frequency tabs and by using or date, turn f clockwise or
off, press this button to display the the radio FAV button. Press FAV to counter‐clockwise.
time. Press to display additional text go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite For detailed instructions on setting
information related to the current
stations available per page. Each the clock for the vehicle's specific
FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3,
page of favorites can contain any audio system, see Clock on
or WMA song. If information is
combination of AM, FM, or XM page 5‑7.
available during XM, CD, MP3,
or WMA playback, the song title stations.
information displays on the top line Satellite Radio
For more information, see “Storing
of the display and artist information Radio Stations” in AM-FM Radio on XM is a satellite radio service based
displays on the bottom line. When page 7‑8. in the 48 contiguous United States
information is not available, “NO and 10 Canadian provinces.
INFO” displays. Setting the Clock XM satellite radio has a wide
For more information about these To set the time and date: variety of programming and
and other radio features, see commercial-free music, coast to
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ coast, and in digital-quality sound.
Operation on page 7‑3. ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then
A fee is required to receive the
For vehicles with a Rear Seat press O , to turn the radio on.
Entertainment System (RSE) and XM service.
Rear Seat Audio System (RSA), see 2. Press H to display HR, MIN,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) MM, DD, and YYYY (hour,
System on page 7‑33 and Rear minute, month, day, and year).
Seat Audio (RSA) System on
page 7‑43 for more information.
In Brief 1-21
For more information, refer to: iPod®, laptop computers, Steering Wheel Controls
. www.xmradio.com or call MP3 players, CD changers,
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.) USB storage device, etc. can be
connected to the auxiliary port using
. www.xmradio.ca or call a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the
1-877-438-9677 (Canada) USB port depending on the audio
See Satellite Radio on page 7‑9. system.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑29
Portable Audio Devices for further information.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with a Bluetooth
system, it allows users with a
Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls If available, some audio controls
using the vehicle’s audio system can be adjusted at the steering
and controls. wheel.
The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone w : Press to go to the next favorite
must be paired with the Bluetooth radio station, track on a CD,
system before it can be used in the or folder on an iPod® or USB
vehicle. Not all phones will support device.
all functions. For more information, c / x : Press to go to the
This vehicle has an auxiliary input, visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
located on the audio faceplate, and previous favorite radio station, track
a USB port located in the center For more information, see Bluetooth on a CD, or folder on an iPod® or
console. External devices such as on page 7‑45. USB device. Press to reject an
incoming call, or to end a call.
1-22 In Brief
b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise

speakers only. Press again to turn control without erasing the set
the sound on. Press and hold longer speed from memory.
than two seconds to interact with See Cruise Control on page 9‑48.
OnStar® or Bluetooth systems,
if equipped.
Navigation System
+e: Press to increase volume. If the vehicle has a navigation
−e: Press to decrease volume. system, there is a separate
navigation system manual that
SRCE: Press to switch between includes information on the radio,
the radio and CD, and for equipped audio players, and navigation
vehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary, system.
and rear auxiliary.
The navigation system provides
¨: Press to seek the next radio detailed maps of most major
station, the next track or chapter T : Press to turn the system on freeways and roads. After a
while sourced to the CD or DVD or off. The indicator light is on when destination has been set, the
slot, or to select tracks and folders cruise control is on and turns off system provides turn-by-turn
on an iPod or USB device. when cruise control is off. instructions for reaching the
For more information, see Steering + RES: Press briefly to make the destination. In addition, the system
Wheel Controls on page 5‑2. vehicle resume to a previously set can help locate a variety of points of
speed, or press and hold to interest (POIs), such as banks,
accelerate. airports, restaurants, and more.
SET −: Press to set the speed and See the navigation system manual
activate cruise control or make the for more information.
vehicle decelerate.
In Brief 1-23
Driver Information 3 : Press to display the V : Press to set or reset certain

Center (DIC) odometer, trip odometer, fuel functions and to turn off or
range, average economy, fuel acknowledge messages on
The DIC display is located at the used, timer, instantaneous economy the DIC.
bottom of the instrument panel and Active Fuel Management™
cluster. It shows the status of many For more information, see Driver
indicator, and transmission Information Center (DIC) on
vehicle systems and enables temperature. The compass and
access to the personalization menu. page 5‑25.
outside air temperature will
also be shown in the display. Vehicle Customization
The temperature will be shown
Some vehicle features can be
in °C or °F depending on the units
programmed by using the DIC
selected.
buttons next to the steering wheel.
T: Press to display the oil life, These features include:
units, tire pressure readings for . Language
vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer . Door Lock and Unlock Settings
brake gain and output information . RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
for vehicles with the Integrated
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, . Lighting
engine hours, compass zone . Chime Volume
setting, and compass recalibration.
The DIC buttons are located on the . Memory Features
instrument panel, next to the U: Press to customize the feature
settings on your vehicle. See See Vehicle Personalization (With
steering wheel. DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42.
Vehicle Personalization (With DIC
Some vehicles do not have the Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more
buttons shown, however some of information.
the menus can be viewed by using
the trip odometer reset stem.
1-24 In Brief
Rear Vision It operates at speeds less than Universal Remote System

8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audible
Camera (RVC) beeps to provide distance and
If available, the RVC displays a system information.
view of the area behind the vehicle Keep the sensors on the vehicle's
when the vehicle is shifted into rear bumper clean to ensure proper
R (Reverse). This is displayed on operation.
the inside rearview mirror or the
navigation screen, if equipped. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
page 9‑50. Vehicles with the Universal Remote
To clean the camera lens, located in
System will have these buttons
the bezel of the tailgate handle,
rinse it with water and wipe it with a
Power Outlets located in the headliner.
soft cloth. Accessory power outlets can be This system provides a way to
used to plug in electrical equipment, replace up to three remote control
For more information, see Rear
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. transmitters used to activate
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑52.
devices such as garage door
The vehicle may have two
openers, security systems, and
Ultrasonic Parking Assist accessory power outlets located home automation devices.
on the instrument panel and one
If available, the Ultrasonic Rear inside the center floor console. Read the instructions completely
Parking Assist (URPA) system uses before attempting to program the
sensors on the rear bumper to The vehicle may also have an outlet
transmitter. Because of the steps
assist with parking and avoiding on the rear of the center floor
involved, it may be helpful to have
objects while in R (Reverse). console above the cupholder door.
another person assist with
The accessory power outlet is programming the transmitter.
operational at all times.
See Universal Remote System on
See Power Outlets on page 5‑8. page 5‑50.
In Brief 1-25
Sunroof Vent: From the closed position, When the sunroof is opened, an air
press the rear of switch (B) to vent deflector will automatically raise.
the sunroof. The air deflector will retract when
Open/Close: To open the sunroof, the sunroof is closed.
press and hold switch (A) until the The sunroof also has a sunshade
sunroof reaches the desired which can be pulled forward to block
position. Press and hold the front sun rays. The sunshade must be
of switch (A) to close it. opened and closed manually.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To If an object is in the path of the
express-open the sunroof, fully sunroof while it is closing, the
press and release the rear of anti-pinch feature will detect the
switch (A) until the sunroof object and stop the sunroof.
reaches the desired position. To See Sunroof on page 2‑25 for more
express-close the sunroof, fully information.
A. Open or Close press and release the front of
B. Vent switch (A). Press the switch again
to stop it.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
sunroof only operates when the
ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑26 for more
information.
1-26 In Brief
Performance and . Press and release g again to During cooler conditions, the low tire
turn on both systems. pressure warning light may appear
Maintenance For more information, see
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
® StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑44.
StabiliTrak System indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
The vehicle has a traction control Tire Pressure Monitor inflated to the proper pressure.
system that limits wheel spin and This vehicle may have a Tire
the StabiliTrak system that assists The TPMS does not replace normal
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). monthly tire maintenance. It is the
with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions. Both driver’s responsibility to maintain
systems turn on automatically every correct tire pressures.
time the vehicle is started. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
. To turn off traction control, press on page 10‑54.
and release g on the instrument
panel. The appropriate DIC Engine Oil Life System
message displays. See Ride The TPMS warning light alerts you The engine oil life system calculates
Control System Messages on to a significant loss in pressure of engine oil life based on vehicle use
page 5‑38. one of the vehicle's tires. If the and, on most vehicles, displays a
. To turn off both traction control warning light comes on, stop as DIC message when it is necessary
and StabiliTrak, press and hold soon as possible and inflate the to change the engine oil and filter.
g until g illuminates and the tires to the recommended pressure The oil life system should be reset
appropriate DIC message shown on the Tire and Loading to 100% only following an oil
displays. See Ride Control Information label. See Vehicle Load change.
System Messages on page 5‑38. Limits on page 9‑16. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
In Brief 1-27
Resetting the Oil Life System 3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING

. Brake gradually and avoid
on the DIC. If the display shows abrupt stops.
To reset the Engine Oil Life System
on most vehicles: 100%, the system is reset. . Avoid idling the engine for long
See Engine Oil Life System on periods of time.
1. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING
on the DIC. If the vehicle does page 10‑10. . When road and weather
not have DIC buttons, the conditions are appropriate, use
vehicle must be in P (Park) to Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) cruise control.
access this display. Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge . Always follow posted speed
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET and a yellow fuel cap can use either limits or drive more slowly when
button on the DIC, or the trip unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel conditions require.
odometer reset stem if the containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). . Keep vehicle tires properly
vehicle does not have DIC See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on inflated.
buttons, for more than page 9‑59. For all other vehicles,
five seconds. The oil life will use only the unleaded gasoline . Combine several trips into a
change to 100%. described under Recommended single trip.
Fuel on page 9‑57. . Replace the vehicle's tires with
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life
System can be reset as follows: the same TPC Spec number
Driving for Better Fuel molded into the tire's sidewall
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with Economy near the size.
the engine off.
Driving habits can affect fuel
. Follow recommended scheduled
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal maintenance.
mileage. Here are some driving tips
slowly three times within
to get the best fuel economy
five seconds.
possible.
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
smoothly.
1-28 In Brief
Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar Sign up today at:

(U.S. and Canada)
Program U.S.: chevrolet.com (click on
If you have an active OnStar “Owners,” then “Manage My
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
subscription, press the Q button Chevrolet/Owners Login”)
TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438 and the current GPS location will be Canada: chevroletowner.ca
Canada: 1-800-268-6800 sent to an OnStar advisor who will
Mexico: 01-800-466-0800
assess your problem, contact OnStar®
Roadside Assistance, and relay
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, your exact location to get the help If equipped, this vehicle has a
you are automatically enrolled in the you need. comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Roadside Assistance program. that can connect to a live Advisor
Online Owner Center for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
See Roadside Assistance Program (U.S. and Canada) Connection, and Diagnostic
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or Services. See OnStar Overview on
The Online Owner Center is a
Roadside Assistance Program page 14‑1.
complimentary service that includes
(Mexico) on page 13‑9.
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Doors

Midgate® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-22
Windows Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Vehicle Security Windows
Keys and Locks Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-16 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Exterior Mirrors Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-21
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Keys and Locks If locked out of your vehicle, contact

Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program (U.S. and
Keys Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Assistance Program (Mexico) on
{ WARNING page 13‑9 for more information.
Leaving children in a vehicle with With an active OnStar subscription,

the ignition key is dangerous for an OnStar Advisor may remotely
unlock the vehicle. See OnStar
many reasons. Children or others
Overview on page 14‑1.
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
Remote Keyless Entry
The key can be used for the ignition, (RKE) System
or even make the vehicle move.
door locks, tailgate, and side
The windows will function with the storage boxes. See Radio Frequency Statement on
keys in the ignition and children page 13‑20 for information
could be seriously injured or killed See your dealer if a replacement regarding Part 15 of the Federal
if caught in the path of a closing key or additional key is needed. Communications Commission (FCC)
window. Do not leave the keys in Notice: If the keys get locked in rules and Industry Canada
a vehicle with children. the vehicle, it may have to be Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If there is a decrease in the RKE when Q is pressed again within

operating range: three seconds of the previous press
. Check the distance. The of the lock button. See Vehicle
transmitter may be too far from Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
the vehicle. on page 5‑42 for additional
information.
. Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be Pressing Q arms the content
blocking the signal. theft‐deterrent system. See
. Check the transmitter's battery. Anti-theft Alarm System on
See “Battery Replacement” later page 2‑16.
in this section. K (Unlock): Press once to unlock
. If the transmitter is still not With Remote Start (Without only the driver door. If K is pressed
working correctly, see your Remote Start Similar) again within three seconds, all
dealer or a qualified technician / (Remote Vehicle Start): For remaining doors, including the
for service. vehicles with this feature, press / tailgate, unlock. The interior lamps
to start the engine from outside the may come on and stay on for
Remote Keyless Entry vehicle using the RKE transmitter. 20 seconds or until the ignition is
(RKE) System Operation See Remote Vehicle Start on turned on.
page 2‑5 for additional information. If enabled through the DIC, the turn
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the signal lamps flash twice to indicate
transmitter functions work up to
doors, including the tailgate. unlocking has occurred. See Vehicle
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
Personalization (With DIC Buttons)
There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver on page 5‑42. If enabled through the
can affect the performance of the Information Center (DIC), the turn DIC, the exterior lights may turn on.
transmitter. See Remote Keyless signal lamps flash once to indicate
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2. locking has occurred. If enabled
through the DIC, the horn chirps
See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

Vehicle Personalization (With DIC the Vehicle Replace the battery if the REPLACE
Buttons) on page 5‑42.
Only RKE transmitters programmed BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter to this vehicle will work. If a message displays in the DIC. See
disarms the content theft‐deterrent transmitter is lost or stolen, a “REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE
system. See Anti-theft Alarm replacement can be purchased and KEY” under Key and Lock
System on page 2‑16. programmed through your dealer. Messages on page 5‑37 for
When the replacement transmitter is additional information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic programmed to this vehicle, all
Alarm): Press and release to Notice: When replacing the
remaining transmitters must also be battery, do not touch any of the
locate the vehicle. The turn signal
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen circuitry on the transmitter. Static
lamps flash and the horn sounds
transmitters will no longer work from your body could damage the
three times.
once the new transmitter is transmitter.
Press and hold L for more than programmed. Each vehicle can
two seconds to activate the panic have up to eight transmitters
alarm. The turn signal lamps flash programmed to it. See your dealer
and the horn sounds repeatedly for to program transmitters to the
30 seconds. The alarm turns off vehicle.
when the ignition is moved to ON/
RUN or L is pressed again. The
ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for
the panic alarm to work.
3. Insert the new battery, positive During a remote start, if the vehicle
side facing down. Replace with a has an automatic climate control
CR2032 or equivalent battery. system and heated seats, the
4. Snap the transmitter back heated seats will turn on during
together. colder outside temperatures and will
shut off when the key is turned to
ON/RUN. If the vehicle does not
Remote Vehicle Start have an automatic climate control
If available, this feature allows you system, during remote start,
to start the engine from outside of manually turn the heated seats on
the vehicle. It may also start up the and off. See Heated and Ventilated
vehicle's heating or air conditioning Front Seats on page 3‑8 for
systems and rear window defogger. additional information.
To replace the battery:
Normal operation of the system will Laws in some communities may
1. Separate the transmitter with a return after the key is turned to the restrict the use of remote starters.
flat, thin object, such as a flat ON/RUN position. For example, some laws may
head screwdriver. require a person using the remote
If the vehicle has an automatic
. Carefully insert the tool into climate control system, the climate start to have the vehicle in view
the notch located along control system will default to a when doing so. Check local
the parting line of the heating or cooling mode depending regulations for any requirements on
transmitter. Do not insert on the outside temperatures. If the remote starting of vehicles.
the tool too far. Stop as vehicle does not have an automatic Do not use the remote start feature
soon as resistance is felt. climate control system, the system if the vehicle is low on fuel. The
. Twist the tool until the will turn on at the setting the vehicle vehicle may run out of fuel.
transmitter is separated. was set to when the vehicle was
last turned off.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
If the vehicle has the remote start When the vehicle starts, the The vehicle can be remote started
feature, the RKE transmitter parking lamps will turn on and two separate times between driving
functions will have an increased remain on while the vehicle is sequences. The engine will run for
range of operation. However, the running. The doors will be 10 minutes after each remote start.
range may be less while the vehicle locked and the climate control Or, you can extend the engine run
is running. system may come on. time by another 10 minutes within
There are other conditions which The engine will continue to run the first 10 minute remote start time
can affect the performance of the for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps frame, and before the engine stops.
transmitter. See Remote Keyless for a 10-minute time extension.
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑2 for Remote start can be extended For example, if Q and then / are
additional information. only once. pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for 5 minutes,
/ (Remote Start): This button will After entering the vehicle during a 10 minutes are added, allowing the
be on the RKE transmitter if the remote start, insert and turn the key engine to run for 15 minutes.
vehicle has remote start. to ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.
The additional 10 minutes are
To start the vehicle using the remote To cancel a remote start: considered a second remote vehicle
start feature: . Aim the RKE transmitter at the start.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold / Once two remote starts, or a single
vehicle. until the parking lamps turn off. remote start with one time extension
2. Press and release Q. . Turn on the hazard warning has been done, the vehicle must be
flashers. started with the key. After the key is
3. Immediately press and hold / removed from the ignition, the
until the turn signal lamps flash.
. Turn the ignition on and then vehicle can be remote started again.
If you cannot see the vehicle's back off.
lamps, press and hold / for
two to four seconds.
The vehicle cannot be remote Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

started if the key is in the ignition,
the hood is not closed, or if there
is an emission control system { WARNING injuries or even death from
malfunction and the check engine heat stroke. Always lock the
Unlocked doors can be vehicle whenever leaving it.
light is on.
dangerous.
Also, the engine will turn off during a
. Outsiders can easily enter
. Passengers, especially through an unlocked door
remote vehicle start if the coolant
children, can easily open the when you slow down or stop
temperature gets too high or if the
doors and fall out of a moving the vehicle. Locking the doors
oil pressure gets low.
vehicle. When a door is can help prevent this from
Remote Start Ready locked, the handle will not happening.
open it. The chance of being
If the vehicle does not have the thrown out of the vehicle in a
remote vehicle start feature, it may crash is increased if the There are several ways to lock and
have the remote start ready feature. doors are not locked. So, all unlock the vehicle.
This feature allows your dealer to passengers should wear From outside, use the Remote
add the manufacturer's remote safety belts properly and the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
vehicle start feature. doors should be locked the key in the driver door.
See your dealer to add the whenever the vehicle is From inside, use the power door
manufacturer's remote vehicle start driven. locks or manual door locks. To lock
feature to the vehicle. . Young children who get into or unlock the door with the manual
unlocked vehicles may be locks, push down or pull up on the
unable to get out. A child can manual lock knob.
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Delayed Locking See Vehicle Personalization (With

DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42 for more
Press Q or K on the Remote When locking the doors with the information on DIC programming.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. power lock switch and a door
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is open, the doors will lock Lockout Protection
System Operation on page 2‑3. five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes to If the driver side power door lock
signal that the delayed locking switch is pressed when the driver
feature is in use. door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
Pressing the power lock switch will
then the driver door will unlock.
override the delayed locking feature
and immediately lock all the doors. If the passenger side power door
lock switch is pressed when the
This feature will not operate if the
front passenger door is open and
key is in the ignition.
the key is in the ignition, all of the
You can also program this feature doors will lock and then the front
using the Driver Information passenger door will unlock.
Center (DIC). See “Delay Door
Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
Lock” under Vehicle Personalization Safety Locks
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42.
Other Models Similar The vehicle has rear door security
Automatic Door Locks locks to prevent passengers from
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. opening the rear doors from the
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the The vehicle may have an automatic inside.
doors. lock/unlock feature. This feature
can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Midgate® . Turn the fan on your heating
or cooling system to its
{ WARNING highest speed on the setting
It can be dangerous to drive with that brings in outside air. This
the cargo area covered and the will force outside air into your
tailgate and the Midgate® open vehicle. See Dual Automatic
because carbon monoxide (CO) Climate Control System on
gas can come into your vehicle. page 8‑4.
You can not see or smell CO. . If you have air outlets on or
Open the rear doors to access the
It can cause unconsciousness under the instrument panel,
security locks on the inside edge of
and even death. If you must drive open them all the way. See
each door.
with the cargo covers on and the Engine Exhaust on
To set the locks, insert a key into tailgate and Midgate open or if page 9‑29.
the slot and turn it to the horizontal electrical wiring or other cable
position. The door can only be connections must pass through
opened from the outside with the Midgate Operation
the seal between the body and
door unlocked. To return the door to This vehicle is equipped with a
the Midgate:
normal operation, turn the slot to the Midgate and a removable rear glass
. Make sure all windows
vertical position. panel. The Midgate allows you to
are shut. extend the length of the vehicle's
(Continued) cargo area.
Rear Glass Removal and Although the rear glass can be

Storage removed without folding the rear
seats, you will not be able to
access the rear glass storage
{ WARNING pocket. Be sure to fold the seats
If the removable rear glass is not before removing the rear glass.
stored properly, it could be thrown
about the vehicle in a crash or
sudden maneuver. People in the
vehicle could be injured.
Whenever you store the rear
glass in the vehicle, always be
The following are the main sure that it is stored securely in
components of the Midgate system: the Midgate® storage pocket.
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles Do not remove the rear glass when
the rear defroster is on. If you do,
C. Glass-Catch Release Button you may see a discharge spark
D. Glass Lock Knobs coming from the latch area. 2. Squeeze and pull down the latch
E. Glass Retaining Tabs To remove the rear glass do the levers (A), located near the
following: upper corners of the rear glass,
F. Midgate Release Handle
1. Fold the rear seats. See Rear to unlatch. Once unlatched, the
G. Glass Alignment Arrows glass-catch release button (C)
Seats on page 3‑10. The front
seats may have to be moved will catch the rear glass and
forward slightly to allow the rear prevent it from falling forward.
seats to fold completely.
3. While holding the rear glass in 4. With the rear glass tilted toward 5. Load the rear glass into the
place, press the glass-catch you, lift it out from the lower storage pocket in the Midgate,
release button (C) and pull the window frame channel. Use the guiding the lower edge of the
top of the rear glass toward you grab handles (B) to assist you in rear glass behind the three rear
using the grab handles (B) removing the rear glass. glass retaining tabs (E).
located at the top of the rear Hold the rear glass flat against
glass. the storage pocket, with grab
handles facing you, until the
next step.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass

To reinstall the rear glass, do the
following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch
levers (A), located near the
upper corners of the rear glass,
to unlatch.
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), Once both glass lock knobs are
located at both top corners of in the locked position, the rear
the storage pocket, to the locked glass is securely stored.
position. Push in on the corner 7. Push both latch levers up to the
of the rear glass to allow the locked position. You should hear
lock knob to engage more easily. a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
The rear seats can be returned
to the normal position when the 2. Hold the rear glass in place with
rear glass is out and stored one hand and turn the glass lock
properly in the storage pocket. knobs, located at both top
corners of the glass storage
pocket, to the unlocked position.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the

storage pocket using the grab
handles (B).
Be sure to align the rear glass 5. Apply a firm downward pressure

side-to-side using the glass and then push the rear glass flat
alignment arrows (G). against the window frame. Use
the grab handles (B) at the top of
4. With the rear glass tilted at an the rear glass to assist you.
angle, place the bottom edge in 6. Push the rear glass flat against
the lower channel of the window the window frame and push
frame. each latch lever (A) up until it
locks. You should hear a click
when each latch lever locks
correctly.
Lowering the Midgate with the Lowering the Midgate with the
Rear Glass in Place Rear Glass in the Storage
The Midgate can be lowered to Pocket
allow the cargo area of your vehicle
to extend into the cab. The rear
glass can be either installed in its
normal position, or it can be Rear Glass in Normal Position
removed and stored in the rear 2. Standing outside of the vehicle,
glass storage pocket. hold the Midgate securely so it
To lower the Midgate: does not fall forward. Turn the
Midgate handle clockwise and
1. Fold the rear seats. The front pull the Midgate toward you.
seats might have to be moved
forward slightly to allow the rear
seats to fold. See Rear Seats on
page 3‑10.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass
Storage Pocket
3. Lower the Midgate until it is flat.

Raising the Midgate

WARNING (Continued)
To return the Midgate to its normal
position, raise the Midgate up with a Be sure everyone in your vehicle
firm swinging motion until it latches is in a seat and using a safety
into place securely. This will help to belt properly.
ensure that the Midgate closes with
enough force to engage the latches.
Use the Remote Keyless
If the rear glass is removed and you Entry (RKE) transmitter or power
would like to put it back, do so using door lock switch to lock and unlock
the instructions given previously. the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its
Midgate Lowered with Crossbar Tailgate handle while pulling the tailgate
Attached toward you.
This procedure works the same as { WARNING To close the tailgate, push it firmly
the procedure described previously, It is extremely dangerous to ride upward until it latches. Push and
but when you lower the Midgate on the tailgate, even when the pull on the tailgate to be sure it is
with the rear glass in the stored latched securely.
vehicle is operated at low speeds.
position, you will notice that the
People riding on the tailgate Tailgate Removal
entire crossbar will lower with the
Midgate. This is completely normal; can easily lose their balance
and fall in response to vehicle The tailgate is not to be removed.
however, since the crossbar lowers Removing the tailgate may cause
with the Midgate, it will be heavier. maneuvers. Falling from a moving
damage to electrical connector
As you lower the Midgate be ready vehicle may result in serious
resulting in loss of lock/unlock and
for the extra weight and do not let injuries or death. Do not allow
rear vision camera function.
the Midgate fall as you lower it. people to ride on the tailgate.
(Continued)
Power Assist Steps The power assist steps Vehicle Security

automatically extend from beneath
the vehicle on the side in which the This vehicle has theft-deterrent
door has been opened. Once the features; however, they do not make
door is closed, the assist steps it impossible to steal.
automatically move back under the
vehicle after a brief delay. The Anti-theft Alarm System
vehicle must not be moving for the
assist steps to extend or retract. Your vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
The assist steps cannot be disabled
in the extended position.
The vehicle may have power assist

steps. To enable or disable the
This is the security light.
power assist steps push j.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the power door lock switch.
The security light will come on to
inform the driver the system is
arming. If a door is open when
the doors are locked, the
security light will flash.
If the delayed locking feature is unlock button on the RKE

. Always unlock the doors with the
turned on, the theft‐deterrent transmitter during the ten second RKE transmitter. Unlocking a
system will not start the arming pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your door any other way will set off
process until the last door is vehicle's headlamps will flash and the alarm if it is armed.
closed and the delay timer has the horn will sound for about If you set off the alarm by accident,
expired. See Delayed Locking 30 seconds, then will turn off to press unlock on the RKE transmitter
on page 2‑8. save the battery power. or place the key in the ignition and
3. Close all doors. The security The theft-deterrent system will not turn it to START to turn off the
light should go off after about activate if the doors are locked with alarm. The alarm will not stop if you
30 seconds. The alarm is not the vehicle's key or the manual door try to unlock a door any other way.
armed until the security light lock. It activates only if you use the Testing the Alarm
goes off. power door lock switch with the door
open or the RKE transmitter. You To test the alarm:
The content theft deterrent
system does not sense if the should also remember that you can 1. From inside the vehicle, lower
midgate or tailgate are open or start your vehicle with the correct the driver window and open the
ajar, therefore, vehicle contents ignition key if the alarm has been driver door.
may not be protected if the set off.
2. Activate the system by locking
midgate is left open or ajar. To avoid setting off the alarm by the doors with the power door
If a locked driver door is opened accident: lock switch while the door is
without using the RKE transmitter, . If you do not want to activate the open, or with the RKE
a ten second pre-alarm will occur. theft-deterrent system, the transmitter.
The horn will chirp and the lights will vehicle should be locked with 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the
flash. If the key is not placed in the the door key after the doors are door and wait for the security
ignition and turned to START or the closed. light to go out.
door is not unlocked by pressing the
4. Then reach in through the Immobilizer Operation trial-and-error method to start the
window, unlock the door with the vehicle will be discouraged because
manual door lock and open the This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ of the high number of electrical key
door. This should set off the (Personalized Automotive Security codes.
alarm. System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key III+ is a passive If the engine does not start and the
While the alarm is set, the power theft-deterrent system. security light on the instrument
door unlock switch will not work. panel cluster comes on when trying
The system is automatically armed to start the vehicle, there may be a
If the alarm does not sound when it when the key is removed from the
should but the headlamps flash, problem with the theft-deterrent
ignition. system. Turn the ignition off and try
check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace The system is automatically again.
the fuse, see Instrument Panel Fuse disarmed when the key is turned to If the engine still does not start, and
Block on page 10‑42 and Engine ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, the key appears to be undamaged,
Compartment Fuse Block on or START from the LOCK/OFF try another ignition key. At this time,
page 10‑38. position. you may also want to check the
If the alarm does not sound or the You do not have to manually arm or fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
headlamps do not flash, the vehicle disarm the system. Breakers on page 10‑38. If the
should be serviced by your dealer. engine still does not start with the
The security light will come on if other key, the vehicle needs service.
there is a problem with arming or If the vehicle does start, the first key
Immobilizer disarming the theft-deterrent may be faulty. See your dealer who
system. can service the PASS-Key III+ to
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13‑20 for information When the PASS-Key III+ system have a new key made.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal senses that someone is using the It is possible for the PASS-Key III+
Communications Commission (FCC) wrong key, it prevents the vehicle decoder to learn the transponder
rules and Industry Canada from starting. Anyone using a value of a new or replacement key.
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed 3. After the engine has started, Exterior Mirrors
for the vehicle. The following turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
procedure is for programming remove the key.
additional keys only. If all the Convex Mirrors
4. Insert the new key to be
currently programmed keys are lost programmed and turn it to the
or do not operate, you must see ON/RUN position within { WARNING
your dealer or a locksmith who can five seconds of turning the
service PASS-Key III+ to have keys A convex mirror can make things,
ignition to the LOCK/OFF like other vehicles, look farther
made and programmed to the position in Step 3.
system. away than they really are. If you
The security light will turn off cut too sharply into the right lane,
See your dealer or a locksmith who once the key has been
can service PASS-Key III+ to get a you could hit a vehicle on the
programmed. right. Check the inside mirror or
new key blank cut exactly as the
ignition key that operates the 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if glance over your shoulder before
system. additional keys are to be changing lanes.
programmed.
To program the new additional key:
If you lose or damage your The passenger side mirror is convex
1. Verify that the new key has PASS-Key III+ key, see your dealer shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
a 1 stamped on it. or a locksmith who can service curved so more can be seen from
2. Insert the original, already PASS-Key III+ to have a new the driver seat.
programmed key in the ignition key made.
and start the engine. If the Do not leave the key or device
engine will not start, see your that disarms or deactivates the
dealer for service. theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Power Mirrors 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that

the side of the vehicle and the
area behind are seen.
Keep the selector switch in the
center position when not adjusting
either outside mirror.
Exterior Automatic Dimming
Mirror
If the vehicle has the exterior
automatic dimming mirror, the driver
outside mirror automatically adjusts
With Manual Folding Mirrors for the glare of headlamps behind.
With Power Folding Mirrors To adjust the mirrors: This feature is controlled by the on
and off setting on the inside
To adjust the mirrors: 1. Move the selector switch located automatic dimming rearview mirror.
above the four-way control pad See Automatic Dimming Rearview
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the to the left or right to choose
driver or passenger side mirror. Mirror on page 2‑22 for more
either the driver side or information.
2. Press the arrows on the control passenger side mirror.
pad to move the mirror up, 2. Press one of the four arrows Turn Signal Indicator
down, right, or left. located on the control pad to The vehicle may also have a turn
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that move the mirror in the desired signal indicator on the mirror. An
the side of the vehicle and the direction. arrow on the mirror flashes in the
area behind are seen. direction of the turn or lane change.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to
deselect the mirror.
Folding Mirrors Resetting the Power Folding Heated Mirrors

Mirrors
Power Folding 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
Reset the power folding mirrors if: Press to heat the mirrors.
. The mirrors are accidentally See “Rear Window Defogger” under
obstructed while folding. Dual Automatic Climate Control
. They are accidentally manually System on page 8‑4 or Climate
folded/unfolded. Control Systems on page 8‑1 for
.
more information.
The mirrors will not stay in the
unfolded position.
Automatic Dimming
. The mirrors vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
Mirror
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time If the vehicle has the automatic
using the mirror controls to reset dimming mirror, the driver outside
them to their normal position. mirror automatically adjusts for the
1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors out A popping noise may be heard glare of the headlamps from behind.
to the driving position. during the resetting of the power This feature is controlled by the on
folding mirrors. This sound is normal and off setting on the inside
2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in to rearview mirror. See Automatic
the folded position. after a manual folding operation.
Dimming Rearview Mirror on
Manual Folding page 2‑22 for more information.
Fold the mirrors inward to prevent
damage when going through an
automatic car wash. To fold, pull the
mirror toward the vehicle. Push the
mirror outward, to return to its
original position.
Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors Automatic Dimming

If the vehicle has the memory Rearview Mirror
package, the exterior mirrors tilt to a Manual Rearview Mirror To adjust the inside rearview mirror,
preselected position when the To adjust the inside rearview mirror, hold the rearview mirror in the
vehicle is in R (Reverse). This hold the rearview mirror in the center and move it to view the area
feature lets the driver view the curb center and move it to view the area behind the vehicle.
when parallel parking. The mirrors behind the vehicle.
return to the original position when For vehicles with an automatic
the vehicle is shifted out of For vehicles with a manual rearview dimming rearview mirror. The mirror
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned mirror, push the tab forward for will automatically reduce the glare
off or to OFF/LOCK. daytime use and pull it for nighttime from the headlamps from behind.
use to avoid glare from the The dimming feature comes on and
This feature can be programed headlamps from behind. the indicator light illuminates when
through the Driver Information the vehicle is started.
Center (DIC). See Vehicle Vehicles with OnStar® have three
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) control buttons at the bottom of the O (On/Off): Press to turn the
on page 5‑42 for more information. mirror. See a dealer for more dimming feature on or off.
information about OnStar and how The vehicle may also have a Rear
to subscribe to it. See OnStar Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear
Overview on page 14‑1. Vision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑52
for more information.
If the vehicle has a RVC, the O Windows

button for turning the automatic
dimming rearview mirror feature on
or off will not be available.
{ WARNING
Vehicles with OnStar have three Leaving children, helpless adults,
additional control buttons located at or pets in a vehicle with the
the bottom of the mirror. See a windows closed is dangerous.
dealer for more information about They can be overcome by the
OnStar and how to subscribe to it. extreme heat and suffer
See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1. permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
Cleaning the Mirror
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
Do not spray glass cleaner directly alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are
on the mirror. Use a soft towel designed to improve fuel economy
the windows closed in warm or
dampened with water. performance. This may result in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when a window is
partially open. To reduce the sound,
open another window or the sunroof
(if equipped).
Power Windows Express Down Windows

Windows that have the express‐
{ WARNING down feature allow the windows to
be lowered without holding the
Leaving children in a vehicle with switch. Press the window switch
the keys is dangerous for many fully and release it to activate the
reasons. Children or others could express‐down feature. The express
be badly injured or even killed. mode can be canceled at any time
They could operate the power by briefly pressing, or pulling the
windows or other controls or even switch.
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed Power Folding Mirrors Shown,
if caught in the path of a closing Other Models Similar
window. Do not leave keys in a The driver door has switches that
vehicle with children. control all windows, the passengers
door switch only control that
When there are children in the window. The power windows work
rear seat use the window lockout when the ignition is in ON/RUN or
button to prevent unintentional ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
operation of the windows. Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Press the switch to lower the
window. Pull the switch up to
raise it.
Window Lockout Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
Pull the sun visor down to block

glare. Detach the sun visor from the
Power Folding Mirrors Shown, center mount to pivot to the side
Other Models Similar window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, A. Open or Close
except from the driver position. B. Vent
. Press o to activate the rear On vehicles with a sunroof, the
window locks. An indicator light sunroof only operates when the
will illuminate when the feature ignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORY
is on. or ON/RUN, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
. Press o again to deactivate the See Retained Accessory Power
rear window locks. (RAP) on page 9‑26.
Vent: From the closed position, When the sunroof is opened, an air
press the rear of switch (B) to vent deflector will automatically raise.
the sunroof. The air deflector will retract when
Open/Close: To open the sunroof, the sunroof is closed.
press and hold switch (A) until the The sunroof also has a sunshade
sunroof reaches the desired which can be pulled forward to block
position. Press and hold the front of sun rays. The sunshade must be
switch (A) to close it. opened and closed manually.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To If an object is in the path of the Dirt and debris may collect on the
express-open the sunroof, fully sunroof while it is closing, the sunroof seal or in the track. This
press and release the rear of anti-pinch feature will detect the could cause an issue with sunroof
switch (A) until the sunroof object and stop the sunroof. operation or noise. It could also plug
reaches the desired position. To the water drainage system.
express-close the sunroof, fully Periodically open the sunroof and
press and release the front of remove any obstacles or loose
switch (A). Press the switch again to debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
stop it. roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .

Safety System Check . . . . . . . .
3-19
3-19
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing Safety Belt System
3-19 Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39
Head Restraints Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41
Airbag System Lower Anchors and Tethers
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-22 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 When Should an Airbag Replacing LATCH System
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4 What Makes an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 (Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-49
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 How Does an Airbag Securing Child Restraints
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 (Center Front Seat
Heated and Ventilated Front What Will You See after an Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Securing Child Restraints
Passenger Sensing (Right Front Seat
Rear Seats System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-33
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Replacing Airbag System
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
Front Seats
The front seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/ Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
spinal injury in a crash. Do not top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
drive until the head restraints for height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
all occupants are installed and head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
chance of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
adjusted properly.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint
down. Try to move the head
restraint after the button is released
to make sure that it is locked in
place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Rear Seats Front Seats

The rear seat has adjustable
headrests in the outboard seating Seat Adjustment
positions.
The height of the headrest can be { WARNING
adjusted. Pull the headrest up to
raise it. To lower the headrest, push You can lose control of the
down on the headrest. vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Rear outboard headrests are not
designed to be removed. The sudden movement could
startle and confuse you, or make
you push a pedal when you do
To adjust the seat:
not want to. Adjust the driver seat
only when the vehicle is not 1. Lift the bar under the front edge
moving. of the seat cushion to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure the seat is
locked in place.

. If available, raise or lower the
Center Seat front or rear part of the seat
If equipped, increase or decrease
manual lumbar support by turning
If equipped, the center front cushion by moving the front or the knob forward or rearward.
seatback doubles as an armrest and rear of the control up or down.
cupholder/storage area for the driver Power Lumbar
. If available, raise or lower the
and passenger when the center
entire seat by moving the entire
front seat is not used. Do not use it
control up or down.
as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down. To adjust the seatback, see “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under
Power Seat Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.
Lumbar Adjustment
Manual Lumbar
To adjust the power lumbar support,

if equipped:
. On vehicles with two-way
lumbar, press and hold the top
or bottom of the control to
increase or decrease lumbar
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: support.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.

. On vehicles with four-way
lumbar, press and hold the front WARNING (Continued)
or rear of the control to increase
or decrease lumbar support. To The lap belt could go up over
raise or lower the height of the your abdomen. The belt forces
support, press and hold the top would be there, not at your pelvic
or bottom of the control. bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
Reclining Seatbacks For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
{ WARNING seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
Sitting in a reclined position when safety belt properly. Do not have a seatback reclined if
the vehicle is in motion can be
the vehicle is moving.
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries.
(Continued)
Manual Reclining Seatbacks The seatback will automatically Power Reclining Seatbacks
fold forward.
{ WARNING 2. To recline, move the seatback
rearward to the desired position,
If either seatback is not locked, it then release the lever to lock the
could move forward in a sudden seatback in place.
stop or crash. That could cause
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
injury to the person sitting there.
make sure it is locked.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are To return the seatback to the upright
locked. position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. To recline a power seatback,
2. Push and pull on the seatback to if equipped:
make sure it is locked. . Tilt the top of the control
rearward to recline.
. Tilt the top of the control forward
to raise.
To adjust a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
Memory Seats Storing Memory Positions To recall, press and release “1” or
To save into memory: “2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).
A single beep will sound. The seat,
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback outside mirrors, and adjustable
recliner, both outside mirrors, throttle and brake pedals will move
and the throttle and brake to the position previously stored for
pedals, if equipped. the identified driver.
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑20 Memory Remote Recall
and Adjustable Throttle and
Brake Pedal on page 9‑21. The memory feature can recall the
driver seat, outside mirrors, and
Not all mirrors and adjustable pedals, if equipped, to stored
throttle and brake pedals will positions when entering the vehicle.
have the ability to save and
recall their positions. To activate, unlock the driver
door with the Remote Keyless
On vehicles with the memory 2. Press and hold “1” until Entry (RKE) transmitter. The driver
feature, the controls on the driver two beeps sound. seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
door are used to program and recall
3. Repeat for a second driver pedals, if equipped, will move to the
memory settings for the driver seat,
position using “2.” memory position associated with the
outside mirrors, and the adjustable
transmitter used to unlock the
throttle and brake pedals,
vehicle.
if equipped.
This feature can be turned on or off B (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Press Heated and Ventilated
using the vehicle personalization to recall the easy exit seat position.
menu. See Vehicle Personalization
Front Seats
The vehicle must be in P (Park).
(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42.
To stop recall movement, press one
If the easy exit seat feature is
programmed on in the vehicle
{ WARNING
of the power seat controls, memory personalization menu, automatic If you cannot feel temperature
buttons, or power mirror buttons, seat movement occurs when the change or pain to the skin, the
or the adjustable pedal switch. ignition key is removed. seat heater may cause burns
If something has blocked the driver A single beep sounds. The driver even at low temperatures. To
seat and/or the adjustable pedals seat moves back approximately reduce the risk of burns, people
while recalling a memory position, 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back with such a condition should use
the recall may stop. Remove the farther, press B again until the care when using the seat heater,
obstruction; then press and hold the especially for long periods of
seat is all the way back.
appropriate manual control for the time. Do not place anything on
memory item that is not recalling for If something has blocked the driver the seat that insulates against
two seconds. Try recalling the seat while recalling the exit position, heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
memory position again by pressing the recall may stop. Remove the
cover, or similar item. This
the appropriate memory button. obstruction; then press and hold the
may cause the seat heater to
If the memory position is still not power seat control rearward for
two seconds. Try recalling the exit overheat. An overheated seat
recalling, see your dealer for
service. position again. If the exit position is heater may cause a burn or may
still not recalling, see your dealer for damage the seat.
Easy Exit Driver Seat service.
This feature can move the seat See Vehicle Personalization (With
rearward to allow extra room to exit DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42.
the vehicle.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Remote Start Heated Seats

Press to heat the seat and When it is cold outside, the heated
seatback. seats may turn on automatically
Press the button once for the during a remote vehicle start. The
highest setting. With each press of heated seats will be canceled when
the button, the seat will change to the ignition is turned on. Press the
the next lower setting, and then to desired button to use the heated
the off setting. The lights indicate seats after the vehicle is started.
three for the highest setting and one The lights on the heated seat
for the lowest. buttons do not turn on during a
The passenger seat may take remote start.
Heated and Cooled Seat Buttons longer to heat up. The temperature performance of an
Shown, Heated Seat Buttons On vehicles with heated seats, unoccupied seat may be reduced.
Similar the heated seats are canceled This is normal.
10 seconds after the ignition is See Remote Vehicle Start on
If available, the buttons are on the
turned off. page 2‑5.
front doors. To operate, the ignition
must be in ON/RUN. On vehicles with heated and cooled
seats, the heated and cooled seats
H (Cooled Seat): If available,
are canceled when the ignition is
press to cool the seat.
turned off.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to
To use this feature after restarting
heat the seatback only.
the vehicle, press the desired button
again.
Rear Seats Notice: Folding a rear seat with 4. Repeat the procedure for the
the safety belts still fastened may other seatback, if desired.
The rear seatbacks can be folded to cause damage to the seat or the To return the seats to the normal
provide more cargo space and safety belts. Always unbuckle the position, lift the seatback up and
access to the midgate. See safety belts and return them to fold the seat cushion down.
Midgate® on page 2‑9. their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To fold the seatback: { WARNING
1. Push the rear seat headrests all
the way down. A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached, and
are not twisted.
3. Fold the seatback forward until it

is flat. If necessary, move the
2. Pull the loop in the crease where front seats forward slightly to
the seatback and seat cushion allow the seatback to fold
meet to release the seat completely.
cushion. Tilt the seat cushion
forward toward the front of the
vehicle.
{ WARNING Safety Belts WARNING (Continued)

This section of the manual
If the seatback is not locked, it describes how to use safety belts
could move forward in a sudden It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly. It also describes some
stop or crash. That could cause in a cargo area, inside or outside
things not to do with safety belts.
injury to the person sitting there. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
Always be sure to press the rear
of the seat cushion down. This
{ WARNING are more likely to be seriously
action locks the seatback in Do not let anyone ride where a injured or killed. Do not allow
place. safety belt cannot be worn passengers to ride in any area of
properly. In a crash, if you or your the vehicle that is not equipped
passenger(s) are not wearing with seats and safety belts.
Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked. Raise the safety belts, injuries can be much Always wear a safety belt, and
headrest. worse than if you are wearing check that all passenger(s) are
safety belts. You can be seriously restrained properly too.
injured or killed by hitting things
inside the vehicle harder or by This vehicle has indicators as a
being ejected from the vehicle. In reminder to buckle the safety belts.
addition, anyone who is not See Safety Belt Reminders on
buckled up can strike other page 5‑14.
passengers in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing Also, in nearly all states and in
safety belts makes such good all Canadian provinces, the law
sense. requires wearing safety belts.
Questions and Answers About How to Wear Safety Belts
Safety Belts
Properly
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a This section is only for people of
safety belt? adult size.
A: You could be — whether you are There are special things to know
wearing a safety belt or not. about safety belts and children. And
Your chance of being conscious there are different rules for smaller
during and after a crash, so you children and infants. If a child will be
can unbuckle and get out, is riding in the vehicle, see Older
When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted. Children on page 3‑34 or Infants
as fast as the vehicle does. If the and Young Children on page 3‑37.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why Follow those rules for everyone's
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. protection.
belts?
It could be the windshield, the It is very important for all occupants
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental to buckle up. Statistics show that
systems only; so they work with unbelted people are hurt more often
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. in crashes than those who are
them. Whether or not an airbag wearing safety belts.
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the There are important things to know
when worn properly, your strongest most protection. about wearing a safety belt properly.
bones take the forces from the

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
These parts of the body are best All seating positions in the vehicle
able to take belt restraining have a lap-shoulder belt except for
forces. The shoulder belt locks if the center front passenger position
there is a sudden stop or crash. (if equipped), which has a lap belt.
See Lap Belt on page 3‑18 for more
{ WARNING information.
The following instructions explain
You can be seriously injured, how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
or even killed, by not wearing properly.
your safety belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
. Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or adjustable, so you can sit up
your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become straight. To see how, see “Seats”
of you. loose or twisted. in the Index.
. Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
for your seating position. under both arms or behind the belt across you. Do not let it
. Wear the lap part of the belt low your back. get twisted.
and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an you pull the belt across you very
this applies force to the strong armrest. quickly. If this happens, let the
pelvic bones and you would be belt go back slightly to unlock it.
less likely to slide under the lap Then pull the belt across you
belt. If you slid under it, the belt more slowly.
would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
If the shoulder portion of a 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt

passenger belt is pulled out all height adjuster, move it to the
the way, the child restraint height that is right for you. See
locking feature may be engaged. “Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
If this happens, let the belt go in this section for instructions on
back all the way and start again. use and important safety
Engaging the child restraint information.
locking feature may affect the
passenger sensing system,
if equipped. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 3‑28
for more information.
If the belt stops before it reaches 3. Push the latch plate into the
the buckle, tilt the latch plate and buckle until it clicks. If you find
keep pulling the safety belt until that the latch plate will not go
it can be buckled. fully into the buckle, see if you
are using the correct buckle.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 3‑19. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt It may be necessary to pull
could be quickly unbuckled if stitching on the safety belt
necessary. through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
Adjust the height so the shoulder The adjuster can be moved up just
portion of the belt is on the shoulder by pushing up on the shoulder belt
and not falling off of it. The belt guide.
should be close to, but not After the adjuster is set to the
contacting, the neck. Improper desired position, try to move it down
shoulder belt height adjustment without squeezing the buttons to
could reduce the effectiveness of make sure it has locked into
the safety belt in a crash. See How position.
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑12. Safety Belt Pretensioners
This vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for front outboard
To unlatch the belt, push the button occupants. Although the safety belt
on the buckle. The belt should pretensioners cannot be seen, they
return to its stowed position. are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
Before a door is closed, be sure the
belts during the early stages of a
safety belt is out of the way. If a
moderate to severe frontal, near
door is slammed against a safety
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
belt, damage can occur to both the
conditions for pretensioner
belt and the vehicle.
activation are met. And, if the
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
The vehicle has a shoulder belt tighten the safety belts in a side
Squeeze the buttons (A) on the
height adjuster for the driver and crash or a rollover event.
sides of the height adjuster and
right front passenger positions.
move the height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the

pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 3‑20.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through your dealer. The There is one guide, if equipped, for 2. Place the guide over the belt,
guides may provide added safety each outside passenger position in and insert the two edges of the
belt comfort for older children who the rear seat. Here is how to install belt into the slots of the guide.
have outgrown booster seats and a comfort guide to the safety belt:
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide 1. Remove the guide from its
positions the belt away from the storage pocket on the side of
neck and head. the seat.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release
twisted and it lies flat. The the safety belt as described
elastic cord must be under the previously in this section. Make
belt and the guide on top. sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can
be removed from the guide. Slide
the guide into its storage clip on the
interior body or storage pocket on
the side of the seat.
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Lap Belt
This part is only for the lap belt. To
learn how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on To make the belt longer, tilt the latch
page 3‑13. plate and pull it along the belt.
The vehicle may have a center Buckle, position and release it the
seating position. When you sit in the same way as the lap part of a
center front seating position, you lap-shoulder belt.
have a lap safety belt, which has no
retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a

lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
Safety Belt Extender from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten safety belts may not protect you in a
around you, you should use it. crash. They can rip apart under
But if a safety belt is not long impact forces. If a belt is torn or
enough, your dealer will order you frayed, get a new one right away.
an extender. When you go in to Make sure the safety belt reminder
order it, take the heaviest coat you light is working. See Safety Belt
will wear, so the extender will be Reminders on page 5‑14.
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone Keep safety belts clean and dry.
else use it, and use it only for the See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑19.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never Safety Belt Care
end as shown until the belt is snug.
use it for securing child seats. To Keep belts clean and dry.
If the belt is not long enough, see wear it, attach it to the regular safety
Safety Belt Extender on page 3‑19. belt. For more information, see the
Make sure the release button on the instruction sheet that comes with { WARNING
buckle is positioned so you would the extender. Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
be able to unbuckle the safety belt It may severely weaken them. In
quickly if necessary. Safety System Check a crash, they might not be able to
If you find that the latch plate will Now and then, check that the safety provide adequate protection.
not go fully into the buckle, see if belt reminder light, safety belts, Clean safety belts only with mild
you are using the correct buckle. Be buckles, latch plates, retractors, and soap and lukewarm water.
sure that the latch plate clicks when anchorages are all working properly.
inserted into the buckle. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety Airbag System
belt assemblies inspected or
System Parts after a replaced. The vehicle has the following
Crash New parts and repairs may be
airbags:
necessary even if the safety belt . A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ WARNING system was not being used at the . A frontal airbag for the right front
time of the crash. passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners . A seat‐mounted side impact
A damaged safety belt system checked if the vehicle has been in a airbag for the driver.
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle . A seat‐mounted side impact
person using it, resulting in airbag for the right front
serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 5‑15. passenger.
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver
properly after a crash, have them and passenger directly behind
inspected and any necessary the driver.
replacements made as soon as . A roof-rail airbag for the right
possible. front passenger and passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary. All of the airbags in the vehicle will
But the safety belt assemblies that have the word AIRBAG embossed
were used during any crash may in the trim or on an attached label
have been stressed or damaged. near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word Here are the most important things
AIRBAG will appear on the middle to know about the airbag system: { WARNING
part of the steering wheel for the
Because airbags inflate with great
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
{ WARNING force and faster than the blink of
You can be severely injured or an eye, anyone who is up
With seat‐mounted side impact against, or very close to any
airbags, the word AIRBAG will killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even if airbag when it inflates can be
appear on the side of the seatback seriously injured or killed. Do not
closest to the door. you have airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety sit unnecessarily close to any
With roof-rail airbags, the word airbag, as you would be if sitting
belts, but do not replace them.
AIRBAG will appear along the on the edge of the seat or leaning
Also, airbags are not designed to
headliner or trim. forward. Safety belts help keep
deploy in every crash. In some
Airbags are designed to supplement crashes safety belts are your only you in position before and during
the protection provided by safety restraint. See When Should an a crash. Always wear a safety
belts. Even though today's airbags Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑24. belt, even with airbags. The driver
are also designed to help reduce should sit as far back as possible
the risk of injury from the force of an Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle.
very quickly to do their job. of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags Occupants should not lean on or
are “supplemental restraints” to sleep against the door or side
the safety belts. Everyone in your windows in seating positions with
vehicle should wear a safety belt seat-mounted side impact airbags
properly — whether or not there is and/or roof-rail airbags.
an airbag for that person.
Where Are the Airbags?

{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol.
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle safety belt The system checks the airbag
system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑15 for
system can provide. Always more information. The driver frontal airbag is in the
secure children properly in the middle of the steering wheel.
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 3‑34 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 3‑37.
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side Shown, Passenger Driver Side Shown, Passenger
airbag is in the instrument panel on Side Similar Side Similar
the passenger side. The seat‐mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, and second
passenger are in the side of the row outboard passengers are in the
seatbacks closest to the door. ceiling above the side windows.
When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at

{ WARNING Inflate? different crash speeds. For
example:
If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to
occupant and an airbag, the
. If the vehicle hits a stationary
inflate in moderate to severe frontal object, the airbags could inflate
airbag might not inflate properly or near-frontal crashes to help
or it might force the object into at a different crash speed than if
reduce the potential for severe the vehicle hits a moving object.
that person causing severe injury injuries mainly to the driver's or right
or even death. The path of an front passenger's head and chest. . If the vehicle hits an object that
inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to deforms, the airbags could
clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a inflate at a different crash speed
between an occupant and an predetermined deployment than if the vehicle hits an object
airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds does not deform.
anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe a . If the vehicle hits a narrow object
hub or on or near any other crash is likely to be in time for the (like a pole), the airbags could
airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain inflate at a different crash speed
the occupants. than if the vehicle hits a wide
Do not use seat accessories that
block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or object (like a wall).
seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on how . If the vehicle goes into an object
fast your vehicle is traveling. at an angle, the airbags could
Never secure anything to the roof It depends largely on what you hit, inflate at a different crash speed
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how than if the vehicle goes straight
by routing a rope or tie‐down quickly your vehicle slows down. into the object.
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an Thresholds can also vary with
inflating roof-rail airbag will be specific vehicle design.
blocked.
Frontal airbags are not intended to The vehicle has seat‐mounted side damage to a vehicle or because
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impact and roof-rail airbags. See of what the repair costs were.
impacts, or in many side impacts. Airbag System on page 3‑20. Seat‐ For frontal airbags, inflation is
In addition, the vehicle has mounted side impact and roof-rail determined by what the vehicle hits,
dual-stage frontal airbags. airbags are intended to inflate in the angle of the impact, and how
Dual-stage airbags adjust the moderate to severe side crashes. quickly the vehicle slows down.
restraint according to crash severity. In addition, these roof-rail airbags For seat‐mounted side impact and
The vehicle has electronic frontal are intended to inflate during a roof-rail airbags, deployment is
sensors, which help the sensing rollover or in a severe frontal determined by the location and
system distinguish between a impact. Seat‐mounted side impact severity of the side impact. In a
moderate frontal impact and a more and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the rollover event, roof-rail airbag
severe frontal impact. For moderate crash severity is above the system's deployment is determined by the
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags designed threshold level. The direction of the roll.
inflate at a level less than full threshold level can vary with
deployment. For more severe frontal specific vehicle design. What Makes an Airbag
impacts, full deployment occurs. Roof-rail airbags are not Inflate?
The vehicle has a seat position intended to inflate in rear impacts.
In a deployment event, the sensing
sensor. Vehicles with dual stage A seat‐mounted side impact airbag
system sends an electrical signal
airbags also have seat position is intended to deploy on the side of
triggering a release of gas from the
sensors which enable the sensing the vehicle that is struck. Both
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
system to monitor the position of the roof-rail airbags will deploy when
airbag causing the bag to break out
driver seat and the right front either side of the vehicle is struck or
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
passenger seat. if the sensing system predicts that
the airbag, and related hardware are
the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
The seat position sensor provides all part of the airbag module.
a severe frontal impact.
information that is used to determine Frontal airbag modules are located
if the airbags should deploy at a In any particular crash, no one can
inside the steering wheel and
reduced level or at full deployment. say whether an airbag should have
instrument panel. For vehicles with
inflated simply because of the
seat‐mounted side impact airbags, Seat‐mounted side impact and What Will You See after
there are airbags modules in the roof-rail airbags distribute the force
side of the front seatbacks closest of the impact more evenly over the
an Airbag Inflates?
to the door. For vehicles with occupant's upper body. After the frontal airbags and
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags seat-mounted side impact airbags
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, are designed to help contain the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
near the side windows that have head and chest of occupants in the quickly that some people may not
occupant seating positions. outboard seating positions in the even realize an airbag inflated.
first and second rows. The rollover Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
How Does an Airbag capable roof-rail airbags are partially inflated for some time after
Restrain? designed to help reduce the risk of they deploy. Some components of
full or partial ejection in rollover the airbag module may be hot for
In moderate to severe frontal or several minutes. For location of the
events, although no system can
near frontal collisions, even belted airbag modules, see What Makes
prevent all such ejections.
occupants can contact the steering an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑25.
wheel or the instrument panel. In But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily The parts of the airbag that come
moderate to severe side collisions,
because the occupant's motion is into contact with you may be warm,
even belted occupants can contact
not toward those airbags. See When but not too hot to touch. There may
the inside of the vehicle.
Should an Airbag Inflate? on be some smoke and dust coming
Airbags supplement the protection from the vents in the deflated
provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags. Airbag inflation does not
airbags distribute the force of the Airbags should never be regarded prevent the driver from seeing out of
impact more evenly over the as anything more than a supplement the windshield or being able to steer
occupant's upper body, stopping to safety belts. the vehicle, nor does it prevent
the occupant more gradually. people from leaving the vehicle.
off the interior lamps and hazard

. Airbags are designed to inflate
{ WARNING warning flashers by using the only once. After an airbag
controls for those features. inflates, you will need some new
When an airbag inflates, there parts for the airbag system.
may be dust in the air. This dust If you do not get them, the
could cause breathing problems { WARNING airbag system will not be there
for people with a history of A crash severe enough to inflate to help protect you in another
asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also crash. A new system will include
To avoid this, everyone in the damaged important functions in airbag modules and possibly
vehicle should get out as soon as other parts. The service manual
the vehicle, such as the fuel
it is safe to do so. If you have for your vehicle covers the need
system, brake and steering
breathing problems but cannot to replace other parts.
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a . The vehicle has a crash sensing
airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be and diagnostic module which
by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could records information after a
If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate crash. See Vehicle Data
problems following an airbag the vehicle. Recording and Privacy on
deployment, you should seek page 13‑19 and Event Data
medical attention. Use caution if you should attempt Recorders on page 13‑19.
to restart the engine after a crash . Let only qualified technicians
has occurred. work on the airbag systems.
The vehicle may have a feature that
may automatically unlock the doors, Improper service can mean that
turn on the interior lamps and In many crashes severe enough to an airbag system will not work
hazard warning flashers, and shut inflate the airbag, windshields are properly. See your dealer for
off the fuel system after the airbags broken by vehicle deformation. service.
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system

works with sensors that are part
System of the right front passenger seat
If the vehicle has the passenger and safety belt. The sensors are
airbag status indicator pictured in designed to detect the presence
the following illustration, then the of a properly-seated occupant
vehicle has a passenger sensing Canada and Mexico and determine if the right front
system for the right front passenger passenger frontal airbag should be
position. The passenger airbag The words ON and OFF, or the enabled (may inflate) or not.
status indicator, if equipped, is symbols for on and off, will be
visible during the system check. According to accident statistics,
visible on the overhead console children are safer when properly
when the vehicle is started. If you are using remote start,
if equipped, to start the vehicle from secured in a rear seat in the correct
In addition, if the vehicle has a a distance, you may not see the child restraint for their weight
passenger sensing system for the system check. When the system and size.
right front passenger position, the check is complete, either the word We recommend that children be
label on the vehicle's sun visors ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or secured in a rear seat, including:
refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”. off, will be visible. See Passenger an infant or a child riding in a
Airbag Status Indicator on rear-facing child restraint; a child
page 5‑16. riding in a forward-facing child seat;
The passenger sensing system will an older child riding in a booster
turn off the right front passenger seat; and children, who are large
frontal airbag under certain enough, using safety belts.
conditions. The driver airbag, A label on the sun visor says,
United States seat‐mounted side impact airbags “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
(if equipped) and the roof-rail the front.” This is because the risk to
airbags are not affected by the the rear-facing child is so great,
passenger sensing system. if the airbag deploys.

. There is a critical problem with
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child
When the passenger sensing
restraint can be seriously restraints in a rear seat, even if
system has turned off the right front
injured or killed if the right front the airbag is off. If you secure a
passenger frontal airbag, the off
passenger airbag inflates. forward-facing child restraint in indicator will light and stay lit as a
This is because the back of the the right front seat, always move reminder that the airbag is off. See
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to on page 5‑16.
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a
child restraint can be seriously rear seat. The passenger sensing system is
injured or killed if the right front designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
passenger airbag inflates and the The passenger sensing system is anytime the system senses that a
passenger seat is in a forward designed to turn off the right front person of adult size is sitting
position. passenger frontal airbag if: properly in the right front
Even if the passenger sensing . The right front passenger seat is passenger seat.
system has turned off the right unoccupied. When the passenger sensing
front passenger frontal airbag, no system has allowed the airbag to be
. The system determines an infant
system is fail-safe. No one can enabled, the on indicator will light
is present in a child restraint.
guarantee that an airbag will not and stay lit as a reminder that the
deploy under some unusual . A right front passenger takes airbag is active.
circumstance, even though the his/her weight off of the seat for
airbag is turned off. a period of time.
(Continued)
For some children, including If the On Indicator is Lit for a 5. If, after reinstalling the child
children in child restraints, and for Child Restraint restraint and restarting the
very small adults, the passenger vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
sensing system may or may not If a child restraint has been installed turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
turn off the right front passenger and the on indicator is lit: recline the vehicle seatback
frontal airbag, depending upon the 1. Turn the vehicle off. and adjust the seat cushion,
person's seating posture and body if adjustable, to make sure that
2. Remove the child restraint from
build. Everyone in the vehicle who the vehicle seatback is not
the vehicle.
has outgrown child restraints pushing the child restraint into
should wear a safety belt 3. Remove any additional items the seat cushion.
properly — whether or not there is from the seat such as blankets,
Also make sure the child
an airbag for that person. cushions, seat covers, seat
restraint is not trapped under the
heaters, or seat massagers.
vehicle head restraint. If this
{ WARNING 4. Reinstall the child restraint happens, adjust the head
following the directions restraint. See Head Restraints
If the airbag readiness light ever provided by the child restraint on page 3‑2.
comes on and stays on, it means manufacturer and refer to
that something may be wrong 6. Restart the vehicle.
Securing Child Restraints (Right
with the airbag system. To help Front Seat Position) on The passenger sensing system
avoid injury to yourself or others, page 3‑52 or Securing Child may or may not turn off the
have the vehicle serviced right Restraints (Center Front Seat airbag for a child in a child
away. See Airbag Readiness Position) on page 3‑51 or restraint depending upon the
Light on page 5‑15 for more Securing Child Restraints (Rear child’s seating posture and body
information, including important Seat Position) on page 3‑49. build. It is better to secure the
safety information. child restraint in a rear seat.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an 2. Remove any additional material If the shoulder portion of the belt is
Adult-Size Occupant from the seat, such as blankets, pulled out all the way, the child
cushions, seat covers, seat restraint locking feature will be
heaters, or seat massagers. engaged. This may unintentionally
3. Place the seatback in the fully cause the passenger sensing
upright position. system to turn the airbag off for
some adult‐size occupants. If this
4. Have the person sit upright in happens, let the belt go back all the
the seat, centered on the seat way and start again.
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended. A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
5. Restart the vehicle and have the or aftermarket equipment such as
person remain in this position for seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
two to three minutes after the on massagers, can affect how well
indicator is lit. the passenger sensing system
If a person of adult size is sitting in operates. We recommend that you
Additional Factors Affecting
the right front passenger seat, but not use seat covers or other
System Operation aftermarket equipment except when
the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting Safety belts help keep the approved by GM for your specific
properly in the seat. If this happens, passenger in position on the seat vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
use the following steps to allow the during vehicle maneuvers and the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
system to detect that person and braking, which helps the passenger page 3‑32 for more information
enable the right front passenger sensing system maintain the about modifications that can affect
frontal airbag: passenger airbag status. See how the system operates.
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” The on indicator may be lit if an
1. Turn the vehicle off. in the Index for additional object, such as a briefcase,
information about the importance of handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
proper restraint use.
or other electronic device, is put on keep the airbag system from

an unoccupied seat. If this is not { WARNING working properly. Changing or
desired, remove the object from moving any parts of the front
the seat. For up to 10 seconds after the seats, safety belts, the airbag
vehicle is turned off and the sensing and diagnostic module,
battery is disconnected, an airbag
{ WARNING can still inflate during improper
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
Stowing of articles under the service. You can be injured if you ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
passenger seat or between the are close to an airbag when it trim, overhead console, front
passenger seat cushion and inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. sensors, side impact sensors,
seatback may interfere with the They are probably part of the or airbag wiring can affect the
proper operation of the passenger airbag system. Be sure to follow operation of the airbag system.
sensing system. proper service procedures, and In addition, the vehicle may have
make sure the person performing a passenger sensing system for
work for you is qualified to do so. the right front passenger
Servicing the position, which includes sensors
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Adding Equipment to the
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
Airbags affect how the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle system may not operate properly
should be serviced. There are parts if the original seat trim is
of the airbag system in several Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle replaced with non-GM covers,
places around the vehicle. Your upholstery or trim, or with GM
dealer and the service manual have that could keep the airbags
from working properly? covers, upholstery or trim
information about servicing the designed for a different vehicle.
vehicle and the airbag system. To A: Yes. If you add things that Any object, such as an
purchase a service manual, see change the vehicle's frame, aftermarket seat heater or a
Service Publications Ordering bumper system, height, front end comfort enhancing pad or
Information on page 13‑16. or side sheet metal, they may device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also Q: Because I have a disability, Airbag System Check
interfere with the operation of I have to get my vehicle
the passenger sensing system. modified. How can I find out The airbag system does not need
This could either prevent proper whether this will affect my regularly scheduled maintenance or
deployment of the passenger airbag system? replacement. Make sure the airbag
airbag(s) or prevent the readiness light is working. See
A: If you have questions, call Airbag Readiness Light on
passenger sensing system Customer Assistance. The
from properly turning off the page 5‑15.
phone numbers and addresses
passenger airbag(s). See for Customer Assistance are in Notice: If an airbag covering is
Passenger Sensing System on Step Two of the Customer damaged, opened, or broken, the
page 3‑28. Satisfaction Procedure in this airbag may not work properly. Do
If you have any questions, call manual. See Customer not open or break the airbag
Customer Assistance. The Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and coverings. If there are any
phone numbers and addresses Canada) on page 13‑1 or opened or broken airbag covers,
for Customer Assistance are in Customer Satisfaction have the airbag covering and/or
Step Two of the Customer Procedure (Mexico) on airbag module replaced. For the
Satisfaction Procedure in this page 13‑3. location of the airbags, see
manual. See Customer Where Are the Airbags? on
Satisfaction Procedure (U.S. and In addition, your dealer and the page 3‑22. See your dealer for
Canada) on page 13‑1 or service manual have information service.
Customer Satisfaction about the location of the airbag
Procedure (Mexico) on sensors, sensing and diagnostic
page 13‑3. module and airbag wiring.
If the vehicle has rollover
roof-rail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 10‑62 for additional
important information.
Replacing Airbag System If an airbag inflates, you will need to Child Restraints
replace airbag system parts. See
Parts after a Crash your dealer for service.
Older Children
If the airbag readiness light stays on
{ WARNING after the vehicle is started or comes
A crash can damage the airbag on when you are driving, the airbag
systems in the vehicle. system may not work properly. Have
A damaged airbag system the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
may not work properly and
page 5‑15.
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as Older children who have outgrown
possible. booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
The manufacturer's instructions that

. Can proper safety belt fit be Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
come with the booster seat state the maintained for the length of the Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
weight and height limitations for that trip? If yes, continue. If no, page 3‑13.
booster. Use a booster seat with a return to the booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
lap-shoulder belt until the child If you have the choice, a child children and infants are safer when
passes the fit test below: should sit in a position with a properly restrained in a child
. Sit all the way back on the seat. lap‐shoulder belt and get the restraint system or infant restraint
Do the knees bend at the seat additional restraint a shoulder belt system secured in a rear seating
edge? If yes, continue. If no, can provide. position.
return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to In a crash, children who are not
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. wear safety belts? buckled up can strike other people
Does the shoulder belt rest on A: An older child should wear a who are buckled up, or can be
the shoulder? If yes, continue. lap-shoulder belt and get the thrown out of the vehicle. Older
If no, try using the rear safety additional restraint a shoulder children need to use safety belts
belt comfort guide. See “Rear belt can provide. The shoulder properly.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” belt should not cross the face or
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on neck. The lap belt should fit
page 3‑13 for more information. snugly below the hips, just
If the shoulder belt still does not touching the top of the thighs.
rest on the shoulder, then return This applies belt force to the
to the booster seat. child's pelvic bones in a crash.
. Does the lap belt fit low and It should never be worn over the
snug on the hips, touching the abdomen, which could cause
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, severe or even fatal internal
return to the booster seat. injuries in a crash.
{ WARNING { WARNING WARNING (Continued)

Never allow more than one child Never allow a child to wear the That could cause serious or fatal
to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt with the shoulder belt injuries. The shoulder belt should
safety belt cannot properly spread behind their back. A child can be go over the shoulder and across
the impact forces. In a crash, they seriously injured by not wearing the chest.
can be crushed together and the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
seriously injured. A safety belt crash, the child would not be
must be used by only one person restrained by the shoulder belt.
at a time. The child could move too far
forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never hold an infant or a child
Children can be seriously injured while riding in a vehicle. Due to
or strangled if a shoulder belt is crash forces, an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and will become so heavy it is not
the safety belt continues to possible to hold it during a crash.
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never (Continued)
allow children to play with the
safety belts.
sure it is designed to be used in

{ WARNING a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
Children who are up against, that it meets federal motor
or very close to, any airbag when vehicle safety standards.
it inflates can be seriously injured
The restraint manufacturer's
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
instructions that come with the
child restraint in the right front
restraint state the weight and
seat. Secure a rear-facing child height limitations for a particular
restraint in a rear seat. It is also child restraint. In addition, there
better to secure a forward-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in a rear seat. If you available for children with
must secure a forward-facing Q: What are the different types of special needs.
child restraint in the right front add-on child restraints?
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
A: Add-on child restraints, which { WARNING
are purchased by the vehicle
will go. To reduce the risk of neck and
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular head injury during a crash, infants
restraint should take into need complete support. In a
consideration not only the child's crash, if an infant is in a
weight, height, and age but also rear-facing child restraint, the
whether or not the restraint will crash forces can be distributed
be compatible with the motor across the strongest part of an
vehicle in which it will be used. infant's body, the back and
For most basic types of child shoulders. Infants should always
restraints, there are many be secured in rear-facing child
different models available. When restraints.
purchasing a child restraint, be
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low on
the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal Forward-Facing Child Seat
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat A forward-facing child seat provides
crash, young children should restraint for the child's body with the
A rear-facing infant seat provides harness.
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child the LATCH system. See Lower

Restraint in the Vehicle Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3‑43.
Children can be endangered in a
{ WARNING crash if the child restraint is not
A child can be seriously injured or properly secured in the vehicle.
killed in a crash if the child When securing an add-on child
restraint is not properly secured in restraint, refer to the instructions
the vehicle. Secure the child that come with the restraint which
restraint properly in the vehicle may be on the restraint itself or in a
using the vehicle safety belt or booklet, or both, and to this manual.
LATCH system, following the The child restraint instructions are
Booster Seats instructions that came with that important, so if they are not
A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions available, obtain a replacement
designed to improve the fit of the in this manual. copy from the manufacturer.
vehicle's safety belt system. Keep in mind that an unsecured
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, child restraint can move around in a
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured collision or sudden stop and injure
in the vehicle. Child restraint people in the vehicle. Be sure to
systems must be secured in vehicle properly secure any child restraint in
seats by lap belts or the lap belt the vehicle— even when no child
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by is in it.
In some areas of the United States Securing the Child Within the Where to Put the
and Canada, Certified Child Child Restraint
Passenger Safety Technicians
Restraint
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
{ WARNING According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
use and install child restraints. In A child can be seriously injured properly restrained in a child
the U.S., refer to the National or killed in a crash if the child is restraint system or infant restraint
Highway Traffic Safety not properly secured in the system secured in a rear seating
Administration (NHTSA) website to child restraint. Secure the child position.
locate the nearest child safety seat
properly following the instructions We recommend that children and
inspection station. For CPST
that came with that child restraint. child restraints be secured in a rear
availability in Canada, check with
seat, including: an infant or a child
Transport Canada or the Provincial
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
Ministry of Transportation office.
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) { WARNING

A child in a rear-facing child frontal airbag, no system is A child in a child restraint in the
restraint can be seriously fail-safe. No one can guarantee center front seat can be badly
injured or killed if the right front that an airbag will not deploy injured or killed by the frontal
passenger airbag inflates. under some unusual airbags if they inflate. Never
This is because the back of the circumstance, even though it is secure a child restraint in the
rear-facing child restraint would turned off. center front seat. It is always
be very close to the inflating better to secure a child restraint in
airbag. A child in a forward-facing Secure rear-facing child restraints a rear seat.
child restraint can be seriously in a rear seat, even if the airbag
injured or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in Do not use child restraints in the
passenger airbag inflates and the center front seat position.
passenger seat is in a forward the right front seat, always move
position. the front passenger seat as far When securing a child restraint in a
back as it will go. It is better to rear seating position, study the
The vehicle may have a secure the child restraint in a instructions that came with your
passenger sensing system which rear seat. child restraint to make sure it is
is designed to turn off the right compatible with this vehicle.
front passenger frontal airbag See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3‑28 for additional Child restraints and booster seats
under certain conditions. vary considerably in size, and some
information.
Even if the passenger sensing may fit in certain seating positions
system, if equipped, has turned better than others. Always make
off the right front passenger sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
(Continued)
Depending on where you place the Lower Anchors and When installing a child restraint
child restraint and the size of the with a top tether, you must also use
child restraint, you may not be able
Tethers for Children either the lower anchors or the
to access adjacent safety belt (LATCH System) safety belts to properly secure the
assemblies or LATCH anchors for The LATCH system holds a child child restraint. A child restraint must
additional passengers or child restraint during driving or in a crash. never be installed using only the top
restraints. Adjacent seating This system is designed to make tether and anchor.
positions should not be used if the installation of a child restraint easier. In order to use the LATCH system
child restraint prevents access to or The LATCH system uses anchors in in your vehicle, you need a child
interferes with the routing of the the vehicle and attachments on the restraint that has LATCH
safety belt. child restraint that are made for use attachments. The child restraint
Wherever a child restraint is with the LATCH system. manufacturer will provide you with
installed, be sure to secure the child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible instructions on how to use the child
restraint properly. child restraint is properly installed restraint and its attachments. The
Keep in mind that an unsecured using the anchors, or use the following explains how to attach a
child restraint can move around in a vehicle's safety belts to secure the child restraint with these
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint, following the instructions attachments in your vehicle.
people in the vehicle. Be sure to that came with that restraint, and Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly secure any child restraint in also the instructions in this manual. child restraints have lower anchors
your vehicle — even when no child and attachments or top tether
is in it. anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a
single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have
built into the vehicle. There are of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be
two lower anchors for each A top tether anchor is built into attached. Be sure to read and follow
LATCH seating position that will the vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
accommodate a child restraint with attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
lower attachments (B). connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether See Rear Seats on page 3‑10.
Anchor Locations Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
To assist you in locating the top position without a top tether anchor
tether anchors, the top tether anchor if a national or local law requires
symbol is located near the top tether that the top tether be attached, or if
anchors. the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
Rear Seat properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
system secured in a rear seating
positions with top tether anchors.
position. See Where to Put the
j (Lower Anchor): Seating Restraint on page 3‑41 for
positions with two lower anchors. additional information.
The right side rear passenger and
center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in
the crease between the seatback The top tether anchors are located
and the seat cushion. on the back of the rear seat frame
above the floor for each rear seating
position. Fold down the rear
seatback(s) to access the anchors.
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
System Do not attach more than one child children cannot reach them. Pull
restraint to a single anchor. the shoulder belt all the way out
{ WARNING Attaching more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint to a single anchor could if the vehicle has one, after the
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
not attached to anchors, the child child restraint has been installed.
to come loose or even break
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
the child correctly. In a crash, the could be injured. To reduce the Notice: Do not let the LATCH
child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the
killed. Install a LATCH-type child during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may
restraint properly using the damage these parts. If necessary,
child restraint per anchor.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety move buckled safety belts to
belts to secure the restraint, avoid rubbing the LATCH
following the instructions that attachments.
came with the child restraint and { WARNING Do not fold the empty rear seat
the instructions in this manual. with a safety belt buckled. This
Children can be seriously injured could damage the safety belt or
or strangled if a shoulder belt is the seat. Unbuckle and return the
wrapped around their neck and safety belt to its stowed position,
the safety belt continues to before folding the seat.
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
(Continued)
1. If the child restraint manufacturer 1.3. Route the top tether

recommends that the top tether according to your child
be attached, attach the top restraint instructions and
tether to the top tether anchor, the following instructions:
if equipped. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the
following steps:
1.1. To access the top tether
anchors, raise the seat
cushion by pulling up on the If the position you are using
strap loop at the rear of the does not have a headrest
seat cushion and fold the or head restraint and you
seat cushion forward. Then are using a dual tether,
fold the seatback forward route the tether over the
until it is flat. See Rear If the position you are using seatback.
Seats on page 3‑10 for does not have a headrest
additional information. or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
1.2. Place the child restraint in route the tether over the
the vehicle, near the seatback.
seating position that you
are using.
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
If the position you are using If the position you are using locked.
has an adjustable headrest has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you 1.5. Lift the seatback up and
are using a dual tether, are using a single tether, push it rearward. Then
route the tether around the raise the headrest or head lower the seat cushion until
headrest or head restraint. restraint and route the the seatback and the seat
tether under the headrest or cushion lock into position.
head restraint and in
between the headrest or 2. Attach the lower attachments to
head restraint posts. the lower anchors. If the child
restraint does not have lower
1.4. Attach the top tether attachments or the desired
attachment to the top tether seating position does not have
anchor. lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
2.1. Find the lower anchors for Replacing LATCH System Securing Child Restraints
the desired seating
position.
Parts After a Crash (Rear Seat Position)
2.2. Put the child restraint on When securing a child restraint in a
the seat.
{ WARNING rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the
2.3. Attach and tighten the lower A crash can damage the LATCH child restraint to make sure it is
attachments on the child system in the vehicle. A damaged compatible with this vehicle.
restraint to the lower LATCH system may not properly
anchors. secure the child restraint, If the child restraint has the LATCH
resulting in serious injury or even system, see Lower Anchors and
3. Tighten the top tether. Tethers for Children (LATCH
death in a crash. To help make
4. Before placing a child in the System) on page 3‑43 for how and
sure the LATCH system is
child restraint, make sure it is where to install the child restraint
working properly after a crash, using LATCH. If you secure a child
securely held in place. To check, see your dealer to have the
grasp the child restraint at the restraint using a safety belt and it
system inspected and any uses a top tether, see Lower
LATCH path and attempt to
necessary replacements made Anchors and Tethers for Children
move it side‐to‐side and
back‐and‐forth. There should be as soon as possible. (LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for
no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of top tether anchor locations.
movement for proper installation. If the vehicle has the LATCH system Do not secure a child restraint in a
and it was being used during a position without a top tether anchor
crash, new LATCH system parts if a national or local law requires
may be needed. that the top tether be anchored, or if
New parts and repairs may be the instructions that come with the
necessary even if the LATCH child restraint say that the top strap
system was not being used at the must be anchored.
time of the crash.
In Canada, the law requires that 1. Put the child restraint on Position the release button on
forward-facing child restraints have the seat. the buckle so that the safety belt
a top tether, and that the tether be 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run could be quickly unbuckled if
attached. the lap and shoulder portions of necessary.
If the child restraint does not have the vehicle's safety belt through
the LATCH system, you will be or around the restraint. The child
using the safety belt to secure the restraint instructions will show
child restraint in this position. Be you how.
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
If more than one child restraint
needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 3‑41.
If the child restraint manufacturer 4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
recommends using a top tether, out of the retractor to set the
attach and tighten the top tether to lock. When the retractor lock is
the top tether anchor. Refer to the set, the belt can be tightened but
instructions that came with the child not pulled out of the retractor.
restraint and see Lower Anchors 3. Push the latch plate into the
and Tethers for Children (LATCH buckle until it clicks.
System) on page 3‑43.
6. If the child restraint has a top Securing Child Restraints

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
(Center Front Seat
regarding the use of the top Position)
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑43.
{ WARNING
7. Before placing a child in the A child in a child restraint in the
child restraint, make sure it is center front seat can be badly
securely held in place. To check, injured or killed by the frontal
grasp the child restraint at the airbags if they inflate. Never
safety belt path and attempt to secure a child restraint in the
5. To tighten the belt, push down move it side‐to‐side and back‐ center front seat. It is always
on the child restraint, pull the and‐forth. When the child better to secure a child restraint in
shoulder portion of the belt to restraint is properly installed, a rear seat.
tighten the lap portion of the belt, there should be no more than
and feed the shoulder belt back 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
Do not use child restraints in the
into the retractor. When installing To remove the child restraint, center front seat position.
a forward-facing child restraint, it unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
may be helpful to use your knee let it return to the stowed position.
to push down on the child If the top tether is attached to a top
restraint as you tighten the belt. tether anchor, disconnect it.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front Seat
{ WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Position) A child in a rear-facing child

restraint can be seriously injured Even if the passenger sensing
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the right front system, if equipped, has turned
seat is a safer place to secure a passenger airbag inflates. This is off the right front passenger
forward-facing child restraint. See because the back of the frontal airbag, no system is
Where to Put the Restraint on fail-safe. No one can guarantee
rear-facing child restraint would
page 3‑41. that an airbag will not deploy
be very close to the inflating
In addition, the vehicle may have a airbag. A child in a forward-facing under some unusual
passenger sensing system which is child restraint can be seriously circumstance, even though it is
designed to turn off the right front injured or killed if the right front turned off.
passenger frontal airbag under passenger airbag inflates and the Secure rear-facing child restraints
certain conditions. See Passenger passenger seat is in a forward in a rear seat, even if the airbag
Sensing System on page 3‑28 and position. is off. If you secure a
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 5‑16 for more information, The vehicle may have a forward-facing child restraint in
including important safety passenger sensing system which the right front seat, always move
information. is designed to turn off the right the front passenger seat as far
front passenger frontal airbag back as it will go. It is better to
A label on the sun visor says, secure the child restraint in a
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in under certain conditions.
rear seat.
the front.” This is because the risk to (Continued)
the rear-facing child is so great if the See Passenger Sensing System
airbag deploys. on page 3‑28 for additional
information.
If the child restraint has the LATCH 1. Move the seat as far back as it Position the release button on
system, see Lower Anchors and will go before securing the the buckle so that the safety belt
Tethers for Children (LATCH forward-facing child restraint. could be quickly unbuckled if
System) on page 3‑43 for how and 2. Put the child restraint on necessary.
where to install the child restraint the seat.
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured using a safety belt and it 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
uses a top tether, see Lower the lap and shoulder portions of
Anchors and Tethers for Children the vehicle's safety belt through
(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 for or around the restraint. The child
top tether anchor locations. restraint instructions will show
you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
In Canada, the law requires that out of the retractor to set the
forward-facing child restraints have lock. When the retractor lock is
a top tether, and that the tether be set, the belt can be tightened but
attached. not pulled out of the retractor.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions 4. Push the latch plate into the
that came with the child restraint. buckle until it clicks.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the vehicle is equipped with the
retractor to make sure the passenger sensing system, and
retractor is locked. If the when the passenger sensing system
retractor is not locked, repeat has turned off the right front
Steps 5 and 6. passenger frontal airbag, the off
7. Before placing a child in the indicator in the passenger airbag
child restraint, make sure it is status indicator should light and stay
securely held in place. To check, lit when you start the vehicle. See
grasp the child restraint at the Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
safety belt path and attempt on page 5‑16.
to move it side‐to‐side and If a child restraint has been installed
back‐and‐forth. When the child and the on indicator is lit, see “If
6. To tighten the belt, push down restraint is properly installed, the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
on the child restraint, pull the there should be no more than Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
shoulder portion of the belt to 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. System on page 3‑28 for more
tighten the lap portion of the belt, information.
and feed the shoulder belt back To remove the child restraint,
into the retractor. When installing unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
a forward-facing child restraint, it let it return to the stowed position.
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage For vehicles with a rear armrest/

cupholder, pull up and out on the
Compartments tab on the top center of the armrest.
Pull the armrest down to access the
Storage Compartments
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Glove Box cupholder.
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lift up on the glove box lever to
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 open it.
Overhead Console
Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 For vehicles with an overhead
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1 Cupholders console, it contains reading lights
Top-Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 and a small storage area.
For vehicles with cupholders for
Luggage/Load Locations front and rear passengers, the Press the button next to each light
Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 cupholders are located in the center to turn it on and off.
Additional Storage Features console and on the back of the
Cargo Cover Panels . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 center console. Armrest Storage
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Press down and release the access Vehicles may have a center armrest
door to open and use the front storage compartment in front of the
Roof Rack System cupholders. bench seat. Open it by folding the
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 armrest down and pressing the
Pull down on the door located on
handle on the front.
the back of the console to use the
rear cupholders. Push on the door
to close it. Center Console Storage
Push down and then back to For vehicles with a console
remove the front cupholder for compartment, cupholders are
cleaning. located between the bucket seats.
Press the button and lift the console
cover to open.
4-2 Storage
The back of the console has a Luggage/Load

cupholder that folds down for the
rear seat passenger to use. Locations
Top-Box Storage Cargo Area
All-Weather Cargo Area
The vehicle's cargo area can be
used in many different
configurations — cargo panels on or
off, Midgate up or down, rear glass
in or out. It has features that resist
the elements and protect cargo. It is Even when all of these things are
designed to quickly direct water out working properly and the cover
of the cargo box. The top drain system is on, there may be some
grates, side rail channels, catch instances (heavy rains, automated
cups, Midgate drain, cargo area car washes, etc.) when water can
floor drains, and rubber cargo mat collect in the following areas:
help do this.
There are top-box storage units on A. Top drain grates
both sides of the rear cargo area.
The passenger side contains the tire B. Removable front drain grate
changing tools. To lock or unlock, (Midgate drain grate)
use the key then press the key C. Side rail channels and
cylinder to open. catch cups
Storage 4-3
D. Front drains Top Drain Grates – Removal

E. Water drainage area around and Cleaning
both sides of the box and the
tailgate side
F. Rear drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat
Maintenance and Cleaning 2. Grasp the edges of the grate
and pull it out from the vehicle.
To ensure that the water Flush the drain with clean water.
management system performs
properly, be sure that the Midgate, The top drain grates are located
tailgate, and cover system are fully near the rear window on both sides
closed and that all parts are clean of the vehicle. Clean the grates and
and not blocked with debris. Follow drains if there is a blockage.
the instructions given next in this To remove each drain grate, do the
section for the proper procedures on following:
cleaning each item.
1. Remove the cargo panels. See
Cargo Cover Panels on
To replace the drain grate:
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle
with the slots in the grate and
firmly push the grate down.
4-4 Storage
2. Do not force the grate. If it does Midgate Drain Grate Removal

not clip into place, realign the and Cleaning
clips with the holes and try
again.
Side Rail Channels
After hauling dirt, wood chips,

pebbles etc. the Midgate drain
should be flushed with water. First
The removable Midgate drain grate remove the drain grate:
The side rail channels are located is located near the base of the 1. Lower the Midgate. See
on top of both sides of the cargo Midgate. Midgate® on page 2‑9 for more
area. Flush them out with clean information.
water if debris collects inside
of them. 2. Pull up on the rear side of the
drain grate, tilt it toward the front
Carefully load cargo into the cargo of the vehicle, and pull it out.
area, so that the rails do not get
damaged. Reverse the procedure to reinstall
the drain grate.
Storage 4-5
Cargo Area Floor Drains Additional Storage Notice: Exceeding the weight
limit of 113 kg (250 lbs) can
Features damage the cargo covers, and the
repairs would not be covered by
Cargo Cover Panels the vehicle warranty. Do not put
anything on top of the cargo
For vehicles with a three-piece covers over the weight limit.
cargo cover system, the cargo
panels can be removed and stored To remove a cargo panel(s):
in the cargo area of the vehicle. 1. Lower the tailgate. See Tailgate
on page 2‑15 for more
The cargo mat has cut outs for the { WARNING information on the tailgate.
four cargo-area floor drains located
Improperly stored cargo cover
under the cargo mat near the sides
panels could be thrown about the
of the cargo area.
vehicle during a collision or
Periodically flush the drains through sudden maneuver. Someone
the cut outs to clear debris and could be injured. If a panel is
allow water to drain from the cargo removed, always store it in the
area. If the cargo area is extremely proper storage location. When
dirty, lift up the edges of the cargo putting it back, always make sure
floor mat or take the whole mat out
that it is securely reattached.
and flush the drains with water.
The panels are embossed on

the upper center portion with the
numbers 1, 2 and 3. There are
4-6 Storage
also numbered labels on the 3. Remove cargo panel 2 in the The three cargo panels can be
bottom of the panels. The same way and set it aside. stored in the cargo area using the
numbers on the top and bottom Remove as many cargo panels storage strap system. Always use
of the panels will be used as as needed. the storage strap system to store
reference when removing, 4. To remove cargo panel 1, unlock the cargo panels while driving.
storing and reinstalling the the two rear latches, lift the
panels. cover slightly and pull rearward.
After each cargo panel has been
removed, store them within the
cargo storage area using the cargo
panel storage system.
Cargo Panel Storage System
To store the panels:

1. Secure the storage strap system
2. Unlock the cargo panel 3 by in the cargo storage area by
pulling forward on the driver side attaching the six clips included
and passenger side cargo panel on the cargo strap system to the
latches, located on the bottom of tie down locations on either side
each cargo panel. of the storage area.
Storage 4-7
Before storing the cargo panels, 1.2. Secure clip (B) on the Do the same for cargo panel 2
make sure that the latches on storage strap. then panel 3. Make sure to store
the cargo panels are in the 1.3. Place the remaining primary panel 2 with the latches facing
locked position. The latches are straps (C) on top of the lid down and panel 3 with latches
locked when they are parallel to and tray at the top of the facing up toward the side of the
the front and back edge of the cargo area. cargo box.
panel.
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load 3. Place the primary straps over
Use the following instructions for the cargo panel with the latches the three cargo covers (A).
the proper storage sequence facing up toward the side of the Fasten the four strap clips (B).
and location for each panel: cargo box.
1.1. Secure clip (A) on the
storage strap.
4-8 Storage
4. Tighten all straps by pulling on 5. Close both cross locks at the Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
the free end of each strap. center of the strap system to Reinstalling the Cargo Cover
tightly secure.
Panels
The strap system can remain
attached to the side of the cargo
area while it is not in use, or it can
be stored inside the top box storage
compartment. See Top-Box Storage
Storage 4-9
Then lower the rear of the cover

to engage the striker pegs (A) to
align with the striker
assembly (B).
To reinstall a cargo panel: Driver Side Shown, Passenger

Side Similar
1. Starting with cargo panel 1,
place the latches in the unlocked 2. Place the cover on the cargo
position. Place cargo panel 1 on box within 10 cm (4 in) of the
the cargo area rails while Midgate and lower the rear of
holding the back of the cargo the panel within 5‐8 cm (2‐3 in) 3. The driver side cargo cover
panel up. from the top of the cargo box. panel latch must lock in place
Push the cover forward making before the passenger side latch
sure that the guide block can be locked. If this procedure
engages the retainer bracket is not followed exactly, the cargo
opening. Continue to push cover panels might not correctly
forward until the panel is fully lock in place. Push the driver
seated against the Midgate. side latch toward the front of the
vehicle to lock the cover in
position. A click sounds when
4-10 Storage
each latch locks. Lock the down making sure that the
remaining passenger side latch pegs (A) align with the
on panel 1. receivers (B).
4. Install cargo cover 2 followed 6. Push the latches toward the
by 3 next. Place the latches in front of the vehicle, starting with
the unlocked position. Place the the driver side latch, to lock the
cargo cover panel on the cargo panel in place. A click sounds
area rails while holding the back when each latch locks correctly.
of the cargo panel up.
Folding and Storage of Straps 2. Fold the four primary strap ends
toward the center as shown.
Fold the straps for storing inside the

top-box storage compartment: 3. Take the short strap and wrap it
Driver Side Shown, Passenger around the folded webbing,
1. Extend the six strap ends on a
Side Similar forming a package.
flat surface.
5. Push the panel forward until it is
snug against the other panel and
then let the back of the panel
Storage 4-11
Roof Rack System Notice: Loading cargo on the

roof rack that weighs more than
91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the
{ WARNING rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
If something is carried on top of so that it rests evenly between
the vehicle that is longer or wider the crossrails, making sure to
than the roof rack — like paneling, fasten cargo securely.
plywood, or a mattress — the
wind can catch it while the vehicle To prevent damage or loss of cargo
4. Take the storage strap and wrap when driving, check to make sure
it around the package. Finally, is being driven. The item being
crossrails and cargo are securely
attach the hooks to the webbing carried could be violently torn off,
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
and place the straps inside the and this could cause a collision
rack will make the vehicle’s center
top-box storage compartment. and damage the vehicle. Never of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
carry something longer or wider sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
Cargo Tie-Downs than the roof rack on top of the braking or abrupt maneuvers,
vehicle unless using a GM otherwise it may result in loss of
The vehicle has cargo tie downs, certified accessory carrier.
located in the rear cargo area. control. If driving for a long distance,
These can be used to secure cargo. on rough roads, or at high speeds,
For vehicles with a roof rack, the occasionally stop the vehicle to
The tie downs can also be used to make sure the cargo remains in its
rack can be used to load items. For
secure the cargo cover panel strap place.
roof racks that do not have
system, if the vehicle has one. For
crossrails included, GM Certified
more information see Cargo Cover
crossrails can be purchased as an
Panels on page 4‑5.
accessory. See your dealer for
additional information.
4-12 Storage
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle

. To carry long items, move the
capacity when loading the vehicle. crossrails as far apart as
For more information on vehicle possible. Tie the load to the
capacity and loading, see Vehicle crossrails and the siderails or
Load Limits on page 9‑16. siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers, but do not
. If small heavy objects are placed tie the load so tightly that the
on the roof, cut a piece of 9 mm crossrails or siderails are
or 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside damaged.
the crossrails and siderails to
spread the load. Tie the plywood
. After moving a crossrail, be sure
to the siderail supports. it is securely locked into the
siderail.
. Tie the load and secure it to
the crossrails or the siderail A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
supports. Use the crossrails only (CHMSL) is located above the rear
to keep the load from sliding. To window glass.
move a crossrail, lift the release Make sure items loaded on the
lever up, on both sides of the roof of the vehicle do not block or
rail. Then slide the crossrail to damage the CHMSL.
the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the
release lever down on both
sides of the rail, down to tighten
it. Try to slide the crossrail back
and forth slightly to make sure it
is tight.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Engine Oil Pressure
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . .
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-23
5-23
Controls Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Coolant Temperature
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . .
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . .
5-24
5-24
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Controls Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-14 Information Displays
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Driver Information
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15
Passenger Airbag Status Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Vehicle Messages
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Malfunction Battery Voltage and Charging
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Brake System Warning Brake System Messages . . . . 5-34
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Indicators Antilock Brake System (ABS) Engine Cooling System
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-36
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-21 Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-36
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Traction Control System Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-37
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-22 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-37
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Object Detection System Controls 3. Release the lever to lock the

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 wheel in place.
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Steering Wheel Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-39 Adjustment
Anti-theft Alarm System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Steering Wheel Controls
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-40
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-41
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization (With
DIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Universal Remote System
Universal Remote System . . . 5-50
Universal Remote System
The tilt lever is located on the lower
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
left side of the steering column.
Universal Remote System If equipped, some audio controls
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 To adjust the steering wheel: can be adjusted at the steering
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull wheel.
the lever. w (Next): Press to go to the next
2. Move the steering wheel up favorite radio station, track on a
or down. CD, or folder on an iPod® or USB
device.
c / x (Previous/End): Press to 2. Press and release w or c / x Navigating an iPod or USB Device

go to the previous favorite radio to scroll up or down the list, then on the Main Audio Screen
station, track on a CD, or folder on (Vehicles with a Navigation
press and hold w , or press ¨ to System)
an iPod® or USB device. Press to play the highlighted track.
reject an incoming call, or end a 1. Press and release w or c / x
current call. Navigating Folders on an iPod or
to select the next or previous
USB Device (Vehicles without a
Radio Navigation System): track within the selected
category.
To select preset or favorite radio
1. Press and hold w or c / x
stations: 2. Press and hold w or c / x to
while listening to a song until the
Press and release w or c / x to contents of the current folder move quickly through the tracks.
go to the next or previous radio display on the radio display. 3. Press and release ¨ to move up
station stored as a preset or one track within the selected
favorite. 2. Press and hold c / x to go
back to the previous folder list. category.
CD/DVD Navigating an iPod or USB Device
3. Press and release w or c / x
To select tracks on a CD/DVD: on the Music Navigator Screen
to scroll up or down the list. (Vehicles with a Navigation
Press and release w or c / x to . To select a folder, press System)
go to the next or previous track. and hold w , or press ¨ 1. Press and release w or c / x
Selecting Tracks on an iPod or when the folder is to select the next or previous
USB Device (Vehicles without a highlighted. track within the selected
Navigation System) . To go back further in the category.
1. Press and hold w or c / x folder list, press and
2. Press and hold w or c / x to
while listening to a song until the hold c / x. move quickly through the tracks
contents of the current folder within the selected category.
display on the radio display.
3. Press and release ¨ to move up ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next +e: Press to increase volume.
one track within the selected radio station while in AM,
category. FM, or XM™. −e: Press to decrease volume.
b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press For vehicles with or without a
Horn
to silence the vehicle speakers only. navigation system:
Press again to turn the sound on. To sound the horn, press the center
Press ¨ to go to the next track or pad on the steering wheel.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or chapter while sourced to the CD or
OnStar systems, press and hold for DVD slot.
longer than two seconds to interact Windshield Wiper/Washer
with those systems. See Bluetooth Press ¨ to select a track or a folder
on page 7‑45 and OnStar Overview when navigating folders on an iPod
on page 14‑1 for more information. or USB device.
SRCE (Source/Voice For vehicles with a navigation
Recognition): Press to switch system:
between the radio and CD, and for
equipped vehicles, the DVD, front 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. heard, to place the radio into The front wiper control is located on
SCAN mode. A station will play the turn and lane‐change lever.
For vehicles with the navigation for five seconds before moving
system, press and hold this button to the next station. The windshield wipers are controlled
for longer than one second to by turning the band with z on it.
initiate voice recognition. See “Voice 2. To stop the SCAN function,
Recognition” in the Navigation press ¨ again. 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turn
System manual for more to 8 , then release. For several
While listening to a CD/DVD, press
information.
and hold ¨ to quickly move forward wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
through the tracks. Release to stop 9 (Off): Turns the windshield
on the desired track. wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): L (Washer Fluid): Push the Compass variance is the difference
Turn the band up for more frequent paddle marked with the windshield between the earth's magnetic north
wipes or down for less frequent washer symbol at the top of the and true geographic north. If the
wipes. multifunction lever, to spray washer compass is not set to the zone
fluid on the windshield. The wipers where you live, the compass may
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. clear the window and then either give false readings. The compass
? (High Speed): Fast wipes. stop or return to the preset speed. must be set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is traveling.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If frozen Compass To adjust for compass variance, use
to the windshield, carefully loosen or The vehicle may have a compass in the following procedure:
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Variance (Zone)
should be replaced. See Wiper
Compass Zone Procedure
Blade Replacement on page 10‑32.
The zone is set to zone eight upon 1. Do not set the compass zone
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
leaving the factory. Your dealer will when the vehicle is moving. Only
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
set it when the vehicle is in
stop the motor until it cools down. set the correct zone for your
location. P (Park).
Windshield Washer Press the vehicle information
Under certain circumstances,
such as during a long-distance, button until PRESS V TO
{ WARNING cross-country trip or moving to a CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
new state or province, it will be displays. Or, if the vehicle does
In freezing weather, do not use not have DIC buttons, press the
necessary to compensate for
the washer until the windshield trip odometer reset stem until
compass variance by resetting the
is warmed. Otherwise the CHANGE COMPASS ZONE
zone through the DIC if the zone is
washer fluid can form ice on the not set correctly. displays.
windshield, blocking your vision.
odometer reset stem for after making turns, there may be a

two seconds to select the next strong magnetic field interfering with
available variance zone. Repeat the compass. Such interference
this step until the appropriate may be caused by a magnetic CB or
variance zone is displayed. cell phone antenna mount, a
5. If calibration is necessary, magnetic emergency light, magnetic
calibrate the compass. See note pad holder, or any other
“Compass Calibration magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,
Procedure” following. move the magnetic item, then turn
on the vehicle and calibrate the
Compass Calibration compass.
The compass can be manually To calibrate the compass, use the
2. Find the vehicle's current calibrated. Only calibrate the following procedure:
location and variance zone compass in a magnetically clean
and safe location, such as an open Compass Calibration Procedure
number on the map.
parking lot, where driving the 1. Before calibrating the compass,
Zones 1 through 15 are vehicle in circles is not a danger. make sure the compass zone is
available. It is suggested to calibrate away set to the variance zone in which
3. Press the set/reset button to from tall buildings, utility wires, the vehicle is located. See
scroll through and select the manhole covers, or other industrial “Compass Variance (Zone)
appropriate variance zone. structures, if possible. Procedure” earlier in this
If CAL should ever appear in the section.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until
the vehicle heading, for DIC display, the compass should be Do not operate any switches
example, N for North, is calibrated. such as window, sunroof,
displayed in the DIC. Or, if the If the DIC display does not show a climate controls, or seats during
vehicle does not have DIC heading, for example, N for North, the calibration procedure.
buttons, press and hold the trip or the heading does not change
2. Press the vehicle information Clock 5. To decrease the time or date, do

button until PRESS V TO one of the following:
To set the time and date:
CALIBRATE COMPASS . Press the © SEEK button.
displays. Or, if the vehicle does 1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/
not have DIC buttons, press the ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then . Press the s REV button.
trip odometer reset stem until press the O button to turn the
CALIBRATE COMPASS radio on.
. Turn the f knob
displays. counterclockwise.
2. Press the H button to display
3. Press the set/reset button to To change the time default setting
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change
start the compass calibration.
minute, month, day, and year). the date default setting from month/
Or, if the vehicle does not have
DIC buttons, press and hold 3. Press the softkey located under day/year to day/month/year:
the trip odometer reset stem any one of the tabs to change
that setting. 1. Press the H button and then
for two seconds to start the
compass calibration. the softkey located below the
4. To increase the time or date, do forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the
4. The DIC will display one of the following: date MM/DD (month and day),
CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN . Press the softkey below the and DD/MM/ (day and month)
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in selected tab. displays.
tight circles at less than 8 km/h
(5 mph) to complete the . Press the ¨ SEEK button. 2. Press the softkey located below
calibration. The DIC will display the desired option.
CALIBRATION COMPLETE
. Press the \ FWD button.
3. Press the H button again to
for a few seconds when the . Turn the f knob clockwise. apply the desired option, or let
calibration is complete. The DIC the screen time out.
display will then return to the
previous menu.
Power Outlets Certain power accessory plugs

{ WARNING may not be compatible with the
Accessory power outlets can be accessory power outlets and could
used to plug in electrical equipment, Power is always supplied to the overload vehicle and adapter fuses.
such as a cell phone or MP3 player. outlets. Do not leave electrical If a problem is experienced, see
equipment plugged in when the your dealer.
The vehicle may have two
accessory power outlets located on vehicle is not in use because the
vehicle could catch fire and cause When adding electrical equipment,
the instrument panel and one inside be sure to follow the proper
the center floor console. injury or death.
installation instructions included
The vehicle may also have an outlet with the equipment. See Add-On
on the rear of the center floor Notice: Leaving electrical Electrical Equipment on page 9‑80.
console above the cupholder door. equipment plugged in for an
Notice: Hanging heavy
extended period of time while
Remove the cover to access and equipment from the power outlet
the vehicle is off will drain the
replace when not in use. The can cause damage not covered
battery. Always unplug electrical
accessory power outlet is by the vehicle warranty. The
equipment when not in use and
operational at all times. power outlets are designed for
do not plug in equipment that
accessory power plugs only, such
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
as cell phone charge cords.
rating.
Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer To display the odometer reading

with the ignition off, press the reset
The speedometer shows the button.
vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per Tachometer
hour (mph).
The tachometer displays the engine
Odometer speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either Fuel Gauge
kilometers or miles.
Trip Odometer English

The trip odometer can show how far When the ignition is on, the fuel
the vehicle has been driven since gauge shows how much fuel the
the trip odometer was last set vehicle has left in the tank.
to zero. An arrow on the fuel gauge
Press the reset button, located on indicates the side of the vehicle the
the instrument panel cluster next to fuel door is on.
the trip odometer display, to toggle The gauge first indicates empty
between the trip odometer and the before the vehicle is out of fuel, and
regular odometer. Holding the reset the fuel tank should be filled soon.
button for approximately one second Metric
while the trip odometer is displayed
resets it.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL Engine Oil Pressure
LEVEL LOW message appears in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
Gauge
See Fuel System Messages on
Here are some situations customers
may experience with the fuel gauge.
None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gauge.
. At the gas station, the fuel pump
shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
English
. It takes a little more or less fuel
The oil pressure gauge shows the
to fill up than the fuel gauge
engine oil pressure in psi (pounds
indicated. For example, the Metric
per square inch) when the engine is
gauge may have indicated the
running. Canadian vehicles indicate
tank was half full, but it actually
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill Oil pressure may vary with engine
the tank. speed, outside temperature and oil
viscosity, but readings above the
. The gauge goes back to empty
low pressure zone indicate the
when the ignition is turned off.
normal operating range. When the
oil pressure reaches the low
pressure zone, the OIL PRESSURE
LOW STOP ENGINE message will
appear in the Driver Information Engine Coolant

Center (DIC). See Engine Oil
Messages on page 5‑36 and Engine
Temperature Gauge
Oil on page 10‑8 for more
information.
A reading in the low pressure zone
may be caused by a dangerously
low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. Driving with the engine
English
oil low can also damage the
engine. The repairs would not be This gauge shows the engine
covered by the vehicle warranty. coolant temperature.
Metric
Check the oil level as soon as It also provides an indicator of how
possible. Add oil if required, but hard the vehicle is working. During a
if the oil level is within the majority of the operation, the gauge
operating range and the oil will read 100°C (210°F) or less.
pressure is still low, have the If the vehicle is pulling a load or
vehicle serviced. Always follow going up hills, it is normal for the
the maintenance schedule for temperature to fluctuate and
changing engine oil. approach the 122°C (250°F) mark.
If the gauge reaches the 125°C When the engine is running, the will come on or the SERVICE
(260°F) mark, it indicates that the gauge shows the condition of the BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
cooling system is working beyond charging system. The charging DIC message will display. See
its capacity. system regulates voltage based on Battery Voltage and Charging
See Engine Overheating on the state of the battery for improved Messages on page 5‑33 and
page 10‑20. fuel economy and battery life. The Charging System Light on
gauge may transition from a higher page 5‑17 for more information.
to lower or a lower to higher
Voltmeter Gauge reading, this is normal. Readings Safety Belt Reminders
between the low and high warning
zones indicate the normal operating Driver Safety Belt Reminder
range. The gauge may also read Light
low during the fuel economy mode, There is a driver safety belt
this is normal. reminder light on the instrument
Readings in the low warning zone panel cluster.
may occur when a large number of
electrical accessories are operating
in the vehicle and the engine is left
at an idle for an extended period.
This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to
provide full power at engine idle. As
When the engine is not running, but engine speeds are increased, this When the vehicle is started, this
the ignition is on, this gauge shows condition should correct itself as light flashes and a chime may come
the battery's state of charge in higher engine speeds allow the on to remind the driver to fasten
DC volts. charging system to create full their safety belt. Then the light stays
power. If there is a problem with the on solid until the belt is buckled.
battery charging system, this light
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if Airbag Readiness Light
times if the driver remains or the front passenger remains or
becomes unbuckled while the becomes unbuckled while the The system checks the airbag's
vehicle is moving. vehicle is moving. electrical system for possible
malfunctions. If the light stays on it
If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the front passenger safety belt is indicates there is an electrical
neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the problem. The system check includes
comes on. light comes on. the airbag sensor(s), passenger
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt sensing system, the pretensioners,
Reminder Light reminder light and chime may turn the airbag modules, the wiring, and
on if an object is put on the seat the crash sensing and diagnostic
such as a briefcase, handbag, module. For more information on the
grocery bag, laptop, or other airbag system, see Airbag System
electronic device. To turn off the on page 3‑20.
reminder light and/or chime, remove
the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
When the vehicle is started, this
light flashes and a chime may come
on to remind front passengers to
fasten their safety belt. Then the
The airbag readiness light comes on
light stays on solid until the belt is
solid for a few seconds when the
buckled.
engine is started. If the light does
See Passenger Airbag Status not come on then, have it fixed
Indicator on page 5‑16. immediately.
Passenger Airbag Status

{ WARNING Indicator
If the airbag readiness light stays If the vehicle has the airbag status
on after the vehicle is started or indicator pictured in the following
comes on while driving, it means illustration, then the vehicle has a
the airbag system might not be passenger sensing system for the
working properly. The airbags in United States
right front passenger position. The
the vehicle might not inflate in a passenger airbag status indicator is
crash, or they could even inflate on the overhead console. See
without a crash. To help avoid Passenger Sensing System on
injury, have the vehicle serviced page 3‑28 for important safety
right away. information.
In addition, if the vehicle has a
If there is a problem with the airbag passenger sensing system for the Canada and Mexico
system, a Driver Information Center right front passenger position, the When the vehicle is started, the
(DIC) message can also come on. label on the vehicle's sun visors passenger airbag status indicator
See Airbag System Messages on refers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.” will light ON and OFF, or the
page 5‑39 for more information. symbols for on and off, for several
seconds as a system check. If you
are using remote start, if equipped,
to start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, If it does not, have the vehicle
the status indicator will light either { WARNING serviced by your dealer.
ON or OFF, or either the on or off The light should go out once the
symbol to let you know the status of If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means engine starts. If it stays on,
the right front passenger frontal or comes on while driving, there
airbag. that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help could be a problem with the
If the word ON or the on symbol is avoid injury to yourself or others, charging system. A charging system
lit on the passenger airbag status have the vehicle serviced right message in the Driver Information
indicator, it means that the right Center (DIC) can also appear. See
away. See Airbag Readiness
front passenger frontal airbag is Battery Voltage and Charging
Light on page 5‑15 for more
enabled (may inflate). Messages on page 5‑33 for more
information, including important information. This light could indicate
If the word OFF or the off symbol is safety information.
lit on the airbag status indicator, it that there are problems with a
means that the passenger sensing generator drive belt, or that there is
system has turned off the right front Charging System Light an electrical problem. Have it
passenger frontal airbag. checked right away. If the vehicle
must be driven a short distance with
If, after several seconds, both status the light on, turn off accessories,
indicator lights remain on, or if there such as the radio and air
are no lights at all, there may be a conditioner.
problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See
your dealer for service.
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition key is turned to START, but
the engine is not running, as a
check to show it is working.
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by these systems could lead to

the system before any problem is costly repairs not covered by the
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light vehicle warranty. This could also
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage result in a failure to pass a
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system assists required Emission Inspection/
Generation) monitors the operation the service technician in correctly Maintenance test. See
of the vehicle to ensure emissions diagnosing any malfunction. Accessories and Modifications on
are at acceptable levels, to produce Notice: If the vehicle is page 10‑3.
a cleaner environment. This light continually driven with this light This light comes on during a
comes on when the vehicle is on, the emission controls might malfunction in one of two ways:
placed in ON/RUN, as a check to not work as well, the vehicle fuel
show it is working. If it does not, Light Flashing: A misfire condition
economy might not be as good, has been detected. A misfire
have the vehicle serviced by your and the engine might not run as
dealer. See Ignition Positions on increases vehicle emissions and
smoothly. This could lead to could damage the emission control
page 9‑22. costly repairs that might not be system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
covered by the vehicle warranty. and service might be required.
Notice: Modifications made to the To prevent more serious damage to
engine, transmission, exhaust, the vehicle:
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of . Reduce vehicle speed.
the original tires with other . Avoid hard accelerations.
than those of the same Tire
If the malfunction indicator lamp Performance Criteria (TPC) can
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
comes on and stays on while the affect the vehicle's emission
engine is running, this indicates that
. If towing a trailer, reduce the
controls and can cause this light amount of cargo being hauled as
there is an OBD II problem and to come on. Modifications to
service is required. soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, stop

. Check that good quality fuel is Emissions Inspection and
and park the vehicle. Turn the used. Poor fuel quality causes Maintenance Programs
vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, the engine not to run as
and restart the engine. If the light is efficiently as designed and may Some local governments may have
still flashing, follow the previous cause stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the on-vehicle
steps and see your dealer for stalling when the vehicle is emission control equipment. For the
service as soon as possible. changed into gear, misfiring, inspection, the emission system test
hesitation on acceleration, equipment is connected to the
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration. vehicle’s Data Link
control system malfunction has These conditions might go away Connector (DLC).
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be
required. If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand used.
The following may correct an It will require at least one full tank of
emission system malfunction: the proper fuel to turn the light off.
. Check that the fuel cap is fully See Recommended Fuel on
installed. See Filling the Tank on page 9‑57.
page 9‑60. The diagnostic The DLC is under the instrument
system can determine if the If none of the above have made the panel to the left of the steering
fuel cap has been left off or light turn off, your dealer can check wheel. See your dealer if assistance
improperly installed. A loose or the vehicle. The dealer has the is needed.
missing fuel cap allows fuel to proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any The vehicle may not pass
evaporate into the atmosphere. inspection if:
A few driving trips with the cap mechanical or electrical problems
properly installed should turn the that might have developed. . The malfunction indicator lamp is
light off. on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off. See your Brake System Warning

dealer for assistance in verifying
proper operation of the
Light
malfunction indicator lamp. With the ignition on, the brake
. The OBD II (On-Board system warning light comes on
Diagnostics) system determines when the parking brake is set. If the
that critical emission control vehicle is driven with the parking Metric English
systems have not been brake engaged, a chime sounds
when the vehicle speed is greater This light comes on briefly when the
completely diagnosed. The
than 8 km/h (5 mph). ignition key is turned to ON/RUN.
vehicle would be considered not
If it does not come on then, have it
ready for inspection. This can The vehicle brake system consists
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is
happen if the 12-volt battery has of two hydraulic circuits. If one
a problem.
recently been replaced or run circuit is not working, the remaining
down. The diagnostic system is circuit can still work to stop the
designed to evaluate critical vehicle. For normal braking { WARNING
emission control systems during performance, both circuits need to
normal driving. This can take be working. The brake system might not be
several days of routine driving. working properly if the brake
If the warning light comes on and a system warning light is on.
If this has been done and the
chime sounds, there could be a Driving with the brake system
vehicle still does not pass the
brake problem. Have the brake warning light on can lead to a
inspection for lack of OBD II
system inspected right away. crash. If the light is still on after
system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for This light can also come on due to the vehicle has been pulled off
inspection. low brake fluid. See Brake Fluid on the road and carefully stopped,
page 10‑26 for more information. have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the light comes on while driving, If the ABS light stays on, turn the For vehicles with the Tow/Haul
pull off the road and stop carefully. ignition off. If the light comes on Mode feature, this light comes on
The pedal might be harder to push while driving, stop as soon as it is when the Tow/Haul Mode has been
or might go closer to the floor. It can safely possible and turn the ignition activated.
take longer to stop. If the light is still off. Then start the engine again to For more information, see Tow/Haul
on, have the vehicle towed for reset the system. If the ABS light Mode on page 9‑34.
service. See Towing the Vehicle on stays on, or comes on again while
page 10‑84. driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning StabiliTrak® OFF Light
Antilock Brake System light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
(ABS) Warning Light If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑20. This light comes on briefly while
starting the engine.
Tow/Haul Mode Light If it does not, have the vehicle
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake
serviced by your dealer. If the
System (ABS), this light comes on
system is working normally, the
briefly when the engine is started.
indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle
Press and release the Traction
serviced by your dealer. If the
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
system is working normally the
button to turn off TCS, and a
indicator light then goes off.
message displays in the DIC.
Press and briefly hold the TCS/ If the light does not come on or Tire Pressure Light
StabiliTrak button to turn off the stays on, have the vehicle serviced
StabiliTrak system; the StabiliTrak by the dealer. If the system is
Off light comes on and a message working normally, the indicator light
appears in the Driver Information turns off.
Center (DIC). If the light comes on and stays on
If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off, while driving, and a message
the system does not assist in displays in the Driver Information
controlling the vehicle. Turn on the Center (DIC), have the vehicle For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
StabiliTrak/TCS system and the serviced by the dealer. See Ride Monitor System (TPMS), this light
indicator light turns off. Control System Messages on comes on briefly when the engine is
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑38 for more information. started. It provides information
page 9‑44, and Ride Control System If the light flashes while driving, this about tire pressures and the TPMS.
Messages on page 5‑38 for more means that StabiliTrak or TCS is When the Light Is On Steady
information. assisting in controlling the vehicle.
See StabiliTrak® System on This indicates that one or more of
Traction Control System page 9‑44 for more information. the tires are significantly
underinflated.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Tire Messages on
page 5‑39. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See
Tire Pressure on page 10‑53.
The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
When the Light Flashes First and pressure is still low, have the This light and a chime come on
Then Is On Steady vehicle serviced. Always follow when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
If the light flashes for about a minute the maintenance schedule for The Driver Information Center also
and then stays on, there may be a changing engine oil. displays a FUEL LEVEL LOW
problem with the TPMS. If the This light comes on briefly while message. See Fuel System
problem is not corrected, the light starting the engine. If it does not, Messages on page 5‑37 for more
will come on at every ignition cycle. have the vehicle serviced by your information. When fuel is added this
See Tire Pressure Monitor dealer. If the system is working light and message should go off.
Operation on page 10‑55. normally, the indicator light then If they do not, have the vehicle
goes off. serviced by your dealer.
Engine Oil Pressure Light If the light comes on and stays on, it Security Light
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem.
Low Fuel Warning Light

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the The security light should come on
engine. Driving with the engine briefly as the engine is started. If the
oil low can also damage the system is working normally, the
engine. The repairs would not be indicator light turns off. If it does not
covered by the vehicle warranty. come on, have the vehicle serviced
Check the oil level as soon as by your dealer.
possible. Add oil if required, but This light, under the fuel gauge,
if the oil level is within the comes on briefly while the engine is
operating range and the oil being started.
If the light stays on and the engine High-Beam On Light The light goes out when the fog
does not start, there could be a lamps are turned off. See Fog
problem with the theft-deterrent Lamps on page 6‑5 for more
system. information.
This light is also used to indicate the
status of the anti-theft alarm system Cruise Control Light
when the ignition is turned off. The
light will flash rapidly if the alarm
system is arming and one or more This light comes on when the
of the monitored entry points is not high-beam headlamps are in use.
closed. The light will stay on if the
alarm is arming and all entry points See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
are closed. Changer on page 6‑3.
For information regarding this light The cruise control light comes on
Front Fog Lamp Light whenever the cruise control is set.
and the vehicle's security system,
see Anti-theft Alarm System on The light goes out when the cruise
page 2‑16. control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑48 for more
information.
The fog lamp light comes on when

the fog lamps are in use.
Information Displays Operation and Displays DIC Buttons

The DIC has different displays
Driver Information which can be accessed by pressing
Center (DIC) the DIC buttons located on the
instrument panel, next to the
Your vehicle has a Driver steering wheel. If the vehicle does
Information Center (DIC). not have DIC buttons, the trip
The DIC displays information about odometer reset stem can be used to
your vehicle. It also displays access some of the menu items
warning messages if a system The DIC displays trip, fuel, and
problem is detected. vehicle system information, and
All messages will appear in the warning messages if a system
DIC display located below the problem is detected.
tachometer in the instrument panel The DIC also allows some features The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle
cluster. to be customized. See Vehicle information, customization, and set/
The DIC comes on when the ignition Personalization (With DIC Buttons) reset buttons. The button functions
is on. After a short delay, the DIC on page 5‑42 for more information. are detailed in the following pages.
will display the information that was 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to display
last displayed before the engine the odometer, trip odometer, fuel
was turned off. range, average economy, fuel
used, timer, instantaneous economy
and Active Fuel Management™
indicator, and transmission Trip/Fuel Menu Items The trip odometer can be reset to
temperature. The compass and (with DIC Buttons) zero by pressing the set/reset
outside air temperature will button while the trip odometer is
also be shown in the display. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scroll displayed. You can also reset the
The temperature will be shown through the following menu items: trip odometer while it is displayed by
in °C or °F depending on the units Odometer pressing and holding the trip
selected. odometer reset stem.
Press the trip/fuel button until
T (Vehicle Information): Press ODOMETER displays. This display The trip odometer has a feature
to display the oil life, units, tire shows the distance the vehicle has called the retro-active reset. This
pressure readings for vehicles been driven in either kilometers (km) can be used to set the trip odometer
with the Tire Pressure Monitor or miles (mi). Pressing the trip to the number of kilometers (miles)
System (TPMS), trailer brake gain odometer reset stem will also driven since the ignition was last
and output information for vehicles display the odometer. turned on. This can be used if the
with the Integrated Trailer Brake trip odometer is not reset at the
Control (ITBC) system, engine To switch between English and beginning of the trip.
hours, compass zone setting, and metric measurements, see “Units”
later in this section. To use the retro-active reset feature,
compass recalibration. press and hold the set/reset button
U (Customization): Press to Trip Odometer for at least four seconds. The trip
customize the feature settings Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP odometer will display the number of
on your vehicle. See Vehicle displays. This display shows the kilometers (km) or miles (mi) driven
Personalization (With DIC Buttons) current distance traveled in either since the ignition was last turned on
on page 5‑42 for more information. kilometers (km) or miles (mi) since and the vehicle was moving. Once
V (Set/Reset): Press to set or the last reset for the trip odometer. the vehicle begins moving, the trip
reset certain functions and to turn Pressing the trip odometer reset odometer will accumulate mileage.
off or acknowledge messages on stem will also display the trip For example, if the vehicle was
the DIC. odometer. driven 8 km (5 miles) before it is
started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is
activated, the display will show 8 km fuel economies. Generally, freeway Speedometer
(5 miles). As the vehicle begins driving produces better fuel The speedometer shows how fast
moving, the display will then economy than city driving. Fuel the vehicle is moving in either
increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles), range cannot be reset. kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. per hour (mph). The speedometer
Average Economy
Fuel Range cannot be reset.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL ECONOMY displays. This display Timer
RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate average Press the trip/fuel button until
shows the approximate number of liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) TIMER displays. This display can be
remaining kilometers (km) or or miles per gallon (mpg). This used as a timer.
miles (mi) the vehicle can be driven number is calculated based on the
without refueling. The display will number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded To start the timer, press the
show LOW if the fuel level is low. since the last time this menu set/reset button while TIMER is
item was reset. To reset AVG displayed. The display will show the
The fuel range estimate is based on amount of time that has passed
an average of the vehicle's fuel ECONOMY, press and hold
the set/reset button. since the timer was last reset, not
economy over recent driving history including time the ignition is off.
and the amount of fuel remaining in Fuel Used Time will continue to be counted as
the fuel tank. This estimate will long as the ignition is on, even if
change if driving conditions change. Press the trip/fuel button until
FUEL USED displays. This display another display is being shown on
For example, if driving in traffic and the DIC. The timer will record
making frequent stops, this display shows the number of liters (L) or
gallons (gal) of fuel used since the up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
may read one number, but if the 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the last reset of this menu item. To reset
the fuel used information, press and the display will return to zero.
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the hold the set/reset button while FUEL To stop the timer, press the set/reset
fuel tank. This is because different USED is displayed. button briefly while TIMER is
driving conditions produce different displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and An Active Fuel Management estimate of the oil's remaining useful
hold the set/reset button while indicator will display on the right life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
TIMER is displayed. side of the DIC, while INST ECON REMAINING on the display, that
displays on the left side. Active Fuel means 99% of the current oil life
Transmission Temperature Management allows the engine to remains. The engine oil life system
Press the trip/fuel button until operate on either four or eight will alert you to change the oil on a
TRANS TEMP displays. This cylinders, depending on your driving schedule consistent with your
display shows the temperature of demands. When Active Fuel driving conditions.
the automatic transmission fluid in Management is active, V4 will When the remaining oil life is low,
either degrees Celsius (°C) or display on the DIC. When Active the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
degrees Fahrenheit (°F). Fuel Management is inactive, V8 message will appear on the display.
will display. See Active Fuel See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
Instantaneous Economy and Management® on page 9‑28 for
Active Fuel Management™ under Engine Oil Messages on
more information. page 5‑36. You should change the
Indicator
Blank Display oil as soon as you can. See Engine
If your vehicle has this display,
Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
press the trip/fuel button until INST This display shows no information. engine oil life system monitoring the
ECON V8 displays. This display
Vehicle Information Menu oil life, additional maintenance is
shows the current fuel economy at a
Items (with DIC Buttons) recommended in the Maintenance
particular moment and will change
Schedule in this manual. See
frequently as driving conditions T (Vehicle Information): Press Maintenance Schedule on
change. This display shows the to scroll through the following menu page 11‑3 for more information.
instantaneous fuel economy in liters items:
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or Remember, you must reset the OIL
miles per gallon (mpg). Unlike Oil Life LIFE display yourself after each oil
average economy, this screen Press the vehicle information button change. It will not reset itself. Also,
cannot be reset. until OIL LIFE REMAINING be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
displays. This display shows an display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset information button again until the a trailer connected or disconnected.
accurately until the next oil change. DIC displays REAR TIRES kPa To adjust this setting, see
To reset the engine oil life system, (PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
see Engine Oil Life System on If a low tire pressure condition is System” under Towing Equipment
page 10‑10. detected by the system while on page 9‑71 for more information.
Units driving, a message advising you to OUTPUT shows the power output to
add pressure in a specific tire will the trailer anytime a trailer with
Press the vehicle information button appear in the display. See Tire electric brakes is connected. Output
until UNITS displays. This display Pressure on page 10‑53 and Tire is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
allows you to select between metric Messages on page 5‑39 for more may appear in the OUTPUT display.
or English units of measurement. information. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
Once in this display, press the set/ Control System” under Towing
reset button to select between If the tire pressure display shows
dashes instead of a value, there Equipment on page 9‑71 for more
METRIC or ENGLISH units. All information.
of the vehicle information will may be a problem with your vehicle.
then be displayed in the unit of If this consistently occurs, see your Engine Hours
measurement selected. dealer for service.
Press the vehicle information button
Tire Pressure Trailer Gain and Output until ENGINE HOURS displays. This
On vehicles with the Integrated display shows the total number of
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure hours the engine has run.
Monitor System (TPMS), the Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
pressure for each tire can be viewed the trailer brake display appears Compass Zone Setting
in the DIC. The tire pressure will in the DIC. Press the vehicle
information button until TRAILER This display allows for setting the
be shown in either kilopascals (kPa) compass zone. See Compass on
or pounds per square inch (psi). GAIN and OUTPUT display.
page 5‑5.
Press the vehicle information TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer
button until the DIC displays gain setting. This setting can be
FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ## adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either
RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
Compass Recalibration in either kilometers (km) or again, and then the retro-active
This display allows for calibrating miles (mi) since the last reset for reset feature is activated, the
the compass. See Compass on the trip odometer. display will show 8 km (5 miles). As
page 5‑5. The trip odometer can be reset to the vehicle begins moving, the
zero by pressing and holding the trip display will then increase to 8.2 km
Blank Display odometer reset stem while the trip (5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.
This display shows no information. odometer is displayed. Language
Trip Odometer Reset Stem The trip odometer has a feature This display allows you to select
Menu Items (with DIC Buttons) called the retro-active reset. This the language in which the DIC
can be used to set the trip odometer messages will appear. To select a
Use the trip odometer reset to the number of kilometers (miles) language:
stem to view the odometer and trip driven since the ignition was last
odometer. The Language selection turned on. This can be used if the 1. Press the trip odometer reset
and Engine Hours display can also trip odometer is not reset at the stem until ODOMETER displays.
be accessed with the trip odometer beginning of the trip. 2. While in the ODOMETER
reset stem. display, press and hold the
To use the retro-active reset feature,
Odometer press and hold the trip odometer trip odometer reset stem for
reset stem for at least four seconds. three seconds until the currently
Press the trip odometer reset stem set language displays.
until ODOMETER displays. This The trip odometer will display the
display shows the distance the number of kilometers (km) or 3. Continue to press and hold the
vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) driven since the ignition trip odometer reset stem to scroll
kilometers (km) or miles (mi). was last turned on and the vehicle through all of the available
was moving. Once the vehicle languages.
Trip Odometer begins moving, the trip odometer The available selections are
Press the trip odometer reset stem will accumulate mileage. For ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS
until TRIP displays. This display example, if the vehicle was driven (French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
shows the current distance traveled 8 km (5 miles) before it is started and NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is 2. While in the ODOMETER The trip odometer can be reset to
displayed, release the trip display, press and hold the zero by pressing and holding the trip
odometer reset stem to set your trip odometer reset stem for odometer reset stem while the trip
choice. three seconds until the currently odometer is displayed.
set language displays. The trip odometer has a feature
Engine Hours
3. Continue to press and hold the called the retro-active reset. This
To display the ENGINE HOURS, trip odometer reset stem to scroll can be used to set the trip odometer
place the ignition in LOCK/OFF or through all of the available to the number of kilometers (miles)
ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and languages. driven since the ignition was last
hold the trip odometer reset stem for turned on. This can be used if the
four seconds while viewing the The available languages are
ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS trip odometer is not reset at the
ODOMETER. This display shows beginning of the trip.
the total number of hours the engine (French), ESPANOL (Spanish),
has run. and NO CHANGE. To use the retro-active reset feature,
4. Once the desired language is press and hold the trip odometer
Trip Odometer Reset Stem reset stem for at least four seconds.
Menu Items (without DIC displayed, release the trip
odometer reset stem to set your The trip odometer will display the
Buttons) choice. number of kilometers (km) or
miles (mi) driven since the ignition
Language Trip Odometer was last turned on and the vehicle
This display allows you to select the Press the trip odometer reset stem was moving. Once the vehicle
language in which the DIC until TRIP displays. This display begins moving, the trip odometer
messages will appear. To select a shows the current distance will accumulate mileage. For
language: traveled in either kilometers (km) example, if the vehicle was driven
1. Press the trip odometer reset or miles (mi) since the last reset for 8 km (5 miles) before it is started
stem until ODOMETER displays. the trip odometer. again, and then the retro-active
reset feature is activated, the
display will show 8 km (5 miles).
As the vehicle begins moving, the OUTPUT shows the power output to Oil Life
display will then increase to 8.2 km the trailer anytime a trailer with To access this display, the vehicle
(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc. electric brakes is connected. Output must be in P (Park). Press the trip
is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
Transmission Temperature may appear in the OUTPUT display. REMAINING displays. This display
Press the trip odometer reset stem See “Integrated Trailer Brake shows an estimate of the oil's
until TRANS TEMP displays. This Control System” under Towing remaining useful life. If you see
display shows the temperature of Equipment on page 9‑71 for more 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
the automatic transmission fluid in information. display, that means 99% of the
either degrees Celsius (°C) or current oil life remains. The engine
degrees Fahrenheit (°F). Speedometer
oil life system will alert you to
The speedometer shows how fast change the oil on a schedule
Trailer Gain and Output the vehicle is moving in either consistent with your driving
On vehicles with the Integrated kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles conditions.
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, per hour (mph). The speedometer
the trailer brake display appears in cannot be reset. When the remaining oil life is low,
the DIC. Press the trip odometer the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
reset stem until TRAILER GAIN and Compass Zone Setting message will appear on the display.
OUTPUT display. This display allows for setting the See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”
compass zone. See Compass on under Engine Oil Messages on
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer page 5‑36. You should change the
gain setting. This setting can be page 5‑5 for more information.
oil as soon as you can. See Engine
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either Compass Recalibration Oil on page 10‑8. In addition to the
a trailer connected or disconnected. engine oil life system monitoring the
To adjust this setting, see This display allows for calibrating
the compass. See Compass on oil life, additional maintenance is
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control
page 5‑5 for more information. recommended in the Maintenance
System” under Towing Equipment Schedule in this manual. See
on page 9‑71 for more information. Maintenance Schedule on
Remember, you must reset the OIL Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and
LIFE display yourself after each oil
change. It will not reset itself. Also, Messages displayed on the DIC Charging Messages
be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE indicate the status of the vehicle or BATTERY LOW START
display accidentally at any time some action may be needed to VEHICLE
other than when the oil has just correct a condition. Multiple
been changed. It cannot be reset messages may appear one after When the vehicle’s battery is
accurately until the next oil change. another. severely discharged, this message
To reset the engine oil life system, will display and four chimes will
The messages that do not require
see Engine Oil Life System on sound. Start the vehicle
immediate action can be
page 10‑10. immediately. If the vehicle is not
acknowledged and cleared by
started and the battery continues to
Relearn Tire Positions pressing V (Set/Reset) or the trip discharge, the climate controls,
Your vehicle may have this display. odometer reset stem. heated seats, and audio systems
To access this display, the vehicle The messages that require will shut off and the vehicle may
must be in P (Park). If your vehicle immediate action cannot be cleared require a jump start. These systems
has the Tire Pressure Monitor until that action is performed. will function again after the vehicle
System (TPMS), after rotating the is started.
All messages should be taken
tires or after replacing a tire or
seriously and clearing the message SERVICE BATTERY
sensor, the system must re-learn the
tire positions. To re-learn the tire
does not correct the problem. CHARGING SYSTEM
positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor The following are the possible On some vehicles, this message
System on page 10‑54. See Tire messages and some information displays if there is a problem with
Inspection on page 10‑58, Tire about them. the battery charging system. Under
Rotation on page 10‑59 and Tire certain conditions, the charging
Messages on page 5‑39 for more system light may also turn on in the
information. instrument panel cluster. See
Charging System Light on
page 5‑17. Driving with this problem
could drain the battery. Turn off all vehicle. Restart the vehicle and See “Integrated Trailer Brake
unnecessary accessories. Have the check for the message on the DIC Control System” under Towing
electrical system checked as soon display. If the message is still Equipment on page 9‑71 for more
as possible. See your dealer. displayed or appears again when information.
you begin driving, the brake system
Brake System Messages needs service. See your dealer. Door Ajar Messages
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE DRIVER DOOR OPEN
SYSTEM
This message displays along with This message displays and a chime
the brake system warning light if On vehicles with the Integrated sounds if the driver door is not fully
there is a problem with the brake Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, closed and the vehicle is shifted out
system. See Brake System Warning this message displays and a chime of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
Light on page 5‑20. If this message sounds when there is a problem vehicle, check the door for
appears, stop as soon as possible with the ITBC system. obstructions, and close the door
and turn off the vehicle. Restart the When this message displays, power again. Check to see if the message
vehicle and check for the message is no longer available to the trailer still appears on the DIC.
on the DIC display. If the message brakes.
is still displayed or appears again HOOD OPEN
when you begin driving, the brake As soon as it is safe to do so, This message displays and a chime
system needs service as soon as carefully pull your vehicle over to sounds if the hood is not fully
possible. See your dealer. the side of the road and turn the closed. Stop and turn off the
ignition off. Check the wiring vehicle, check the hood for
SERVICE BRAKES SOON connection to the trailer and turn the obstructions, and close the hood
This message displays if there is a ignition back on. If this message still again. Check to see if the message
problem with the brake system. displays, either your vehicle or the still appears on the DIC.
If this message appears, stop as trailer needs service. See your
soon as possible and turn off the dealer.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN the door for obstructions, and close normal, the air conditioning
the door again. Check to see if the compressor turns back on. You can
This message displays and a chime
message still appears on the DIC. continue to drive your vehicle.
sounds if the driver side rear door is
not fully closed and the vehicle is If this message continues to appear,
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn Engine Cooling System have the system repaired by your
off the vehicle, check the door for Messages dealer as soon as possible to avoid
obstructions, and close the door damage to the engine.
Notice: If you drive the vehicle
again. Check to see if the message while the engine is overheating,
still appears on the DIC.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
severe engine damage may ENGINE
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN occur. If an overheat warning
appears on the instrument panel This message displays when the
This message displays and a chime cluster and/or DIC, stop the engine coolant temperature is too
sounds if the front passenger door vehicle as soon as possible. See hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
is not fully closed and the vehicle is Engine Overheating on idle until it cools down. See Engine
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn page 10‑20 for more information. Coolant Temperature Gauge on
off the vehicle, check the door for page 5‑13.
obstructions, and close the door ENGINE HOT A/C (Air See Overheated Engine Protection
again. Check to see if the message Conditioning) TURNED OFF Operating Mode on page 10‑22 for
still appears on the DIC. information on driving to a safe
This message displays when the
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN engine coolant becomes hotter than place in an emergency.
the normal operating temperature.
This message displays and a chime See Engine Coolant Temperature
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
sounds if the passenger side rear Gauge on page 5‑13. To avoid ENGINE
door is not fully closed and the added strain on a hot engine, This message displays and a chime
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). the air conditioning compressor sounds if the engine cooling system
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check automatically turns off. When the reaches unsafe temperatures for
coolant temperature returns to operation. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and allow the vehicle to idle until it Engine Power Messages
to avoid severe damage. This cools down. See Engine Coolant
message clears when the engine Temperature Gauge on page 5‑13. ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
has cooled to a safe operating This message displays and a chime
temperature. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP
ENGINE sounds when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the
Engine Oil Messages Notice: If you drive the vehicle engine further enters the engine
while the engine oil pressure is coolant protection mode. See
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON low, severe engine damage may Engine Overheating on page 10‑20
This message displays when the occur. If a low oil pressure for further information.
engine oil needs to be changed. warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the This message also displays when
When you change the engine oil, be
vehicle as soon as possible. Do the engine power is reduced.
sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE
not drive the vehicle until the Reduced engine power can affect
OIL SOON message. See Engine
cause of the low oil pressure is the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
Oil Life System on page 10‑10 for
corrected. See Engine Oil on If this message is on, but there is no
information on how to reset the
page 10‑8 for more information. reduction in performance, proceed
message. See Engine Oil on
to your destination. The
page 10‑8 and Maintenance This message displays if low oil performance may be reduced the
Schedule on page 11‑3 for more pressure levels occur. Stop the next time the vehicle is driven. The
information. vehicle as soon as safely possible vehicle may be driven at a reduced
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE and do not operate it until the cause speed while this message is on, but
ENGINE of the low oil pressure has been acceleration and speed may be
corrected. Check the oil as soon as reduced. Anytime this message
This message displays when the possible and have the vehicle stays on, the vehicle should be
engine oil becomes hotter than the serviced by your dealer. See Engine taken to your dealer for service as
normal operating temperature. Stop Oil on page 10‑8. soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Object Detection System
FUEL LEVEL LOW REPLACE BATTERY IN Messages
This message displays and a chime REMOTE KEY PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
sounds if the fuel level is low. Refuel This message displays if a Remote OWNERS MANUAL
as soon as possible. See Fuel Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter This message displays if there is
Gauge on page 5‑11 and Fuel on battery is low. The battery needs to something interfering with the park
page 9‑56 for more information. be replaced in the transmitter. See assist system. See Ultrasonic
“Battery Replacement” under Parking Assist on page 9‑50 for
TIGHTEN GAS CAP Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) more information.
This message may display along System Operation on page 2‑3.
with the check engine light on the PARK ASSIST OFF
instrument panel cluster if the fuel Lamp Messages After the vehicle has been started,
cap is not tightened properly. See this message displays to remind the
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on TURN SIGNAL ON
driver that the URPA system has
page 5‑18. Reinstall the fuel cap This message displays and a chime been turned off. Press the set/reset
fully. See Filling the Tank on sounds if a turn signal is left on for button or the trip odometer reset
page 9‑60. The diagnostic system 1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turn stem to acknowledge this message
can determine if the fuel cap has signal/multifunction lever to the off and clear it from the DIC display. To
been left off or improperly installed. position. turn the URPA system back on, see
A loose or missing fuel cap allows Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
fuel to evaporate into the page 9‑50.
atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should SERVICE PARK ASSIST
turn this light and message off.
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system. Do
not use this system to help you
park. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist suspension system is not operating If this message continues to be
on page 9‑50 for more information. properly. Have your vehicle serviced displayed for multiple ignition cycles
See your dealer for service. by your dealer. and on different road surfaces, see
your dealer for service.
Ride Control System SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL TRACTION XX
Messages STABILITRAK XX
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this
SERVICE STABILITRAK message displays when there is a This message displays when the
®
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak and problem with the Traction Control traction control and/or StabiliTrak
this message displays, it means System (TCS). When this message systems have been turned on or off.
there may be a problem with the displays, the system will not limit Adjust your driving accordingly.
StabiliTrak system. If you see this wheel spin. Adjust your driving To limit wheel spin and realize
message, try to reset the system. accordingly. See your dealer for the full benefits of the stability
Stop; turn off the engine for at least service. See StabiliTrak® System on enhancement system, you should
15 seconds; then start the engine page 9‑44 for more information. normally leave StabiliTrak on.
again. If this message still comes However, you should turn
STABILITRAK INITIALIZING StabiliTrak off if the vehicle gets
on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer for service. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, this stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
The vehicle is safe to drive, message may come on if the and you want to rock the vehicle
however, you do not have the StabiliTrak system has not fully to attempt to free it, or if you
benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce initialized because of road are driving in extreme off-road
your speed and drive accordingly. conditions or the incorrect tire size. conditions and require more wheel
When the StabiliTrak system is fully spin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on
SERVICE SUSPENSION initialized, the message will turn off. page 9‑14. To turn the StabiliTrak
SYSTEM See StabiliTrak® System on system on or off, see StabiliTrak®
page 9‑44 for more information. System on page 9‑44.
If your vehicle has the Autoride®
suspension system, this message
displays when the Autoride
STABILITRAK OFF may also The message turns off as soon as off the engine. See Immobilizer
display when the stability control the conditions that caused the Operation on page 2‑18 for more
has been automatically disabled. message to be displayed are no information.
There are several conditions that longer present.
can cause this message to appear. Tire Messages
. One condition is overheating, Airbag System Messages
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
which could occur if StabiliTrak SERVICE AIR BAG
activates continuously for an
SYSTEM
extended period of time. This message displays if there is a On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
problem with the airbag system. Monitor System (TPMS), this
. The message also displays if the
Have your dealer inspect the message displays if a part on the
brake system warning light is on.
system for problems. See Airbag TPMS is not working properly. The
See Brake System Warning
Readiness Light on page 5‑15 and tire pressure light also flashes and
Light on page 5‑20.
Airbag System on page 3‑20 for then remains on during the same
. The message could display if the more information. ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure
stability system takes longer Light on page 5‑22. Several
than usual to complete its Anti-theft Alarm System conditions may cause this message
diagnostic checks due to driving to appear. See Tire Pressure
conditions.
Messages
Monitor Operation on page 10‑55 for
. The message displays if an SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT more information. If the warning
engine or vehicle related SYSTEM comes on and stays on, there may
problem has been detected and be a problem with the TPMS. See
This message displays when there your dealer.
the vehicle needs service. See is a problem with the theft-deterrent
your dealer. system. The vehicle may or may not TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
restart so you may want to take the
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
vehicle to your dealer before turning
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the TPMS
is re-learning the tire positions on button or the trip odometer reset appears again when you begin
your vehicle. The tire positions must stem. If a tire pressure message driving, the four-wheel-drive system
be re-learned after rotating the tires appears on the DIC, stop as soon needs service. See your dealer.
or after replacing a tire or sensor. as you can. Have the tire pressures
See Tire Inspection on page 10‑58, checked and set to those shown on TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE
Tire Rotation on page 10‑59, Tire the Tire Loading Information label. ENGINE
Pressure Monitor System on See Tires on page 10‑46, Vehicle Notice: Do not drive the vehicle
page 10‑54, and Tire Pressure on Load Limits on page 9‑16, and Tire while the transmission fluid is
page 10‑53 for more information. Pressure on page 10‑53. The DIC overheating and the transmission
also shows the tire pressure values. temperature warning is displayed
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE See “DIC Operation and Displays on the instrument panel cluster
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure (With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this and/or DIC, or the transmission
Monitor System (TPMS), this section. can be damaged. This could lead
message displays when the to costly repairs that would not
pressure in one or more of the Transmission Messages be covered by the warranty.
vehicle's tires needs to be checked.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE This message displays along with a
This message also displays LEFT
sound if the transmission fluid in the
FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right This message displays if a problem vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
front), LEFT RR (left rear), occurs with the four-wheel-drive transmission fluid temperature high
or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate system. If this message appears, can cause damage to the vehicle.
the location of the low tire. The low stop as soon as possible and turn Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
tire pressure warning light will also off the vehicle. Make sure the key is allow the transmission to cool. This
come on. See Tire Pressure Light in the LOCK/OFF position for at message clears and the chime
on page 5‑22. You can receive more least one minute and then restart stops when the fluid temperature
than one tire pressure message at a the vehicle and check for the reaches a safe level.
time. To read the other messages message on the DIC display. If the
that may have been sent at the message is still displayed or
same time, press the set/reset
Vehicle Reminder As soon as it is safe to do so, This message clears itself after
carefully pull the vehicle over to the several seconds. This message also
Messages side of the road and turn the ignition clears if you acknowledge it. After
CHECK TRAILER WIRING off. Check the wiring connection to this message clears, the TRAILER
the trailer and turn the ignition back GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in
On vehicles with the Integrated on. This message clears if the trailer the DIC.
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, is reconnected. This message also
this message may display and a See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT”
clears if you acknowledge it. If this under Driver Information Center
chime may sound when one of the message still displays, either the
following conditions exists: (DIC) on page 5‑25 and “Integrated
vehicle or the trailer needs service. Trailer Brake Control System” under
. A trailer with electric brakes See your dealer. Towing Equipment on page 9‑71 for
becomes disconnected from the See “Integrated Trailer Brake more information.
vehicle. Control System” under Towing
‐ If the disconnect occurs while Equipment on page 9‑71 for more Washer Fluid Messages
the vehicle is stopped, this information.
message clears itself after a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE FLUID
short time.
WITH CARE
‐ If the disconnect occurs while This message displays when the
the vehicle is moving, this This message displays when ice windshield washer fluid is low. Fill
message stays on until the conditions are possible. the windshield washer fluid reservoir
ignition is turned off. TRAILER CONNECTED as soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
. There is a short in the wiring to On vehicles with the Integrated page 10‑6 for the location of the
the electric trailer brakes. Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, windshield washer fluid reservoir.
When this message displays, power this message displays briefly when Also, see Washer Fluid on
is no longer available to the trailer a trailer with electric brakes is first page 10‑24 for more information.
brakes. connected to the vehicle.
Vehicle To change customization Press the customization button until

preferences, use the following the PRESS V TO DISPLAY IN
Personalization procedure. ENGLISH screen appears on the
Entering the Feature DIC display. Press the set/reset
Vehicle Personalization Settings Menu button once to display all DIC
(With DIC Buttons) messages in English.
1. Turn the ignition on and place
Your vehicle may have the vehicle in P (Park). DISPLAY LANGUAGE
customization capabilities that allow This feature allows you to select the
you to program certain features to To avoid excessive drain on the
battery, it is recommended that language in which the DIC
one preferred setting. Customization messages will appear.
features can only be programmed to the headlamps are turned off.
one setting on the vehicle and 2. Press the customization button Press the customization button until
cannot be programmed to a to scroll through the available the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen
preferred setting for two different customizable options. appears on the DIC display. Press
drivers. the set/reset button once to access
Feature Settings Menu Items the settings for this feature. Then
All of the customization options may press the customization button to
not be available on your vehicle. The following are customization
features that allow you to program scroll through the following settings:
Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC. settings to the vehicle: ENGLISH (default): All messages
will appear in English.
The default settings for the DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
customization features were set FRANCAIS: All messages will
This feature will only display if a appear in French.
when your vehicle left the factory, language other than English has
but may have been changed from been set. This feature allows you to ESPANOL: All messages will
their default state since then. change the language in which the appear in Spanish.
The customization preferences are DIC messages appear to English.
automatically recalled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press the It also allows you to select which
made to this feature. The current customization button to scroll doors and when the doors will
setting will remain. through the following settings: automatically unlock. See Automatic
To select a setting, press the set/ SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more
reset button while the desired The doors, including the tailgate, will information.
setting is displayed on the DIC. automatically lock when the vehicle Press the customization button until
You can also change the language is shifted out of P (Park). AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on
by pressing the trip odometer reset AT VEHICLE SPEED: The the DIC display. Press the set/reset
stem. See “Language” under DIC doors, including the tailgate, will button once to access the settings
Operation and Displays (Without automatically lock when the vehicle for this feature. Then press the
DIC Buttons) earlier in this section speed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for customization button to scroll
for more information. 3 seconds. through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be OFF: None of the doors will

AUTO DOOR LOCK automatically unlock.
made to this feature. The current
This feature allows you to select setting will remain. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the
when the vehicle's doors will driver door will unlock when the key
automatically lock. See Automatic To select a setting, press the set/
reset button while the desired is taken out of the ignition.
Door Locks on page 2‑8 for more
information. setting is displayed on the DIC. DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver
door will unlock when the vehicle is
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK shifted into P (Park).
AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on the This feature allows you to select
DIC display. Press the set/reset ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors,
whether or not to turn off the including the tailgate, will unlock
button once to access the settings automatic door unlocking feature. when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the for this feature. Then press the REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
doors, including the tailgate, will customization button to scroll This feature allows you to select the
unlock when the vehicle is shifted through the following settings: type of feedback you will receive
into P (Park). OFF: There will be no feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
NO CHANGE: No change will be when you press the lock button on Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
made to this feature. The current the RKE transmitter. transmitter. You will not receive
setting will remain. LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps feedback when unlocking the
To select a setting, press the set/ will flash when you press the lock vehicle with the RKE transmitter if
reset button while the desired button on the RKE transmitter. the doors are open. See Remote
setting is displayed on the DIC. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound Operation on page 2‑3 for more
REMOTE DOOR LOCK on the second press of the lock information.
button on the RKE transmitter.
This feature allows you to select the Press the customization button until
type of feedback you will receive HORN & LIGHTS (default): The REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears
when locking the vehicle with the exterior lamps will flash when you on the DIC display. Press the set/
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) press the lock button on the RKE reset button once to access the
transmitter. You will not receive transmitter, and the horn will sound settings for this feature. Then press
feedback when locking the vehicle when the lock button is pressed the customization button to scroll
with the RKE transmitter if the doors again within five seconds of the through the following settings:
are open. See Remote Keyless previous command.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps
Entry (RKE) System Operation on NO CHANGE: No change will be will not flash when you press the
page 2‑3 for more information. made to this feature. The current unlock button on the RKE
Press the customization button until setting will remain. transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on To select a setting, press the set/ LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior
the DIC display. Press the set/reset reset button while the desired lamps will flash when you press the
button once to access the settings setting is displayed on the DIC. unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until Press the customization button
made to this feature. The current DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on until EXIT LIGHTING appears on
setting will remain. the DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset
To select a setting, press the set/ button once to access the settings button once to access the settings
reset button while the desired for this feature. Then press the for this feature. Then press the
setting is displayed on the DIC. customization button to scroll customization button to scroll
through the following settings: through the following settings:
DELAY DOOR LOCK OFF: There will be no delayed OFF: The exterior lamps will not
This feature allows you to select locking of the vehicle's doors. turn on.
whether or not the locking of the ON (default): The doors will not 30 SECONDS (default): The
vehicle's doors and tailgate will be lock until five seconds after the last exterior lamps will stay on for
delayed. When locking the doors door or the tailgate is closed. 30 seconds.
and tailgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the NO CHANGE: No change will be 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will
tailgate is open, this feature will made to this feature. The current stay on for one minute.
delay locking the doors and tailgate setting will remain. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will
until five seconds after the last door To select a setting, press the set/ stay on for two minutes.
is closed. You will hear three chimes reset button while the desired
to signal that the delayed locking NO CHANGE: No change will be
setting is displayed on the DIC. made to this feature. The current
feature is in use. The key must be
out of the ignition for this feature to EXIT LIGHTING setting will remain.
work. You can temporarily override This feature allows you to select To select a setting, press the set/
delayed locking by pressing the the amount of time you want the reset button while the desired
power door lock switch twice. See exterior lamps to remain on when setting is displayed on the DIC.
Delayed Locking on page 2‑8 for it is dark enough outside. This
more information. happens after the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
APPROACH LIGHTING Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) NO CHANGE: No change will be

This feature allows you to select System Operation on page 2‑3 for made to this feature. The current
whether or not to have the exterior more information. setting will remain.
lights turn on briefly during low light NO CHANGE: No change will be There is no default for chime
periods after unlocking the vehicle made to this feature. The current volume. The volume will stay at the
using the Remote Keyless setting will remain. last known setting.
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To select a setting, press the set/ To select a setting, press the set/
Press the customization button until reset button while the desired reset button while the desired
APPROACH LIGHTING appears on setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC.
the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings CHIME VOLUME PARK TILT MIRRORS
for this feature. Then press the This feature allows you to select the If your vehicle has this feature, it
customization button to scroll volume level of the chime. allows you to select whether or not
through the following settings: Press the customization button until the outside mirror(s) will
OFF: The exterior lights will not CHIME VOLUME appears on the automatically tilt down when the
turn on when you unlock the vehicle DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
with the RKE transmitter. button once to access the settings See “Outside Power Foldaway
for this feature. Then press the Mirrors” in Folding Mirrors on
ON (default): If it is dark enough page 2‑21 for more information.
outside, the exterior lights will turn customization button to scroll
on briefly when you unlock the through the following settings: Press the customization button until
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. NORMAL: The chime volume will PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on
be set to a normal level. the DIC display. Press the set/reset
The lights will remain on for button once to access the settings
20 seconds or until the lock button LOUD: The chime volume will be
on the RKE transmitter is pressed, set to a loud level.
or the vehicle is no longer off. See
for this feature. Then press the EASY EXIT RECALL The automatic easy exit seat
customization button to scroll If your vehicle has this feature, it movement will only occur one time
through the following settings: allows you to select your preference after the key is removed from the
OFF (default): Neither outside for the automatic easy exit seat ignition. If the automatic movement
mirror will be tilted down when the feature. See Memory Seats on has already occurred, and you put
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). page 3‑7 for more information. the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat will stay in
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver Press the customization button until the original exit position, unless a
outside mirror will be tilted down EASY EXIT RECALL appears on memory recall took place prior to
when the vehicle is shifted into the DIC display. Press the set/reset removing the key again.
R (Reverse). button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the NO CHANGE: No change will be
PASSENGER MIRROR: The made to this feature. The current
passenger outside mirror will be customization button to scroll
through the following settings: setting will remain.
tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into R (Reverse). DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No To select a setting, press the set/
automatic seat exit recall will occur. reset button while the desired
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver and setting is displayed on the DIC.
passenger outside mirrors will be The recall will only occur after
tilted down when the vehicle is pressing the easy exit seat button. EASY EXIT SETUP
shifted into R (Reverse). BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If If your vehicle has this feature, it
NO CHANGE: No change will be the features are enabled through the allows you to select which areas will
made to this feature. The current EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the recall with the automatic easy exit
setting will remain. driver seat will move back when the seat feature. It also allows you to
key is removed from the ignition or turn off the automatic easy exit
To select a setting, press the set/ after pressing the easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seats on
reset button while the desired button. page 3‑7 and EASY EXIT RECALL
setting is displayed on the DIC. earlier for more information.
Press the customization button until Press the customization button until REMOTE START
EASY EXIT SETUP appears on the MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears If your vehicle has this feature, it
DIC display. Press the set/reset on the DIC display. Press the set/ allows you to turn the remote start
button once to access the settings reset button once to access the off or on. The remote start feature
for this feature. Then press the settings for this feature. Then press allows you to start the engine from
menu up/down button to scroll the customization button to scroll outside of the vehicle using the
through the following settings: through the following settings: Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
OFF: No automatic seat exit will OFF (default): No remote memory transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
recall. seat recall will occur. Start on page 2‑5 for more
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver ON: The driver seat and, on some information.
seat will recall. vehicles, the outside mirrors will Press the customization button until
NO CHANGE: No change will be automatically move to the stored REMOTE START appears on the
made to this feature. The current driving position when the unlock DIC display. Press the set/reset
setting will remain. button on the Remote Keyless Entry button once to access the settings
(RKE) transmitter is pressed. On for this feature. Then press the
To select a setting, press the set/ some vehicles with the adjustable customization button to scroll
reset button while the desired throttle and brake pedal feature, the through the following settings:
setting is displayed on the DIC. pedals will also automatically move. OFF: The remote start feature will
MEMORY SEAT RECALL NO CHANGE: No change will be be disabled.
If your vehicle has this feature, it made to this feature. The current ON (default): The remote start
allows you to select your preference setting will remain. feature will be enabled.
for the remote memory seat recall To select a setting, press the set/ NO CHANGE: No change will be
feature. See Memory Seats on reset button while the desired made to this feature. The current
page 3‑7 for more information. setting is displayed on the DIC. setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the DO NOT RESTORE: The Exiting the Feature
set/reset button while the desired customization features will not be Settings Menu
setting is displayed on the DIC. set to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be
FACTORY SETTINGS To select a setting, press the set/ exited when any of the following
reset button while the desired occurs:
This feature allows you to set all of setting is displayed on the DIC.
the customization features back to . The vehicle is no longer in
their factory default settings. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS ON/RUN.
Press the customization button until This feature allows you to exit the . The trip/fuel or vehicle
FACTORY SETTINGS appears on feature settings menu. information DIC buttons are
the DIC display. Press the set/reset Press the customization button until pressed.
button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the PRESS V TO EXIT FEATURE . The end of the feature settings
SETTINGS appears in the DIC menu is reached and exited.
customization button to scroll
through the following settings: display. Press the set/reset button . A 40 second time period has
once to exit the menu. elapsed with no selection made.
RESTORE ALL (default): The
customization features will be set to If you do not exit, pressing the
their factory default settings. customization button again will
return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
Universal Remote devices such as garage door Park the vehicle outside of the
openers, security systems, and garage when programming a garage
System home automation devices. door. Be sure that people and
Do not use this system with any objects are clear of the garage door
See Radio Frequency Statement on
garage door opener that does not or gate that is being programmed.
page 13‑20 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal have the stop and reverse feature. Programming Universal Home
Communications Commission (FCC) This includes any garage door Remote — Rolling Code
rules and Industry Canada opener model manufactured before
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. April 1, 1982. For questions or help programming
the Universal Home Remote
Read the instructions completely System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
Universal Remote System before attempting to program the to www.learcar2u.com.
Programming transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have Most garage door openers sold
another person assist with after 1996 are Rolling Code units.
programming the transmitter. Programming a garage door opener
Be sure to keep the original remote involves time-sensitive actions, so
control transmitter for use in other read the entire procedure before
vehicles, as well as for future starting. Otherwise, the device will
programming. Only the original time out and the procedure will have
remote control transmitter is needed to be repeated.
Vehicles with the Universal Remote
System will have these buttons for Fixed Code programming. The
located in the headliner. programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or
This system provides a way to the lease ends. See “Erasing
replace up to three remote control Universal Home Remote Buttons” in
transmitters used to activate this section.
hanging antenna wire is To program another Rolling Code

attached to the motor-head unit device such as an additional garage
and may be a colored button. door opener, a security device,
Press this button. After pressing or home automation device, repeat
this button, complete the Steps 1 through 5, choosing a
following steps in less than different function button in Step 3
30 seconds. than what was used for the garage
To program up to three devices: door opener.
3. Immediately return to the
1. From inside the vehicle, press vehicle. Press and hold the If these instructions do not work, the
the two outside buttons at Universal Home Remote button garage door opener is probably a
the same time for one to that will be used to control the Fixed Code unit. Follow the
two seconds, and immediately garage door until the garage programming instructions that follow
release them. door moves. The indicator light, for a Fixed Code garage door
above the selected button, opener.
should slowly blink. This button
may need to be held for up to Programming Universal Home
20 seconds. Remote — Fixed Code
4. Immediately, within one second, For questions or help programming
release the button when the the Universal Home Remote
garage door moves. The System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go
indicator light will blink rapidly to www.learcar2u.com.
until programming is complete. Most garage door openers sold
2. In the garage, locate the 5. Press and release the same before 1996 are Fixed Code units.
garage door opener receiver button again. The garage door Programming a garage door opener
(motor-head unit). Find the should move, confirming that involves time-sensitive actions, so
“Learn” or “Smart” button. It can programming is successful and read the entire procedure before
usually be found where the complete.
starting. Otherwise, the device will Code unit. If you do not see a
time out and the procedure will have row of dip switches, return to the
to be repeated. previous section for
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code.
Your hand-held transmitter can
have between 8 to 12 dip Example of Eight Dip Switches
switches depending on the with Two Positions
brand of transmitter.
The garage door opener receiver
(motor head unit) could also
have a row of dip switches that
can be used when programming
the Universal Home Remote.
If the total number of switches Example of Eight Dip Switches
on the motor head and with Three Positions
To program up to three devices: hand-held transmitter are
1. To verify that the garage door different, or if the dip switch The panel of switches might not
opener is a Fixed Code unit, settings are different, use the dip appear exactly as they do in the
remove the battery cover on the switch settings on the motor examples above, but they
hand-held transmitter supplied head unit to program the should be similar.
by the manufacturer of the Universal Home Remote. The The switch positions on the
garage door opener motor. motor head dip switch settings hand-held transmitter could be
If there is a row of dip switches can also be used when the labeled as follows:
similar to the graphic above, the original hand-held transmitter is
not available.
. A switch in the up position
garage door opener is a Fixed
could be labeled as Up,
+, or On.

. A switch in the down to right, into the Universal C. Right Button
position could be labeled as Home Remote, when (Down, −, or Off)
Down, −, or Off. completing Step 4. 4. The indicator lights will blink
. A switch in the middle 3. From inside your vehicle, first slowly. Enter each switch setting
position could be labeled as firmly press all three buttons at from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Middle, 0, or Neutral. the same time for about Universal Home Remote. You
2. Write down the 8 to 12 switch three seconds. Release the will have two and one-half
settings from left to right as buttons to put the Universal minutes to complete Step 4. Now
follows: Home Remote into press one button on the
programming mode. Universal Home Remote for
. When a switch is in the up each switch setting as follows:
position, write “Left.”
. If you wrote “Left,” press
. When a switch is in the the left button (A) in the
down position, write “Right.” vehicle.
. If a switch is set between . If you wrote “Right,” press
the up and down position, the right button (C) in the
write “Middle.” vehicle.
The switch settings written . If you wrote “Middle,” press
down in Step 2 now the middle button (B) in the
become the button strokes vehicle.
to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in 5. After entering all of the switch
Step 4. Be sure to enter the positions, once again firmly
A. Left Button (Up, +, or On) press and release all three
switch settings written down
in Step 2, in order from left B. Middle Button buttons at the same time. The
(Middle, 0, or Neutral) indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that Universal Remote System To erase either Rolling Code or
will be used to control the Fixed Code settings on the
garage door until the garage
Operation Universal Home Remote device:
door moves. The indicator light Press and hold the appropriate 1. Press and hold the two outside
above the selected button button for at least half of a second. buttons at the same time for
should slowly blink. This button The indicator light will come on approximately 20 seconds, until
may need to be held for up to while the signal is being transmitted. the indicator lights, located
55 seconds. directly above the buttons, begin
Reprogramming Universal
7. Immediately release the button Home Remote Buttons to blink rapidly.
when the garage door moves. 2. Once the indicator lights begin to
The indicator light will blink Any of the three buttons can be
reprogrammed by repeating the blink, release both buttons. The
rapidly until programming is codes from all buttons will be
complete. instructions.
erased.
8. Press and release the same Erasing Universal Home For help or information on the
button again. The garage door Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote System,
should move, confirming that call the customer assistance phone
programming is successful and The programmed buttons should be
erased when the vehicle is sold or number under Customer Assistance
complete. Offices (U.S. and Canada) on
the lease ends.
To program another Fixed Code page 13‑4 or Customer Assistance
device such as an additional garage Offices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.
door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat
Steps 1-8, choosing a different
button in Step 6 than what was used
for the garage door opener.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Interior Lighting

Instrument Panel Illumination
Exterior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Exterior Lamp Controls
Exterior Lighting
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lamps Off Lighting Features
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
The exterior lamps control is located
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4
on the instrument panel to the left of
Turn and Lane-Change
the steering wheel.
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 It controls the following systems:
Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . 6-6 . Headlamps
. Taillamps
. Parking Lamps
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
6-2 Lighting
The exterior lamps control has four the delay can be changed using the turning off to prevent the battery
positions: DIC. See Driver Information Center from being drained. Turn the
P (Off): Turns off the automatic (DIC) on page 5‑25. headlamp control to off and then
headlamps and daytime running ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the back to the headlamp on position to
lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp parking lamps together with the make the headlamps stay on for an
control to the off position again to following: additional 10 minutes.
turn the automatic headlamps or . Instrument Panel Lights Push the turn signal/multifunction
DRL back on. lever toward the instrument panel to
. Taillamps change the headlamps from low
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
the off position will only work when . License Plate Lamps beam to high beam.
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps together with the
Exterior Lamps Off
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically
turns on the headlamps at normal following: Reminder
brightness, together with the . Parking Lamps If a door is open, a reminder chime
following: sounds when the headlamps or
. Instrument Panel Lights parking lamps are manually turned
. Parking Lamps
. Taillamps on and the key is out of the ignition.
. Instrument Panel Lights To turn off the chime, turn the
. License Plate Lamps
. Taillamps headlamp switch to off or AUTO and
When the headlamps are turned on then back on, or close and re-open
. License Plate Lamps while the vehicle is on, the the door. In the AUTO mode, the
When the vehicle is turned off and headlamps turn off automatically headlamps turn off once the ignition
the headlamps are in AUTO, the 10 minutes after the ignition is is in LOCK/OFF or remains on until
headlamps may automatically turned off. When the headlamps are the headlamp delay ends (if enabled
remain on for a set time. The time of turned on while the vehicle is off, in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting”
the headlamps will stay on for under Vehicle Personalization (With
10 minutes before automatically DIC Buttons) on page 5‑42.
Lighting 6-3
. The light sensor determines it is
Headlamp High/ To use it, pull the turn signal lever
daytime.
toward you, then release it.
Low-Beam Changer
If the headlamps are in the When the DRL system is on, only
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam automatic position or on low beam, the DRL lamps are on. The
Changer): To change the the high-beam headlamps turn on. taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
headlamps from low to high beam, They stay on as long as the lever is panel lights, and other lamps will not
push the lever toward the instrument held. The high-beam indicator on be on.
panel. To return to low-beam the instrument panel cluster comes
headlamps, pull the multifunction When it begins to get dark, the
on. Release the lever to return to automatic headlamp system
lever toward you. Then release it. normal operation. switches from DRL to the
headlamps.
Daytime Running To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the
Lamps (DRL) exterior lamps control to the OFF
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can position and then release. For
make it easier for others to see the vehicles first sold in Canada, the
front of your vehicle during the day. transmission must be in the P (Park)
When the high beams are on, this Fully functional daytime running position before the DRL lamps can
indicator light on the instrument lamps are required on all vehicles be turned off.
panel cluster will also be on. first sold in Canada.
Automatic Headlamp
The DRL system comes on when
Flash-to-Pass the following conditions are met: System
Use your high-beam headlamps to . The ignition is on. When it is dark enough outside and
signal to a driver in front that you the headlamp switch is in AUTO,
want to pass. It works even if the
. The exterior lamps control is the automatic headlamp system
headlamps are in the automatic in AUTO. turns on the headlamps along with
position. . The transmission is not in Park. other lamps such as the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, roof
6-4 Lighting
marker lamps, and the instrument The system may also turn on the instrument panel brightness control
panel lights. The radio lights will headlamps when driving through a is in the full bright position. See
also be dim. parking garage, a tunnel, or while Instrument Panel Illumination
To turn off the automatic headlamp driving in heavy overcast weather. Control on page 6‑6.
system, turn the exterior lamps This is normal.
switch to the off position and then There is a delay in the transition Hazard Warning Flashers
release. For vehicles first sold in between the daytime and nighttime
Canada, the transmission must be operation of the Daytime Running
in the P (Park) position, before the Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
automatic headlamp system can be headlamp systems so that driving
turned off. under bridges or bright overhead
street lights does not affect the
system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system is only affected
when the light sensor sees a
change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
If the vehicle is started in a dark
garage, the automatic headlamp
system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, | (Hazard Warning Flashers):
The vehicle has a light sensor it takes approximately one minute Press this button located on top of
located on the top of the instrument for the automatic headlamp system the steering column, to make the
panel. Do not cover this sensor or to change to DRL if it is light front and rear turn signal lamps
the system will come on whenever outside. During that delay, the flash on and off. This warns others
the ignition is on. instrument panel cluster may not be that you are having trouble. Press
as bright as usual. Make sure the again to turn the flashers off.
Lighting 6-5
When the hazard warning flashers signal lever for more than Fog Lamps
are on, the vehicle's turn signals will one second causes the turn signals
not work. to flash until the lever is released. If your vehicle has fog lamps you
can use them for better vision in
The lever returns to its starting foggy or misty conditions. Your
Turn and Lane-Change position when it is released. parking lamps and/or low-beam
Signals If after signaling a turn or a lane headlamps must be on for your fog
change the arrows flash rapidly or lamps to work.
do not come on, a signal bulb may
be burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb
is not burned out, check the fuse.
See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
on page 10‑42 and Engine
An arrow on the instrument panel Compartment Fuse Block on
cluster flashes in the direction of the page 10‑38.
turn or lane change.
Turn Signal On Chime
Move the turn signal lever all the
way up or down to signal a turn. If the turn signal is left on for more The fog lamp button is located on
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime the left side of your instrument
Raise or lower the lever until the panel.
sounds at each flash of the turn
arrow starts to flash to signal a
lane change. The turn signals
signal and the message TURN # (Fog Lamps): Press the button
SIGNAL ON also appears in the to turn the fog lamps on. An
automatically flash three times.
DIC. See Lamp Messages on indicator light will glow near the
It will flash six times if the tow-haul
page 5‑37. To turn the chime and button when the fog lamps are on.
mode is active. Holding the turn
message off, move the turn signal Press the button again to turn
lever to the off position. them off.
6-6 Lighting
Remember, fog lamps alone will not Exterior Cargo Lamps Interior Lighting
give off as much light as your
headlamps. Never use your fog The cargo lamp can be used if more
lamps in the dark without turning on light is needed in the cargo area of Instrument Panel
the headlamps. the vehicle or in the top-box storage Illumination Control
units. Some vehicles will only have
The fog lamps will go off whenever a cargo lamp in the driver side
your high-beam headlamps come top box.
on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again. The cargo lamps come on by
turning on the interior dome lamps.
The fog lamps will be cancelled
after the ignition is turned off. If you
still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need
to press the fog lamp button again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on D (Instrument Panel
along with the fog lamps. Brightness): This feature controls
the brightness of the instrument
panel lights and is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Push the knob to extend out and
then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the instrument panel lights. Turning
the knob to the farthest clockwise
position turns on the dome lamps.
Lighting 6-7
Dome Lamps Lighting Features

The dome lamps are located in the
overhead console. Entry/Exit Lighting
They come on when any door is The vehicle has an illuminated
opened and turn off after all the entry/exit feature.
doors are closed.
The dome lamps come on if the E
Turn the instrument panel DOME OFF button is in the
brightness knob located below the extended position, when a door is
dome lamp override button, k (Dome Off): Press the button opened or the key is removed from
clockwise to the farthest position to in and the dome lamps remain off the ignition.
manually turn on the dome lamps. when a door is opened. Press the
The dome lamps remain on until the button again to return it to the Battery Load
knob is turned counterclockwise. extended position so that the dome
lamps come on when a door is
Management
Dome Lamp Override
opened. The vehicle has Electric Power
The dome lamp override button is Management (EPM) that estimates
located next to the exterior lamps
control.
Reading Lamps the battery's temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
For vehicles with front reading for best performance and extended
lamps in the overhead console, life of the battery.
press the button located next to the
lamp to turn it on or off.
The vehicle may also have reading
lamps in other locations. The lamps
cannot be adjusted.
6-8 Lighting
When the battery's state of charge A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur in
is low, the voltage is raised slightly several of the following are on, such steps or levels, without being
to quickly bring the charge back up. as: headlamps, high beams, fog noticeable. In rare cases at the
When the state of charge is high, lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action,
the voltage is lowered slightly to climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a Driver Information
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) message might be
display on the Driver Information accessory power outlets. displayed, such as BATTERY LOW
Center (DIC), you may see the EPM works to prevent excessive START VEHICLE . If this message
voltage move up or down. This is discharge of the battery. It does this displays, it is recommended that the
normal. If there is a problem, an by balancing the generator's output driver reduce the electrical loads as
alert will be displayed. and the vehicle's electrical needs. much as possible and restart the
The battery can be discharged at It can increase engine idle speed to vehicle. See Battery Voltage and
idle if the electrical loads are very generate more power, whenever Charging Messages on page 5‑33.
high. This is true for all vehicles. needed. It can temporarily reduce
This is because the generator the power demands of some Battery Power Protection
(alternator) may not be spinning fast accessories. This feature shuts off the dome
enough at idle to produce all the lamps if they are left on for more
power that is needed for very high than 10 minutes when the ignition is
electrical loads. in LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent
the battery from running down.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Introduction
System CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Infotainment
Determine which radio the vehicle
Rear Seat Infotainment has and read the following pages to
Introduction Rear Seat Entertainment
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 become familiar with its features.
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43 { WARNING
Radio Phone Taking your eyes off the road for
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 extended periods could cause a
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 crash resulting in injury or death
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Trademarks and License to you or others. Do not give
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-13 Agreements extended attention to infotainment
Trademarks and License tasks while driving.
Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
This system provides access to

many audio and non‐audio listings.
7-2 Infotainment System
To minimize taking your eyes off the Notice: Contact your dealer Navigation/Radio System
road while driving, do the following before adding any equipment.
For vehicles with a navigation radio
while the vehicle is parked: Adding audio or communication system, see the separate Navigation
. Become familiar with the equipment could interfere with System Manual.
operation and controls of the the operation of the engine, radio,
audio system. or other systems, and could Theft-Deterrent Feature
. Set up the tone, speaker damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and TheftLock® is designed to
adjustments, and preset radio discourage theft of the vehicle's
stations. telephone equipment.
radio by learning a portion of the
For more information, see Defensive The vehicle has Retained Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Driving on page 9‑3. Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, The radio does not operate if it is
the audio system can be played stolen or moved to a different
even after the ignition is turned off. vehicle.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9‑26 for more
information.
Operation
Radio with CD (MP3) Shown, Radio with USB and CD (MP3) Similar
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD

radio may have a Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. See
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑33 for more
information on the vehicle's RSE
system.
The DVD player is the top slot on
the radio faceplate. The player is
capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD
Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3) Dolby Laboratories.
The vehicle has one of these radios Radios with CD and DVD
as its audio system.
Vehicles with a USB, CD, and DVD
radio have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features
are explained later in this section
under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade).”
Using the Radio Speed Compensated Volume Noise Compensation

(SCV): Radios with Speed Technology: Vehicles with the LTZ
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn
Compensated Volume (SCV) package and a Bose Audio System
the system on and off.
automatically adjusts the radio include the Bose AudioPilot® noise
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise volume to compensate for road and compensation technology. When
to increase or decrease the volume. wind noise as the vehicle's speed turned on, AudioPilot continuously
4 (Information) (If Available): changes while driving, so that the adjusts the audio system
Press to switch the display between volume level stays consistent. equalization, to compensate for
the radio station frequency and the To activate SCV: background noise, so that music
time. While the ignition is off, press always sounds the same at the set
1. Set the radio volume to the volume level.
this button to display the time. Press
desired level.
to display additional text information This feature is most effective at
related to the current FM-RDS or 2. Press the MENU button to lower radio volume settings where
XM station; or CD, MP3, or WMA display the radio setup menu. background noise can affect how
song. If information is available 3. Press the softkey under the well the music is heard. At higher
during XM, CD, MP3, or WMA AUTO VOLUM (automatic volume settings, where the music is
playback, the song title information volume) tab on the radio display. much louder than the background
displays on the top line of the noise, there might be little or no
display and artist information 4. Press the softkey under the adjustments by AudioPilot.
displays on the bottom line. When desired Speed Compensated
Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, To activate:
information is not available, “NO
INFO” displays. or High) to select the level of 1. Set the radio volume to the
radio volume compensation. desired level.
The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each 2. Press the MENU button to
higher setting allows for more display the radio setup menu.
radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
3. Press the softkey under the 3. Adjust the setting by doing one EQ (Equalization): Press this
AUTO VOLUM (automatic of the following: button to choose bass and treble
volume) tab on the radio display. equalization settings designed for
. Turn the f knob clockwise different types of music. Selecting
4. Press the softkey under the ON or counterclockwise.
tab. The display times out after MANUAL or changing bass or
approximately 10 seconds. . Press the ¨ SEEK, treble, returns the EQ to the manual
bass and treble settings.
For additional information on or © SEEK button.
AudioPilot, please visit Unique EQ settings can be saved
www.bose.com/audiopilot.
. Press the \ FWD, for each source.
or s REV button. If the radio has a Bose audio
Setting the Tone system, the EQ settings are either
(Bass/Midrange/Treble) If a station's frequency is weak or if
there is static, decrease the treble. MANUAL or TALK.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, Digital Signal Processing (DSP):
or Treble): To adjust the bass, To quickly adjust bass, midrange,
or treble to the middle position, Press the EQ button to change the
midrange, or treble: DSP settings (only available on
press the softkey positioned under
1. Press the f knob until the tone the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for Bose systems with the LTZ option
more than two seconds. A beep package). DSP settings provide a
control tabs display.
sounds and the level adjusts to the choice of different listening
2. Highlight the desired tone middle position. experiences.
control tab by doing one of the
To quickly adjust all tone and The following DSP settings are
following:
speaker controls to the middle available:
. Pressing the f knob. position, press the f knob for more . Normal — Select this setting to
. Press the softkey under the than two seconds until a beep adjust the audio for normal
desired tab. sounds. mode. This provides the best
sound quality for all seating
positions.

. Driver — Select this setting to 2. Highlight the desired speaker Radio Messages
adjust the audio for the driver to control tab by doing one of the
receive the best possible sound Calibration Error: The audio
following:
quality. system has been calibrated for the
. Rear — Select this setting to
. Pressing the f knob. vehicle from the factory.
If Calibration Error displays, it
adjust the audio for the rear seat . Press the softkey under the means that the radio has not been
passengers to receive the best desired tab. configured properly for the vehicle
possible sound quality. 3. Adjust the setting by doing one and it must be returned to your
. Surround (Centerpoint®) — of the following: dealer for service.
Select this setting to enable Locked or Loc: One of these
Bose Centerpoint. Centerpoint
. Turn the f knob clockwise
or counterclockwise. messages will display when the
signal processing produces a TheftLock® system has locked up
surround sound listening . Press the ¨ SEEK, the radio. Take the vehicle to your
experience from a CD or XM dealer for service.
stereo digital audio source. or © SEEK button.
Centerpoint delivers five If any error occurs repeatedly or if
. Press the \ FWD, an error cannot be corrected,
independent audio channels
from conventional two channel or s REV button. contact your dealer.
stereo recordings. (Not available To quickly adjust all speaker and
for AM or FM.) tone controls to the middle position,
Adjusting the Speakers press the f knob for more than
(Balance/Fade) 2 seconds.
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is
adjust the balance or fade: turned on, the radio disables FADE
and mutes the rear speakers.
1. Press the f knob until the
speaker control tabs display.
Radio available, the song title information order, press the ¨ SEEK button
displays on the top line of the again to stop scanning radio
display and artist information stations. The radio only seeks and
AM-FM Radio displays on the bottom line. When scans stations with a strong signal
Radio Data System (RDS) information is not available, “NO that are in the selected band.
INFO” displays.
For radios with the Radio Data s REV: Press to manually tune to
System (RDS) feature, it only works Finding a Station a radio station in descending order.
with FM stations that broadcast BAND: Press to switch between \ FWD: Press to manually tune to
RDS information. This system relies AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped. a radio station in ascending order.
upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works f (Tune): Turn to manually select FAV (Favorites): Press to select
when the information is available. radio stations. different favorite pages for stored
While the radio is tuned to an © SEEK: Press to seek the radio stations.
FM-RDS station, the station name previous radio station. Press and Storing Radio Stations
or call letters displays. In rare hold for a few seconds until a beep
cases, a radio station could sounds to scan for radio stations in Drivers are encouraged to store
broadcast incorrect information that radio station while the vehicle is
descending order, press the ©
causes the radio features to work parked, see Defensive Driving on
SEEK button again to stop scanning page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio
improperly. If this happens, contact radio stations. The radio only seeks
the radio station. stations using the presets, favorites
and scans stations with a strong button, and steering wheel controls,
4 (Information) (RDS Features): signal that are in the selected band. if the vehicle has this feature.
For vehicles with RDS features, ¨ SEEK: Press to seek the next
press 4 to display additional text Up to 36 stations can be
radio station. Press and hold for a programmed as favorites using the
information related to the current few seconds until a beep sounds to
FM-RDS station. If information is sixbutton. Press the FAV button to
scan for radio stations in ascending go through up to six pages of
favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the number of favorites information, contact XM at
stations available per page. Each pages by pressing the softkey www.xmradio.com or
page of favorites can contain any located below the displayed 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,
combination of AM, FM, or XM, page numbers. and www.xmradio.ca or
if equipped, stations. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Storing a Radio Station as a menu time out, to return to the 4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio
Favorite original main radio screen Service): For vehicles with XM,
To store a station as a favorite:
showing the radio station press 4 to display additional text
frequency tabs and to begin the information related to the current
1. Tune to a radio station. process of programming XM channel. If information is
2. Press the FAV button to display favorites. available, the song title information
the page where the station will displays on the top line of the
be stored. Satellite Radio display and artist information
displays on the bottom line. When
3. Press and hold one of the XM™ Satellite Radio Service information is not available, “NO
six softkeys until a beep sounds.
XM is a satellite radio service based INFO” displays.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to in the 48 contiguous United States
store additional radio stations. and 10 Canadian provinces. XM Finding a Channel
The number of favorites pages can Satellite Radio has a wide variety of BAND: Press to switch between
be setup using the MENU button. programming and commercial-free AM, FM, or XM™, if equipped.
music, coast to coast, and in
To setup the number of favorites
digital-quality sound. A service fee
f (Tune): Turn to manually select
pages: an XM channel.
is required to receive the XM
1. Press the MENU button. service. If the service needs to be © SEEK: Press to go to the
2. Press the softkey located below reactivated, the radio will display previous XM channel.
the FAV 1-6 tab. “No Subscription Please Renew ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
on channel XM1.” For more XM channel.
s REV: Press to go to the 2. Press either of the two softkeys 3. Turn the f knob to display the
previous XM category. below the desired category tab category to add or remove.
to immediately tune to the first
\ FWD: Press to go to the next XM station in that category. 4. Press the softkey located under
XM category. the Add or Remove tab.
To go to the previous or next XM
FAV (Favorites): Press to select station in the selected category, To restore all removed
different favorites pages for stored do one of the following: categories, press the softkey
radio stations. under the Restore All tab.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is
. Turn the f knob. 5. Repeat the steps to remove
used to find XM channels when the . Press the softkey below the more categories.
radio is in the XM mode. right or left arrows in the
category tab. Storing XM Channels
Finding a Category (CAT)
Drivers are encouraged to store
Station . Press © SEEK or ¨ SEEK. XM channels while the vehicle is
To find XM channels in a category: 3. To exit the category search parked; see Defensive Driving on
mode, press the FAV button or page 9‑3. Tune to stored radio
1. Press the CAT button to display
BAND button to display the stations using the presets, favorites
the category tabs. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the favorites again. button, and steering wheel controls,
desired category name displays. if the vehicle has this feature.
Adding and Removing Categories
Up to 36 stations can be
. Radios with CD and DVD Categories cannot be added or
can also navigate the programmed as favorites using the
removed while the vehicle is moving six softkeys below the radio station
category list by pressing the faster than 8 km/h (5 mph).
\ FWD or the s REV frequency tabs and by using the
To add or remove a category: FAV button. Press the FAV button to
buttons.
go through up to six pages of
1. Press the MENU button.
2. Press the softkey located below
the XM CAT tab.
favorites, each having six favorite 3. Select the number of favorites No XM Signal: The system is
stations available per page. Each pages by pressing the softkey functioning correctly, but the vehicle
page of favorites can contain any located below the displayed is in a location that is blocking the
combination of AM, FM, or XM, page numbers. XM signal. When the vehicle is
if equipped, stations. 4. Press the FAV button, or let the moved into an open area, the signal
menu time out, to return to the should return.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite original main radio screen Loading XM: The audio system is
showing the radio station acquiring and processing audio and
To store a station as a favorite: frequency tabs and to begin text data. No action is needed. This
1. Tune to an XM channel. the process of programming message should disappear shortly.
2. Press the FAV button to display favorites. Channel Off Air: This channel is
the page where the station will XM Radio Messages not currently in service. Tune in to
be stored. another channel.
XL (Explicit Language
3. Press and hold one of the six Channels): These channels, or Channel Unauth: This channel is
softkeys until a beep sounds. any others, can be blocked at a blocked or cannot be received with
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 to customer's request, by calling your XM subscription package.
store additional radio stations. 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and Channel Unavail: This previously
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. assigned channel is no longer
The number of favorites pages can
be set up using the MENU button. XM Updating: The encryption code assigned. Tune to another station.
To set up the number of favorites in the receiver is being updated, and If this station was one of the
pages: no action is required. This process presets, choose another station
should take no longer than for that preset button.
1. Press the MENU button. 30 seconds. No Artist Info: No artist
2. Press the softkey located below information is available at this time
the FAV 1-6 tab. on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No Title Info: No song title XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver XM Not Available: If this message
information is available at this time in the vehicle could have previously does not clear within a short period
on this channel. The system is been in another vehicle. For security of time, the receiver could have a
working properly. purposes, XM receivers cannot be fault. Consult with your dealer.
No CAT Info: No category swapped between vehicles. If this
information is available at this time message is received after having Radio Reception
on this channel. The system is the vehicle serviced, check with
your dealer. Frequency interference and static
working properly. can occur during normal radio
No Information: No text or XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, reception if items such as cell phone
informational messages are this message alternates with the XM chargers, vehicle convenience
available at this time on this Radio eight‐digit radio ID label. This accessories, and external electronic
channel. The system is working label is needed to activate the devices are plugged into the
properly. service. accessory power outlet. If there is
Unknown: If this message is interference or static, unplug the
No Subscription Please Renew: item from the accessory power
The XM subscription needs to be received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault. outlet.
reactivated. Contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call Consult with your dealer. AM
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and Check Antenna: If this message
The range for most AM stations is
www.xmradio.ca or call does not clear within a short period
greater than for FM, especially at
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. of time, the receiver or antenna
night. The longer range can cause
CAT Not Found: There are no could have a fault. Consult with your
station frequencies to interfere
channels available for the selected dealer.
with each other. For better radio
category. The system is working Check XM Receivr: If this reception, most AM radio stations
properly. message does not clear within a boost the power levels during the
short period of time, the receiver day, and then reduce these levels
could have a fault. Consult with your during the night. Static can also
dealer.
occur when things like storms and Cellular Phone Usage Audio Players
power lines interfere with radio
Cellular phone usage may cause
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
interference with the vehicle's radio. CD Player
This interference may occur when
FM Stereo making or receiving phone calls, Care of the CD Player
charging the phone's battery, Do not add any label to a CD.
FM signals only reach about or simply having the phone on. This
16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although It could get caught in the CD. If a
interference causes an increased CD is recorded on a personal
the radio has a built-in electronic level of static while listening to the
circuit that automatically works to computer and a description label is
radio. If static is received while needed, try labeling the top of the
reduce interference, some static listening to the radio, unplug the
can occur, especially around tall recorded CD with a marking pen.
cellular phone and turn it off.
buildings or hills, causing the sound The use of CD lens cleaners for
to fade in and out. CDs is not advised, due to the risk
Satellite Radio Antenna of contaminating the lens of the CD
XM™ Satellite Radio Service The XM Satellite Radio antenna is optics with lubricants internal to the
XM Satellite Radio Service gives located on the roof of the vehicle. CD player mechanism.
digital radio reception from coast to Keep the antenna clear of
Notice: If a label is added to a
coast in the 48 contiguous United obstructions for clear radio
CD, more than one CD is inserted
States, and in Canada. Just as with reception.
into the slot at a time, or an
FM, tall buildings or hills can If the vehicle has a sunroof, the attempt is made to play scratched
interfere with satellite radio signals, performance of the XM system (if or damaged CDs, the CD player
causing the sound to fade in and equipped) may be affected if the could be damaged. While using
out. In addition, traveling or standing sunroof is open. the CD player, use only CDs in
under heavy foliage, bridges,
good condition without any label,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
load one CD at a time, and keep
of the XM signal for a period of time.
the CD player and the loading slot If the surface of a CD is soiled, The CD is controlled by the buttons
free of foreign materials, liquids, clean it with a soft, lint free cloth or on the radio faceplate or by the RSA
and debris. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
If an error displays, see “CD Player neutral detergent solution mixed System on page 7‑43 for more
Messages” later in this section. with water. Make sure the wiping information.
process starts from the center to When a CD is inserted, the CD
Care of CDs the edge. symbol displays on the left side of
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality Inserting a CD the radio display. As each new track
can be reduced due to CD-R or starts to play, the track number
CD-RW quality, the method of Insert a CD partway into the slot, displays.
recording, the quality of the music label side up. The player pulls it in
and the CD should begin playing. The CD player can play the smaller
that has been recorded, and the 8 cm (3 inch) single CDs with an
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been Ejecting a CD adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
handled. Handle them carefully. smaller CDs are loaded in the same
Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their Z EJECT: Press and release to
eject the disc. Remove the CD manner.
original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight when Remove Disc displays. If the CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to
and dust. The CD player scans the disc is not removed, after several cycle through CD or Auxiliary when
bottom surface of the disc. If the seconds, the disc is automatically listening to the radio. The CD icon
surface of a CD is damaged, such pulled back into the player. and a message showing the disc
as cracked, broken, or scratched, and/or track number displays when
Playing a CD a CD is in the player. Press again
the CD does not play properly or not
at all. Do not touch the bottom side If the ignition or radio is turned off, and the system automatically
of a CD while handling it; this could with a CD in the player, it stays in searches for an auxiliary input
damage the surface. Pick up CDs the player. When the ignition or device, see, Auxiliary Devices on
by grasping the outer edges or the radio is turned on, the CD starts page 7‑29 for more information.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source.
If a portable audio player is not ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next Format

connected, “No Input Device Found” track. Radios that have the capability of
displays. playing MP3s can play .mp3 or .wma
Press and hold, or press multiple
4 (Information): Press to display times to continue moving forward files that were recorded onto a
additional text information related to through the tracks on the CD. CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can
the current song. If information is be recorded with the following fixed
available, the song title information s REV (Fast Reverse): Press bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
displays on the top line of the and hold to reverse playback quickly 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
display and artist information within a track. 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
displays on the bottom line. When \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or
information is not available, “NO and hold to advance playback a variable bit rate.
INFO” displays. quickly within a track.
Compressed Audio or Mixed
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen to Mode Discs
the CD that is currently playing. tracks in random, rather than
The radio can play discs that
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of sequential order. To use random:
contain both uncompressed
the current track, if more than ten 1. Press the softkey positioned CD audio and MP3 files. If both
seconds on the CD have played. under the RDM tab until Random formats are on the disc, the radio
Press to go to the previous track if Current Disc displays. reads all MP3 files first, then the
less than ten seconds on the CD 2. Press the softkey again to turn uncompressed CD audio files.
have played. off random play. CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File
Press and hold, or press multiple and Folder Structure
MP3 Supported Files
times to continue moving backward The radio supports:
through the tracks on the CD. The Radio with CD (MP3) and the
Radio with USB and CD (MP3), . Up to 50 folders.
have the capability of playing an . Up to eight folders in depth.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc.
. Up to 50 playlists.

. Up to 255 files. Tracks are played in the following Track names longer than
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl order: 32 characters or four pages are
extension. . Play begins from the first track in shortened. The display does not
the first playlist and continues show parts of words on the last
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda page of text and the extension of
file extension. sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last the filename is not displayed.
Root Directory track of the last playlist has Preprogrammed Playlists
The root directory is treated as a played, play continues from the
first track of the first playlist. CDs that have preprogrammed
folder. Files are stored in the root playlists that were created using
directory when the disc or storage . Play begins from the first track in WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or
device does not contain folders. the first folder and continues Real Jukebox™ software can be
Files accessed from the root sequentially through all tracks in accessed, however, there is no
directory of a CD display as each folder. When the last track playlist editing capability using
F1 ROOT. of the last folder has played, the radio. These playlists are
Empty Folder play continues from the first treated as special folders containing
track of the first folder. compressed audio song files.
Folders that do not contain files are
skipped, and the player advances to File System and Naming Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
the next folder that contains files. The song name that displays is the file extension and are stored on a
song name that is contained in the USB device may be supported by
Order of Play the radio with a USB port.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not
Compressed audio files are present in the ID3 tag, then the Playlists can be changed by using
accessed in the following order: radio displays the file name without the softkeys below the S c and
. Playlists (Px). the extension (such as .mp3) as the c T tabs, the f knob, the © SEEK
track name.
. Files stored in the root directory. button or the ¨ SEEK button. An
. Files stored in folders in the root MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that has been
directory.
recorded without using file folders ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next RDM (Random): Press to listen to
can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW track. Press and hold or press tracks in random, rather than
contains more than the maximum multiple times to continue moving sequential order. To use random:
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and forward through tracks. 1. Press the softkey positioned
512 folders and files, the player
allows access and navigates up s REV (Reverse): Press and hold under the RDM tab until Random
to reverse playback quickly. Sound Current Disc displays.
to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible. is heard at a reduced volume and 2. Press the softkey again to turn
the elapsed time of the file displays. off random play.
Playing an MP3 Release s REV to resume playing. h (Music Navigator): Press the
4 (Information): Press to display \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press softkey below the h tab to have
additional text information related to and hold to advance playback the files played in order by artist or
the current song. If information is quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced album. The player scans the disc to
available, the song title information volume and the elapsed time of the sort the files by artist and album ID3
displays on the top line of the
file displays. Release \ FWD to tag information. It can take several
display and artist information
resume playing. The elapsed time of minutes to scan the disc depending
displays on the bottom line. When
the file displays. on the number of files on the disc.
information is not available, “NO
The radio may begin playing while it
INFO” displays. S c (Previous Folder): Press is scanning in the background.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files the softkey below the S c tab to
go to the first track in the previous When the scan is finished, the disc
on the CD currently playing.
folder. begins playing files in order by
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of artist. The current artist playing is
the track, if more than ten seconds c T (Next Folder): Press the shown on the second line of the
have played. Press and hold or softkey below the c T tab to go to display. Once all songs by that artist
press multiple times to continue the first track in the next folder. are played, the player moves to the
moving backward through tracks. next artist in alphabetical order and
begins playing files by that artist.
To listen to files by another artist, alphabetical order on the CD and

. The label could be caught in the
press the softkey located below begins playing MP3 files from that CD player.
either arrow tab. The disc goes to album. If the CD is not playing correctly, for
the next or previous artist in To exit music navigator mode, press any other reason, try a known
alphabetical order. Continue the softkey below the Back tab to good CD.
pressing either softkey below the return to normal MP3 playback.
arrow tab until the desired artist If any error occurs repeatedly or
if an error cannot be corrected,
displays. CD Player Messages
contact your dealer. If the radio
To change from playback by artist to CHECK DISC: If this message displays an error message, write it
playback by album: displays and/or the CD ejects, it down and provide it to your dealer
1. Press the softkey located below could be for one of the following when reporting the problem.
the Sort By tab. reasons:
2. Press one of the softkeys below
. It is very hot. When the CD/DVD Player
the album tab from the sort temperature returns to normal,
the CD should play.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
screen.
. The road is very rough. When Do not add any label to a disc.
3. Press the softkey below the It could get caught in the CD or
back tab to return to the main the road becomes smoother, the
DVD player. If a disc is recorded
music navigator screen. CD should play.
on a personal computer and a
. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
The album name displays on the description label is needed, try
second line between the arrows or upside down. labeling the top of the recorded disc
and songs from the current album . The air is very humid. If so, wait with a marking pen.
begins to play. Once all songs from about an hour and try again. The use of CD/DVD lens cleaners
that album have played, the player . is not advised, due to the risk of
There could have been a
moves to the next album in contaminating the lens of the optics
problem while burning the CD.
with lubricants internal to the CD
and DVD player mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a disc. If the surface of a disc is Front seat passengers can listen
CD, more than one CD is inserted damaged, such as cracked, broken, to the radio (AM, FM, or XM if
into the slot at a time, or an or scratched, the disc does not play equipped) by pressing the BAND
attempt is made to play scratched properly or not at all. Do not touch button or the DVD/CD AUX button to
or damaged CDs, the CD player the bottom side of a disc while select CD slot, DVD slot, front
could be damaged. While using handling it; this could damage the auxiliary input, USB port, or rear
the CD player, use only CDs in surface. Pick up discs by grasping auxiliary input (if available).
good condition without any label, the outer edges or the edge of the If a playback device is plugged
load one CD at a time, and keep hole and the outer edge. into the radio’s front auxiliary input
the CD player and the loading slot If the surface of a disc is soiled, jack, USB port, or the rear auxiliary
free of foreign materials, liquids, clean it with a soft, lint‐free cloth or jack, the front seat passengers
and debris. dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, are able to listen to playback from
If an error displays, see “CD neutral detergent solution mixed this source through the vehicle
Messages” later in this section. with water. Make sure the wiping speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary
process starts from the center to Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
Care of CDs and DVDs the edge. page 7‑29, or “Audio/Video
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the (A/V) Jacks” under Rear Seat
sound quality can be reduced due to
Audio Output Entertainment (RSE) System on
CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method Only one audio source can be heard page 7‑33 for more information.
of recording, the quality of the music through the speakers at one time. In some vehicles, depending on
that has been recorded, and the An audio source is defined as DVD audio options, the rear speakers
way the CD-R or CD-RW has been slot, CD slot, XM, FM‐AM, front can be muted when the RSA power
handled. Handle them carefully. auxiliary jack, USB port, or rear is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio
Store CD-Rs or CD-RWs in their auxiliary jack. (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for
original cases or other protective more information.
cases and away from direct sunlight Press the O button to turn the radio
and dust. The CD or DVD player on. The radio can be heard through
scans the bottom surface of the all of the vehicle speakers.
Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc When a CD is inserted, the text tab
cannot be completed, due to DVD or CD symbol displays on the
Insert a disc partway into either slot,
unknown format, etc., and the disc left side of the radio display. As
label side up. The player pulls it in
fails to eject, press and hold for each new track starts to play, the
and the disc should begin playing.
more than five seconds to force the track number displays.
(Loading a disc into the system,
disc to eject. The CD player can play the smaller
depending on media type and
format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Playing a CD (in Either the 8 cm (3 in) single CDs with an
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD or CD Slot) adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
DVD to begin playing.) smaller CDs are loaded in the same
If the ignition or radio is turned off manner.
Ejecting a Disc with a CD in the player, it stays in
the player. When the ignition or DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to
Z CD (Eject): Press and release
radio is turned on, the CD starts cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
to eject the disc that is currently when listening to the radio. The
playing. The CD ejects from the playing where it stopped, if it was
the last selected audio source. The DVD/CD text tab and a message
bottom slot. A beep sounds and showing the track or chapter
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the CD is controlled by the buttons on
the radio faceplate or by the RSA number will display when a disc is in
disc is ejected, Remove Disc either slot. Press the DVD/CD AUX
displays. The disc can be removed. unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
System on page 7‑43 for more button again and the system
If the disc is not removed, after automatically searches for an
several seconds the disc information. The DVD/CD decks
(the upper slot is the DVD deck and auxiliary input device; see Auxiliary
automatically pulls back into the Devices on page 7‑29 for more
player. the lower slot is the CD deck) of the
radio are compatible with most information. If a portable audio
Z DVD (Eject): Press and audio CDs, CD-Rs, CD-RWs, player is not connected, “No Aux
release to eject the disc that is and MP3s. Input Device” displays. If a disc is in
currently playing in the top slot. both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
displays. between the two sources and does
not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
If a front auxiliary device is f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on RDM (Random): Press to listen
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button the disc that is currently playing. to tracks in random, rather than
cycles through all available options, sequential order. To use random:
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front © SEEK: Press to go to the start
of the current track, if more than 1. Press the softkey under the
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if RDM tab until Random Current
available). See “Using the Auxiliary five seconds on the CD have
played. Disc displays.
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
page 7‑29 or “Audio/Video (A/V) Press to go to the previous track if 2. Press the softkey again to turn
Jacks” under Rear Seat less than five seconds on the CD off random play.
Entertainment (RSE) System on have played. MP3 and WMA Supported Files
Press and hold, or press multiple
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD times, to continue moving backward Format
slot, the rear seat operator can turn through the tracks on the CD. The radio can play .mp3 or .wma
on the video screen and use the files that were recorded onto a
remote control to navigate the CD
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
track.
(tracks only) through the remote
control. Press and hold, or press multiple Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode
times, to continue moving forward Discs
4 (Information): Press to display
through the tracks on the CD.
additional text information related to The radio plays discs that contain
the current song. If information is s REV (Fast Reverse): Press both uncompressed CD audio and
available, the song title information and hold to reverse playback quickly MP3/WMA files depending on which
displays on the top line of the within a track. slot the disc is loaded into.
display and artist information \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press The DVD player only reads
displays on the bottom line. When and hold to advance playback uncompressed audio and ignores
information is not available, “NO quickly within a track. MP3/WMA files on a mixed
INFO” displays. mode disc.
The CD player reads both

. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl recorded without folders or playlists.
uncompressed audio and MP3/ extension. When displaying the name of the
WMA files on a mixed mode disc. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda folder, the radio displays ROOT.
Uncompressd audio is played file extension. When the disc contains only
before MP3/WMA files. Press the playlists and compressed audio
CAT (category) button to toggle Root Directory
files, but no folders, all files are
between uncompressed audio and The root directory of the disc is located under the root folder. The
MP3/WMA files. treated as a folder. If the root folder down and the folder up
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File directory has compressed audio buttons search playlists first and
and Folder Structure files, the directory displays as F1 then go to the root folder. When the
ROOT on the radio. radio displays the name of the
The DVD player supports:
If a disc contains both folder, the radio displays ROOT.
. Up to 255 folders. uncompressed CD audio and MP3/ Order of Play
. Up to eight folders in depth. WMA files, a folder under the root
directory called CD accesses all of Compressed audio files are
. Up to 15 playlists. the CD audio tracks on the disc. accessed in the following order:
. Up to 40 sessions. . Playlists (Px).
Empty Folder
. Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl . Files stored in the root directory.
Folders that do not contain files are
extension.
skipped, and the player advances to . Files stored in folders in the root
. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda the next folder that contains files. directory.
file extension.
No Folder Tracks are played in the following
The CD player supports: order:
When the disc contains only
. Up to 512 files and folders. compressed files, the files are . Play begins from the first track in
. Up to 8 folders in depth. located under the root folder. The the first playlist and continues
next and previous folder function sequentially through all tracks in
does not function on a disc that was each playlist. When the last
track of the last playlist has Track names longer than f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA
played, play continues from the 32 characters or 4 pages are files.
first track of the first playlist. shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension © SEEK: Press to go to the start of
. Play begins from the first track in the track, if more than five seconds
the first folder and continues of the file name do not display.
have played. Press and hold or
sequentially through all tracks in Preprogrammed Playlists press multiple times, if less than
each folder. When the last track five seconds have played, to
of the last folder has played, Preprogrammed playlists that
were created using WinAmp™, continue moving backward through
play continues from the first tracks.
track of the first folder. MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed; however, ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next
When play enters a new folder, the they cannot be edited using the track.
display does not automatically show radio. These playlists are treated
the new folder name unless the Press and hold, or press multiple
as special folders containing
folder mode has been chosen as times, to continue moving forward
compressed audio song files.
the default display. The new track through tracks.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls
name displays.
file extension and are stored on a
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold
to reverse playback quickly.
File System and Naming USB device may be supported by
The song name that displays is the the radio with a USB port. \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
and hold to advance playback
song name that is contained in the Playing an MP3 or WMA (in quickly.
ID3 tag. If the song name is not Either the DVD or CD Slot)
present in the ID3 tag, then the S c (Previous Folder): Press
radio displays the file name without If a disc is inserted into the top DVD the softkey below the S c tab to
the extension (such as .mp3) as the slot, the rear seat operator can turn
go to the first track in the previous
track name. on the video screen and use the
folder.
remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only).
c T (Next Folder): Press the shown on the second line of the that album have played, the player
display. Once all songs by that artist moves to the next album in
softkey below the c T tab to go to
are played, the player moves to the alphabetical order on the CD and
the first track in the next folder.
next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing MP3 files from that
RDM (Random): Press to listen to begins playing files by that artist. album.
tracks in random, rather than
To listen to files by another artist, To exit music navigator mode, press
sequential order.
press the softkey located below the softkey below the Back tab to
To use random: either arrow tab. The disc goes to return to normal MP3 playback.
1. Press the softkey under the the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue Using the DVD Player
RDM tab until Random Current
Disc displays pressing either softkey below the The DVD player can be controlled
arrow tab until the artist displays. by the buttons on the remote
2. Press the same softkey again to control, the RSA system, or by the
turn off random play. To change from playback by artist to
playback by album: buttons on the radio faceplate. See
h (Music Navigator): Press the “Remote Control” under Rear Seat
1. Press the softkey below the Sort Entertainment (RSE) System on
softkey below the h tab to play By tab.
files in order by artist or album. page 7‑33 and Rear Seat Audio
2. Press one of the softkeys below (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for
The player scans the disc to sort the the Album tab from the sort more information.
files by artist and album ID3 tag screen.
information. It can take several The DVD player is only compatible
minutes to scan the disc depending 3. Press the softkey below the with DVDs of the appropriate region
on the number of files on the disc. Back tab to return to the main code printed on the jacket of
The radio may begin playing while it music navigator screen. most DVDs.
is scanning in the background. The album name displays on the The DVD slot of the radio is
When the scan is finished, the disc second line between the arrows, compatible with most audio CDs
begins playing files in order by and songs from the current album and CD-R/RW, DVD-Video,
artist. The current artist playing is begin to play. Once all songs from
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, and Loading a disc into the system, system automatically searches for
DVD+R/RW media, along with depending on media type and an auxiliary input device; see
MP3 and WMA formats. format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑29 for
If an error message displays on the for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for more information. If a portable audio
video screen or the radio, see “DVD a DVD. player is not connected, “No Aux
Display Error Messages” under Input Device” displays. If a disc is in
Ejecting a Disc both the DVD slot and the CD slot,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System on page 7‑33, and “CD/DVD Z DVD (Eject): Press and the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
Player Messages” later in this release to eject the disc currently between the two sources and does
section for more information. playing in the top slot. A beep not indicate “No Aux Input Device.”
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. If a front auxiliary device is
Inserting a Disc If loading and reading of a disc
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options,
Insert a disc partway into the top cannot be completed, due to
such as: DVD slot, CD slot, front
slot, label side up. The player pulls unknown format, etc., and the disc
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary (if
it in and the disc should begin fails to eject, press and hold for
available). See “Using the Auxiliary
playing. “Loading Disc” shows on more than five seconds to force the
Input Jack” in Auxiliary Devices on
the radio display. At the same time, disc to eject.
page 7‑29 or “Audio/Video (A/V)
the radio displays a softkey menu of
Playing a DVD Jacks” under Rear Seat
option(s). Some discs automatically
Entertainment (RSE) System on
play the movie while others default DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press to page 7‑33 for more information.
to the softkey menu display, cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary
which requires the Play, Enter, when listening to the radio. The If a disc is inserted into the top DVD
or Navigation softkeys to be DVD/CD text tab and a message slot, the rear seat operator can turn
pressed, either by softkey or by the showing the track or chapter on the video screen and use the
rear seat passenger using the number will display when a disc is remote control to navigate the CD
remote control. in either slot. Press the DVD/ (tracks only) through the remote
CD AUX button again and the control.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio © SEEK: Press to return to the start Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-V
on or off. Turn clockwise or of the current track or chapter. (Video)
counterclockwise to increase or Press again to go to the previous Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio
decrease the volume. Press and track or chapter. This button might display menu shows several tab
hold for more than two seconds to not work when the DVD is playing options for playback. Press the
turn off the entire radio and Rear the copyright information or the softkey located under any tab option
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system previews. during DVD-V playback.
and to start the Parental Control ¨ SEEK:
feature. Parental Control prevents
Press to go to the next r / j (Play/Pause): Press either
track or chapter. This button might the Play or Pause tab displayed on
the rear seat occupant from not work when the DVD is playing
operating the Rear Seat Audio the radio, to toggle between pausing
the copyright information or the or restarting playback of a DVD.
(RSA) system or remote control. previews. If the forward arrow is showing on
A lock symbol displays next to the s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to the display, the system is in pause
clock display. The Parental Control quickly reverse the CD or DVD at mode. If the Pause tab is showing
feature remains on until the knob is five times the normal speed. To stop on the display, the system is in
pressed and held for more than fast reversing, press again. This playback mode. If the DVD screen
two seconds again, or until the button might not work when the is off, press the play button to turn
driver turns the ignition off and exits DVD is playing the copyright the screen on.
the vehicle. information or the previews. Some DVDs begin playing after the
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to previews have finished, although
a CD or DVD. fast forward the CD or DVD at there could be a delay of up to
five times the normal speed. To stop 30 seconds. If the DVD does
fast forwarding, press again. This not begin playing the movie
button might not work when the automatically, press the softkey
DVD is playing the copyright located under the play/pause
information or the previews. symbol tag displayed on the radio.
If the DVD still does not play, refer The rear seat passenger can If the forward arrow is showing on
to the on-screen instructions, navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A the display, the system is in pause
if available. menus and controls through the mode. If the pause tab is showing
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, remote control. See “Remote on the display, the system is in
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Control” under Rear Seat playback mode.
Entertainment (RSE) System on q Group r : Press to cycle
r (Enter): Press to select the page 7‑33 for more information. The through musical groupings on the
choices that are highlighted in video screen automatically turns
any menu. DVD-A disc.
on when the DVD-V is inserted
y (Menu): Press to access the into the DVD slot, and does not Nav (Navigate): Press to display
DVD menu. The DVD menu is automatically power on when the directional arrows for navigating
different on every DVD. Use DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. through the menus.
the softkeys located under the It must be manually turned on by e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle
navigation arrows to navigate the the rear seat occupant through the through audio stream formats
cursor through the DVD menu. remote control power button. located on the DVD-A disc. The
After making a selection press this Using Softkeys to Play a DVD-A video screen shows the audio
button. This button only operates (Audio) stream changing.
when using a DVD. The rear seat passenger can
Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio
Nav (Navigate): Press to display display menu shows several tab navigate the DVD-V and DVD-A
directional arrows for navigating options for playback. Press the menus and controls through the
through the menus. softkey located under any tab option remote control. See “Remote
q (Return): Press to exit the during DVD-A playback. Control” under Rear Seat
current active menu and return to Entertainment (RSE) System on
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either page 7‑33 for more information.
the previous menu. This button the play or pause icon displayed on
operates only when a DVD is the radio, to toggle between pausing
playing and a menu is active. or restarting playback of a DVD.
The video screen automatically ejected and the stop button has not Player Error: This message
turns on when the DVD-V is been pressed twice on the remote displays if there are disc load or
inserted into the DVD slot, and does control. If the disc has been ejected disc eject problems.
not automatically power on when or the stop button has been pressed . It is very hot. When the
the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD twice on the remote control, the disc temperature returns to normal,
slot. It must be manually turned on resumes playing at the beginning of the disc should play.
by the rear seat occupant through the disc.
the remote control power button. . The road is very rough. When
CD/DVD Player Messages the road becomes smoother, the
Stopping and Resuming Disc Format Error: This message disc should play.
Playback displays if the disc is inserted with . The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,
To stop playing a DVD without the disc label wrong side up, or if or upside down.
turning off the system, press the disc is damaged. . The air is very humid. If so, wait
the c button on the remote control, Disc Region Error: This message about an hour and try again.
or press the softkey located under displays if the disc is not from a . There was a problem while
the c or the r / j tabs displayed correct region.
burning the disc.
on the radio. If the radio is sourced No Disc Inserted: This message . The label is caught in the
to something other than DVD-V, displays if no disc is present when
press the DVD/CD AUX button to CD/DVD player.
the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
make DVD-V the active source. If the disc is not playing correctly, for
pressed on the radio.
To resume DVD playback, press the any other reason, try a known
Optical Error: This message good disc.
r / j button on the remote control, displays if the disc was inserted
or press the softkey located under upside down. If any error occurs repeatedly or if
the r / j tab on the radio. The DVD an error cannot be corrected,
should resume play from where it Disk Read Error: This message contact your dealer. If the radio
last stopped if the disc has not been displays if a disc was inserted with
an invalid or unknown format.
displays an error message, write it When a device is connected, press from the connected portable audio
down and provide it to your dealer the radio CD/AUX button to begin player. If a portable audio player is
when reporting the problem. playing audio from the device over not connected, “No Input Device
the vehicle speakers. Found” displays.
Auxiliary Devices For optimal sound quality, increase DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary):
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack the portable audio device's volume Press to cycle through DVD, CD,
to the loudest level. or Auxiliary when listening to the
Radios with an auxiliary input jack radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a
It is always best to power the
located on the lower right side of the message showing track or chapter
portable audio device through its
faceplate can connect to an external number displays when a disc is in
own battery while playing.
audio device such as an iPod®, either slot. Press again and the
MP3 player, CD player, for use as O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise system automatically searches for
another source for audio listening. or counterclockwise to increase an auxiliary input device, such as a
This input jack is not an audio or decrease the volume of the portable audio player. If a portable
output; do not plug headphones into portable player. Additional volume audio player is not connected, “No
the front auxiliary input jack. adjustments might have to be made Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc
from the portable device if the is in both the DVD slot and the CD
Drivers are encouraged to set up
volume is not loud or soft enough. slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
any auxiliary device while the
vehicle is in P (Park). See BAND: Press to listen to the radio between the two sources and not
Defensive Driving on page 9‑3 for when a portable audio device is indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
more information on driver playing. The portable audio device front auxiliary device is connected,
distraction. continues playing. the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
through all available options, such
To use a portable audio player, CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to play a CD when a portable audio Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if
the radio's front auxiliary input jack. device is playing. Press again and available). See “Using the Auxiliary
the system begins playing audio Input Jack(s)” in this section,
or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Make sure the iPod has the latest
. AAC files stored on an iPod.
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) firmware from Apple® for proper . FAT16
System on page 7‑33 for more operation. iPod firmware can be .
information. updated using the latest iTunes® FAT32
application. See www.apple.com/ Connecting a USB Storage
Using the USB Port itunes. Device or iPod
Radios with a USB port can control For help with identifying your iPod,
a USB storage device or an iPod The USB Port can be used to
go to www.apple.com/support. control an iPod or a USB storage
using the radio buttons and knobs.
Radios that have a USB port can device.
USB Support play .mp3 and .wma files that are To connect a USB storage device,
The USB connector is located on stored on a USB storage device as connect the device to the USB port
the instrument panel or in the center well as AAC files that are stored on located in the center console or on
console, and uses the USB 2.0 an iPod. the instrument panel.
standard. USB Supported File and Folder To connect an iPod, connect one
USB Supported Devices Structure end of the USB cable that came
. USB Flash Drives The radio supports: with the iPod to the iPod’s dock
connector and connect the other
. Portable USB Hard Drives
. Up to 700 folders. end to the USB port located in the
. Fifth generation or later iPod
. Up to 8 folders in depth. center console or on the instrument
. Up to 65,535 files. panel. If the vehicle is on and the
. iPod nanos USB connection works, “OK to
. iPod touch
. Folder and file names up to disconnect” and a GM logo may
.
64 bytes. appear on the iPod and iPod
iPod classic
. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file appears on the radio display. The
Not all iPods and USB Drives are extension. iPod music appears on the radio’s
compatible with the USB port. display and begins playing.
The iPod charges while it is © SEEK: Press to go to the start of Using Softkeys to Control a
connected to the vehicle if the the track, if more than ten seconds USB Storage Device or iPod
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY have played. Press and hold or
or ON/RUN position. When the The five softkeys below the radio
press multiple times to continue display are used to control the
vehicle is turned off, the iPod moving backward through tracks.
automatically powers off and will not functions listed below.
charge or draw power from the ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next To use the softkeys:
vehicle's battery. track. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving 1. Press the first or fifth softkey
If you have an older iPod model that forward through tracks. below the radio display to
is not supported, it can still be used display the functions listed
by connecting it to the Auxiliary s REV (Reverse): Press and hold below, or press the softkey
Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm to reverse playback quickly. Sound below the function if it is
(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using the is heard at a reduced volume. currently displayed.
Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more Release s REV to resume playing.
2. Press the softkey below the tab
information. The elapsed time of the file
with the function on it to use that
displays.
Using the Radio to Control a function.
USB Storage Device or iPod \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press
j (Pause): Press the softkey
and hold to advance playback
The radio can control a USB quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced below j to pause the track. The
storage device or an iPod using the volume. Release \ FWD to tab appears raised when pause is
radio buttons and knobs and display being used. Press the softkey
resume playing. The elapsed time of
song information on the radio’s below j again to resume playback.
the file displays.
display.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
4 (Information): Press to display Back: Press the softkey below the
additional information about the back tab to go back to the main
selected track. display screen on an iPod, or the
root directory on a USB storage
device.

. Third softkey, 5% through the list
c (Folder View): Press the each time the softkey is pressed.
3. Press f to select the
softkey below c to view the desired menu.
. Fourth softkey, 10% through the
contents of the current folder on the 4. Turn f to scroll through the
USB drive. To browse and select list each time the softkey is
pressed. folders or files in the
files:
selected menu.
. Fifth softkey, end of the list.
1. Press the softkey below c. 5. Press f to select the desired file
h (Music Navigator): Press the
2. Turn f to scroll through the list softkey below h to view and
to be played.
of folders. select a file on an iPod, using the To skip through large lists, the five
3. Press f to select the desired iPod's menu system. Files are softkeys can be used to navigate in
sorted by: the following order:
folder. If there is more then one
folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until . Playlists . First softkey, first item in the list.
the desired folder is reached. . . Second softkey, 1% through the
Artists
4. Turn f to scroll through the files list each time the softkey is
. Albums pressed.
in the selected folder. . Genres . Third softkey, 5% through the list
5. Press f to select the desired file . Songs each time the softkey is pressed.
to be played.
. Composers . Fourth softkey, 10% through the
To skip through large lists, the five list each time the softkey is
softkeys can be used to navigate in To select files:
pressed.
the following order: 1. Press the softkey below h. . Fifth softkey, end of the list.
. First softkey, first item in the list.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list
. Second softkey, 1% through the of menus.
list each time the softkey is
pressed.
Repeat Functionality > (Shuffle Off): Press the Rear Seat

To use Repeat: softkey below 2 to turn shuffle
off. This is the default mode when a
Infotainment
Press the softkey below " or ' USB storage device or iPod is first
to select between Repeat All and connected. Rear Seat Entertainment
Repeat Track. (RSE) System
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey Songs): Press the softkey below The vehicle may have an
below " to repeat all tracks. The = or C to shuffle all songs on Overhead DVD Rear Seat
tab appears lowered when Repeat the USB storage device or iPod. Entertainment (RSE) system. The
All is being used. This is the default RSE system works with the
mode when a USB storage device
C (Shuffle Album): Press the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD
or iPod is first connected. softkey below > to shuffle all player is part of the front radio. The
songs in the current album on RSE system includes a radio with a
' (Repeat Track): Press the an iPod. DVD player, a video display screen,
softkey below ' to repeat one
track. The tab appears raised when
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the audio/video jacks, two wireless
softkey below > to shuffle all headphones, and a remote control.
Repeat Track is being used. See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑18
songs in the current folder on a USB
Shuffle Functionality storage device. for more information on the vehicle's
DVD system.
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2,
C or = to select between
Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,
or Shuffle Folder.
Before Driving Parental Control Headphones

The RSE is designed for rear seat The RSE system may have a
passengers only. The driver cannot Parental Control feature, depending
safely view the video screen while on which radio the vehicle has. To
driving and should not try to do so. start Parental Control, press and
In severe or extreme weather hold the radio power button for more
conditions, the RSE system might than two seconds to stop all system
not work until the temperature is features such as: radio, video
within the operating range. The screen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),
operating range for the RSE system DVD, and/or CD. While Parental
is above −20°C (−4°F) or below Control is on, a padlock icon
60°C (140°F). If the temperature of displays.
the vehicle is outside this range, The radio can be turned back on
heat or cool the vehicle until the with a single press of the power
A. Battery cover
temperature is within the operating button, but the RSE system will
range of the RSE system. remain under Parental Control. B. Channel 1 or 2 switch
To turn Parental Control off, press C. Power button
and hold the radio power button for D. Volume control
more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously E. Power indicator light
left and the padlock icon disappears The RSE includes two 2-channel
from the radio display. wireless headphones that are
Parental Control can also be turned dedicated to this system. Channel 1
off by inserting or ejecting any disc, is dedicated to the video screen,
pressing the play icon on the radio while Channel 2 is dedicated to
DVD display menu, or changing an Rear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.
ignition position.
These headphones can be used to are shut off, or if the headphones Storage in extreme cold can
listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, are out of range of the transmitters weaken the batteries. Keep the
MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliary for more than three minutes. If you headphones stored in a cool, dry
source connected to A/V jacks or move too far forward or step out of place.
the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle the vehicle, the headphones lose If the foam ear pads attached to
has this feature. The wireless the audio signal. the headphones become worn or
headphones have a power button, To adjust the volume on the damaged, the pads can be replaced
channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volume headphones, use the volume control separately from the headphone set.
control. located on the right side. To purchase replacement ear pads,
Push the power button to turn on For optimal audio performance, the call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt
the headphones. An indicator light headphones must be worn correctly. zero (0), or contact your dealer.
located on the headphones comes Headphones should be worn with
on. If the light comes on, but there Battery Replacement
the headband over the top of the
is intermittent sound and/or static on head for best audio reception. The To change the batteries on the
the headphones, or if the indicator symbol L (Left) appears on the headphones:
light does not come on, the batteries outside bottom edge of the ear cup 1. Turn the screw to loosen the
might need to be replaced. See and should be positioned on the left battery door located on the left
“Battery Replacement” later in this ear. The symbol R (Right) appears side of the headphones. Slide
section for more information. Switch on the outside bottom edge of the the battery door open.
the headphones to Off when not ear cup and should be positioned on
in use. 2. Replace the two batteries in the
the right ear. compartment. Make sure that
Infrared transmitters are located at Notice: Do not store the they are installed correctly, using
the rear of the overhead console. headphones in heat or direct the diagram on the inside of the
The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage the battery compartment.
automatically to save the battery headphones and repairs will not
power if the RSE system and RSA 3. Replace the battery door and
be covered by the warranty. tighten the door screw.
If the headphones are to be stored The A/V jacks, located on the rear and listening with the wireless
for a long period of time, remove the of the floor console, allow audio headphones on Channel 2 or with
batteries and keep them in a cool, or video signals to be connected the wired headphones. See “Using
dry place. from an auxiliary device such the Auxiliary Input Jack” under
as a camcorder or a video game Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑29 for
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks unit to the RSE system. Adapter more information about changing
connectors or cables (not included) the source.
may be required to connect the
auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. How to Change the RSE Video
Screen Settings
Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage. The screen display mode (normal,
full, and zoom), screen brightness,
Power for auxiliary devices is not
and setup menu language can be
supplied by the radio system.
changed from the on screen setup
To use the auxiliary inputs of the menu. To change any feature:
RSE system, connect an external
auxiliary device to the color-coded 1. Press the z (display menu)
A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary button on the remote control.
device and the video screen power
2. Use the remote control n, q,
Yellow : Video Input on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX p, o (navigation) arrows and
White : Left Audio Input (auxiliary) button on the remote the r (enter) button to use the
Red : Right Audio Input control switches the video screen setup menu.
from the DVD player mode to the
The A/V jacks are color coded to 3. Press the z button again to
match typical home entertainment auxiliary device. The audio of the
connected source can be listened to remove the setup menu from the
system equipment. screen.
over the speakers by sourcing the
radio to the auxiliary device or by
sourcing the RSA to the Rear Aux
Audio Output When a device is connected to the The DVD player is capable of
A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary outputting audio to the wired
Audio from the DVD player or
input jack, if the vehicle has this headphone jacks on the RSA
auxiliary inputs can be heard
feature, the rear seat passengers system, if the vehicle has this
through the following possible
are able to hear audio from the feature. The DVD player can be
sources:
auxiliary device through the wireless selected as an audio source on the
. Wireless Headphones or wired headphones. The front seat RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio
. Vehicle Speakers passengers are able to listen to (RSA) System on page 7‑43 for
playback from this device through more information.
. Vehicle wired headphone jacks the vehicle speakers by selecting
on the rear seat audio system, When a device is connected to the
AUX as the source on the radio. A/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliary
if the vehicle has this feature.
Audio Output input jack if the vehicle has this
The RSE system always transmits feature, the rear seat passengers
the audio signal to the wireless Audio from the DVD player or are able to hear audio from the
headphones, if there is audio auxiliary inputs can be heard auxiliary device through the wireless
available. See “Headphones” earlier through the following possible or wired headphones. The front seat
in this section for more information. sources: passengers are able to listen to
The DVD player is capable of . Wireless headphones playback from this device through
outputting audio to the wired . the vehicle speakers by selecting
Vehicle speakers
headphone jacks on the RSA AUX as the source on the radio.
system, if the vehicle has this
. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks
on the RSA system, if the Video Screen
feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the vehicle has this feature. The video screen is located in the
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio The RSE system always transmits overhead console.
(RSA) System on page 7‑43 for the audio signal to the wireless To use the video screen:
more information. headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier 1. Push the release button located
in this section for more information. on the overhead console.
2. Move the screen to the desired Remote Control Objects blocking the line of sight
position. could also affect the function of the
When the video screen is not in remote control.
use, push it up into its locked If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD
position. slot, the remote control O (power)
If a DVD is playing and the screen button can be used to turn on the
is raised to its locked position, the video screen display and start the
screen remains on. This is normal, disc. The radio can also turn on the
and the DVD continues to play video screen display. See CD/DVD
through the previous audio source. Player on page 7‑18 for more
Use the remote control power button information.
or eject the disc to turn off the Notice: Storing the remote
screen. control in a hot area or in direct
The overhead console contains the sunlight can damage it, and the
To use the remote control, aim it at repairs will not be covered by the
infrared transmitters for the wireless the transmitter window at the rear of
headphones and the infrared warranty. Storage in extreme cold
the RSE overhead console and can weaken the batteries. Keep
receivers for the remote control. press the desired button. Direct
They are located at the rear of the the remote control stored in a
sunlight or very bright light could cool, dry place.
console. affect the ability of the RSE
Notice: Avoid directly touching transmitter to receive signals from Remote Control Buttons
the video screen, as damage may the remote control. If the remote O (Power): Press this button to
occur. See “Cleaning the Video control does not seem to be turn the video screen on and off.
Screens” later in this section for working, the batteries might need
more information. to be replaced. See “Battery P (Illumination): Press this button
Replacement” later in this section. to turn the remote control backlight
on. The backlight automatically
turns off after 7 to 10 seconds if no q (Return): Press this button to t (Previous Track/Chapter):
other button is pressed while the exit the current active menu and Press this button to return to the
backlight is on. return to the previous menu. This start of the current track or chapter.
v (Title): Press this button to button operates only when the Press this button again to go to the
return the DVD to the main menu of display menu or a DVD menu is previous track or chapter. This
the DVD. This function may vary for active. button might not work when the
each disc. c (Stop): Press this button to DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
y (Main Menu): Press this button stop playing, fast reversing, or fast
to access the DVD menu. The DVD forwarding a DVD. Press this button u (Next Track/Chapter): Press
menu is different on every DVD. twice to return to the beginning of this button to go to the beginning of
Use the navigation arrows to move the DVD. the next chapter or track. This
the cursor around the DVD menu. s (Play/Pause): Press this button might not work when the
After making a selection press the button to start playing a DVD. Press DVD is playing the copyright
enter button. This button only this button while a DVD is playing to information or the previews.
operates when using a DVD. pause it. Press it again to continue r (Fast Reverse): Press this
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation playing the DVD. button to fast reverse the DVD or
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to On some radios, play may be CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD
navigate through a menu. slowed down by pressing the play/ video, press the play button. To stop
fast reversing a DVD audio or CD,
r (Enter): Press this button to pause button then pressing the fast
release this button. This button
select the choice that is highlighted forward button when the DVD is
playing. The DVD continues playing might not work when the DVD is
in any menu. playing the copyright information or
in a slow play mode. Some radios
z (Display Menu): Press this may perform reverse slow play by the previews.
button to adjust the brightness, pressing the play/pause button and [ (Fast Forward): Press this
screen display mode (normal, then pressing the fast reverse button to fast forward the DVD or
full, or zoom), and display the button. To cancel slow play mode, CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
language menu. press the play/pause button. video, press the play/pause button.
To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): Battery Replacement
or CD, release this button. This The numeric keypad provides the To change the remote control
button might not work when the capability of direct chapter or track batteries:
DVD is playing the copyright number selection.
information or the previews. 1. Slide the rear cover back on the
\ (Clear): Press this button within remote control.
e (Audio): Press this button to three seconds after entering a
change audio tracks on DVDs that numeric selection, to clear all 2. Replace the two batteries in the
have this feature when the DVD is numerical inputs. compartment. Make sure they
playing. The format and content of are installed correctly using the
this function vary for each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press diagram on the inside of the
this button to select chapter or track remote control.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to numbers greater than nine. Press
turn ON/OFF subtitles and to move this button before entering the 3. Replace the battery cover.
through subtitle options when a number. If the remote control is to be stored
DVD is playing. The format and If the remote control becomes lost for a long period of time, remove the
content of this function vary for or damaged, a new universal batteries and keep them in a cool,
each disc. remote control can be purchased. dry place.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button If this happens, make sure the
to switch the system between the universal remote control uses a
DVD player and an auxiliary source. code set of Toshiba®.
2 (Camera): Press this button to
change camera angles on DVDs
that have this feature when a DVD
is playing. The format and content
of this function vary for each disc.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or the pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
picture looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimes If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
the DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times, the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers, or use a
cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L
(left) and R (right) on the headphones.
The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message It might be necessary to turn off the
displays if the disc is not from a DVD player when operating one of
The DVD display error message
correct region. these devices in or near the vehicle.
depends on the radio that is in the
vehicle. The video screen can No Disc Inserted: This message *Excludes the OnStar® System.
display one of the following: displays if no disc is present when
Z DVD or DVD/CD AUX is Cleaning the RSE Overhead
Disc Load/Eject Error: This Console
pressed on the radio.
message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems. DVD Distortion When cleaning the RSE overhead
console surface, use only a clean
Disc Format Error: This message Video distortion can occur when cloth dampened with clean water.
displays if the disc is inserted with operating cellular phones, scanners,
the disc label wrong side up, or if CB radios, Global Position Systems
the disc is damaged. (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax
machines, or walkie talkies.
Cleaning the Video Screen The radio functionality is controlled available), located on the front audio
by both the RSA and the front radio. system. Turn the iPod on, then
When cleaning the video screen,
Only one band can be tuned to at choose the front auxiliary input with
use only a clean cloth dampened
one time. Changing the band on the the RSA SRCE button.
with clean water. Use care when
RSA or the front radio will change
directly touching or cleaning the
the band on the other system,
screen, as damage could result.
if they are both sourced to the radio.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) The RSA functions operate even
when the main radio is off. The
System front audio system will display the
Vehicles with this feature allow the headphone icon when the RSA is
rear seat passengers to listen to on, and will disappear from the
and control any of the music display when it is off. P (Power): Press this button to
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other turn RSA on and off.
Audio can be heard through wired
auxiliary sources. However, the rear headphones (not included) plugged Volume: To increase or decrease
seat passengers can only control into the jacks on the RSA. If the headphone volume, turn the knobs
the music sources the front seat vehicle has this feature, audio can located next to the SRCE or PROG
passengers are not listening to, also be heard on Channel 2 of the buttons. The left knob controls the
except on some radios where dual wireless headphones. left headphones and the right knob
control is allowed. For example, controls the right headphones.
rear seat passengers can control The audio system mutes the rear
and listen to a CD through the speakers when the RSA audio is SRCE (Source): Press this button
headphones, while the driver active through the headphones. to switch between the radio FM,
listens to the radio through the AM, or XM™ (if equipped), CD, and
To listen to an iPod or portable
front speakers. The rear seat if the vehicle has these features,
audio device through the RSA,
passengers have control of the DVD, front auxiliary, and rear
attach the iPod or portable audio
volume for each set of headphones. auxiliary.
device to the front auxiliary input (if
© or ¨ (Seek): When listening to Press the right seek arrow to go to When a CD or DVD audio disc is
FM, AM, or XM (if equipped), press the next track or chapter on the playing, press this button to go to
the seek arrows to go to the disc. This function is inactive, the beginning of the CD or DVD
previous or to the next station or with some radios, if the front seat audio. This function is inactive,
channels and stay there. This passengers are listening to the disc. with some radios, if the front seat
function is inactive, with some When a DVD video menu is being passengers are listening to the disc.
radios, if the front seat passengers displayed, press either seek arrow When a disc is playing in the CD or
are listening to the radio. to perform a cursor up or down on DVD changer, press this button to
Press and hold either seek arrow the menu. Hold either seek arrow to select the next disc, if multiple discs
until the display flashes, to tune to perform a cursor left or right on are loaded. This function is inactive,
an individual station. The display the menu. with some radios, if the front seat
stops flashing after the buttons have PROG (Program): Press this passengers are listening to the disc.
not been pushed for more than button to go to the next preset radio When a DVD video menu is being
two seconds. This function is station or channel set on the main displayed, press the PROG button
inactive, with some radios, if the radio. This function is inactive, to perform the menu function, Enter.
front seat passengers are listening with some radios, if the front seat
to the radio. passengers are listening to the
While listening to a disc, press the radio.
left seek arrow to go to the start of
the current track or chapter (if more
than 10 seconds have played).

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.
Phone The system may not work with
A Bluetooth system can use a
Bluetooth‐capable cell phone with a
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in Hands‐Free Profile to make and
Bluetooth this section for more information. receive phone calls. The system
For vehicles equipped with . If the cell phone has voice can be used while the key is in the
Bluetooth capability, the system can dialing capability, learn to use ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
interact with many cell phones, that feature to access the position. The range of the Bluetooth
allowing: address book or contact list. See system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this section Not all phones support all functions,
. Placement and receipt of calls in and not all phones work with the
a hands-free mode. for more information.
in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See
. Sharing of the cell phone’s
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
address book or contact list with Numbers” in this section for information on compatible phones.
the vehicle. more information.
Voice Recognition
To minimize driver distraction,
before driving, and with the vehicle
{ WARNING The Bluetooth system uses voice
parked: recognition to interpret voice
When using a cell phone, it can commands to dial phone numbers
. Become familiar with the be distracting to look too long or and name tags.
features of the cell phone. too often at the screen of the
Organize the phone book and phone or the infotainment For additional information, say
contact lists clearly and delete (navigation) system. Taking your “Help” while you are in a voice
duplicate or rarely used entries. eyes off the road too long or recognition menu.
If possible, program speed dial too often could cause a crash Noise: Keep interior noise levels to
or other shortcuts. resulting in injury or death. a minimum. The system may not
. Review the controls and Focus your attention on driving. recognize voice commands if there
operation of the infotainment is too much background noise.
system.

. Up to five cell phones can be
When to Speak: A short tone b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
paired to the Bluetooth system.
sounds after the system responds answer incoming calls, confirm
indicating when it is waiting for a system information, and start . The pairing process is disabled
voice command. Wait until the tone speech recognition. when the vehicle is moving.
and then speak.
c / x (End): Press to end a call, . Pairing only needs to be
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a reject a call, or cancel an operation. completed once, unless the
calm and natural voice. pairing information on the cell
Pairing phone changes or the cell phone
Audio System
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone is deleted from the system.
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth must be paired to the Bluetooth . Only one paired cell phone can
system, sound comes through the system and then connected to the be connected to the Bluetooth
vehicle's front audio system vehicle before it can be used. See system at a time.
speakers and overrides the audio the cell phone manufacturer's user
system. Use the audio system guide for Bluetooth functions before
. If multiple paired cell phones are
volume knob, during a call, to pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth within range of the system, the
change the volume level. The phone is not connected, calls will be system connects to the first
adjusted volume level remains in made using OnStar Hands‐Free available paired cell phone in the
memory for later calls. To prevent Calling, if equipped. See OnStar order that they were first paired
missed calls, a minimum volume Overview on page 14‑1 for more to the system. To connect to a
level is used if the volume is turned information. different paired phone, see
down too low. “Connecting to a Different
Pairing Information Phone” later in this section.
Bluetooth Controls . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 Pairing a Phone
Use the buttons located on the capability cannot be paired to
steering wheel to operate the the vehicle as a phone and an 1. Press and hold b / g for
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See MP3 player at the same time. two seconds.
Steering Wheel Controls on
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair 4. Say the name of the phone you
can be skipped. additional phones. want to delete.
3. Say “Pair.” The system responds Listing All Paired and Connected Connecting to a Different Phone
with instructions and a four‐digit Phones
Personal Identification Number To connect to a different cell phone,
The system can list all cell phones the Bluetooth system looks for the
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is next available cell phone in the
4. Start the pairing process on the also connected to the vehicle, the order in which all the available cell
cell phone that you want to pair. system responds with “is connected” phones were paired. Depending on
For help with this process, see after that phone name. which cell phone you want to
the cell phone manufacturer's connect to, you may have to use
user guide. 1. Press and hold b / g for this command several times.
two seconds.
5. Locate the device named “Your 1. Press and hold b / g for
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
two seconds.
phone. Follow the instructions 3. Say “List.”
on the cell phone to enter the 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
PIN provided in Step 3. After the Deleting a Paired Phone
3. Say “Change phone.”
PIN is successfully entered, the If the phone name you want to . If another cell phone is
system prompts you to provide a delete is unknown, see “Listing All
name for the paired cell phone. found, the response will be
Paired and Connected Phones.” “<Phone name> is now
This name will be used to
indicate which phones are 1. Press and hold b / g for connected.”
paired and connected to the two seconds. . If another cell phone is not
vehicle. The system responds 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
with “<phone name> has been remains connected.
successfully paired” after the 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
pairing process is complete. which phone to delete.
Storing and Deleting Phone Using the “Store” Command 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
Numbers that you want to store. After
1. Press and hold b / g for each digit is entered, the system
The system can store up to two seconds. repeats back the digit it heard
30 phone numbers as name tags in followed by a tone. After the last
2. Say “Store.”
the Hands‐Free Directory that is digit has been entered, say
shared between the Bluetooth and 3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the
OnStar systems, if equipped. of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
The following commands are used
follow the directions given by the
to delete and store phone numbers.
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command
Store: This command will store a this number.
phone number, or a group of 1. Press and hold b / g for
numbers as a name tag. Using the “Digit Store” Command two seconds.
Digit Store: This command allows If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Delete.”
a phone number to be stored as a recognized by the system, say
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say the name tag you want to
name tag by entering the digits one delete.
at a time. number.
To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
Delete: This command is used to Command
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
Delete All Name Tags: This name tags in the Hands‐Free
command deletes all stored name 1. Press and hold b / g for Calling Directory and the OnStar
tags in the Hands‐Free Calling two seconds. Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,
Directory and the OnStar 2. Say “Digit Store.” if equipped.
Turn‐by‐Turn Destinations
Directory, if equipped.
To delete all name tags: Digit Dial: This command allows a If an unwanted number is
phone number to be dialed by recognized by the system, say
1. Press and hold b / g for entering the digits one at a time. “Clear” at any time to clear the last
two seconds. number.
Re‐dial: This command is used to
2. Say “Delete all name tags.” dial the last number used on the cell To hear all of the numbers
Listing Stored Numbers phone. recognized by the system, say
“Verify” at any time.
The list command will list all stored Using the “Dial” or “Call”
numbers and name tags. Command 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds.
Using the “List” Command 1. Press and hold b / g for
two seconds. 2. Say “Digit Dial.”
1. Press and hold b / g for 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
two seconds. 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
that you want to dial. After each
2. Say “Directory.” 3. Say the entire number without digit is entered, the system
pausing, or say the name tag. repeats back the digit it heard
3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”
Once connected, the person called followed by a tone. After the last
4. Say “List.” will be heard through the audio digit has been entered,
speakers. say “Dial.”
Making a Call
Using the “Digit Dial” Command Once connected, the person called
Calls can be made using the
will be heard through the audio
following commands. The digit dial command allows a
speakers.
Dial or Call: The dial or call phone number to be dialed by
command can be used entering the digits one at a time.
interchangeably to dial a phone After each digit is entered, the
number or a stored name tag. system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the “Re‐dial” Command . Press b / g again to return to Ending a Call

the original call.
1. Press and hold b / g for Press c / x to end a call.
two seconds.
. To ignore the incoming call, no
action is required. Muting a Call
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”
Once connected, the person called
. Press c / x to disconnect the During a call, all sounds from inside
current call and switch to the call the vehicle can be muted so that the
will be heard through the audio person on the other end of the call
speakers. on hold.
cannot hear them.
Receiving a Call Three‐Way Calling . To mute a call, press b / g , and
When an incoming call is received, Three‐way calling must be then say “Mute call.”
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service . To cancel mute, press b / g ,
carrier. and then say “Un‐mute call.”
. Press b / g to answer the call.
1. While on a call, press b / g. Transferring a Call
. Press c / x to ignore a call. 2. Say “Three‐way call.” Audio can be transferred between
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to the Bluetooth system and the cell
dial the number of the third party phone.
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. The cell phone must be paired and
wireless service carrier. 4. Once the call is connected, connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers transferred. The connection process
incoming call when another call together. can take up to two minutes after the
is active. The original call is ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
placed on hold.
Transferring Audio from the To access contacts stored in the cell Sending a Number or Name Tag
Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone phone: During a Call
During a call with the audio in the 1. Press and hold b / g for 1. Press b / g. The system
vehicle: two seconds. responds “Ready,” followed by
1. Press b / g. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” can be skipped. 2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say “Voice.” The system 3. Say the number or name tag
Transferring Audio to the to send.
responds “OK, accessing
Bluetooth System from a Cell
<phone name>.”
Phone Clearing the System
The cell phone's normal prompt
During a call with the audio on the Unless information is deleted out of
messages will go through their cycle
cell phone, press b / g. The audio according to the phone's operating the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio instructions. will be retained indefinitely. This
does not transfer to the vehicle, includes all saved name tags in the
use the audio transfer feature on the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency phone book and phone pairing
cell phone. See your cell phone (DTMF) Tones information. For information on how
manufacturer's user guide for more to delete this information, see the
The Bluetooth system can send
information. previous section “Deleting a Paired
numbers and the numbers stored as
Phone” and the previous sections
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
on deleting name tags.
use this feature when calling a
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the menu‐driven phone system.
voice recognition commands on the Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See your cell phone stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
Other Information Trademarks and

The Bluetooth® word mark and License Agreements
logos are owned by the Bluetooth®
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners. Manufactured under license from
See Radio Frequency Statement on Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the
page 13‑20 for information double-D symbol are trademarks of
regarding Part 15 of the Federal Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under
Communications Commission (FCC)
U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
rules and Industry Canada
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued &
pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks and DTS
Digital Surround and the DTS logos
are trademarks of DTS Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of the vehicle can be
Climate Control Systems controlled with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. Fan Control E. Air Conditioning

B. Outside Air F. Driver and Passenger
C. Recirculation Temperature Controls
D. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger

8-2 Climate Controls
Temperature Control: Move ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided 0 (Defrost): The defrost mode
the thumbwheels up or down between the instrument panel and is used to remove fog or frost from
to increase or decrease the floor outlets. Some air is directed the windshield more quickly. Air is
temperature on the driver side or towards the windshield and side directed to the windshield and side
the passenger side of the vehicle. window outlets. Cooler air is window vents, with some directed to
A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise directed to the upper outlets and the floor vents. In this mode, the
or counterclockwise to increase or warmer air to the floor outlets. system automatically forces outside
decrease the fan speed. Turn the 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the air into the vehicle. The recirculation
knob all the way counterclockwise floor outlets, with some of the air mode cannot be selected while
to turn the front system off. directed to the windshield, side in the defrost mode. The air
window, and second row floor conditioning compressor runs
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn automatically in this setting, unless
clockwise or counterclockwise to outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. the outside temperature is close to
change the direction of the airflow freezing.
inside the vehicle. The knob can be Recirculation cannot be selected
positioned between two modes, for when in Floor Mode. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
a combination of those modes. - (Defog): The defog mode is windows are clear.
To change the current mode, select used to clear the windows of fog or # (Air Conditioning): Press this
one of the following: moisture. Air is directed to the button to turn the air conditioning
windshield, floor outlets, and side system on or off. An indicator
H (Vent): Air is directed to the window vents. In this mode, the light comes on to show that the
instrument panel outlets. system turns off recirculation and air conditioning is on. The air
runs the air conditioning compressor conditioning can be selected in any
unless the outside temperature is mode as long as the fan control
close to freezing. The recirculation is on.
mode cannot be selected while in
the defog mode.
On hot days, open the windows to This mode recirculates and helps 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
let hot inside air escape; then close to quickly cool the air inside the Press this button on the right knob
them. This helps to reduce the time vehicle. It can be used to help to turn the rear window defogger on
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. prevent outside air and odors from or off. The system automatically
It also helps the system to operate entering the vehicle. turns off several minutes after it has
more efficiently. The recirculation mode cannot be been activated. The defogger can
The air conditioning system used with floor, defrost, or defogging also be turned off by turning off the
removes moisture from the air, so a modes. If recirculation is selected engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
small amount of water might drip while in one of those modes, the all the windows are clear.
under the vehicle while idling or indicator flashes three times and For vehicles with heated outside
after turning off the engine. This is turns off. The air conditioning rearview mirrors, the mirrors will
normal. compressor will also come on when heat to help clear fog or frost from
: (Outside Air): Press to turn this mode is activated. While in the surface of the mirror when the
the outside air mode on. An recirculation mode the windows may rear window defog button is
indicator light comes on to show fog when the weather is cold and pressed.
that outside air is on. Air from damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and Notice: Do not use anything
outside the vehicle is circulated sharp on the inside of the rear
throughout the vehicle. The outside increase the fan speed. The
recirculation mode can also be window. If you do, you could cut
air mode can be used with all or damage the warming grid, and
modes, but it cannot be used with turned off by turning off the engine.
the repairs would not be covered
the recirculation mode. Pressing this Rear Window Defogger by the vehicle warranty. Do not
button again will cancel the attach a temporary vehicle
recirculation mode. The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the license, tape, a decal, or anything
? (Recirculation): Press to turn rear window. similar to the defogger grid.
the recirculation mode on or off. An
indicator light comes on to show
that recirculation is on.
Dual Automatic Climate Control System O (On/Off): Press to turn the

climate control system on or off.
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with Outside air still enters the vehicle,
this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system and is directed to the floor. This
described later in this section. direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button.
Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level
mode. The temperature can also be
adjusted using either temperature
button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted
with the system off, the display
illuminates briefly to show the
settings and then returns to off. The
system can be turned back on by
pressing either O, D, C, # , the
defrost or the AUTO button.
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode Control Driver Side Temperature Control
Temperature Controls H. Display The driver side temperature buttons
B. Fan Control I. Power Button are used to adjust the temperature
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation) of the air coming through the
J. Rear Window Defogger system on the drivers side. The
D. Defrost K. Air Conditioning temperature can be adjusted even if
E. Recirculation the system is turned off. This is
L. PASS possible since outside air will
F. Outside Air
always flow through the system as Press the + or − buttons to increase Use the steps below to place the
the vehicle is moving forward unless or decrease the cabin temperature. entire system in automatic mode:
it is set to recirculation mode. See The driver side or passenger side 1. Press the AUTO button.
“Recirculation” later in this section. temperature display shows the
temperature setting decreasing or When AUTO is selected, the
Press the + or − buttons to increase display will change to show the
or decrease the cabin temperature. increasing.
current temperature(s) and
The driver side temperature display The passenger side temperature AUTO will be lit on the display.
will show the temperature setting setting can be set to match the The current delivery mode and
decreasing or increasing. driver side temperature setting by fan speed will also be displayed
pressing the PASS button and for approximately 5 seconds.
Driver and Passenger Side turning off the PASS indicator. When
Temperature Controls the passenger side temperature When AUTO is selected, the air
The driver and passenger side setting is set different than the driver conditioning operation and air
temperature buttons are used to side setting, the indicator on the inlet will be automatically
adjust the temperature of the air PASS button illuminates and both controlled. The air conditioning
coming through the system on the the driver side and passenger side compressor will run when the
driver or passenger side of the temperature displays are shown. outside temperature is over
vehicle. The temperature can be about 4°C (40°F). The air inlet
When in defrost mode the will normally be set to outside
adjusted even if the system is passenger temperature setting
turned off. This is possible since air. If it is hot outside, the air
cannot be changed. inlet may automatically switch to
outside air always flows through the
system as the vehicle is moving Automatic Operation recirculate inside air to help
forward unless it is set to quickly cool down the vehicle.
recirculation mode. See AUTO (Automatic): When The light on the button comes on
automatic operation is active the in recirculation.
“Recirculation” later in this section.
system will control the inside
temperature, the air delivery, and
the fan speed.
2. Set the driver and passenger To avoid blowing cold air in cold display. Pressing either mode button
temperature. weather, the system will delay while the system is off changes the
To find your comfort setting, start turning on the fan until warm air is air delivery mode without turning the
with a 23°C (74°F) temperature available. The length of delay system on. Pressing either mode
setting and allow about depends on the engine coolant button while in automatic control
20 minutes for the system to temperature. Pressing the fan places the mode under manual
regulate. Use the driver or switch will override this delay and control.
passenger temperature buttons change the fan to a selected speed. The air delivery mode setting will be
to adjust the temperature setting Manual Operation displayed and the AUTO light turns
as necessary. If a temperature off. The fan remains under
setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen, D C (Fan Control): Press these automatic control.
the system remains at the buttons to increase or decrease the
maximum cooling setting. If a fan speed. H (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
temperature setting of 32°C Pressing either fan button while in
(90°F) is chosen, the system automatic control places the fan ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided
remains at the maximum heat under manual control. The fan between the instrument panel and
setting. Choosing either setting remains displayed and the floor outlets. Some air is directed
maximum setting will not cause AUTO light turns off. The air towards the windshield and side
the vehicle to heat or cool any delivery mode remains under window outlets.
faster. automatic control. 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the
Do not cover the solar sensor H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): floor outlets, with some to the
located on the top of the instrument Press these buttons to change the windshield, side window outlets, and
panel near the windshield. This direction of the airflow in the vehicle. second row floor outlets. In this
sensor regulates air temperature Repeatedly press either button until mode, the system automatically
based on sun load and also turns the desired mode appears on the selects outside air.
on the headlamps. For more
information on the solar sensor, see
“Sensors” later in this section.
- (Defog): This mode clears the The passenger temperature If this button is pressed when the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is control cannot be activated while in air conditioning compressor is
directed to the windshield, floor defrost mode. If the PASS button is unavailable, the indicator flashes
outlets, and side window vents. In pressed, the button indicator flashes three times and then turns off.
this mode, the system turns off three times and will not work. If the If the air conditioning is on and the
recirculation and runs the air passenger temperature buttons are outside temperature drops below a
conditioning compressor unless the adjusted, the driver temperature temperature which is too cool for air
outside temperature is close to indicator changes. The passenger conditioning to be effective, the air
freezing. The recirculation mode temperature will not be displayed. conditioning light turns off to show
cannot be selected while in the If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is that the air conditioning mode has
defrost mode. selected again, the climate control been canceled.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes system displays the previous On hot days, open the windows long
fog or frost from the windshield temperature settings. enough to let hot inside air escape.
more quickly. Air is directed to the Do not drive the vehicle until all the This helps to reduce the time it
windshield and side window vents, windows are clear. takes for the vehicle to cool down.
with some directed to the floor It also helps the system to operate
vents. In this mode, the system # (Air Conditioning): Press to more efficiently.
automatically forces outside air turn the air conditioning (A/C)
compressor on and off. An indicator The air conditioning system
into the vehicle and runs the air removes moisture from the air, so a
conditioning compressor unless the light comes on to show that the air
conditioning is on. small amount of water might drip
outside temperature is close to under the vehicle while idling or
freezing. The recirculation mode after turning off the engine. This is
cannot be selected while in the normal.
defrost mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn The recirculation mode can be 1 (Rear Window Defogger):
the recirculation mode on. An turned off by pressing the outside Press to turn the rear window
indicator light comes on to show air button, or by turning off the defogger on or off. It automatically
that the recirculation is on. ignition. turns off several minutes after it has
This mode recirculates and helps to ; (Outside Air): Press to turn the been activated. The defogger can
quickly cool the air inside the outside air mode on. An indicator also be turned off by turning off the
vehicle. It can be used to help light on the button comes on to engine. Do not drive the vehicle until
prevent outside air and odors from show that outside is on. Air from all the windows are clear.
entering the vehicle. outside the vehicle is circulated Notice: Do not use a razor blade
throughout the vehicle. The outside or sharp object to clear the inside
The recirculation mode cannot be air mode can be used with all
used with floor, defog, or defrost rear window. Do not adhere
modes, but it cannot be used with anything to the defogger grid
modes. If recirculation is selected the recirculation mode.
with one of those modes, the lines in the rear glass. These
indicator light flashes three times Pressing this button again will actions may damage the rear
and then turns off. The air cancel the recirculation mode. defogger. Repairs would not be
conditioning compressor also comes covered by your warranty.
Rear Window Defogger
on when this mode is activated. Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with
While in recirculation mode the The rear window defogger uses a heated outside rearview mirrors, the
windows may fog when the weather warming grid to remove fog from the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
is cold and damp. To clear the fog, rear window. from the surface of the mirror when
select either the defog or defrost the rear window defog button is
mode and increase the fan speed. pressed. See Power Mirrors on
page 2‑20.
Sensors There is also an exterior

temperature sensor located behind
the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and
helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the
front of the vehicle could cause a
false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The climate control system uses the
information from these sensors to
maintain your comfort setting by
There is also an interior temperature adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
sensor located next to the speed, and the air delivery mode.
The solar sensor, located in the steering wheel that measures the The system may also supply cooler
defrost grille, middle of the temperature of the air inside your air to the side of the vehicle facing
instrument panel, monitors the solar vehicle. the sun. The recirculation mode will
heat. Do not cover the solar sensor also be used as needed to maintain
or the system will not work properly. cool outlet temperatures.

. Keep the air path under the front
Air Vents Operation Tips
seats clear of objects. This helps
. Keep the hood and front air air to circulate throughout your
Use the air outlets located in the
inlets free of ice, snow, or any vehicle.
center and on the side of the
other obstruction, such as
instrument panel to adjust the . Adding outside equipment to the
leaves. The heater and defroster
direction and amount of airflow front of your vehicle, such as
will work far better, reducing the
inside the vehicle. hood-air deflectors, etc., may
chance of fogging the inside of
Move the louvers up or down to your windows. affect the performance of the
adjust the direction of the airflow. heating and air conditioning
Use the thumbwheel next to or system. Check with your dealer
underneath the outlet to adjust the before adding equipment to the
amount of airflow from the louvers. outside of your vehicle.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-21
Drive Systems
Four-Wheel Drive (Two Speed
Operating Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Automatic
Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Four-Wheel Drive (Single
Driving Information Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Speed Automatic
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Brakes
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Antilock Brake
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-43
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-28
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Engine Exhaust Ride Control Systems
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Running the Vehicle While Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Continuous Damping
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14 Automatic Transmission Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-47
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-30
Truck-Camper Loading Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Cruise Control
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Object Detection Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-50
Rear Vision
Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
9-2 Driving and Operating
Fuel
. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-57 distractions.
Gasoline Specifications (U.S. Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
California Fuel and can take your focus from the programming favorite radio
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-58 judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58 activities divert your attention Program all trip information into
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-59 away from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 governments have enacted laws driving.
Filling a Portable Fuel regarding driver distraction. Become
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area.
Towing to the floor.
General Towing To avoid distracted driving, always . Stop or park the vehicle to tend
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62 keep your eyes on the road, hands
to children.
Driving Characteristics and on the wheel, and mind on the drive.
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 . Keep pets in an appropriate
. Do not use a phone in
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67 carrier or restraint.
demanding driving situations.
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71 Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations
Trailer Sway place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79 phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone.
Conversions and Add-Ons . Watch the road. Do not read,
Add-On Electrical take notes, or look up
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 information on phones or
other electronic devices.
careless and make mistakes.

{ WARNING Anticipate what they might do WARNING (Continued)
and be ready.
Taking your eyes off the road too Do not drink and drive or ride with
long or too often could cause a
. Allow enough following distance a driver who has been drinking.
crash resulting in injury or death. between you and the driver in Ride home in a cab; or if you are
Focus your attention on driving. front of you. with a group, designate a driver
. Focus on the task of driving. who will not drink.
Refer to the infotainment section
for more information on using that Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle
system, including pairing and using Death and injury associated with
a cell phone. drinking and driving is a global Braking, steering, and accelerating
are important factors in helping to
If equipped, refer to the navigation tragedy.
control a vehicle while driving.
manual for information on that
system, including pairing and using { WARNING Braking
a cell phone.
Drinking and then driving is Braking action involves perception
Defensive Driving very dangerous. Your reflexes, time and reaction time. Deciding to
perceptions, attentiveness, and push the brake pedal is perception
Defensive driving means “always judgment can be affected by even time. Actually doing it is
expect the unexpected.” The first reaction time.
a small amount of alcohol. You
step in driving defensively is to wear
can have a serious — or even Average driver reaction time is
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 3‑11. fatal — collision if you drive after about three-quarters of a second.
drinking. In that time, a vehicle moving at
. Assume that other road users 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(Continued)
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and (66 ft), which could be a lot of
other drivers) are going to be distance in an emergency.
Helpful braking tips to keep in mind Steering Curve Tips

include:
Hydraulic Power Steering
. Take curves at a reasonable
. Keep enough distance between speed.
you and the vehicle in front Your vehicle has hydraulic
power steering. It may require
. Reduce speed before entering a
of you.
maintenance. See Power Steering curve.
. Avoid needless heavy braking.
Fluid Power Steering Fluid on . Maintain a reasonable steady
. Keep pace with traffic. page 10‑23. speed through the curve
If the engine ever stops while the If power steering assist is lost . Wait until the vehicle is out of
vehicle is being driven, brake because the engine stops or the the curve before accelerating
normally but do not pump the power steering system is not gently into the straightaway.
brakes. Doing so could make the functioning, the vehicle can be
pedal harder to push down. If the steered but may required increased Steering in Emergencies
engine stops, there will be some effort. See your dealer if there is a . There are some situations when
power brake assist but it will be problem. steering around a problem may
used when the brake is applied. be more effective than braking.
If the vehicle is a hybrid, see the
Once the power assist is used up, it
can take longer to stop and the hybrid supplement for more . Holding both sides of the
information. steering wheel allows you to turn
brake pedal will be harder to push.
180 degrees without removing
a hand.
. Antilock Brake System (ABS)
allows steering while braking.
Off-Road Recovery 2. Turn the steering wheel about Defensive drivers avoid most skids
one-eighth of a turn, until the by taking reasonable care suited to
right front tire contacts the existing conditions, and by not
pavement edge. overdriving those conditions. But
3. Then turn the steering wheel to skids are always possible.
go straight down the roadway. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions:
Loss of Control . Ease your foot off the
Skidding accelerator pedal and quickly
steer the way you want the
There are three types of skids that vehicle to go. The vehicle may
correspond to the vehicle's three straighten out. Be ready for a
control systems: second skid if it occurs.
. Braking Skid — wheels are not . Slow down and adjust your
The vehicle's right wheels can drop rolling. driving according to weather
off the edge of a road onto the conditions. Stopping distance
shoulder while driving. Follow
. Steering or Cornering Skid —
too much speed or steering in a can be longer and vehicle
these tips: control can be affected when
curve causes tires to slip and
1. Ease off the accelerator and lose cornering force. traction is reduced by water,
then, if there is nothing in the snow, ice, gravel, or other
way, steer the vehicle so that it
. Acceleration Skid — too much material on the road. Learn to
straddles the edge of the throttle causes the driving recognize warning clues — such
pavement. wheels to spin. as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a
mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering, Controlling the vehicle is the key to
. Read all the information about
acceleration, or braking, successful off-road driving. One of four-wheel-drive vehicles in this
including reducing vehicle speed the best ways to control the vehicle manual.
by shifting to a lower gear. Any is to control the speed. . Make sure all underbody
sudden changes could cause shields, if equipped, are properly
the tires to slide.
{ WARNING attached.
Remember: Antilock brakes help . Know the local laws that apply to
avoid only the braking skid. When driving off-road, bouncing
off-road driving.
and quick changes in direction
Off-Road Driving can easily throw you out of To gain more ground clearance if
position. This could cause you to needed, it may be necessary to
Four-wheel-drive vehicles can be remove the front fascia lower
lose control and crash. You and
used for off-road driving. Vehicles air dam.
your passengers should always
without four-wheel drive and
vehicles not equipped with All wear safety belts. Notice: Operating the vehicle
Terrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR) for extended periods without
tires must not be driven off-road the front fascia lower air dam
Before Driving Off-Road installed can cause improper air
except on a level, solid surface. To
contact the tire manufacturer for
. Have all necessary maintenance flow to the engine. Re‐attach the
more information about the original and service work completed. front fascia air dam after off-road
equipment tires, see the Limited . Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels, driving.
Warranty and Owner Assistance and check inflation pressure in
Information manual. all tires, including the spare,
if equipped.
Loading the Vehicle for For more information about loading Driving on Hills
Off-Road Driving the vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limits
Driving safely on hills requires good
and Tires.
judgment and an understanding of
{ WARNING Environmental Concerns what the vehicle can and cannot do.
. Unsecured cargo on the . Always use established trails,
load floor can be tossed roads, and areas that have been { WARNING
about when driving over set aside for public off-road
Many hills are simply too steep
rough terrain. You or your recreational driving and obey all
posted regulations. for any vehicle. Driving up hills
passengers can be struck by
can cause the vehicle to stall.
flying objects. Secure the . Do not damage shrubs, flowers, Driving down hills can cause loss
cargo properly. trees, or grasses or disturb of control. Driving across hills can
. Keep cargo in the cargo area wildlife. cause a rollover. You could be
as far forward and as low as . Do not park over things that injured or killed. Do not drive on
possible. The heaviest things burn. See Parking Over Things steep hills.
should be on the floor, that Burn..
forward of the rear axle.
Before driving on a hill, assess
. Heavy loads on the roof raise the steepness, traction, and
the vehicle's center of gravity, obstructions. If the terrain ahead
making it more likely to roll cannot be seen, get out of the
over. You can be seriously or vehicle and walk the hill before
fatally injured if the vehicle driving further.
rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on
the roof.
When driving on hills:

. Never go downhill forward or . When driving down a hill, keep
backward with either the the vehicle headed straight
. Use a low gear and keep a firm transmission or transfer case in down. Use a low gear because
grip on the steering wheel. N (Neutral). The brakes could the engine will work with the
. Maintain a slow speed. overheat and you could lose brakes to slow the vehicle and
. control. help keep the vehicle under
When possible, drive straight up
control.
or down the hill.
{ WARNING
. Slow down when approaching
the top of the hill. If the vehicle has the two‐speed
{ WARNING
. Use headlamps even during the automatic transfer case, shifting Heavy braking when going down
day to make the vehicle more the transfer case to N (Neutral) a hill can cause your brakes to
visible. can cause your vehicle to roll overheat and fade. This could
even if the transmission is in cause loss of control and you or
{ WARNING P (Park). This is because the
N (Neutral) position on the
others could be injured or killed.
Apply the brakes lightly when
Driving to the top of a hill at high transfer case overrides the descending a hill and use a low
speed can cause an accident. transmission. You or someone gear to keep vehicle speed under
There could be a drop-off, else could be injured. If leaving control.
embankment, cliff, or even the vehicle, set the parking brake
another vehicle. You could be and shift the transmission to If the vehicle stalls on a hill:
seriously injured or killed. As you P (Park). Shift the transfer case to
near the top of a hill, slow down any position but N (Neutral). 1. Apply the brakes to stop the
and stay alert. vehicle, and then apply the
parking brake.
2. Shift into P (Park) and then 3. If the vehicle cannot be restarted

. Hidden obstacles can make the
restart the engine. after stalling, set the parking steepness of the incline more
brake, shift an automatic severe. If a rock is driven across
. If driving uphill when the with the uphill wheels, or if the
vehicle stalls, shift to transmission into P (Park), and
turn the vehicle off. downhill wheels drop into a rut
R (Reverse), release the or depression, the vehicle can tilt
parking brake, and back 3.1. Leave the vehicle and even more.
straight down. seek help.
. If an incline must be driven
. Never try to turn the vehicle 3.2. Stay clear of the path the across, and the vehicle starts to
around. If the hill is steep vehicle would take if it slide, turn downhill. This should
enough to stall the vehicle, rolled downhill. help straighten out the vehicle
it is steep enough to cause . Avoid turns that take the vehicle and prevent the side slipping.
it to roll over. across the incline of the hill.
. If you cannot make it up the
hill, back straight down
A hill that can be driven straight
up or down might be too steep to
{ WARNING
the hill. drive across. Driving across an Getting out of the vehicle on the
. Never back down a hill in incline puts more weight on the downhill side when stopped
N (Neutral) using only the downhill wheels which could across an incline is dangerous.
brake. cause a downhill slide or a If the vehicle rolls over, you could
rollover. be crushed or killed. Always get
. The vehicle can roll out on the uphill side of the
backward quickly and you
. Surface conditions can be a
problem. Loose gravel, muddy vehicle and stay well clear of the
could lose control.
spots, or even wet grass can rollover path.
. If driving downhill when the cause the tires to slip sideways,
vehicle stalls, shift to a downhill. If the vehicle slips
lower gear, release the sideways, it can hit something
parking brake, and drive that will trip it – a rock,
straight down the hill. a rut, etc. – and roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, Notice: Do not drive through

or Ice { WARNING standing water if it is deep
enough to cover the wheel hubs,
Use a low gear when driving in Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, axles or exhaust pipe. Deep water
mud – the deeper the mud, the or rivers can be dangerous. Ice can damage the axle and other
lower the gear. Keep the vehicle conditions vary greatly and the vehicle parts.
moving to avoid getting stuck. vehicle could fall through the ice;
you and your passengers could If the standing water is not too deep,
Traction changes when driving on drive slowly through it. At faster
sand. On loose sand, such as on drown. Drive your vehicle on safe
speeds, water splashes on the
beaches or sand dunes, the tires surfaces only.
ignition system and the vehicle can
tend to sink into the sand. This stall. Stalling can also occur if you
affects steering, accelerating, and Driving in Water get the tailpipe under water. While
braking. Drive at a reduced speed the tailpipe is under water, you will
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. { WARNING not be able to start the engine.
When going through water, the
Traction is reduced on hard packed Driving through rushing water can brakes get wet, and it might take
snow and ice and it is easy to lose be dangerous. Deep water can longer to stop. See Driving on Wet
control. Reduce vehicle speed when sweep your vehicle downstream Roads.
driving on hard packed snow and you and your passengers
and ice. After Off-Road Driving
could drown. If it is only shallow
water, it can still wash away the Remove any brush or debris that
ground from under your tires. has collected on the underbody,
Traction could be lost, and the or chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire
vehicle could roll over. Do not
hazard.
drive through rushing water.
After operation in mud or sand, Hydroplaning

have the brake linings cleaned and { WARNING Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
checked. These substances can
Wet brakes can cause crashes. can build up under the vehicle's
cause glazing and uneven braking.
They might not work as well in a tires so they actually ride on the
Check the body structure, steering,
quick stop and could cause water. This can happen if the road is
suspension, wheels, tires, and
pulling to one side. You could wet enough and you are going fast
exhaust system for damage and
lose control of the vehicle. enough. When the vehicle is
check the fuel lines and cooling
hydroplaning, it has little or no
system for any leakage. After driving through a large contact with the road.
More frequent maintenance puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake There is no hard and fast rule about
service is required. Refer to the
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Maintenance Schedule for more pedal until the brakes work
slow down when the road is wet.
information. normally.
Flowing or rushing water creates Other Rainy Weather Tips
Driving on Wet Roads strong forces. Driving through Besides slowing down, other wet
Rain and wet roads can reduce flowing water could cause the weather driving tips include:
vehicle traction and affect your vehicle to be carried away. If this . Allow extra following distance.
ability to stop and accelerate. happens, you and other vehicle
Always drive slower in these types occupants could drown. Do not
. Pass with caution.
of driving conditions and avoid ignore police warnings and be . Keep windshield wiping
driving through large puddles and very cautious about trying to drive equipment in good shape.
deep‐standing or flowing water. through flowing water. . Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.

. Have good tires with proper
Hill and Mountain Roads
tread depth. See Tires on { WARNING
page 10‑46. Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
. Turn off cruise control.
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is
driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will have
Highway Hypnosis to do all the work of slowing down
. Keep the vehicle serviced and in
Always be alert and pay attention to good shape. and they could get so hot that
your surroundings while driving. they would not work well. You
If you become tired or sleepy, find a
. Check all fluid levels and brakes, would then have poor braking or
safe place to park the vehicle tires, cooling system, and even none going down a hill. You
and rest. transmission. could crash. Always have the
. Shift to a lower gear when going engine running and the vehicle in
Other driving tips include:
down steep or long hills. gear when going downhill.
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
. Keep the interior
temperature cool.
{ WARNING . Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
. Keep your eyes moving — scan If you do not shift down, the
center of the road. Drive at
the road ahead and to the sides. brakes could get so hot that they speeds that let you stay in your
would not work well. You would own lane.
. Check the rearview mirror and then have poor braking or even
vehicle instruments often. none going down a hill. You could
. Be alert on top of hills;
crash. Shift down to let the engine something could be in your lane
assist the brakes on a steep (stalled car, accident).
downhill slope.

. Pay attention to special road Try not to break the fragile traction. Blizzard Conditions
signs (falling rocks area, winding If you accelerate too fast, the drive
roads, long grades, passing or Being stuck in snow can be a
wheels will spin and polish the
no-passing zones) and take serious situation. Stay with the
surface under the tires even more.
appropriate action. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) If possible, use the Roadside
on page 9‑41 improves vehicle Assistance Program (U.S. and
Winter Driving stability during hard stops on Canada) on page 13‑7 or Roadside
Driving on Snow or Ice slippery roads, but apply the brakes Assistance Program (Mexico) on
sooner than when on dry pavement. page 13‑9. To get help and keep
Drive carefully when there is snow everyone in the vehicle safe:
or ice between the tires and the Allow greater following distance on
road, creating less traction or grip. any slippery road and watch for . Turn on the hazard warning
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C slippery spots. Icy patches can flashers.
(32°F) when freezing rain begins to occur on otherwise clear roads in . Tie a red cloth to an outside
fall, resulting in even less traction. shaded areas. The surface of a
mirror.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in curve or an overpass can remain icy
freezing rain until roads can be when the surrounding roads are
treated with salt or sand. clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
Drive with caution, whatever the on ice.
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too Turn off cruise control on slippery
quickly causes the wheels to spin surfaces.
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
feel really uncomfortable from the

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument If it takes some time for help to
cause exhaust gases to get panel. arrive, now and then when you run
inside. Engine exhaust contains the engine, push the accelerator
. Adjust the climate control pedal slightly so the engine runs
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that
cannot be seen or smelled. It can faster than the idle speed. This
circulates the air inside the keeps the battery charged to restart
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed the vehicle and to signal for help
death. to the highest setting. See with the headlamps. Do this as little
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems” in as possible to save fuel.
the Index.
. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, For more information about If the Vehicle Is Stuck
especially any that is blocking carbon monoxide, see Engine
Slowly and cautiously spin the
the exhaust pipe. Exhaust on page 9‑29.
wheels to free the vehicle when
. Check again from time to stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
time to be sure snow does Run the engine for short periods See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It
not collect there. only as needed to keep warm, but Out” later in this section.
be careful. If the vehicle has a traction system,
. Open a window about 5 cm
(2 in) on the side of the To save fuel, run the engine for only it can often help to free a stuck
vehicle that is away from the short periods as needed to warm vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's
wind to bring in fresh air. the vehicle and then shut the engine traction system in the Index. If stuck
off and close the window most of too severely for the traction system
(Continued)
the way to save heat. Repeat this to free the vehicle, turn the traction
until help arrives but only when you system off and use the rocking
method.
possible. To prevent transmission

{ WARNING wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
If the vehicle's tires spin at high Release the accelerator pedal while
speed, they can explode, and you shifting, and press lightly on the
or others could be injured. The accelerator pedal when the
vehicle can overheat, causing an transmission is in gear. Slowly
engine compartment fire or other spinning the wheels in the forward
damage. Spin the wheels as little and reverse directions causes a
as possible and avoid going rocking motion that could free the
above 56 km/h (35 mph). vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might
need to be towed out. Recovery Notice: Never use recovery
For information about using tire
hooks can be used, if the vehicle hooks to tow the vehicle. Your
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
has them. If the vehicle does need vehicle could be damaged and it
Chains on page 10‑65.
to be towed out, see Towing the would not be covered by
Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle on page 10‑84. warranty.
it Out Recovery Hooks The recovery hooks at the front of
Turn the steering wheel left and the vehicle can be used if the
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
{ WARNING vehicle is stuck off-road and needs
to be pulled to some place where
vehicles with a two‐speed automatic Never pull on recovery hooks you can continue driving.
transfer case, shift into Four‐Wheel from the side. The hooks could
High. For vehicles with StabiliTrak, break and you and others could
turn the traction control part of the be injured. When using recovery
system off. Shift back and forth hooks, always pull the vehicle
between R (Reverse) and a forward straight out.
gear, spinning the wheels as little as
Vehicle Load Limits WARNING (Continued)

pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
It is very important to know how attached below the door lock
much weight your vehicle can vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a post (striker). The tire and
carry. This weight is called the loading information label shows
vehicle capacity weight and crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle. the number of occupant seating
includes the weight of all positions (A), and the maximum
occupants, cargo, and all vehicle capacity weight (B) in
nonfactory-installed options. Tire and Loading Information
Label kilograms and pounds.
Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it was The Tire and Loading
designed to carry, the Tire and Information label also shows the
Loading Information label and size of the original equipment
the Certification/Tire label. tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
{ WARNING For more information on tires
and inflation see Tires on
Do not load the vehicle any page 10‑46 and Tire Pressure
heavier than the Gross on page 10‑53.
Vehicle Weight Rating There is also important loading
(GVWR), or either the information on the vehicle
maximum front or rear Gross Label Example Certification/Tire label. It tells
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). you the Gross Vehicle Weight
This can cause systems to A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
break and change the way the Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
is attached to the center
(Continued)
the front and rear axles. See there will be five 150 lb
“Certification/Tire Label” later in passengers in your vehicle,
this section. the amount of available cargo
Steps for Determining Correct
and luggage load capacity is
Load Limit 650 lbs (1400−750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lbs).
1. Locate the statement
“The combined weight of 5. Determine the combined
occupants and cargo should weight of luggage and cargo
never exceed XXX kg or being loaded on the vehicle.
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's That weight may not safely
placard. exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity Example 1
2. Determine the combined calculated in Step 4. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
weight of the driver and Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
passengers that will be riding 6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg
3. Subtract the combined your vehicle. Consult this (300 lbs)
weight of the driver and manual to determine how this C. Available Occupant and Cargo
passengers from XXX kg or reduces the available cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs)
XXX lbs. and luggage load capacity of
4. The resulting figure equals your vehicle. See Trailer
the available amount of cargo Towing on page 9‑67 for
and luggage load capacity. important information on
For example, if the “XXX” towing a trailer, towing safety
amount equals 1400 lbs and rules and trailering tips.
weight of the driver, passengers

and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs) Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
B. Subtract Occupant Weight @ B. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg
(750 lbs) (1,000 lbs) A vehicle specific Certification/
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight = Tire label is attached to the rear
113 kg (250 lbs) 0 kg (0 lbs) edge of the driver door. The
label shows the size of your
Refer to your vehicle's tire and
vehicle's original tires and the
loading information label for
inflation pressures needed to
specific information about your
obtain the gross weight capacity
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
of your vehicle. This is called

Gross Vehicle Weight { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR In the case of a sudden stop could cause loss of control
includes the weight of the or collision, things carried in and a crash. Overloading can
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and the bed of your truck could also shorten the life of the
cargo. shift forward and come into vehicle.
The Certification/Tire label also the passenger area, injuring
tells you the maximum weights you and others. If you put Your warranty does not cover
for the front and rear axles, things in the bed of your truck, parts or components that fail
called Gross Axle Weight you should make sure they because of overloading.
Rating (GAWR). To find out the are properly secured.
actual loads on your front and The label will help you decide
rear axles, you need to go to a how much cargo and installed
weigh station and weigh your equipment your truck can carry.
vehicle. Your dealer can help
{ WARNING Using heavier suspension
you with this. Be sure to spread Do not load the vehicle any components to get added
out your load equally on both heavier than the Gross durability might not change your
sides of the centerline. Vehicle Weight Rating weight ratings. Ask your dealer
Never exceed the GVWR for (GVWR), or either the to help you load your vehicle the
your vehicle, or the GAWR for maximum front or rear Gross right way.
either the front or rear axle. Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you put things inside your
This can cause systems to vehicle — like suitcases,
And, if you do have a heavy break and change the way
load, you should spread it out. tools, packages, or anything
the vehicle handles. This else — they will go as fast as the
(Continued)
vehicle goes. If you have to stop Notice: Overloading the

or turn quickly, or if there is a WARNING (Continued) vehicle may cause damage.
crash, they will keep going. . When you carry something Repairs would not be covered
inside the vehicle, secure by the vehicle warranty. Do
{ WARNING it whenever you can. not overload the vehicle.
Things you put inside the . Do not leave a seat folded Truck-Camper Loading
vehicle can strike and injure down unless you need to. Information
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash. The vehicle was neither
There is also important loading
designed nor intended to carry
. Put things in the cargo information for off-road driving in
a slide-in type camper.
area of the vehicle. Try to this manual. See “Loading Your
spread the weight evenly. Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” Notice: Adding a slide-in
under Off-Road Driving on camper or similar equipment
. Never stack heavier to the vehicle can damage it,
page 9‑6.
things, like suitcases, and the repairs would not be
inside the vehicle so that Add-On Equipment covered by the vehicle
some of them are above When you carry removable warranty. Do not install a
the tops of the seats. items, you may need to put a slide-in camper or similar
. Do not leave an limit on how many people you equipment on the vehicle.
unsecured child restraint can carry inside your vehicle.
in the vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
(Continued) before you buy and install the
new equipment.

. Avoid making hard stops for
Starting and the first 322 km (200 miles) or
Adjustable Throttle and
Operating so. During this time the new Brake Pedal
brake linings are not yet On vehicles with this feature, you
New Vehicle Break-In broken in. Hard stops with can change the position of the
new linings can mean throttle and brake pedals.
Notice: The vehicle does not premature wear and earlier
need an elaborate break-in. But it replacement. Follow this No adjustment to the pedals can
will perform better in the long run breaking-in guideline every be made when the vehicle is in
if you follow these guidelines: time you get new brake R (Reverse) or while using cruise
linings. control.
. Keep the vehicle speed at
88 km/h (55 mph) or less for . Do not tow a trailer during
the first 805 km (500 miles). break-in. See Trailer Towing
. Do not drive at any one on page 9‑67 for the trailer
constant speed, fast or slow, towing capabilities of the
for the first 805 km vehicle and more
(500 miles). Do not make information.
full-throttle starts. Avoid Following break‐in, engine speed The control used to adjust the
downshifting to brake or and load can be gradually pedals is located on the instrument
slow the vehicle. increased. panel below the climate control
system.
Press the bottom of the control to
move the pedals closer. Press the
top of the control to move the
pedals away.
Before you start driving, fully press To shift out of P (Park), the ignition If the vehicle must be shut off in an
the brake pedal to confirm the must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ emergency:
adjustment is right for you. While ACCESSORY and the regular brake 1. Brake using a firm and steady
driving, make only small pedal must be applied. pressure. Do not pump the
adjustments. A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ brakes repeatedly. This may
The vehicle may have a memory LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is deplete power assist, requiring
function which lets pedal settings be stopped, turn the ignition switch to increased brake pedal force.
saved and recalled. See Memory LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).
Seats on page 3‑7. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) This can be done while the
will remain active. See Retained vehicle is moving. After shifting
Ignition Positions Accessory Power (RAP) on to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
page 9‑26. brakes and steer the vehicle to a
This position locks the ignition. safe location.
It also locks the transmission on 3. Come to a complete stop, shift
automatic transmission vehicles. to P (Park), and turn the ignition
The key can be removed in to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
LOCK/OFF. an automatic transmission, the
Do not turn the engine off when the shift lever must be in P (Park) to
vehicle is moving. This will cause a turn the ignition switch to the
loss of power assist in the brake LOCK/OFF position.
and steering systems and disable 4. Set the parking brake. See
the airbags. Parking Brake on page 9‑42.
The ignition switch has four different

positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the The switch stays in this position
{ WARNING key to turn in the ignition could when the engine is running. The
cause damage to the switch or transmission is also unlocked in this
Turning off the vehicle while break the key. Use the correct position on automatic transmission
moving may cause loss of power key, make sure it is all the way in, vehicles.
assist in the brake and steering and turn it only with your hand.
systems and disable the airbags. If you leave the key in the ACC/
If the key cannot be turned by ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position
While driving, only shut the hand, see your dealer.
vehicle off in an emergency. with the engine off, the battery could
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This be drained. You may not be able to
position lets things like the radio start the vehicle if the battery is
If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and the windshield wipers operate allowed to drain for an extended
and must be shut off while driving, while the engine is off. Use this period of time.
turn the ignition to ACC/ position if the vehicle must be D (START): This is the position that
ACCESSORY. pushed or towed. starts the engine. When the engine
The steering can bind with the C (ON/RUN): This position can be starts, release the key. The ignition
wheels turned off center. If this used to operate the electrical switch returns to ON/RUN for
happens, move the steering wheel accessories and to display some driving.
from right to left while turning the instrument panel cluster warning A warning tone will sound when the
key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this and indicator lights. This position driver door is opened and the
does not work, then the vehicle can also be used for service and ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
needs service. diagnostics, and to verify the proper LOCK/OFF, and the key is in the
operation of the malfunction ignition.
indicator lamp as may be required
for emission inspection purposes.
Starting the Engine The vehicle has a When the Low Fuel warning
Computer-Controlled Cranking lamp is on and the FUEL LEVEL
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or System. This feature assists in LOW message is displayed in
N (Neutral). The engine will not start starting the engine and protects the Driver Information Center
in any other position. To restart the components. If the ignition key is (DIC), the Computer-Controlled
engine when the vehicle is already turned to the START position, Cranking System is disabled to
moving, use N (Neutral) only. and then released when the prevent possible vehicle
Notice: Do not try to shift to engine begins cranking, the component damage. When this
P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. engine will continue cranking for happens, hold the ignition switch
If you do, you could damage the a few seconds or until the in the START position to
transmission. Shift to P (Park) vehicle starts. If the engine does continue engine cranking.
only when the vehicle is stopped. not start and the key is held in Notice: Cranking the engine for
START, cranking will be stopped long periods of time, by returning
Starting Procedure after 15 seconds to prevent the key to the START position
1. With your foot off the accelerator cranking motor damage. To immediately after cranking has
pedal, turn the ignition to START. prevent gear damage, this ended, can overheat and damage
When the engine starts, let go of system also prevents cranking if the cranking motor, and drain the
the key. The idle speed will slow the engine is already running. battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
down as the engine warms. Do Engine cranking can be stopped between each try, to let the
not race the engine immediately by turning the ignition switch to cranking motor cool down.
after starting it. Operate the the ACC/ACCESSORY or
engine and transmission gently LOCK/OFF position.
to allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
2. If the engine does not start after covered by the vehicle warranty. tie which secures the electrical
five to 10 seconds, especially in See Add-On Electrical Equipment cord. Do not cut the
very cold weather (below −18°C on page 9‑80. electrical cord.
or 0°F), it could be flooded with 3. Plug the cord into a normal,
too much gasoline. Try pushing Engine Heater grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there The engine coolant heater can
as you hold the key in START provide easier starting and better { WARNING
for up to a maximum of fuel economy during engine
warm-up in cold weather conditions Plugging the cord into an
15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to at or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicles ungrounded outlet could cause an
allow the cranking motor to cool with an engine heater should be electrical shock. Also, the wrong
down. When the engine starts, plugged in at least four hours before kind of extension cord could
let go of the key and accelerator. starting. An internal thermostat in overheat and cause a fire. You
If the vehicle starts briefly but the plug-end of the cord may exist could be seriously injured. Plug
then stops again, repeat these which will prevent engine coolant the cord into a properly grounded
steps. This clears the extra heater operation at temperatures three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
gasoline from the engine. Do not above −18°C (0°F). If the cord will not reach, use a
race the engine immediately To Use the Engine Coolant heavy-duty three-prong extension
after starting it. Operate the Heater cord rated for at least 15 amps.
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and 1. Turn off the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be
lubricates all moving parts. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the sure to unplug and store the
Notice: If you add electrical parts electrical cord. The cord is cord as it was before to keep it
or accessories, you could change secured to the engine away from moving engine parts.
the way the engine operates. Any compartment fuse block with a If you do not, it could be
resulting damage would not be clip. Carefully remove the wire damaged.
The length of time the heater should Shifting Into Park WARNING (Continued)
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the { WARNING N (Neutral). If you are pulling a
vehicle for the best advice on this. It can be dangerous to get out of trailer, see Driving Characteristics
the vehicle if the shift lever is not and Towing Tips on page 9‑63.
Retained Accessory fully in P (Park) with the parking Always set the parking brake.
Power (RAP) brake firmly set. The vehicle can
The following vehicle accessories roll. If you have left the engine 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then
can be used for up to 10 minutes running, the vehicle can move set the parking brake.
after the engine is turned off: suddenly. You or others could be See Parking Brake on page 9‑42
injured. To be sure the vehicle will for more information.
. Audio System not move, even when you are on
. Power Windows fairly level ground, use the steps 2. Move the shift lever into the
P (Park) position by pulling the
. OnStar System (if equipped) that follow. If you have a
shift lever toward you and
four-wheel drive transfer case
. Sunroof (if equipped) moving it up as far as it will go.
with a N (Neutral) position, and
These features work when the key the transfer case is in N (Neutral), 3. Be sure the transfer case is in a
is in ON/RUN or ACC/ the vehicle will be free to roll, drive gear — not in N (Neutral).
ACCESSORY. Once the key is even if the shift lever is in 4. Turn the ignition key to
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, P (Park). So, be sure the transfer LOCK/OFF.
the windows and sunroof continue case is in a drive gear — not in
to work up to 10 minutes until any 5. Remove the key and take it with
(Continued) you. If you can leave the vehicle
door is opened. The radio continues
to work for up to 10 minutes or until with the ignition key in your
the driver door is opened. hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the If you have to leave the vehicle with When you are ready to drive, move
Engine Running the engine running, be sure your the shift lever out of P (Park) before
vehicle is in P (Park) and the you release the parking brake.
parking brake is firmly set before
{ WARNING you leave it. After you move the shift
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle push
It can be dangerous to leave the lever into P (Park), hold the regular yours a little uphill to take some of
vehicle with the engine running. brake pedal down. Then, see if you the pressure from the parking pawl
The vehicle could move suddenly can move the shift lever away from in the transmission, then you will be
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) without first pulling it toward able to pull the shift lever out of
you. If you can, it means that the P (Park).
P (Park) with the parking brake
shift lever was not fully locked into
firmly set.
P (Park).
If you have four-wheel drive and
Shifting out of Park
the transfer case is in N (Neutral), Torque Lock This vehicle is equipped with an
the vehicle will be free to roll, If you are parking on a hill and electronic shift lock release system.
even if the shift lever is in you do not shift your transmission The shift lock release is
P (Park). So be sure the transfer into P (Park) properly, the weight designed to:
case is in a drive gear — not in of the vehicle may put too much . Prevent ignition key removal
N (Neutral). force on the parking pawl in the unless the shift lever is in
transmission. You may find it difficult P (Park) with the shift lever
And, if you leave the vehicle to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
with the engine running, it could button fully released.
This is called torque lock. To
overheat and even catch fire. You prevent torque lock, set the parking . Prevent movement of the shift
or others could be injured. Do not brake and then shift into P (Park) lever out of P (Park), unless the
leave the vehicle with the engine properly before you leave the driver ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
running unless you have to. seat. To find out how, see Shifting ACCESSORY and the regular
Into Park on page 9‑26. brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always 3. Move the shift lever to the Active Fuel Management®
functional except in the case of an desired position.
uncharged or low voltage (less than Vehicles with V8 engines may have
If you are still having a problem Active Fuel Management™. This
9 volt) battery. shifting, then have the vehicle system allows the engine to operate
If the vehicle has an uncharged serviced soon. on either all or half of its cylinders,
battery or a battery with low voltage, depending on the driving conditions.
try charging or jump starting the Parking over Things When less power is required, such
battery. See Jump Starting on
That Burn as cruising at a constant vehicle
speed, the system will operate in
To shift out of P (Park) use the
following:
{ WARNING the half cylinder mode, allowing the
vehicle to achieve better fuel
1. Apply the brake pedal. Things that can burn could touch economy. When greater power
hot exhaust parts under the demands are required, such as
2. Move the shift lever to the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park accelerating from a stop, passing,
desired position. or merging onto a freeway, the
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
If you still are unable to shift out of or other things that can burn. system will maintain full-cylinder
P (Park): operation.
1. Ease the pressure on the shift If the vehicle has an Active Fuel
lever. Management™ indicator, see Driver
2. While holding down the brake Information Center (DIC) on
pedal, press the shift lever all page 5‑25 for more information on
the way into P (Park). using this display.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or aftermarket
to, here are some things to know.
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is
. Drive it only with the windows dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
garages, tunnels, deep snow contains carbon monoxide (CO)
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled.
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑29.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
{ WARNING { WARNING Automatic

It can be dangerous to get out of If the vehicle has a four-wheel
Transmission
the vehicle if the automatic drive transfer case with a The vehicle has a
transmission shift lever is not fully N (Neutral) position, and the Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic
in P (Park) with the parking brake transfer case is in N (Neutral), the transmission, and has an electronic
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do vehicle may roll, even if the shift position indicator within the
not leave the vehicle when the automatic transmission shift lever instrument panel cluster. The
engine is running unless you is in P (Park). So, be sure the electronic shift position indicator
displays when the shift lever is
have to. If you have left the transfer case is in a drive
moved out of P (Park).
engine running, the vehicle can gear — not in N (Neutral).
move suddenly. You or others Always set the parking brake. There are several different positions
could be injured. To be sure the for the shift lever.
vehicle will not move, even when Follow the proper steps to be sure
you are on fairly level ground, the vehicle will not move. See
always set the parking brake and Shifting Into Park on page 9‑26.
move the shift lever to P (Park).
If parking on a hill and pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 9‑63.
See “Range Selection Mode” under
Manual Mode on page 9‑33.
P (Park): This position locks your
rear wheels. It is the best position to
use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
When parked on a hill, especially R (Reverse): Use this gear to

when the vehicle has a heavy load, WARNING (Continued) back up.
you may notice an increase in the Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
effort to shift out of P (Park). See See Shifting Into Park on
while the vehicle is moving
“Torque Lock” under Shifting Into page 9‑26. If you are pulling a
forward could damage the
Park on page 9‑26 for more trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission. The repairs would
information. and Towing Tips on page 9‑63. not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
{ WARNING after the vehicle is stopped.
It is dangerous to get out of the { WARNING To rock the vehicle back and forth to
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully get out of snow, ice, or sand without
If the vehicle has a four-wheel damaging the transmission, see If
in P (Park) with the parking brake
drive transfer case with a the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑14.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
N (Neutral) position, and the
Do not leave the vehicle when the N (Neutral): In this position, the
transfer case is in N (Neutral), the
engine does not connect with the
engine is running unless you vehicle will be free to roll — even wheels. To restart the engine when
have to. If you have left the if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be the vehicle is already moving, use
engine running, the vehicle can sure the transfer case is in a drive N (Neutral) only. Also, use
move suddenly. You or others gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
could be injured. To be sure the Four-Wheel Drive High or being towed.
vehicle will not move, even when Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in
you are on fairly level ground, N (Neutral). See Shifting Into Park
always set the parking brake and on page 9‑26. Always set the
move the shift lever to P (Park). parking brake.
(Continued)
D (Drive): This position is for When temperatures are very cold,

{ WARNING normal driving. It provides the best the Hydra-Matic® automatic
fuel economy for the vehicle. If you transmission's gear shifting may be
Shifting into a drive gear while the need more power for passing, and delayed providing more stable shifts
engine is running at high speed is you are: until the engine warms up. Shifts
dangerous. Unless your foot is may be more noticeable with a cold
firmly on the brake pedal, the
. Going less than about 55 km/h
(35 mph), push the accelerator transmission. This difference in
vehicle could move very rapidly. shifting is normal.
You could lose control and hit pedal about halfway down.
. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or M (Manual Mode): This position
people or objects. Do not shift
more, push the accelerator all lets drivers select the range of gears
into a drive gear while the engine
the way down. appropriate for current driving
is running at high speed. conditions. See “Range Selection
D (Drive) can be used when towing Mode” under Manual Mode on
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or a trailer, carrying a heavy load, page 9‑33
N (Neutral) with the engine driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the Notice: Spinning the tires or
running at high speed may holding the vehicle in one
damage the transmission. The transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts place on a hill using only the
repairs would not be covered by accelerator pedal may damage
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the too often.
the transmission. The repair will
engine is not running at high Downshifting the transmission in not be covered by the vehicle
speed when shifting the vehicle. slippery road conditions could result warranty. If you are stuck, do not
in skidding, see “Skidding” under spin the tires. When stopping on
Loss of Control on page 9‑5. a hill, use the brakes to hold the
vehicle in place.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization The transmission constantly makes To use this feature, do the following:
feature that adjusts the transmission adjustments to improve vehicle 1. Move the shift lever to the
shifting to the current driving performance according to the way M (Manual Mode).
conditions in order to reduce rapid the vehicle is being used, such as
upshifts and downshifts. This shift with a heavy load. During this 2. Press the plus/minus button, to
stabilization feature is designed to adaptive shift controls process, upshift or downshift selecting the
determine, before making an some shifts may feel different as the desired range of gears for
upshift, if the engine will be able to transmission determines the best current driving conditions.
maintain vehicle speed by analyzing settings for a particular shift. When in M (Manual Mode) a number
things such as throttle position, displays next to the M, indicating the
vehicle load, and hill grade. If the Manual Mode current gear that has been selected.
shift stabilization feature determines The number displayed in the gear
that a current vehicle speed cannot Range Selection Mode indicator is the highest gear that can
be maintained, the transmission be used. However, the vehicle can
does not upshift and instead holds automatically shift to lower gears as
the current gear. In some cases, this it adjusts to driving conditions. This
may appear to be a delayed shift, means that all gears below that
however the transmission is number are available. When 5 (Fifth)
operating normally. is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)
The vehicle's transmission gears are automatically shifted by
uses adaptive shift controls. On vehicles with a Range Selection the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be
Adaptive shift controls continually Mode, this feature may be used to used until the plus/minus button
compares key shift parameters control the vehicle's transmission. located on the steering column lever
to pre‐programmed ideal shift is used to change to the gear.
conditions stored in the
transmissions computer.
Range Selection Mode controls the transmission cooling while driving Grade Braking is only active while
vehicle and engine speed while down steep hills or mountain the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and
driving down a hill or towing a trailer, grades, towing, or hauling heavy you are not in the Range Selection
by allowing you to select a desired loads. Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed
range of gears. Press the button located on the end previously and Manual Mode on
Grade Braking is not available when of the shift lever to turn the tow/haul page 9‑33 for more information on
the Range Selection Mode is active. on or off. While the tow/haul is on, a the Range Selection Mode. Grade
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑34 light on the instrument panel cluster Braking assists in maintaining
for more information. comes on. desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades by automatically
While using the Range Selection See Tow/Haul Mode Light on implementing a shift schedule that
Mode, Cruise Control and the Tow/ page 5‑21 and Hill and Mountain utilizes the engine and transmission
Haul Mode can be used. Roads on page 9‑12 for more to slow the vehicle. This reduces
information. wear on the braking system and
Tow/Haul Mode Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under increases control of the vehicle.
Towing Equipment on page 9‑71 for Grade Braking monitors vehicle
more information. speed, acceleration, engine torque
and brake pedal usage. Using this
Grade Braking information, it detects when the
The Grade Braking shift modes can truck is on a downhill grade and the
be activated by pressing the button driver desires to slow the vehicle by
on the end of the shift control lever. pressing the brake.
The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode. While in Range Selection Mode,
The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts the Grade Braking is deactivated
transmission shift pattern to reduce allowing the driver to select a
shift cycling, providing increased desired range of gears.
performance, vehicle control, and
Drive Systems While driving on clean dry pavement Automatic Transfer Case
and during tight turns, you may
experience a vibration in the
Four-Wheel Drive steering system.
(Two Speed Automatic The vehicle has StabiliTrak®.
Transfer Case) Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, will turn Traction Control and
you can send the engine's driving StabiliTrak off. See StabiliTrak®
power to all four wheels for extra System on page 9‑44.
traction. Read the following before Front Axle
using four-wheel drive.
The front axle engages and
Notice: Driving on clean, dry disengages automatically when you
pavement in Four-Wheel Drive shift the transfer case. Some delay
High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for for the axle to engage or disengage The transfer case knob is located to
an extended period of time may is normal. the left of the instrument panel
cause premature wear on the
cluster.
vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive
on clean, dry pavement in Use this dial to shift into and out of
Four-Wheel Drive High or four-wheel drive.
Four-Wheel Drive Low for You can choose among five driving
extended periods of time. settings:
Indicator lights in the switches show
you which setting you are in. The
indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and
the last chosen setting will stay on.
If the lights do not come on, you 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
should take the vehicle to your the Four-Wheel Drive High position
{ WARNING
dealer for service. An indicator light when you need extra traction, such
will flash while shifting. It will stay on Shifting the transfer case to
as on snowy or icy roads or in most N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
when the shift is completed. If for off-road situations. This setting also
some reason the transfer case to roll even if the transmission is
engages your front axle to help
cannot make a requested shift, it will in P (Park). You or someone else
drive the vehicle. This is the best
return to the last chosen setting. could be seriously injured. Be
setting to use when plowing snow.
sure to set the parking brake
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This before placing the transfer case in
setting is used for driving in most setting also engages the front axle N (Neutral). See Parking Brake on
street and highway situations. and delivers extra torque. You may page 9‑42.
The front axle is not engaged in never need this setting. It sends
two-wheel drive. This setting also maximum power to all four wheels.
provides the best fuel economy. N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's
You might choose Four-Wheel Drive
transfer case to N (Neutral) only
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Low if you are driving off-road in
when towing the vehicle. See
Drive): This setting is ideal for deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
use when road surface traction and while climbing or descending
page 10‑85 or Towing the Vehicle
conditions are variable. When steep hills.
driving the vehicle in AUTO, the The vehicle has StabiliTrak. Shifting
front axle is engaged, and the If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
into Four-Wheel Drive Low will turn
vehicle's power is sent to the front message stays on, you should
Traction Control and StabiliTrak off.
and rear wheels automatically take the vehicle to your dealer for
See StabiliTrak® System on
based on driving conditions. Driving service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL
page 9‑44.
in this mode results in slightly lower DRIVE” message under
fuel economy than Two-Wheel Transmission Messages on
Drive High. page 5‑40.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Extended high-speed operation The vehicle may have significant
High or AUTO (Automatic in 4L may damage or shorten the life engagement noise and bump when
Four-Wheel Drive) of the drivetrain. shifting between Four-Wheel Drive
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low and Four-Wheel Drive High
Drive High or AUTO position. This Low position, the ignition must be in ranges or from N (Neutral) while the
can be done at any speed, except ON/RUN and the vehicle must be engine is running.
when shifting from Four-Wheel stopped or moving less than 5 km/h If the knob is turned to the
Drive Low. The indicator light will (3 mph) with the transmission in Four-Wheel Drive Low position
flash while shifting. It will remain on N (Neutral). The preferred method when the vehicle is in gear and/or
when the shift is completed. for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive moving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),
Low is to have the vehicle moving the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
Shifting Into Two-Wheel
1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn the light will flash for 30 seconds and
Drive High
knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low not complete the shift. After
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel position. You must wait for the 30 seconds the transfer case
Drive High position. This can be Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will shift to Four-Wheel Drive
done at any speed, except when to stop flashing and remain on High mode. With the vehicle moving
shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. before shifting the transmission less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
See “Shifting Out of Four-Wheel into gear. transmission in N (Neutral), attempt
Drive Low” in this section for more Notice: Shifting the transmission the shift again.
information. into gear before the requested Shifting Out of Four-Wheel
mode indicator light has stopped Drive Low
Shifting Into Four-Wheel
flashing could damage the
Drive Low To shift from Four-Wheel Drive
transfer case. To help avoid
When Four-Wheel Drive Low is Low to Four-Wheel Drive High,
damaging the vehicle, always wait
engaged, vehicle speed should be AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High,
for the mode indicator lights to
kept below 72 km/h (45 mph). the vehicle must be stopped or
stop flashing before shifting the
moving less than 5 km/h (3 mph)
transmission into gear.
with the transmission in N (Neutral) If the knob is turned to the 5. Shift the transfer case to
and the ignition in ON/RUN. The Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, Two-Wheel Drive High.
preferred method for shifting out of or Two-Wheel Drive High switch 6. Turn the transfer case dial
Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have position when the vehicle is in gear clockwise to N (Neutral) until it
your vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h and/or moving more than 5 km/h stops and hold it there until
(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to the (3 mph), the Four-Wheel Drive High, the N (Neutral) light starts
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High blinking. This will take at least
or Two-Wheel Drive High position. indicator light will flash for 10 seconds. Then slowly release
You must wait for the Four-Wheel 30 seconds but will not complete the the dial to the Four‐Wheel Drive
Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel shift. With the vehicle moving less Low position. The N (Neutral)
Drive High indicator light to stop than 5 km/h (3 mph) and the light will come on when the
flashing and remain on before transmission is in N (Neutral), transfer case shift to N (Neutral)
shifting the transmission into gear. attempt the shift again. is complete.
Notice: Shifting the transmission Shifting into Neutral 7. If the engine is running, verify
into gear before the requested that the transfer case is in
mode indicator light has stopped To shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral) do the following: N (Neutral) by shifting the
flashing could damage the transmission to R (Reverse) for
transfer case. To help avoid 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked one second, then shift the
damaging the vehicle, always wait so that it will not roll. transmission to D (Drive) for
for the mode indicator lights to 2. Set the parking brake and apply one second.
stop flashing before shifting the the regular brake pedal. See
transmission into gear. 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/
Parking Brake on page 9‑42 for ACCESSORY, which will turn
The vehicle may have significant more information. the engine off.
engagement noise and bump when 3. Start the vehicle or turn the
shifting between Four-Wheel Drive 9. Place the transmission shift
ignition to ON/RUN. lever in P (Park).
Low and Four-Wheel Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) while the 4. Put the transmission in
engine is running. N (Neutral).
10. Release the parking brake prior Notice: Shifting the transmission Four-Wheel Drive
to moving the vehicle. into gear before the Four-Wheel
Drive Low indicator light has
(Single Speed Automatic
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Transfer Case)
stopped flashing could damage
Shifting Out of Neutral the transfer case. To help avoid If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,
To shift out of N Neutral do the damaging the vehicle, always wait you can send the engine's driving
following: for the Four-Wheel Drive Low power to all four wheels for extra
indicator light to stop flashing traction. Read the following before
1. Set the parking brake and apply before shifting the transmission using four-wheel drive.
the regular brake pedal. into gear.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 5. Start the engine and shift the pavement in Four-Wheel Drive
the engine off, and shift the transmission to the desired High for an extended period of
transmission to N (Neutral). position. time may cause premature wear
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the Excessively shifting the transfer on the vehicle's powertrain. Do
desired transfer case shift case into or out of the different not drive on clean, dry pavement
position (Two-Wheel Drive High, modes may cause the transfer case in Four-Wheel Drive High for
Four-Wheel Drive High, to enter the shift protection mode. extended periods of time.
or AUTO). This will protect the transfer case While driving on clean dry pavement
After the transfer case has from possible damage and will only and during tight turns, you may
shifted out of N (Neutral), the allow the transfer case to respond to experience a vibration in the
N (Neutral) light will go out. one shift per 10 seconds. The steering system.
transfer case may stay in this mode
4. Release the parking brake prior for up to three minutes.
to moving the vehicle.
Front Axle The vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel
with StabiliTrak®. For information on Drive): This setting is ideal for
The front axle engages and
StabiliTrak, see StabiliTrak® System use when road surface traction
disengages automatically when you
on page 9‑44. conditions are variable. When
shift the transfer case. Some delay
You can choose among three driving the vehicle in AUTO, the
for the axle to engage or disengage
driving settings: front axle is engaged, and the
is normal.
vehicle's power is sent to the front
Automatic Transfer Case Indicator lights in the switch show and rear wheels automatically
you which setting you are in. The based on driving conditions. Driving
indicator lights will come on briefly in this mode results in slightly lower
when you turn on the ignition and fuel economy than Two-Wheel
the last chosen setting will stay on. Drive High.
If the lights do not come on, you
should take the vehicle to your 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use
dealer for service. An indicator light the Four-Wheel Drive High position
will flash while shifting. It will stay on when you need extra traction, such
when the shift is completed. If for as on snowy or icy roads or in most
some reason the transfer case off-road situations. This setting also
cannot make a requested shift, it will engages the front axle to help drive
return to the last chosen setting. the vehicle. This is the best setting
to use when plowing snow.
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This
The transfer case knob is located to setting is used for driving in most
the left of the instrument panel street and highway situations. The
cluster. front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also
Use this dial to shift into and out of provides the best fuel economy.
four-wheel drive.
Service Four‐Wheel Drive Shifting Into Two-Wheel Brakes

If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE Drive High
message stays on, you should take Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel Antilock Brake
the vehicle to your dealer for Drive High position. This can be
service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL done at any speed. The indicator System (ABS)
DRIVE” message under light will flash while shifting. It will This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
Transmission Messages on remain on when the shift is System (ABS), an advanced
page 5‑40. completed. electronic braking system that
Excessively shifting the transfer helps prevent a braking skid.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive
High or AUTO (Automatic case into or out of the different When the engine is started and the
Four-Wheel Drive) modes may cause the transfer case vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
to enter the shift protection mode. checks itself. A momentary motor or
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel This will protect the transfer case clicking noise might be heard while
Drive High or AUTO position. This from possible damage and will only this test is going on, and it might
can be done at any speed. The
allow the transfer case to respond to even be noticed that the brake
indicator light will flash while one shift per 10 seconds. The pedal moves a little. This is normal.
shifting. It will remain on when the transfer case may stay in this mode
shift is completed. for up to three minutes.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑21.
If driving safely on a wet road there will not be enough time to Parking Brake
and it becomes necessary to slam apply the brakes if that vehicle
on the brakes and continue braking suddenly slows or stops. Always
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a leave enough room up ahead to
computer senses that the wheels stop, even with ABS.
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the Using ABS
computer will separately work the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
brakes at each wheel. the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS can change the brake pressure ABS work. You might hear the ABS
to each wheel, as required, faster pump or motor operating and feel
than any driver could. This can help the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
the driver steer around the obstacle normal.
while braking hard. Braking in Emergencies
As the brakes are applied, the ABS allows the driver to steer and Set the parking brake by holding the
computer keeps receiving updates brake at the same time. In many regular brake pedal down, then
on wheel speed and controls emergencies, steering can help pushing down the parking brake
braking pressure accordingly. more than even the very best pedal.
Remember: ABS does not change braking. If the ignition is on, the brake
the time needed to get a foot up to system warning light will come on.
the brake pedal or always decrease See Brake System Warning Light on
stopping distance. If you get too page 5‑20.
close to the vehicle in front of you,
Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist The brake assist feature will
brake on can overheat the brake automatically disengage when the
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist brake pedal is released or brake
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver pedal pressure is quickly
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle decreased.
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
driving. stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement the Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under Start Assist (HSA) feature, which
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has may be useful when the vehicle is
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the stopped on a grade. This feature is
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly designed to prevent the vehicle from
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The rolling, either forward or rearward,
foot up off the parking brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake during vehicle drive off. After
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake the driver completely stops and
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the holds the vehicle in a complete
system warning light will flash and a vehicle until the ABS activates. standstill on a grade, HSA will be
chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or automatically activated. During the
the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is transition period between when the
If you are towing a trailer and are normal and the driver should driver releases the brake pedal and
parking on a hill, see Driving continue to apply the brake pedal starts to accelerate to drive off
Characteristics and Towing Tips on as the driving situation dictates. on a grade, HSA holds the braking
page 9‑63.
pressure for a maximum of Ride Control Systems the vehicle is started. See Trailer
two seconds to ensure that there Sway Control (TSC) on page 9‑79
is no rolling. The brakes will for more information.
automatically release when the StabiliTrak® System
When the vehicle is started and
accelerator pedal is applied within The vehicle has a vehicle stability begins to move, the system
the two‐second window. If the enhancement system called performs several diagnostic checks
vehicle is equipped with the StabiliTrak. It is an advanced to insure there are no problems.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control computer-controlled system that The system may be heard or felt
(ITBC) system, HSA may also apply assists the driver with directional while it is working. This is normal
the trailer brakes. It will not activate control of the vehicle in difficult and does not mean there is a
if the vehicle is in a drive gear and driving conditions. problem with the vehicle. The
facing downhill or if the vehicle is system should initialize before the
facing uphill and in R (Reverse). StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a discrepancy vehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).
There may be situations on minor In some cases, it may take
hills (less than 5% grade) with a between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually approximately 3.2 km (2 mi) of
loaded vehicle or while pulling a driving before the system initializes.
trailer where HSA will not activate. traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one If cruise control is being used when
of the vehicle's brakes to assist the StabiliTrak activates, the cruise
driver with keeping the vehicle on control automatically disengages.
the intended path. The cruise control can be
StabiliTrak is on automatically re-engaged when road conditions
whenever the vehicle is started. To allow. See Cruise Control on
assist with directional control of the page 9‑48.
vehicle, the system should always If the system fails to turn on or
be left on. Trailer Sway Control activate, the StabiliTrak light along
(TSC) is also on automatically when with a message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
If a DIC message appears, make the appropriate DIC message

sure the StabiliTrak system has not displays. This will also disable the
been turned off using the Traction TSC feature.
Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Traction control and StabiliTrak can
button. Then turn the vehicle off, be turned on by pressing and
wait 15 seconds, and then turn it releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button
back on again to reset the system. The TCS/StabiliTrak button is if they are not automatically shut off
If any of the messages still appear located on the instrument panel. for any other reason. This will also
on the DIC, the vehicle should be enable the TSC feature.
taken in for service. For more The traction control part of
information on the DIC messages, StabiliTrak can be turned off by When the TCS or StabiliTrak system
see Ride Control System Messages pressing and releasing the TCS/ is turned off, the StabiliTrak light
on page 5‑38. StabiliTrak button if both systems and the appropriate message will be
(traction control and StabiliTrak) displayed on the DIC to warn the
were previously on. driver. The vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when traction
control is off, but will not be able to
use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control
Operation” next for more
information.
The StabiliTrak light will flash on the
instrument panel cluster when the
system or the TSC feature is both To disable both TCS and
on and activated. StabiliTrak, press and hold
the TCS/StabiliTrak button until the
The system may be heard or felt StabiliTrak OFF light illuminates and
while it is working; this is normal.
When the TCS has been turned off, Traction Control Operation Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle
system noises may still be heard as is allowed to spin excessively
The TCS is part of the StabiliTrak
a result of the brake-traction control while the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brake
system. Traction control limits
coming on. warning lights, and any relevant
wheel spin by reducing engine
It is recommended to leave the DIC messages are displayed, the
power to the wheels (engine speed
system on for normal driving transfer case could be damaged.
management) and by applying
conditions, but it may be necessary The repairs would not be covered
brakes to each individual wheel
to turn the system off if the vehicle by the vehicle warranty. Reduce
(brake-traction control) as
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, engine power and do not spin
necessary.
and you want to “rock” the vehicle to the wheel(s) excessively while
The TCS is enabled automatically these lights and messages are
attempt to free it. It may also be
when the vehicle is started. It will displayed.
necessary to turn off the system
activate and the StabiliTrak light will
when driving in extreme off-road The TCS may activate on dry or
flash if it senses that any of the
conditions where high wheel spin is rough roads or under conditions
wheels are spinning or beginning to
required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck such as heavy acceleration while
lose traction while driving. If traction
on page 9‑14. turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
control is turned off, only the
When the transfer case is in 4LO, of the transmission. When this
brake-traction control portion of
the stability system is automatically happens, a reduction in acceleration
traction control will work. The
disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes may be noticed, or a noise or
engine speed management will be
on, and the appropriate message vibration may be heard. This is
disabled. In this mode, engine
will appear on the DIC. Both traction normal.
power is not reduced automatically
control and StabiliTrak are and the driven wheels can spin
automatically disabled in this more freely. This can cause the
condition. brake-traction control to activate
constantly.
If cruise control is being used when Locking Rear Axle The controller then sends
the system activates, the StabiliTrak signals to each shock absorber to
light will flash and cruise control will Vehicles with a locking rear axle can independently adjust the damping
automatically disengage. Cruise give more traction on snow, mud, level to provide the optimum
control may be reengaged when ice, sand, or gravel. It works like a vehicle ride.
road conditions allow. See Cruise standard axle most of the time, but
when traction is low, this feature will Autoride also interact with the tow/
Control on page 9‑48. haul mode that, when activated, will
allow the rear wheel with the most
StabiliTrak may also turn off traction to move the vehicle. provide additional control of the
automatically if it determines that a shock absorbers. This additional
problem exists with the system. Continuous Damping control results in better ride and
If the problem does not clear itself handling characteristics when the
after restarting the vehicle, see your Control (CDC) vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.
dealer for service. This vehicle may have a continuous See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Trailer
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a damping control system called Towing on page 9‑67 for more
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature. Autoride®. With this feature, information.
See Trailer Sway Control (TSC) on improved vehicle ride and handling
page 9‑79. is provided under a variety of Automatic Level Control
passenger and loading conditions. The automatic level control rear
Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a Hill
Start Assist (HSA) feature. See Hill Autoride is fully automatic and suspension is available on light‐duty
Start Assist (HSA) on page 9‑43. uses a computer controller to vehicles and comes as a part of the
continuously monitor vehicle speed, Continuous Damping Control (CDC)
Adding non‐dealer accessories can wheel to body position, lift/dive, and suspension, if equipped.
affect the vehicle's performance. steering position of the vehicle.
See Accessories and Modifications
on page 10‑3.
This type of level control is fully Cruise Control If the vehicle has StabiliTrak and the
automatic and will provide a better system begins to limit wheel spin,
leveled riding position as well as cruise control will automatically
better handling under a variety of { WARNING disengage. See StabiliTrak® System
passenger and loading conditions. on page 9‑44. When road conditions
An air compressor connected to the Cruise control can be dangerous allow the cruise control to be safely
rear shocks will raise or lower the where you cannot drive safely at used again, it can be turned
rear of the vehicle to maintain a steady speed. So, do not use back on.
proper vehicle height. The system the cruise control on winding
is activated when the ignition key roads or in heavy traffic.
is turned to ON/RUN and will Cruise control can be dangerous
automatically adjust vehicle height on slippery roads. On such roads,
thereafter. The system may exhaust fast changes in tire traction can
(lower vehicle height) for up to cause excessive wheel slip, and
ten minutes after the ignition key
you could lose control. Do not use
has been turned off. You may hear
cruise control on slippery roads.
the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
If a weight‐distributing hitch is being With cruise control, a speed of
used, it is recommended to allow about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can
the shocks to inflate, thereby be maintained without keeping your
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting foot on the accelerator. Cruise
the hitch. control does not work at speeds I (On/Off): Press to turn the
below about 40 km/h (25 mph). system on or off. The indicator light
When the brakes are applied, cruise is on when cruise control is on and
control is turned off. turns off when cruise control is off.
+RES (Resume/Accelerate): 4. Take your foot off the

. To increase vehicle speed in
Press briefly to make the vehicle accelerator. small amounts, press the +RES
resume to a previously set speed, button. Each time this is done,
or press and hold to accelerate. Resuming a Set Speed the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
If the cruise control is set at a (1 mph) faster.
SET− (Set/Coast): Press to set the
speed and activate cruise control or desired speed and then the brakes Reducing Speed While Using
make the vehicle decelerate. are applied, the cruise control is Cruise Control
disengaged without erasing the set
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage speed from memory. If the cruise control system is
cruise control without erasing the already activated,
set speed from memory. Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,
. Press and hold the SET– button
Setting Cruise Control press the +RES button on the on the steering wheel until the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns desired lower speed is reached,
If the cruise button is on when not in then release it.
use, it could get bumped and go into to the previous set speed and stays
cruise when not desired. Keep the there. . To slow down in small amounts,
cruise control switch off when cruise Increasing Speed While Using press the SET– button on the
is not being used. Cruise Control steering wheel briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes
The cruise control light on the If the cruise control system is about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
instrument panel cluster comes on already activated,
after the cruise control has been set Passing Another Vehicle While
. Press and hold the +RES button Using Cruise Control
to the desired speed.
on the steering wheel until the
1. Press the I button. desired speed is reached, then Use the accelerator pedal to
release it. increase the vehicle speed. When
2. Get up to the desired speed. you take your foot off the pedal, the
3. Press the SET− button located vehicle will slow down to the
on the steering wheel and previous set cruise speed.
release it.
Using Cruise Control on Hills Ending Cruise Control Object Detection

How well the cruise control works There are three ways to end cruise
on hills depends on the vehicle control:
Systems
speed, the load, and the steepness . To disengage cruise control,
of the hills. When going up steep Ultrasonic Parking Assist
step lightly on the brake pedal.
hills, pressing the accelerator pedal If available, the Ultrasonic Rear
may be necessary to maintain . Press the [ on the steering Parking Assist (URPA) system
vehicle speed. wheel. assists the driver with parking
While going downhill, the Cruise . To turn off the cruise control, and avoiding objects while in
Grade Braking feature may R (Reverse). URPA operates at
press I on the steering wheel.
automatically shift to a lower gear to speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
keep the vehicle's speed down. Erasing Speed Memory The sensors on the rear bumper
It may be necessary to apply the detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
The cruise control set speed is behind the vehicle, and at least
brake or manually shift the erased from memory by pressing
transmission to a lower gear. The 25 cm (10 in) off the ground.
vehicle may shift to a higher gear the I button or if the ignition is
when grade braking assistance is turned off. { WARNING
no longer required. Cruise Grade
Braking is not available while in The URPA system does not
Range Selection Mode. See "Range detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
Selection Mode" under Manual animals, or objects below the
Mode on page 9‑33. bumper or that are too close
When the brakes are manually or too far from the vehicle.
applied the cruise control is (Continued)
disengaged.
must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from Notice: If you use URPA while the
WARNING (Continued) the rear bumper. This distance may tailgate is lowered, it may not
be less during warmer or humid detect an object behind your
To prevent injury, death, weather. vehicle, and you might back into
or vehicle damage, even with the object and damage your
URPA, always check the area Turning the System On and Off vehicle. Always verify the tailgate
around the vehicle and check The URPA system can be turned on is closed when using URPA or
all mirrors before backing. and off using the rear park aid turn off URPA when driving with
disable button located next to the the tailgate lowered.
radio.
How the System Works When the System Does Not
URPA comes on automatically Seem to Work Properly
when the shift lever is moved into The following messages may be
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds displayed on the DIC:
to indicate the system is working.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this
URPA operates only at speeds less message occurs, take the vehicle to
than 8 km/h (5 mph). your dealer to repair the system.
The indicator light comes on when
An obstacle is indicated by audible PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE
the system is disabled and turns off
beeps. The interval between the OWNERS MANUAL: This
when the system is on.
beeps becomes shorter as the message can occur under the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. When the system is off, PARK following conditions:
When the distance is less than ASSIST OFF displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). The
. The ultrasonic sensors are not
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is a
message disappears after a short clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
continuous tone for five seconds.
period of time. bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
To be detected, objects must be at ice, and slush. For cleaning
least 25 cm (10 in) off the ground URPA defaults to the on setting instructions, see Exterior Care
and below tailgate level. Objects each time the vehicle is started. on page 10‑89.

. The park assist sensors are
covered by frost or ice. Frost or
Rear Vision Vehicles without Navigation
Camera (RVC) System
ice can form around and behind
the sensors and may not always If available, the Rear Vision Camera The RVC system displays a view of
be seen; this can occur after (RVC) system displays part of the the area behind the vehicle. When
washing the vehicle in cold scene behind the vehicle. the vehicle is on and shifted into
weather. The message may not R (Reverse) the video image
clear until the frost or ice has appears on the inside rearview
melted. { WARNING mirror. The video image disappears
after the vehicle is shifted out of
. A trailer was attached to the The RVC system does not display
R (Reverse).
vehicle, or an object was pedestrians, bicyclists, animals,
hanging out of the tailgate during or any other object located Turning the RVC System On or Off
the last drive cycle. Once the outside the camera's field of view, To turn off the RVC system, press
object is removed and the below the bumper, or under the
tailgate is raised, URPA will and hold z , located on the inside
vehicle. Do not back the vehicle
return to normal operation. rearview mirror, until the left
using only the RVC screen, such
indicator light turns off. The RVC
. A tow bar is attached to the as during longer, higher speed display is now disabled.
vehicle. backing maneuvers, or where
there could be cross-traffic. To turn the RVC system on, press
. The bumper is damaged. Take
Perceived distances may be and hold z until the left indicator
the vehicle to your dealer to
repair the system. different from actual distances. light comes on. The RVC system
Failure to use proper care before display will appear in the mirror.
. Other conditions, such as backing may result in injury,
vibrations from a jackhammer or death, or vehicle damage. Always
the compression of air brakes on check behind and around the
a very large truck, are affecting
vehicle before backing.
system performance.
Vehicles with Navigation Adjusting the Brightness and

System Contrast of the Screen
The RVC system is designed to To adjust the brightness and
help the driver when backing up by contrast of the screen, press the
displaying a view of the area behind MENU button while the RVC image
the vehicle. When the vehicle is is on the display. Any adjustments
shifted into R (Reverse), the video made will only affect the RVC
image appears on the navigation screen.
screen. After a delay, the navigation
4. Select the Video screen button. ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)
screen displays the last screen after or – (minus) screen buttons to
the vehicle is shifted out of When the Video screen button is
highlighted the RVC increase or decrease the brightness
R (Reverse). of the screen.
system is on.
Turning the RVC System On or Off The delay that is received after _ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or
To turn the RVC system on or off: shifting out of R (Reverse) is – (minus) screen buttons to increase
approximately 10 seconds. The or decrease the contrast of the
1. Shift into P (Park). screen.
delay can be canceled by
2. Press MENU to enter the performing one of the following: Symbols
configure menu options. Turn
the Multifunction knob until the
. Pressing a hard key on the The navigation system may have a
Display feature is highlighted navigation system. feature that allows for viewing
and press the Multifunction . Shifting in to P (Park). parking assist symbols on the
knob. Or press the Display .
navigation screen while using the
Reach a vehicle speed of RVC. The Ultrasonic Rear Park
screen button 8 km/h (5 mph). Assist (URPA) system must not be
3. Select the Rear Camera Options disabled to use the caution symbols.
screen button. The Rear Camera If URPA has been disabled and the
Options screen displays. symbols have been turned on, the
Rear Parking Assist Symbols Guidelines RVC Location

Unavailable error message may The RVC system has a guideline
display. See Ultrasonic Parking overlay that can help the driver align
Assist on page 9‑50. the vehicle when backing into a
The symbols appear near objects parking spot.
detected by the URPA system. The To turn the guidelines on or off:
symbol may cover the object when
viewing the navigation screen. 1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled.
To turn the symbols on or off:
2. Shift into P (Park).
1. Make sure that URPA has not
been disabled. 3. Press MENU to enter the
configure menu options. Turn
2. Shift into P (Park). the Multifunction knob until the
3. Press MENU to enter the Display feature is highlighted
configure menu options. Turn and press the Multifunction The camera is located under the
the Multifunction knob until the knob. Or press the Display tailgate handle.
Display feature is highlighted screen button This shows the field of view that the
and press the Multifunction 4. Select the Rear Camera Options camera provides.
knob. Or press the Display screen button. The Rear Camera
screen button Options screen displays.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options 5. Touch the Guidelines screen
screen button. The Rear Camera button. The screen button will be
Options screen displays. highlighted when on.
5. Touch the Symbols screen
button. The screen button will be
highlighted when on.
Displayed images may be further or

. The back of the vehicle is in an
closer than they appear. The area accident, the position and
displayed is limited and objects mounting angle of the camera
which are close to either corner of can change or the camera can
the bumper or under the bumper do be affected. Be sure to have the
not display. camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
When the System Does Not dealer.
Seem To Work Properly The RVC system display in the
The RVC system might not work rearview mirror may turn off or not
properly or display a clear image if: appear as expected due to one of
. The RVC is turned off. See the following conditions. If this
A. View displayed by the camera “Turning the RVC System On or occurs the left indicator light on the
Off” earlier in this section. mirror will flash.
. It is dark.
. A slow flash may indicate a loss
of video signal, or no video
. The sun or the beam of signal present during the reverse
headlamps is shining directly cycle.
into the camera lens. . A fast flash may indicate that the
. Ice, snow, mud, or anything else display has been on for the
builds up on the camera lens. maximum allowable time during
Clean the lens, rinse it with a reverse cycle, or the display
A. View displayed by the camera water, and wipe it with a soft has reached an Over
cloth. Temperature limit.
B. Corners of the rear bumper
The fast flash conditions are Fuel

used to protect the video
device from high temperature Use of the recommended fuel
conditions. Once conditions is an important part of the proper
return to normal the device will maintenance of this vehicle. To help
reset and the green indicator will keep the engine clean and maintain
stop flashing. optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
During any of these fault conditions,
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
the display will be blank and the
Gasoline.
indicator will flash while the vehicle
is in R (Reverse) or until the Look for the TOP TIER label on the
conditions return to normal. fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
Press and hold z when the left developed by auto companies. A list and a yellow fuel cap can use either
indicator light is flashing to turn off of marketers providing TOP TIER unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
the video display along with the left Detergent Gasoline can be found at containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
indicator light. www.toptiergas.com. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑59. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑57.
Recommended Fuel Gasoline Specifications California Fuel

Use regular unleaded gasoline with (U.S. and Canada Only) Requirements
a posted octane rating of 87 or At a minimum, gasoline If the vehicle is certified to meet
higher. If the octane rating is less should meet ASTM specification California Emissions Standards, it is
than 87, an audible knocking noise, D 4814 in the United States or designed to operate on fuels that
commonly referred to as spark CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. meet California specifications. See
knock, might be heard when driving. Some gasolines contain an the underhood emission control
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated octane-enhancing additive called label. If this fuel is not available in
at 87 octane or higher as soon as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese states adopting California Emissions
possible. If heavy knocking is heard tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend Standards, the vehicle will operate
when using gasoline rated at against the use of gasolines satisfactorily on fuels meeting
87 octane or higher, the engine containing MMT. See Fuel Additives federal specifications, but emission
needs service. on page 9‑58 for additional control system performance might
information. be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 5‑18. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
Countries To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System
Never use leaded gasoline or any in the United States are now Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel
other fuel not recommended in the required to contain additives that tank at every engine oil change, can
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs help prevent engine and fuel system help clean deposits from fuel
caused by use of improper fuel deposits from forming, allowing the injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle emission control system to work System Treatment PLUS is the only
warranty. properly. In most cases, nothing gasoline additive recommended by
should have to be added to the fuel. General Motors. It is available at
To check the fuel availability, ask an However, some gasolines contain your dealer.
auto club, or contact a major oil only the minimum amount of
company that does business in the additive required to meet U.S. Gasolines containing oxygenates,
country where you will be driving. Environmental Protection Agency such as ethers and ethanol, and
regulations. To help keep fuel reformulated gasolines might be
injectors and intake valves clean available in your area. We
and avoid problems due to dirty recommend that you use these
injectors or valves, look for gasoline gasolines, if they comply with the
that is advertised as TOP TIER specifications described earlier.
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to other fuels containing more than
ensure gasoline meets enhanced 15% ethanol must not be used in
detergency standards developed by vehicles that were not designed for
the auto companies. A list of those fuels.
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) At a minimum, E85 should meet
designed for fuel that contains ASTM Specification D 5798 or
methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling
containing methanol. It can and a yellow fuel cap can use either the tank with fuel mixtures that
corrode metal parts in the fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel do not meet ASTM or CGSB
system and also damage plastic containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). specifications can affect driveability
and rubber parts. That damage For all other vehicles, use only the and could cause the malfunction
would not be covered under the unleaded gasoline described under indicator lamp to come on. As the
vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 9‑57. outside temperature approaches
Some gasolines that are We encourage the use of E85 in freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
not reformulated for low vehicles that are designed to use it. should supply winter grade ethanol,
emissions can contain an The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” the same as with unleaded
octane-enhancing additive called fuel, meaning it is made from gasoline.
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn It is best not to alternate repeatedly
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops. between gasoline and E85. If you
where you buy gasoline whether the Many service stations will not have do switch fuels, it is recommended
fuel contains MMT. We recommend an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump that you add as much fuel as
against the use of such gasolines. available. The U.S. Department of possible — do not add less than
Fuels containing MMT can reduce Energy has an alternative fuels 11 L (3 gal) when refueling. You
spark plug life and affect emission website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/ should drive the vehicle immediately
control system performance. The locator/stations/) that can help you after refueling for at least 11 km
malfunction indicator lamp might find E85 fuel. Those stations that do (7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adapt
turn on. If this occurs, return to your have E85 should have a label to the change in ethanol
dealer for service. indicating ethanol content. Do not concentration.
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
E85 has less energy per liter Filling the Tank

(gallon) than gasoline, so you will
need to refill the fuel tank more
often when using E85 than when { WARNING
you are using gasoline. See Filling Fuel vapor burns violently and a
the Tank on page 9‑60.
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
Notice: Some additives are not To help avoid injuries to you and
compatible with E85 fuel and can others, read and follow all the
harm the vehicle's fuel system. instructions on the fuel pump
Do not add anything to E85. island. Turn off the engine when
Damage caused by additives refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
would not be covered by the or when refueling the vehicle. Do
vehicle warranty. not use cellular phones. Keep The tethered fuel cap is located
Notice: This vehicle was not sparks, flames, and smoking behind a hinged fuel door on the
designed for fuel that contains materials away from fuel. Do not driver side of the vehicle. If the
methanol. Do not use fuel leave the fuel pump unattended vehicle has E85 fuel capability, the
containing methanol. It can when refueling the vehicle. This is fuel cap will be yellow and state that
corrode metal parts in the fuel E85 or gasoline can be used. See
against the law in some places.
system and also damage plastic Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
and rubber parts. That damage page 9‑59.
pumping fuel. Keep children away
would not be covered under the from the fuel pump; never let To remove the fuel cap, turn it
vehicle warranty. children pump fuel. slowly counterclockwise. It will
require more effort to turn the fuel
cap on the last turn as you loosen it.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert

{ WARNING the tether in its hole before { WARNING
tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap
Fuel can spray out on you if you clockwise until it clicks. It will require If a fire starts while you are
open the fuel cap too quickly. more effort to turn the fuel cap on refueling, do not remove the
If you spill fuel and then the last turn as you tighten it. Make nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
something ignites it, you could be sure the cap is fully installed. The shutting off the pump or by
badly burned. This spray can diagnostic system can determine if notifying the station attendant.
happen if the tank is nearly full, the fuel cap has been left off or Leave the area immediately.
and is more likely in hot weather. improperly installed. This would
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait allow fuel to evaporate into the Notice: If a new fuel cap is
for any hiss noise to stop. Then atmosphere. See Malfunction needed, be sure to get the right
unscrew the cap all the way. Indicator Lamp on page 5‑18. type of cap from your dealer. The
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message wrong type of fuel cap might not
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not displays on the Driver Information fit properly, might cause the
top off or overfill the tank and wait a Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not malfunction indicator lamp to
few seconds after you have finished properly installed. See Fuel System light, and could damage the fuel
pumping before removing the Messages on page 5‑37 for more tank and emissions system. See
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted information. Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
surfaces as soon as possible. See page 5‑18.
Exterior Care on page 10‑89.
Filling a Portable Fuel WARNING (Continued) Towing

Container
General Towing
. Bring the fill nozzle in contact
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill Information
Never fill a portable fuel container opening before operating the Only use towing equipment that has
while it is in the vehicle. Static nozzle. Contact should be been designed for the vehicle.
electricity discharge from the maintained until the filling is Contact your dealer or trailering
container can ignite the fuel complete. dealer for assistance with preparing
vapor. You can be badly burned the vehicle for towing a trailer.
. Do not smoke while
and the vehicle damaged if this pumping fuel. See the following trailer towing
occurs. To help avoid injury to you information in this section:
. Do not use a cellular phone
and others: while pumping fuel. . For information on driving while
. Dispense fuel only into towing a trailer, see “Driving
approved containers. Characteristics and
Towing Tips.”
. Do not fill a container while it
is inside a vehicle, in a . For maximum vehicle and trailer
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, weights, see “Trailer Towing.”
or on any surface other than . For information on equipment to
the ground. tow a trailer, see “Towing
(Continued) Equipment.”
For information on towing a disabled

. Consider using a sway control. Important considerations that have
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on See “Hitches” in Towing to do with weight:
page 10‑84. For information on Equipment on page 9‑71. . The weight of the trailer.
towing the vehicle behind another . Do not tow a trailer at all during
vehicle such as a motor home, see the first 800 km (500 miles) the
. The weight of the trailer tongue.
Recreational Vehicle Towing on new vehicle is driven. The . The weight on the vehicle's tires.
page 10‑85. engine, axle or other parts could . The weight of the trailering
be damaged.
Driving Characteristics combination.
. Then, during the first 800 km
and Towing Tips (500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
Pulling a Trailer (50 mph) and do not make starts
Here are some important points: at full throttle. This helps the
. There are many different laws, engine and other parts of the
including speed limit restrictions, vehicle wear in at the heavier
having to do with trailering. loads.
Make sure the rig will be legal, . Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).
not only where you live but also Shift the transmission to a lower
where you will be driving. gear if the transmission shifts
A good source for this too often under heavy loads and/
information can be state or or hilly conditions.
provincial police.
Driving with a Trailer Before starting, check all trailer

WARNING (Continued) hitch parts and attachments, safety
{ WARNING . Fully open the air outlets on
chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirrors. If the
or under the instrument trailer has electric brakes, start the
When towing a trailer, exhaust panel.
gases may collect at the rear of combination moving and then apply
the vehicle and enter if the
. Adjust the Climate Control the trailer brake controller by hand
liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most system to a setting that to be sure the brakes work.
window is open. brings in only outside air and During the trip, check occasionally
set the fan speed to the to be sure that the load is secure
Engine exhaust contains Carbon highest setting. See Climate and the lamps and any trailer
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be Control System in the Index. brakes still work.
seen or smelled. It can cause
For more information about
unconsciousness and even death.
Carbon Monoxide, see Engine Following Distance
To maximize safety when towing Exhaust on page 9‑29. Stay at least twice as far behind the
a trailer: vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
. Have the exhaust system Towing a trailer requires a certain
This can help to avoid heavy
inspected for leaks and make amount of experience. The
braking and sudden turns.
necessary repairs before combination you are driving is
starting a trip. longer and not as responsive as the
. Never drive with the liftgate, vehicle itself. Get acquainted with
trunk/hatch, or rear-most the handling and braking of the rig
window open. before setting out for the open road.
(Continued)
Passing Making Turns Driving on Grades

More passing distance is needed Notice: Making very sharp turns Reduce speed and shift to a
when towing a trailer. The while trailering could cause the lower gear before starting down a
combination will not accelerate as trailer to come in contact with the long or steep downgrade. If the
quickly and is longer so it is vehicle. The vehicle could be transmission is not shifted down, the
necessary to go much farther damaged. Avoid making very brakes might get hot and no longer
beyond the passed vehicle before sharp turns while trailering. work well.
returning to the lane. When turning with a trailer, make Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift
Backing Up wider turns than normal. Do this the transmission to a lower gear if
so the trailer will not strike soft the transmission shifts too often
Hold the bottom of the steering shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees under heavy loads and/or hilly
wheel with one hand. Then, to move or other objects. Avoid jerky or conditions.
the trailer to the left, move that hand sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
to the left. To move the trailer to the The tow/haul mode may be used if
advance. the transmission shifts too often.
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
if possible, have someone out, the arrows on the instrument page 5‑21.
guide you. panel will still flash for turns. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
When towing at high altitude on Parking on Hills 2. Have someone place chocks
steep uphill grades, consider the under the trailer wheels.
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
{ WARNING 3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the regular brakes
altitudes. If the engine is turned off Parking the vehicle on a hill with until the chocks absorb the load.
immediately after towing at high the trailer attached can be
altitude on steep uphill grades, the dangerous. If something goes 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
vehicle may show signs similar to apply the parking brake and shift
wrong, the rig could start to move.
engine overheating. To avoid this, into P (Park).
People can be injured, and both
let the engine run while parked, 5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive
the vehicle and the trailer can be
preferably on level ground, with the and has a two-speed transfer
damaged. When possible, always
automatic transmission in P (Park) case, be sure the transfer case
for a few minutes before turning the park the rig on a flat surface.
is in a drive gear and not in
engine off. If the overheat warning N (Neutral).
comes on, see Engine Overheating If parking the rig on a hill:
on page 10‑20. 6. Release the brake pedal.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn
the wheels into the curb if facing { WARNING
downhill or into traffic if facing It can be dangerous to get out of
uphill. the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle
can roll.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
3. Shift into a gear. Trailer Towing
4. Release the parking brake. Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.
If the engine has been left 5. Let up on the brake pedal. See New Vehicle Break-In on
running, the vehicle can move page 9‑21 for more information.
suddenly. You or others could be 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when on fairly 7. Stop and have someone pick up
{ WARNING
level ground, use the steps that and store the chocks. The driver can lose control when
follow. pulling a trailer if the correct
Maintenance When Trailer
equipment is not used or the
Always put the shift lever fully in Towing
P (Park) with the parking brake vehicle is not driven properly. For
The vehicle needs service more example, if the trailer is too
firmly set. often when pulling a trailer. See heavy, the brakes may not work
If the transfer case on a Maintenance Schedule on well — or even at all. The driver
four-wheel-drive vehicle is in page 11‑3. Things that are and passengers could be
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be especially important in trailer seriously injured. The vehicle may
free to roll, even if the shift lever operation are automatic also be damaged; the resulting
is in P (Park). Be sure the transfer transmission fluid, engine oil, axle repairs would not be covered by
case is in a drive gear — not in lubricant, belts, cooling system and
the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
N (Neutral). brake system. It is a good idea to
only if all the steps in this section
inspect these before and during
the trip. have been followed. Ask your
Leaving After Parking on a Hill dealer for advice and information
Check periodically to see that all about towing a trailer with the
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. hitch nuts and bolts are tight. vehicle.
2. Start the engine.
Notice: Pulling a trailer The following information has many Trailer weight rating (TWR) is
improperly can damage the time-tested, important trailering tips calculated assuming the tow vehicle
vehicle and result in costly and safety rules. Many of these are has only the driver but all required
repairs not covered by the vehicle important for your safety and that of trailering equipment. Weight of
warranty. To pull a trailer your passengers. So please read additional optional equipment,
correctly, follow the advice in this this section carefully before pulling a passengers, and cargo in the tow
section and see your dealer for trailer. vehicle must be subtracted from the
important information about trailer weight rating.
towing a trailer with the vehicle. Weight of the Trailer
Use the following chart to determine
To identify the trailering capacity of How heavy can a trailer safely be? how much the vehicle can weigh,
the vehicle, read the information in It depends on how the rig is used. based upon the vehicle model and
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears Speed, altitude, road grades, options.
later in this section. outside temperature, and how much Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or
Trailering is different than just the vehicle is used to pull a trailer goose-neck hitch device on the
driving the vehicle by itself. are all important. It can depend on vehicle could damage the vehicle.
Trailering means changes in any special equipment on the The repairs would not be covered
handling, acceleration, braking, vehicle, and the amount of tongue by the vehicle warranty. Do not
durability, and fuel economy. weight the vehicle can carry. See use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck
Successful, safe trailering takes “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later hitch device on the vehicle.
correct equipment, and it has to be in this section for more information.
used properly.
Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR *

1500 Series 2WD
5.3L V8 3.08 2 313 kg (5,100 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 540 kg (5,600 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
1500 Series 4WD
5.3L V8 3.08 2 268 kg (5,000 lbs) 4 990 kg (11,000 lbs)
5.3L V8 3.42 2 495 kg (5,500 lbs) 5 216 kg (11,500 lbs)
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer for trailering Weight of the Trailer Tongue passengers, and cargo in the
information or advice, or write us at The tongue load (A) of any trailer is vehicle reduce the amount of
our Customer Assistance Offices. very important because it is also tongue weight the vehicle can carry,
See Customer Assistance Offices part of the vehicle weight. The which will also reduce the trailer
(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) weight the vehicle can tow. See
Customer Assistance Offices includes the curb weight of the Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16
(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for more vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and for more information about the
information. the people who will be riding in the vehicle's maximum load capacity.
vehicle as well as trailer tongue
weight. Vehicle options, equipment,
Maximum Tongue
Vehicle Series Hitch Type Weight
1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)
1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)
Do not exceed the maximum proper. If they are not, adjustments

allowable tongue weight for the might be made by moving some
vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch items around in the trailer.
extension that will position the hitch
ball closest to the vehicle. This will Total Weight on the Vehicle's
Trailer tongue weight (A) should be help reduce the effect of trailer Tires
10 percent to 15 percent of the tongue weight on the rear axle. Be sure the vehicle's tires are
loaded trailer weight (B) up to the Trailering may be limited by the inflated to the inflation pressures
maximums for vehicle series and vehicle's ability to carry tongue found on the Certification label on
hitch type. weight. Tongue or kingpin weight the drivers door or see Vehicle Load
cannot cause the vehicle to exceed Limits on page 9‑16 for more
the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight information. Make sure not to
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross exceed the GVWR limit for the
Axle Weight Rating). See “Total vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow
Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later vehicle and trailer fully loaded for
in this section for more information. the trip including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight
After loading the trailer, weigh distributing hitch, make sure not to
the trailer and then the tongue, exceed the RGAWR before applying
separately, to see if the weights are the weight distribution spring bars.
Weight of the Trailering or a tow eye latched to a pintle Weight‐Distributing Hitch

Combination hook. Other trailers may require a Adjustment
weight distributing hitch that uses
It is important that the combination spring bars to distribute the trailer
of the tow vehicle and trailer tongue weight among the two
does not exceed any of its weight vehicle and trailer axles. See
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” in
Trailer Weight Rating or Tongue Trailer Towing on page 9‑67 for
Weight. The only way to be sure it is rating limits with various hitch types.
not exceeding any of these ratings
is to weigh the tow vehicle and If a step-bumper hitch will be used,
trailer combination, fully loaded for the bumper could be damaged in
the trip, getting individual weights sharp turns. Make sure there
for each of these items. is ample room when turning to avoid
contact between the trailer and the
Towing Equipment bumper.
Consider using sway controls A. Body to Ground Distance
Hitches with any trailer. Ask a trailering B. Front of Vehicle
The correct hitch equipment helps professional about sway controls or
When using a weight-distributing
maintain combination control. Many refer to the trailer manufacturer's
hitch, the spring bars should be
trailers can be towed with a weight recommendations and instructions.
adjusted so the distance (A) is the
carrying hitch which simply features same after coupling the trailer to the
a coupler latched to the hitch ball, tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.
Safety Chains the instructions for the trailer brakes The seven-wire harness contains
so they are installed, adjusted and the following trailer circuits:
Always attach chains between the
maintained properly. . Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue of Do not tap into the vehicle's . Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn
the trailer to help prevent the tongue hydraulic system. Signal
from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Trailer Wiring Harness . Brown: Taillamps
Instructions about safety chains Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness . White: Ground
may be provided by the hitch Package
manufacturer or by the trailer
. Light Green: Back-up Lamps
manufacturer. If the trailer being . Red: Battery Feed
towed weighs up to 2 271 kg . Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
(5,000 lbs) with a factory-installed
step bumper, safety chains may be If charging a remote (non-vehicle)
attached to the attaching points on battery, press the tow/haul mode
the bumper, otherwise, safety button located at the end of the shift
chains should be attached to holes lever. This will boost the vehicle
on the trailer hitch platform. Always system voltage and properly charge
leave just enough slack so the the battery. If the trailer is too light
combination can turn. Never allow for tow/haul mode, turn on the
safety chains to drag on the ground. headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and
Trailer Brakes charge the battery.
The vehicle has a seven-pin
A loaded trailer that weighs more universal heavy-duty trailer
than 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs to connector attached to the rear
have its own brake system that is bumper beam next to the
adequate for the weight of the integrated trailer hitch.
trailer. Be sure to read and follow
Electric Brake Control Wiring Do not power both ITBC and Tow/Haul is a feature that assists
Provisions aftermarket controllers to control the when pulling a heavy trailer or a
trailer brakes at the same time. large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul
These wiring provisions are Mode on page 9‑34 for more
included with the vehicle as part of Tow/Haul Mode information.
the trailer wiring package. These
provisions are for an electric brake Tow/Haul is designed to be most
controller. The instrument panel effective when the vehicle and
contains blunt cut wires near the trailer combined weight is at least
data link connector for the trailer 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross
brake controller. The harness Combined Weight Rating (GCWR).
contains the following wires: See “Weight of the Trailer” in Trailer
Towing on page 9‑67. Tow/Haul is
. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Pressing this button at the end of most useful under the following
Trailer Connector the shift lever turns on and off the driving conditions:
. Red/Black: Battery tow/haul mode. . When pulling a heavy trailer or a
. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch large or heavy load through
rolling terrain.
. White: Ground
. When pulling a heavy trailer or a
It should be installed by your dealer
large or heavy load in stop and
or a qualified service center.
go traffic.
If the vehicle is equipped with an . When pulling a heavy trailer or a
ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are
This indicator light on the instrument large or heavy load in busy
not connected further in the
panel cluster comes on when the parking lots where improved low
harness. If an aftermarket trailer
tow/haul mode is on. speed control of the vehicle is
brake controller is installed, the
desired.
ITBC must be disconnected.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul This symbol is located on the Trailer all of these systems are fully
when lightly loaded or with no trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles operational to ensure full
at all will not cause damage. with an Integrated Trailer Brake functionality of the ITBC system.
However, there is no benefit to the Control System. The power output The ITBC system is powered
selection of Tow/Haul when the to the trailer brakes is based on the through the vehicle's electrical
vehicle is unloaded. Such a amount of brake pressure being system. Turning the ignition off will
selection when unloaded may applied by the vehicle’s brake also turn off the ITBC system. The
result in unpleasant engine and system. This available power output ITBC system is fully functional only
transmission driving characteristics to the trailer brakes can be adjusted when the ignition is in ON or
and reduced fuel economy. Tow/ to a wide range of trailering in RUN.
Haul is recommended only when situations.
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or The ITBC system can only be used
The ITBC system is integrated with with trailers with electric brakes.
heavy load. the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock brake
Integrated Trailer Brake and StabiliTrak systems. In trailering
Control System conditions that cause the vehicle’s { WARNING
anti‐lock brake or StabiliTrak
Connecting a trailer that is not
systems to activate, power sent to
the trailer's brakes will be compatible with the ITBC system
automatically adjusted to minimize may result in reduced or complete
trailer wheel lock-up. This does not loss of trailer braking. There
imply that the trailer has the may be an increase in stopping
StabiliTrak system. distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or
The vehicle may have an Integrated If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock damage to the vehicle, trailer,
Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system brake or StabiliTrak systems are not
or other property. An aftermarket
for electric trailer brakes. functioning properly, the ITBC
controller may be available for
system may not be fully functional
or may not function at all. Make sure (Continued)

. The trailer and vehicle are The ITBC system has a control
WARNING (Continued) properly loaded for the towing panel located on the instrument
condition. panel to the left of the steering
use with trailers with surge, air, column. The control panel allows
The ITBC system is a factory
or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer adjustment to the amount of output,
installed item. Out‐of‐factory
brake systems. To determine the referred to as trailer gain, available
installation of this system should not
type of brakes on the trailer and be attempted. GM is not responsible to the electric trailer brakes and
the availability of controllers, for warranty or performance of the allows manual application the trailer
check with your trailer system resulting from out‐of‐factory brakes. The Trailer Brake Control
manufacturer or dealer. installation. Panel is used along with the Trailer
Brake Display Page on the DIC to
Trailer Brake Control Panel adjust and display power output to
When trailering, make sure of the
following: the trailer brakes.
. The ITBC system is used only Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
with trailers that are equipped The ITBC system displays
with electric brakes. messages into the vehicle’s Driver
. All applicable local and federal Information Center (DIC). See Driver
laws and regulations are Information Center (DIC) on
followed. page 5‑25 for more information.
. All electrical and mechanical The display page indicates Trailer
connections to the trailer are Gain setting, power output to the
made correctly. electric trailer brakes, trailer
connection and system operational
. The trailer’s brakes are in proper status.
working condition. A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The Trailer Brake Display Page can the DIC Vehicle Information button Output to the electric brakes is
be displayed by performing any of (if equipped) before the Trailer based on the amount of vehicle
the following actions: Brake Display Page can be braking present and relative to the
. Scrolling through the DIC displayed and Trailer Gain can be Trailer Gain setting. Output is
menu pages using the odometer adjusted. displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each
trip stem or the DIC Vehicle TRAILER GAIN – This setting is gain setting.
Information button (if equipped). displayed anytime the Trailer The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -
. Pressing a Trailer Gain Brake Display Page is active. This - - -“on the Trailer Brake Display
button – If the Trailer Brake setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to Page whenever the following occur:
Display Page is not currently 10.0 with either a trailer connected . No trailer is connected.
displayed, pressing a Trailer or disconnected. To adjust the
Trailer Gain, press one of the . A trailer without electric brakes
Gain button will first recall the is connected (no DIC message
current Trailer Gain setting. After Trailer Gain adjustment buttons
located on the Trailer Brake Control is displayed).
the Trailer Brake Display Page is
displayed, each press and Panel. Press and hold a gain . A trailer with electric brakes has
release of the gain buttons will button to cause the Trailer Gain to become disconnected (a
then cause the Trailer Gain continuously adjust. To turn the CHECK TRAILER WIRING
setting to change. output to the trailer off, adjust the message will also be displayed
Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero). on the DIC).
. Activating the Manual Trailer
Brake Apply lever 0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default . There is a fault present in the
setting. To properly adjust trailer wiring to the electric trailer
. Connecting a trailer equipped gain, see the Trailer Gain brakes (a CHECK TRAILER
with electric trailer brakes Adjustment Procedure later in this WIRING message will also be
All DIC warning and service section. displayed on the DIC).
messages must first be TRAILER OUTPUT – This is
acknowledged by the driver by displayed any time a trailer with
pressing the odometer trip stem or electric brakes is connected.

. There is a fault in the ITBC Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure electrical connections. See
system (a SERVICE TRAILER Vehicle Load Limits on
BRAKE SYSTEM message will Trailer Gain should be set for a
specific trailering condition and page 9‑16 for more information.
also be displayed in the DIC).
must be adjusted any time vehicle 3. After the electrical connection is
Manual Trailer Brake Apply loading, trailer loading or road made to a trailer equipped with
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply surface conditions change. electric brakes:
Lever is located on the Trailer Setting the Trailer Gain properly is . A TRAILER CONNECTED
Brake Control Panel and is used to needed for the best trailer stopping message will be briefly
apply the trailer’s electric brakes performance. A trailer that is displayed on the DIC
independent of the vehicle’s brakes. over-gained may result in locked display.
This lever is used in the Trailer Gain trailer brakes. A trailer that is . The Trailer Brake Display
Adjustment Procedure to properly under-gained may result in not Page will appear on the
adjust the power output to the trailer enough trailer braking. Both of these DIC showing TRAILER
brakes. Sliding the lever to the left conditions may result in poorer GAIN and TRAILER
will apply only the trailer brakes. stopping and stability of the vehicle OUTPUT.
The power output to the trailer is and trailer.
indicated in the Trailer Brake . In the Trailer Output display
Use the following procedure to on the DIC, “- - - - - -“will
Display Page in the DIC. If the
correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each disappear if there is no
vehicle’s service brakes are applied
towing condition: error present. Connecting a
while using the Manual Trailer Brake
Apply Lever, the trailer output power 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are trailer without electric
will be the greater of the two. in proper working condition. brakes will not clear the six
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer dashed lines.
The trailer and the vehicle's brake
lamps will come on when either to the vehicle and make all 4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using
vehicle braking or manual trailer necessary mechanical and the gain adjustment (+ / -)
brakes are applied. buttons on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer 7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time If the disconnect occurs while
attached on a level road surface vehicle loading, trailer loading or the vehicle is stationary, this
representative of the towing road surface conditions change message will automatically turn
condition and free of traffic at or if trailer wheel lock-up is off in about 30 seconds. This
about 32 to 40 km/h (20 to noticed at any time while towing message will also turn off if the
25 mph) and fully apply the driver acknowledges this
Manual Trailer Brake Apply Other ITBC Related DIC Messages message off or if the trailer
lever. In addition to displaying TRAILER harness is re-connected.
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT If the disconnect occurs while
lower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to through the DIC, trailer connection the vehicle is moving, this
25 mph) may result in an and ITBC system status is displayed message will continue until the
incorrect gain setting. in the DIC. ignition is turned off. This
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will also turn off if the
below the point of trailer wheel message will be briefly displayed driver acknowledges this
lock-up, indicated by trailer when a trailer with electric brakes is message off or if the trailer
wheel squeal or tire smoke when first connected to the vehicle. This harness is re-connected.
a trailer wheel locks. message will automatically turn off 2. There is an electrical fault in the
in about 10 seconds. The driver can wiring to the electric trailer
Trailer wheel lock-up may not also acknowledge this message
occur if towing a heavily loaded brakes. This message will
before it automatically turns off. continue as long as there is an
trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This electrical fault in the trailer
allowable setting for the towing message will be displayed if: wiring. This message will
condition. 1. The ITBC system first also turn off if the driver
determines connection to a acknowledges this message off.
trailer with electric brakes and
then the trailer harness becomes
disconnected from the vehicle.
To determine if the electrical fault is the ITBC system. Take the vehicle Trailer Sway
on the vehicle side or trailer side of to an authorized GM dealer to have
the trailer wiring harness the ITBC system diagnosed and
Control (TSC)
connection, do the following: repaired. Vehicles with StabiliTrak have a
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring If either the CHECK TRAILER Trailer Sway Control (TSC) feature.
harness from the vehicle. WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER If the vehicle is towing a trailer and
BRAKE SYSTEM message is the system detects that the trailer is
2. Turn the ignition OFF. swaying, the vehicle brakes are
displayed while driving the vehicle,
3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the power is no longer available to applied without the driver pressing
ignition back to RUN. the trailer brakes. When traffic the brake pedal. If the vehicle is
conditions allow, carefully pull the equipped with the Integrated Trailer
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING Brake Control (ITBC) system,
message re-appears, the vehicle over to the side of the road
and turn the ignition off. Check the StabiliTrak may also apply the
electrical fault is on the trailer brakes. The TCS/StabiliTrak
vehicle side. wiring connection to the trailer and
turn the ignition back on. If either of warning light will flash on the
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING these messages continues, either instrument panel cluster to notify the
message only re-appears when the vehicle or trailer needs service. driver to reduce speed. If the trailer
connecting the trailer wiring continues to sway, StabiliTrak will
harness to the vehicle, the An authorized GM dealer may reduce engine torque to help slow
electrical fault is on the be able to diagnose and repair the vehicle. See StabiliTrak®
trailer side. problems with the trailer. However, System on page 9‑44 for more
any diagnosis and repair of the information.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE trailer is not covered under the
SYSTEM – This message will be vehicle warranty. Please contact Adding non‐dealer accessories can
displayed when there is a problem your trailer dealer for assistance affect the vehicle performance. See
with the ITBC system. If this with trailer repairs and trailer Accessories and Modifications on
message persists over multiple warranty information. page 10‑3 for more information.
ignition cycles there is problem with
Conversions and Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
Add-Ons vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Add-On Electrical Before attempting to add anything
Equipment electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Notice: Do not add anything Vehicle on page 3‑32 and Adding
electrical to the vehicle unless Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
you check with your dealer first. Vehicle on page 3‑32.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Vehicle Care Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-23
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-35
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-36
General Information Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
California Proposition Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-30 Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Automatic Transmission Shift Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Lock Control Function Engine Compartment Fuse
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Park Brake and P (Park) Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Wiper Blade Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-33 Tire Terminology and
Automatic Transmission Headlamp Aiming Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Bulb Replacement System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Tire Pressure Monitor
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Overheated Engine Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Protection Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-2 Vehicle Care
When It Is Time for New General Information California Proposition

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 For service and parts needs, visit 65 Warning
Different Size Tires and your dealer. You will receive Most motor vehicles, including this
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 genuine GM parts and GM-trained one, contain and/or emit chemicals
Uniform Tire Quality and supported service people. known to the State of California to
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Genuine GM parts have one of cause cancer and birth defects or
Wheel Alignment and Tire these marks: other reproductive harm. Engine
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 exhaust, many parts and systems,
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64 many fluids, and some component
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 wear by-products contain and/or
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 emit these chemicals.
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77
Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-79
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Perchlorate Accessories and Damage to vehicle components

resulting from modifications or the
Materials Requirements Modifications installation or use of non‐GM
Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories or certified parts, including control
applications, such as airbag making modifications to the vehicle module or software modifications, is
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, can affect vehicle performance and not covered under the terms of the
and lithium batteries contained in safety, including such things as vehicle warranty and may affect
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, airbags, braking, stability, ride and remaining warranty coverage for
may contain perchlorate materials. handling, emissions systems, affected parts.
Special handling may be necessary. aerodynamics, durability, and GM Accessories are designed to
For additional information, see electronic systems like antilock complement and function with other
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ brakes, traction control, and stability systems on the vehicle. See your
perchlorate. control. These accessories or dealer to accessorize the vehicle
modifications could even cause using genuine GM Accessories
malfunction or damage not covered installed by a dealer technician.
by the vehicle warranty.
Also, see Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3‑32.
10-4 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service This vehicle has an airbag system.
work, use the proper service Before attempting to do your own
manual. It tells you much more service work, see Servicing the
Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Service Work than this manual can. To order the page 3‑32.
proper service manual, see Service Keep a record with all parts receipts
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑16.
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
It can be dangerous to work on Maintenance Records on
your vehicle if you do not have page 11‑14.
the proper knowledge, service
manual, tools, or parts. Always
follow owner manual procedures
and consult the service manual
for your vehicle before doing any
service work.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood 3. Push the secondary hood

release to the right.
To open the hood:
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then bring the hood from full
open to within 152 mm (6 in)
from the closed position, pause,
then push the front center of the
1. Pull the handle with this symbol hood with a swift, firm motion to
on it. It is located inside the fully close the hood.
vehicle to the lower left of the
steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the
vehicle and locate the secondary
hood release, near the center of
the grille.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview

5.3L V8 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on F. Automatic Transmission J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.

page 10‑14. Dipstick (Out of View). See See Power Steering Fluid on
B. Coolant Surge Tank and “Checking the Fluid Level” page 10‑23.
Pressure Cap. See Cooling under Automatic Transmission K. Brake Master Cylinder
System on page 10‑16. Fluid on page 10‑11. Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When under Brake Fluid on
See Jump Starting on to Add Engine Oil” under page 10‑26.
page 10‑80. Engine Oil on page 10‑8. L. Engine Compartment Fuse
D. Battery on page 10‑27. H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Block on page 10‑38.
View). See “Checking Engine M. Windshield Washer Fluid
E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal Oil” under Engine Oil on
(Out of View). See Jump Reservoir. See “Adding Washer
page 10‑8. Fluid” under Washer Fluid on
Starting on page 10‑80.
I. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of page 10‑24.
View). See Cooling System on
page 10‑16.
10-8 Vehicle Care
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil When to Add Engine Oil

To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
your investment: loop. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10‑6 for the
. Always use engine oil approved location of the engine oil dipstick.
to the proper specification and of If the oil is below the cross-hatched
the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level area at the tip of the dipstick, add
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential: 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
in this section. and then recheck the level. See
1. If the engine has been running “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and this section for an explanation of
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil what kind of oil to use. For engine
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan. oil crankcase capacity, see
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon Capacities and Specifications on
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not page 12‑2.
provide an accurate oil level
. Change the engine oil at the reading. Notice: Do not add too much oil.
appropriate time. See Engine Oil Oil levels above or below the
Life System on page 10‑10. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it acceptable operating range
with a paper towel or cloth, then shown on the dipstick are harmful
. Always dispose of engine oil push it back in all the way.
properly. See “What to Do with to the engine. If you find that you
Remove it again, keeping the tip have an oil level above the
Used Oil” in this section. down, and check the level. operating range, i.e., the engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
has so much oil that the oil level Specification Viscosity Grade
gets above the cross-hatched Use and ask for licensed engine oils SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscosity
area that shows the proper with the dexos1™ approved grade for the vehicle. Do not use
operating range, the engine could certification mark. Engine oils other viscosity grade oils such as
be damaged. You should drain meeting the requirements for the SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.
out the excess oil or limit driving vehicle should have the dexos1
of the vehicle and seek a service If in an area of extreme cold, where
approved certification mark. This the temperature falls below −20°F
professional to remove the certification mark indicates that the
excess amount of oil. (−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should
oil has been approved to the dexos1 be used. An oil of this viscosity
See Engine Compartment Overview specification. grade will provide easier cold
on page 10‑6 for the location of the starting for the engine at extremely
engine oil fill cap. low temperatures. When selecting
Add enough oil to put the level an oil of the appropriate viscosity
somewhere in the proper operating grade, always select an oil that
range. Push the dipstick all the way meets the dexos1 specification or
back in when through. equivalent. See “Specification” for
more information.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil Notice: Failure to use the
Selecting the right engine oil recommended engine oil or Engine Oil Additives/Engine
depends on both the proper oil equivalent can result in engine Oil Flushes
specification and viscosity grade. damage not covered by the Do not add anything to the oil. The
See Recommended Fluids and vehicle warranty. Check with your recommended oils with the dexos
Lubricants on page 11‑11. dealer or service provider on specification and displaying the
whether the oil is approved to the dexos certification mark are all that
dexos1 specification. is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
10-10 Vehicle Care
Engine oil system flushes are not Engine Oil Life System It is possible that, if driving under
recommended and could cause the best conditions, the oil life
engine damage not covered by the When to Change Engine Oil system might indicate that an oil
vehicle warranty. This vehicle has a computer system change is not necessary for up to a
that indicates when to change the year. The engine oil and filter must
What to Do with Used Oil be changed at least once a year
engine oil and filter. This is based
Used engine oil contains certain on a combination of factors which and, at this time, the system
elements that can be unhealthy for include engine revolutions, engine must be reset. For vehicles without
your skin and could even cause temperature, and miles driven. the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Based on driving conditions, the SOON message, an oil change is
your skin for very long. Clean your mileage at which an oil change is needed when the OIL LIFE
skin and nails with soap and water, indicated can vary considerably. For REMAINING percentage is near
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or the oil life system to work properly, 0%. Your dealer has trained service
properly dispose of clothing or rags the system must be reset every time people who will perform this work
containing used engine oil. See the the oil is changed. and reset the system. It is also
manufacturer's warnings about the important to check the oil regularly
use and disposal of oil products. On some vehicles, when the over the course of an oil drain
system has calculated that oil life interval and keep it at the proper
Used oil can be a threat to the has been diminished, a CHANGE level.
environment. If you change your ENGINE OIL SOON message
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil comes on to indicate that an oil If the system is ever reset
from the filter before disposal. Never change is necessary. See Engine accidentally, the oil must be
dispose of oil by putting it in the Oil Messages on page 5‑36. changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
trash or pouring it on the ground, Change the oil as soon as possible since the last oil change.
into sewers, or into streams or within the next 1 000 km (600 mi). Remember to reset the oil life
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system whenever the oil is changed.
it to a place that collects used oil.
Vehicle Care 10-11
How to Reset the Engine Oil On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life Automatic Transmission
Life System System can be reset as follows:
Fluid
Reset the system whenever the 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
engine oil is changed so that the the engine off. When to Check and Change
system can calculate the next 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal
Automatic Transmission Fluid
engine oil change. Always reset the slowly three times within It is usually not necessary to
engine oil life to 100% after every oil five seconds. check the transmission fluid level.
change. It will not reset itself. To The only reason for fluid loss is a
reset the system on most vehicles: 3. Display the OIL LIFE
transmission leak or overheating the
REMAINING on the DIC. If the
1. Display the OIL LIFE transmission. If a small leak is
display shows 100%, the system
REMAINING on the DIC. If the suspected, then use the following
is reset. See Driver Information
vehicle does not have DIC checking procedures to check the
Center (DIC) on page 5‑25.
buttons, the vehicle must be in fluid level. However, if there is a
P (Park) to access this display. If the vehicle has a CHANGE large leak, then it may be necessary
See Driver Information Center ENGINE OIL SOON message to have the vehicle towed to a
(DIC) on page 5‑25. and it comes back on when the dealer and have it repaired before
vehicle is started and/or the OIL driving the vehicle further.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET LIFE REMAINING is near 0%, the
button on the DIC, or the trip Notice: Use of the incorrect
engine oil life system has not been
odometer reset stem if the automatic transmission fluid may
reset. Repeat the procedure.
vehicle does not have DIC damage the vehicle, and the
buttons, for more than damages may not be covered by
five seconds. The oil life will the vehicle warranty. Always use
change to 100%. the automatic transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 11‑11.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Change the fluid and filter at the Before checking the fluid level, 6. Using the TRANS TEMP
intervals listed in the Maintenance prepare the vehicle as follows: reading, determine and
Schedule. See Maintenance 1. Start the engine and park the perform the appropriate check
Schedule on page 11‑3. Be sure to vehicle on a level surface. Keep procedure. If the TRANS TEMP
use the transmission fluid listed in the engine running. reading is not within the required
Recommended Fluids and temperature ranges, allow the
Lubricants on page 11‑11. 2. Apply the parking brake and vehicle to cool, or operate the
place the shift lever in P (Park). vehicle until the appropriate
How to Check Automatic transmission fluid temperature is
3. With your foot on the brake
Transmission Fluid reached.
pedal, move the shift lever
Notice: Too much or too through each gear range, Cold Check Procedure
little fluid can damage the pausing for about three seconds
transmission. Too much can in each range. Then, move the Use this procedure only as a
mean that some of the fluid could shift lever back to P (Park). reference to determine if the
come out and fall on hot engine transmission has enough fluid to be
4. Allow the engine to idle operated safely until a hot check
parts or exhaust system parts,
(500 – 800 rpm) for at least procedure can be made. The hot
starting a fire. Too little fluid
one minute. Slowly release the check procedure is the most
could cause the transmission to
brake pedal. accurate method to check the fluid
overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if checking the 5. Keep the engine running and level. Perform the hot check
transmission fluid. press the Trip/Fuel button or procedure at the first opportunity.
trip odometer reset stem until Use this cold check procedure to
TRANS TEMP (Transmission check fluid level when the
Temperature) displays on the transmission temperature is
Driver Information Center (DIC). between 27°C and 32°C
(80°F and 90°F).
Vehicle Care 10-13
Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check the
transmission fluid level when the
transmission fluid temperature
is between 71°C and 93°C
(160°F and 200°F).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick
at the rear of the engine 5. If the fluid level is below the The hot check is the most accurate
compartment, on the passenger COLD check band, add only method to check the fluid level. The
side of the vehicle. enough fluid as necessary to hot check should be performed at
bring the level into the COLD the first opportunity in order to verify
See Engine Compartment band. It does not take much the cold check. The fluid level rises
Overview on page 10‑6 for fluid, generally less than 0.5 L as fluid temperature increases,
more information. (1 pt). Do not overfill. so it is important to ensure the
2. Flip the handle up and then pull 6. Perform a hot check at the transmission temperature is within
out the dipstick and wipe it with first opportunity after the range.
a clean rag or paper towel. transmission reaches a normal
3. Install the dipstick by pushing operating temperature between
it back in all the way, wait 71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).
three seconds, and then pull it 7. If the fluid level is in the
back out again. acceptable range, push the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick dipstick back in all the way, then
and read the lower level. Repeat flip the handle down to lock the
the check procedure to verify the dipstick in place.
reading.
10-14 Vehicle Care
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at
least twice using the procedures
described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to
maintaining proper fluid level.
1. Locate the transmission
5. Safe operating level is within the If readings are still inconsistent,
dipstick at the rear of the engine
HOT cross hatch band on the contact your dealer.
compartment, on the passenger
side of the vehicle. dipstick. If the fluid level is not
within the HOT band, and the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment transmission temperature is
Overview on page 10‑6 for more between 71°C and 93°C (160°F See Engine Compartment Overview
information. and 200°F), add or drain fluid as on page 10‑6 for the location of the
necessary to bring the level into engine air cleaner/filter.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull
out the dipstick and wipe it with the HOT band. If the fluid level is Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
a clean rag or paper towel. low, add only enough fluid to scheduled maintenance intervals
bring the level into the HOT and replace it at the first oil change
3. Install the dipstick by pushing band. It does not take much after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
it back in all the way, wait fluid, generally less than 0.5 L interval. See Maintenance Schedule
three seconds, and then pull it (1 pt ). Do not overfill. on page 11‑3 for more information.
back out again. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,
6. If the fluid level is in the
4. Check both sides of the dipstick acceptable range, push the inspect the filter at each engine oil
and read the lower level. Repeat dipstick back in all the way, then change.
the check procedure to verify the flip the handle down to lock the
reading. dipstick in place.
Vehicle Care 10-15
How to Inspect the Engine

Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the engine air cleaner/filter
from the vehicle by following
Steps 1 through 6. When the engine
air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly
shake it to release loose dust and
dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
remains covered with dirt, a new 3. Remove the engine air cleaner/
filter is required. Never use filter from the housing. Care
compressed air to clean the filter. should be taken to dislodge as
2. Loosen the four screws on the little dirt as possible.
Replacing the Engine Air cover of the housing and lift up 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/
Cleaner/Filter the cover. filter sealing surfaces and the
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter housing.
assembly. See Engine 5. Inspect or replace the engine air
Compartment Overview on cleaner/filter.
page 10‑6.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten
the screws.
10-16 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING
Operating the engine with the air Heater and radiator hoses, and
cleaner/filter off can cause you or other engine parts, can be very
others to be burned. The air hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
cleaner not only cleans the air; it you can be burned.
helps to stop flames if the engine Do not run the engine if there is a
backfires. Use caution when leak. If you run the engine, it
working on the engine and do not 5.3L V8 Engine could lose all coolant. That could
drive with the air cleaner/filter off. A. Coolant Surge Tank cause an engine fire, and you
B. Coolant Surge Tank could be burned. Get any leak
Cooling System Pressure Cap fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The cooling system allows the C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
engine to maintain the correct (Out of View) Notice: Using coolant other than
working temperature. DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
{ WARNING corrosion. In addition, the engine
An electric engine cooling fan coolant could require changing
under the hood can start up even sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
when the engine is not running
first. Any repairs would not be
and can cause injury. Keep
covered by the vehicle warranty.
hands, clothing, and tools away Always use DEX-COOL
from any underhood electric fan. (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-17

. Will not damage aluminum parts.
Engine Coolant WARNING (Continued) . Helps keep the proper engine
The cooling system in the vehicle
temperature.
is filled with DEX-COOL engine With plain water or the wrong
coolant. This coolant is designed to mixture, the engine could get too Notice: If an improper coolant
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or hot but you would not get the mixture is used, the engine could
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever overheat warning. The engine overheat and be badly damaged.
occurs first. The repair cost would not be
could catch fire and you or
covered by the vehicle warranty.
The following explains the cooling others could be burned. Use a
Too much water in the mixture
system and how to check and add 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable can freeze and crack the engine,
coolant when it is low. If there is a water and DEX-COOL coolant. radiator, heater core, and other
problem with engine overheating,
parts.
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑20. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or
drinkable water and DEX-COOL additives are used in the vehicle
What to Use coolant. If using this mixture, cooling system, the vehicle
nothing else needs to be added. could be damaged. Use only the
{ WARNING This mixture: proper mixture of the engine
. Gives freezing protection down coolant listed in this manual for
Adding only plain water or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside the cooling system. See
other liquid to the cooling system temperature. Recommended Fluids and
can be dangerous. Plain water Lubricants on page 11‑11 for
. Gives boiling protection up to more information.
and other liquids, can boil before
129°C (265°F), engine
the proper coolant mixture will.
temperature.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. . Protects against rust and
corrosion.
(Continued)
10-18 Vehicle Care
Never dispose of engine coolant by How to Add Coolant to the

putting it in the trash, pouring it on Surge Tank
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
changed by an authorized service
{ WARNING
center, familiar with legal You can be burned if you spill
requirements regarding used coolant on hot engine parts.
coolant disposal. This will help Coolant contains ethylene glycol
protect the environment and your and it will burn if the engine parts
health.
are hot enough. Do not spill
Checking Coolant coolant on a hot engine.
The vehicle must be on a level
The coolant surge tank is located in
surface when checking the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a
the engine compartment on the specific coolant fill procedure.
level.
passenger side of the vehicle. See
Failure to follow this procedure
Check to see if coolant is visible in Engine Compartment Overview on
could cause the engine to
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant page 10‑6 for more information on
overheat and be severely
inside the coolant surge tank is location.
damaged.
boiling, do not do anything else until
The coolant level should be at or
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark. If it is
not, the vehicle may have a leak in
{ WARNING
above the FULL COLD mark, add a
the cooling system. An electric engine cooling fan
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the under the hood can start up even
coolant surge tank, but be sure the when the engine is not running
cooling system is cool before this and can cause injury. Keep
is done. hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
Vehicle Care 10-19
If no coolant is visible in the surge 2. Keep turning the pressure cap

{ WARNING tank, add coolant as follows: slowly and remove it.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can
come out at high speed. Never 1. Remove the coolant surge tank
turn the cap when the cooling pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the surge tank system, including the coolant
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the surge tank pressure cap and
cooling system and surge tank upper radiator hose, is no
pressure cap to cool if you ever longer hot.
have to turn the pressure cap. Turn the pressure cap slowly 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
counterclockwise about one full the proper mixture to the FULL
turn. If a hiss is heard, wait for COLD mark.
that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
10-20 Vehicle Care
By this time, the coolant level Engine Overheating

inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is The vehicle has several indicators
lower, add more of the proper to warn of engine overheating.
mixture to the coolant surge tank There is a coolant temperature
until the level reaches the FULL gauge on your vehicle's instrument
COLD mark. panel. See Engine Coolant
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be Temperature Gauge on page 5‑13.
sure the pressure cap is In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED
hand-tight and fully seated. STOP ENGINE, ENGINE
6. Verify coolant level after engine OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and
is shut off and the coolant is an ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
4. With the coolant surge tank cold. If necessary, repeat coolant message comes on in the Driver
pressure cap off, start the fill procedure Steps 1 through 6. Information Center (DIC) on the
engine and let it run until the instrument panel. See Engine
upper radiator hose can be felt Notice: If the pressure cap is not Cooling System Messages on
getting hot. Watch out for the tightly installed, coolant loss and page 5‑35 and Engine Power
engine cooling fan. possible engine damage may Messages on page 5‑36.
occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured. If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears,
but instead get service help right
away. See Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and Canada) on
page 13‑7 or Roadside Assistance
Program (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Vehicle Care 10-21
If the decision is made to lift the Notice: If the engine catches fire
hood, make sure the vehicle is while driving with no coolant, the WARNING (Continued)
parked on a level surface. vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be Wait until there is no sign of
Then check to see if the engine
covered by the vehicle warranty. steam or coolant before you
cooling fans are running. If the
engine is overheating, both fans See Overheated Engine open the hood.
should be running. If they are not, Protection Operating Mode on
If you keep driving when the
do not continue to run the engine page 10‑22 for information on
vehicles engine is overheated,
and have the vehicle serviced. driving to a safe place in an
emergency. the liquids in it can catch fire. You
Notice: Engine damage from or others could be badly burned.
running the engine without If Steam Is Coming from the Stop the engine if it overheats,
coolant is not covered by the Engine Compartment and get out of the vehicle until the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated engine is cool.
Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 10‑22 for
{ WARNING See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on
information on driving to a safe Steam from an overheated engine
page 10‑22 for information on
place in an emergency. can burn you badly, even if you
driving to a safe place in an
just open the hood. Stay away
emergency.
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down.
(Continued)
10-22 Vehicle Care
If No Steam Is Coming from If the overheat warning is displayed If there is no sign of steam, idle the
the Engine Compartment with no sign of steam: engine for three minutes while
1. Turn the air conditioning off. parked. If the warning is still
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP displayed, turn off the engine until it
ENGINE or the ENGINE 2. Turn the heater on to the highest cools down. Also, see “Overheated
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE temperature and to the highest Engine Protection Operating Mode”
message, along with a low coolant fan speed. Open the windows as later in this section.
condition, can indicate a serious necessary.
problem.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine Overheated Engine
If an engine overheat warning is idle in N (Neutral) while stopped. Protection
displayed but no steam can be seen If it is safe to do so, pull off the
or heard, the problem may not be road, shift to P (Park) or
Operating Mode
too serious. Sometimes the engine N (Neutral) and let the If an overheated engine condition
can get a little too hot when the engine idle. exists and the ENGINE POWER IS
vehicle: REDUCED message is displayed,
If the temperature overheat gauge is
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. no longer in the overheat zone or an an overheat protection mode which
overheat warning no longer alternates firing groups of cylinders
. Stops after high-speed driving. helps prevent engine damage. In
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
. Idles for long periods in traffic. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly this mode, a loss in power and
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe engine performance will be noticed.
. Tows a trailer. See Trailer
vehicle distance from the vehicle in This operating mode allows the
Towing on page 9‑67.
front. If the warning does not come vehicle to be driven to a safe place
back on, continue to drive normally. in an emergency. Driving extended
distances and/or towing a trailer in
If the warning continues, pull over, the overheat protection mode
stop, and park the vehicle should be avoided.
right away.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Notice: After driving in the Power Steering Fluid How to Check Power Steering
overheated engine protection Fluid
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool Notice: Extremely small amounts
before attempting any repair. The of contamination can cause
engine oil will be severely steering system damage and
degraded. Repair the cause of cause it to not work properly. Do
coolant loss, change the oil and not allow contaminants to contact
reset the oil life system. See the fluid side of the reservoir cap/
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. See Engine Compartment Overview dipstick or to enter the reservoir.
on page 10‑6 for reservoir location. To check the power steering fluid:
Engine Fan When to Check Power Steering 1. Turn the key off and let the
The vehicle has electric cooling Fluid engine compartment cool down.
fans. The fans spinning at low It is not necessary to regularly 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
speed during most everyday driving check power steering fluid unless reservoir clean.
might be heard. The fans can turn there is a leak suspected in the
off if no cooling is required. Under 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
system or an unusual noise is
heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, dipstick with a clean rag.
heard. A fluid loss in this system
and/or high outside temperatures, could indicate a problem. Have the 4. Replace the cap and completely
or if operating the air conditioning system inspected and repaired. tighten it.
system, the fans can change to high
5. Remove the cap again and look
speed and an increase in fan noise
at the fluid level on the dipstick.
might be heard. This is normal and
indicates that the cooling system is The level should be at the FULL
functioning properly. The fans COLD mark. If necessary, add only
change to low speed when enough fluid to bring the level up to
additional cooling is no longer the mark.
required.
10-24 Vehicle Care
What to Use Adding Washer Fluid Notice

To determine what kind of fluid to The vehicle has a low washer fluid . When using concentrated
use, see Recommended Fluids and message on the DIC that comes on washer fluid, follow the
Lubricants on page 11‑11. Always when the washer fluid is low. The manufacturer's instructions
use the proper fluid. message is displayed for for adding water.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid 15 seconds at the start of each . Do not mix water with
may damage the vehicle and the ignition cycle. When the WASHER ready-to-use washer fluid.
damages may not be covered by FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message Water can cause the solution
the vehicle's warranty. Always displays, washer fluid will need to to freeze and damage the
use the correct fluid listed in be added to the windshield washer washer fluid tank and other
Recommended Fluids and fluid reservoir. parts of the washer system.
Lubricants on page 11‑11. . Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
Washer Fluid very cold. This allows for
fluid expansion if freezing
What to Use occurs, which could damage
When windshield washer fluid needs the tank if it is
to be added, be sure to read the completely full.
manufacturer's instructions before Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid until . Do not use engine coolant
use. Use a fluid that has sufficient (antifreeze) in the windshield
protection against freezing in an the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on washer. It can damage the
area where the temperature may fall windshield washer system
below freezing. page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
and paint.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Brakes Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment

can cause a brake squeal when the
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
brake pads have built-in wear with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
indicators that make a high-pitched the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
warning sound when the brake pads Replacing Brake System Parts
are worn and new pads are needed. Properly torqued wheel nuts are
The sound can come and go or be necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
heard all the time the vehicle is pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
moving, except when applying the inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together
brake pedal firmly. evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed
specifications in Capacities and
{ WARNING Specifications on page 12‑2.
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
The brake wear warning sound Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get
means that soon the brakes will replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
not work well. That could lead to If this is not done, the brakes might
a crash. When the brake wear
Brake Pedal Travel not work properly. For example,
warning sound is heard, have the See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change
vehicle serviced.
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The
Notice: Continuing to drive with that brake service might be braking performance expected can
worn-out brake pads could result required. change in many other ways if the
in costly brake repair. wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
10-26 Vehicle Care
Brake Fluid Do not top off the brake fluid. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. to determine when to check the
If fluid is added when the linings are brake fluid. See Maintenance
worn, there will be too much Schedule on page 11‑3.
fluid when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, Checking Brake Fluid
as necessary, only when work is Check brake fluid by looking at the
done on the brake hydraulic system. brake fluid reservoir. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
The brake master cylinder reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See { WARNING page 10‑6.
Engine Compartment Overview on If too much brake fluid is added, it
page 10‑6 for the location of the
can spill on the engine and burn,
reservoir.
if the engine is hot enough. You
There are only two reasons why the or others could be burned, and
brake fluid level in the reservoir the vehicle could be damaged.
might go down: Add brake fluid only when work is
. The brake fluid level goes down done on the brake hydraulic
because of normal brake lining system. See “Checking Brake
wear. When new linings are Fluid” in this section.
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
When the brake fluid falls to a low
. A fluid leak in the brake level, the brake warning light comes
hydraulic system can also cause on. See Brake System Warning The fluid level should be above
a low fluid level. Have the brake Light on page 5‑20. MIN. If it is not, have the brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a hydraulic system checked to see if
leak means that sooner or later there is a leak.
the brakes will not work well.
Vehicle Care 10-27
After work is done on the brake Notice Battery

hydraulic system, make sure the . Using the wrong fluid can
level is above the MIN but not over Refer to the replacement number
badly damage brake shown on the original battery label
the MAX mark. hydraulic system parts. For when a new battery is needed. See
What to Add example, just a few drops of Engine Compartment Overview on
mineral-based oil, such as page 10‑6 for battery location.
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic { WARNING
Lubricants on page 11‑11. system parts so badly that Battery posts, terminals, and
Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
related accessories contain lead
reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
and lead compounds, chemicals
the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
. If brake fluid is spilled on the cause cancer and reproductive
reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces, harm. Wash hands after handling.
the paint finish can be
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
brake hydraulic system, the immediately.
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
10-28 Vehicle Care
Vehicle Storage Four-Wheel Drive To get an accurate reading, the

vehicle should be on a level
{ WARNING Transfer Case surface.
When to Check Lubricant If the level is below the bottom of
Batteries have acid that can burn the fill plug hole, some lubricant will
you and gas that can explode. Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
need to be added. Add enough
You can be badly hurt if you are page 11‑3 to determine when to
lubricant to raise the level to the
not careful. See Jump Starting on check the lubricant.
bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care
page 10‑80 for tips on working How to Check Lubricant not to overtighten the plug.
around a battery without
When to Change Lubricant
getting hurt.
Refer to Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3 to determine how often to
Infrequent Usage: Remove the change the lubricant.
black, negative (−) cable from the
battery to keep the battery from What to Use
running down. Refer to Recommended Fluids and
Extended Storage: Remove the Lubricants on page 11‑11 to
black, negative (−) cable from the determine what kind of lubricant
battery or use a battery trickle to use.
charger.
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
Vehicle Care 10-29
Front Axle What to Use
When to Check and Change Refer to Recommended Fluids and

Lubricant Lubricants on page 11‑11 to
determine what kind of lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly to use.
check front axle fluid unless there is
a leak suspected or an unusual Rear Axle
noise is heard. A fluid loss could
indicate a problem. Have it When to Check Lubricant
inspected and repaired.
It is not necessary to regularly
How to Check Lubricant check rear axle fluid unless you
suspect there is a leak or you hear
To get an accurate reading, the A. Fill Plug an unusual noise. A fluid loss could
B. Drain Plug indicate a problem. Have it
surface.
. When the differential is cold, add inspected and repaired.
enough lubricant to raise the All axle assemblies are filled by
level from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm volume of fluid during production.
(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole. They are not filled to reach a certain
. When the differential is at level. When checking the fluid level
operating temperature (warm), on any axle, variations in the
add enough lubricant to raise the readings can be caused by factory
level to the bottom of the fill fill differences between the minimum
plug hole. and the maximum fluid volume.
10-30 Vehicle Care
Also, if a vehicle has just been How to Check Lubricant What to Use
driven before checking the fluid
Refer to Recommended Fluids and
level, it may appear lower than
Lubricants on page 11‑11 to
normal because fluid has traveled
determine what kind of lubricant
out along the axle tubes and has
to use.
not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has Starter Switch Check
been driven will appear to have a
lower fluid level than a vehicle that { WARNING
has been stationary for an hour or
two. Remember that the rear axle When you are doing this
assembly must be supported to get inspection, the vehicle could
a true reading. move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
To get an accurate reading, the injured.
surface.
1. Before starting this check, be
The proper level is from 1.0 mm to sure there is enough room
19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.75 in) below around the vehicle.
the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper
level.
Vehicle Care 10-31
2. Firmly apply both the parking Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the
brake and the regular brake. ignition on, but do not start the
See Parking Brake on
Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
page 9‑42. Function Check regular brake, try to move the
Do not use the accelerator shift lever out of P (Park) with
pedal, and be ready to turn off { WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
the engine immediately if it
starts. When you are doing this your dealer for service.
inspection, the vehicle could
3. Try to start the engine in each move suddenly. If the vehicle Ignition Transmission
gear. The vehicle should start moves, you or others could be
only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). Lock Check
injured.
If the vehicle starts in any other While parked, and with the parking
position, contact your dealer for brake set, try to turn the ignition to
service. 1. Before starting this check, be LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
sure there is enough room position.
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
. The ignition should turn to
LOCK/OFF only when the shift
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. lever is in P (Park).
See Parking Brake on
page 9‑42.
. The ignition key should come
out only in LOCK/OFF.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle Contact your dealer if service is
begins to move. required.
10-32 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
To replace the wiper blade
assembly:
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm
connector away from the
{ WARNING parking brake followed by the
windshield.
regular brake.
When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
the vehicle could begin to move. required.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
of the vehicle in case it begins to Windshield wiper blades should be
roll. Be ready to apply the regular inspected for wear or cracking. See
brake at once should the vehicle Maintenance Schedule on 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on
begin to move. page 11‑3. each side of the blade, and
Replacement blades come in rotate the blade assembly away
different types and are removed in from the arm connector.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping different ways.
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
. To check the parking brake's
holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Headlamp Aiming The vehicle should:

. Be placed so the headlamps are
The vehicle has a visual optical
7.6 m (25 ft) from a light‐
headlamp aiming system. The aim
colored wall.
of the headlamps has been preset
. Have all four tires on a level
at the factory and should need no
further adjustment. surface which is level all the way
3. Install the new blade onto the to the wall.
arm connector and make sure However, if the vehicle is damaged
the grooved areas are fully set in in a crash, the aim of the headlamps . Be placed so it is perpendicular
the locked position. may be affected and adjustment to the wall.
may be necessary. . Not have any snow, ice, or mud
For the proper type and size, see
Maintenance Replacement Parts on If oncoming vehicles flash their high on it.
page 11‑13. beams at you, this may mean the . Be fully assembled and all other
vertical aim of the headlamps needs work stopped while headlamp
Glass Replacement to be adjusted. aiming is being performed.
It is recommended that the vehicle . Be loaded with a full tank of fuel
If the windshield or front side glass
be taken to your dealer for service if and one person or 75 kg
must be replaced, see your dealer
the headlamps need to be adjusted. (160 lbs) sitting on the
to determine the correct
It is possible, however, to re-aim the driver seat.
replacement glass.
headlamps as described.
. Have the tires properly inflated.
. Have the spare tire in its proper
location in the vehicle.
10-34 Vehicle Care
Headlamp aiming is done with the 6. Turn on the low-beam

vehicle's low-beam headlamps. The headlamps and place a piece of
high-beam headlamps will be cardboard or equivalent in front
correctly aimed if the low-beam of the headlamp not being
headlamps are aimed properly. adjusted. This allows only the
To adjust the vertical aim: beam of light from the headlamp
being adjusted to be seen on the
1. Open the hood. See Hood on flat surface.
page 10‑5
4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of aiming screws, which are under
the low‐beam headlamp. headlamp.
the hood near each headlamp
3. Record the distance from the assembly.
ground to the aim dot on the The adjustment screw can be
low‐beam headlamp. turned with an E8 Torx® socket.
Vehicle Care 10-35
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw Bulb Replacement Taillamps, Turn Signal,
until the headlamp beam is
aimed to the horizontal tape line. For the proper type of replacement Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Turn it clockwise or bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on and Back-Up Lamps
counterclockwise to raise or page 10‑37.
lower the angle of the beam. For any bulb‐changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
9. Make sure that the light from the drop or scratch the bulb. You or
headlamp is positioned at the others could be injured. Be sure
to read and follow the instructions A. Back-up Lamp
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the on the bulb package. B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
left (A) shows the correct C. Sidemarker Lamp
headlamp aim. The lamp on the
right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp aim.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
10-36 Vehicle Care
To replace one of these bulbs, do 3. Pull the taillamp assembly License Plate Lamp
the following: rearward until you disengage the
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate outer pins on the taillamp
on page 2‑15 for more assembly from the vehicle.
information. 4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out
from the bulb socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb
socket and insert the bulb socket A. License Plate Lamp Housing
into the taillamp assembly. B. Bulb
Turn the bulb socket clockwise
into the taillamp assembly until it C. Bulb Socket
clicks.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly
making sure to line up the pins
2. Remove the two screws from the with the vehicle.
taillamp assembly.
Vehicle Care 10-37
To replace one of these bulbs: Replacement Bulbs Electrical System

1. Using a small flat-bladed tool, Bulb
Exterior Lamp
insert the blade end at the back Number Electrical System
edge of the rear license plate
lamp housing (A). Back-up Lamp 7441 Overload
2. Gently push forward while lifting License The vehicle has fuses and circuit
168 breakers to protect against an
the back edge of the lamp Plate Lamp
housing from the bumper electrical system overload.
Rear Turn Signal
opening. Lamp, Taillamp, 3057K When the current electrical load is
3. Turn the bulb socket (C) and Stoplamp too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
one‐quarter turn to release the and closes, protecting the circuit
Sidemarker Lamp 194LL until the current load returns to
bulb socket from the lamp
housing (A). normal or the problem is fixed. This
For replacement bulbs not listed greatly reduces the chance of circuit
4. Pull the bulb (B) from the bulb here, contact your dealer. overload and fire caused by
socket (C). electrical problems.
5. Reverse the steps to install. Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road and
a fuse needs to be replaced, the
same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
10-38 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

An electrical overload may cause Breakers Fuse Block
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
combination of fuses, circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers, and fusible thermal links.
remain off.
This greatly reduces the chance of
Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken The Engine Compartment Fuse
wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure Block is located in the engine
and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new compartment, on the driver side of
one of the identical size and rating. the vehicle. Lift the cover for access
Although the circuit is protected to the fuse/relay block.
from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can
due to heavy snow or ice may be temporarily borrowed from Notice: Spilling liquid on any
cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes electrical component on the
Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as vehicle may damage it. Always
from the windshield before using the you can. keep the covers on any electrical
windshield wipers. component.
If the overload is caused by an To remove fuses, hold the end of
electrical problem and not snow or the fuse between your thumb and
ice, be sure to get it fixed. index finger and pull straight out.
Vehicle Care 10-39

10-40 Vehicle Care
The vehicle may not be equipped Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown. Trailer Back-up Transmission
10 19
Fuses Usage Lamps Controls (Ignition)
Right Trailer Driver Side 20 Fuel Pump

1 11 Low-Beam
Stop/Turn Lamp Fuel System
Headlamp 21
Electronic Stability Control Module
Suspension Engine Control
12 22 Headlamp Washer
2 Control, Automatic Module (Battery)
Rear Windshield
Level Control Fuel Injectors, 23
Washer
Exhaust 13 Ignition Coils
(Right Side) Fuel Injectors,
Left Trailer
3 24 Ignition Coils
Stop/Turn Lamp Transmission
(Left Side)
4 Engine Controls 14 Control Module
(Battery) 25 Trailer Park Lamps
Engine Control
Vehicle Back-up Driver Side Park
5 Module, Throttle 15 26
Lamps Lamps
Control
Passenger Side Passenger Side
Trailer Brake 27
6 16 Low-Beam Park Lamps
Controller
Headlamp 28 Fog Lamps
7 Front Washer
Air Conditioning 29 Horn
8 Oxygen Sensors 17
Compressor
Passenger Side
Antilock Brake 18 Oxygen Sensors
9 30 High-Beam
System 2
Headlamp
Vehicle Care 10-41
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage

Daytime Running 41 Amplifier Accessory Power
31 Lamps (DRL) Outlet, Cigarette
42 Audio System 53
(If Equipped) Lighter
Miscellaneous (If Equipped)
Driver Side
43 (Ignition), Cruise
32 High-Beam Automatic
Control
Headlamp 54 Level Control
44 Liftgate Release Compressor Relay
Daytime Running
33 Lamps 2 Airbag System Climate Controls
45 55
(If Equipped) (Battery) (Ignition)
34 Sunroof Instrument Panel Engine Control
46
Cluster Module, Secondary
Key Ignition 56
47 Not Used Fuel Pump
35 System, Theft‐
(Ignition)
Deterrent System
Auxiliary Climate
48
36 Windshield Wiper Control (Ignition)
J-Case Usage
SEO B2 Upfitter Center Fuses
37
Usage (Battery) 49 High-Mounted
57 Cooling Fan 1
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Electric Adjustable Automatic Level
38
Pedals 50 Rear Defogger
58 Control
Climate Controls 51 Heated Mirrors Compressor
39
(Battery) Heavy Duty
SEO B1 Upfitter
52
Airbag System Usage (Battery) 59 Antilock Brake
40 System
(Ignition)
10-42 Vehicle Care
J-Case Usage J-Case Usage Relays Usage

Fuses Fuses
PRK LAMP Parking Lamps
60 Cooling Fan 2 Power Liftgate
71 REAR
Module Rear Defogger
Antilock Brake DEFOG
61
System 1 Left Bussed
72 RUN/CRNK Switched Power
Electrical Center 2
62 Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Instrument Panel Fuse
63 Relays Usage
Brakes) Block
Cooling Fan High
Left Bussed FAN HI
64 Speed
Electrical Center 1
Cooling Fan Low
Electric Running FAN LO
65 Speed
Boards
Cooling Fan
66 Not Used FAN CNTRL
Control
67 Transfer Case HDLP Low-Beam
Stud 1 (Trailer LO/HID Headlamp
68 Connector Battery FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps
Power)
A/C Air Conditioning
Mid-Bussed CMPRSR Compressor
69 The instrument panel fuse block
Electrical Center 1
STRTR Starter access door is located on the driver
Climate Control side edge of the instrument panel.
70 PWR/TRN Powertrain
Blower
Pull off the cover to access the fuse
FUEL PMP Fuel Pump block.
Vehicle Care 10-43
Fuses Usage
Steering Wheel
3
Controls Backlight
4 Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver
5
Side Turn Signal
Driver Side Turn
6
Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel
7
Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn
8
Signal, Stoplamp
Passenger Door
9
Module, Driver Unlock
The vehicle may not be equipped Power Door Lock 2
Fuses Usage 10
with all of the fuses, relays, and (Unlock Feature)
features shown. 1 Rear Seats Power Door Lock 2
11
Rear Accessory (Lock Feature)
2
Power Outlet
10-44 Vehicle Care
Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Circuit

Usage
Breaker
Stoplamps, Center Ultrasonic Rear
12 High‐Mounted 20 Parking Assist, Power Driver Side Power
Stoplamp Liftgate LT DR Window Circuit
Breaker
13 Rear Climate Controls Power Door Lock 1
21
(Lock Feature)
14 Power Mirror Harness
Driver Information Connector Usage
Body Control 22
15 Center (DIC)
Module (BCM) Driver Door
23 Rear Wiper LT DR Harness
Accessory Power
16 Connection
Outlets 24 Cooled Seats
17 Interior Lamps Driver Seat Module, BODY Harness Connector
25 Remote Keyless Entry BODY Harness Connector
Power Door Lock 1
18 System
(Unlock Feature)
Driver Power Door
Rear Seat 26
19 Lock (Unlock Feature)
Entertainment
Vehicle Care 10-45
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Harness Circuit

Block Connector Usage Breaker Usage
The center instrument panel fuse Body Harness Passenger Side
block is located underneath the BODY 1
Connector 1 CB1 Power Window Circuit
instrument panel, to the left of the Breaker
steering column. Body Harness
BODY 3
Connector 3 Passenger Seat
Top View CB2
Circuit Breaker
Headliner
HEADLINER 3 Harness Driver Seat Circuit
CB3
Connector 3 Breaker
Headliner CB4 Rear Sliding Window
HEADLINER 2 Harness
Connector 2
Headliner
HEADLINER 1 Harness
Connector 1
Special
SEO/ Equipment Option
UPFITTER Upfitter Harness
Connector
Harness
Connector Usage
Body Harness
BODY 2
Connector 2
10-46 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. See Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 56 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such as
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact— such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure. 20‐Inch Tires
. Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a If the vehicle has 20‐inch
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly P275/55R20 size tires, they are
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them. classified as touring tires and
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
are designed for on road use.
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts The low‐profile, wide tread
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc. design is not recommended for
serious crash. See Vehicle off‐road driving. See Off-Road
Load Limits on page 9‑16. (Continued)
Driving on page 9‑6, for
(Continued) additional information.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Notice: Low‐profile tires are criteria have a TPC specification

more susceptible to damage code molded onto the sidewall.
from road hazards or curb GM's TPC specifications meet or
impact than standard profile exceed all federal safety
tires. Tire and/or wheel guidelines.
assembly damage can occur (C) DOT (Department of
when coming into contact Transportation): The
with road hazards like, Department of Transportation
potholes, or sharp edged (DOT) code indicates that
objects, or when sliding into a the tire is in compliance
curb. The warranty does not with the U.S. Department of
cover this type of damage. Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Transportation Motor Vehicle
Keep tires set to the correct Safety Standards.
inflation pressure and, when (A) Tire Size: The tire size
possible, avoid contact with code is a combination of letters (D) Tire Identification Number
curbs, potholes, and other and numbers used to define a (TIN): The letters and numbers
road hazards. particular tire's width, height, following the DOT code are the
aspect ratio, construction type, Tire Identification Number
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the (TIN). The TIN shows the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this manufacturer and plant code,
Useful information about a tire section for more detail. tire size, and date the tire was
is molded into the sidewall. manufactured. The TIN is
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
The examples show a typical molded onto both sides of the
Performance Criteria
passenger and light truck tire tire, although only one side may
Specification): Original
sidewall. have the date of manufacture.
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
10-48 Vehicle Care
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type GM's specific tire performance
of cord and number of plies in criteria have a TPC specification
the sidewall and under the tread. code molded onto the sidewall.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality GM's TPC specifications meet or
Grading (UTQG): Tire exceed all federal safety
manufacturers are required to guidelines.
grade tires based on three (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load:
performance factors: treadwear, Maximum load that can be
traction, and temperature carried and the maximum
resistance. For more pressure needed to support
information, see Uniform Tire that load when used in a dual
Quality Grading on page 10‑62. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire configuration. For information on
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation (A) Tire Size: The tire size recommended tire pressure see
Load Limit: Maximum load code is a combination of letters Tire Pressure on page 10‑53
that can be carried and the and numbers used to define a and Vehicle Load Limits on
maximum pressure needed particular tire's width, height, page 9‑16.
to support that load. For aspect ratio, construction type, (D) DOT (Department of
information on recommended and service description. See the Transportation): The
tire pressure see Tire Pressure “Tire Size” illustration later in this Department of Transportation
on page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load section for more detail. (DOT) code indicates that the
Limits on page 9‑16. (B) TPC Spec (Tire tire is in compliance with
Performance Criteria the U.S. Department of
Specification): Original Transportation Motor Vehicle
equipment tires designed to Safety Standards.
Vehicle Care 10-49
(E) Tire Identification Number Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit
(TIN): The letters and numbers number that indicates the tire
following the DOT code are the Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements.
Tire Identification Number The examples show a typical For example, if the tire size
(TIN). The TIN shows the passenger vehicle and light aspect ratio is 75, as shown in
manufacturer and plant code, truck tire size. item C of the tire illustration, it
tire size, and date the tire was would mean that the tire's
manufactured. The TIN is sidewall is 75 percent as high as
molded onto both sides of the it is wide.
tire, although only one side may (D) Construction Code: A
have the date of manufacture. letter code is used to indicate
(F) Tire Ply Material : The type the type of ply construction in
of cord and number of plies in Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire the tire. The letter R means
the sidewall and under the tread. (A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the
(G) Single Tire Maximum The United States version of a letter D means diagonal or bias
Load: Maximum load that can metric tire sizing system. The ply construction; and the letter B
be carried and the maximum letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply
pressure needed to support that the tire size means a passenger construction.
load when used as a single. For vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
information on recommended standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches.
tire pressure see Tire Pressure and Rim Association.
(F) Service Description: These
on page 10‑53 and Vehicle Load (B) Tire Width: The three‐digit characters represent the load
Limits on page 9‑16. number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents
sidewall to sidewall. the load carrying capacity a tire
10-50 Vehicle Care
is certified to carry. The speed For example, if the tire size this represents the load index for
rating is the maximum speed a aspect ratio is 75, as shown single versus dual wheel usage
tire is certified to carry a load. in item C of the light truck (single/dual). The speed rating is
(LT‐Metric) tire illustration, it the maximum speed a tire is
would mean that the tire's certified to carry a load.
sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide. Tire Terminology and
(D) Construction Code: A Definitions
letter code is used to indicate Air Pressure: The amount of
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire the type of ply construction in air inside the tire pressing
(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric) the tire. The letter R means outward on each square inch
Tire: The United States version radial ply construction; the of the tire. Air pressure is
of a metric tire sizing system. letter D means diagonal or bias expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
The letters LT as the first two ply construction; and the letter B or psi (pounds per square inch).
characters in the tire size mean means belted‐bias ply
a light truck tire engineered to construction. Accessory Weight: The
standards set by the U.S. Tire combined weight of optional
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of accessories. Some examples
and Rim Association. the wheel in inches. of optional accessories are
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit (F) Load Range: Load Range. automatic transmission, power
number indicates the tire section steering, power brakes, power
width in millimeters from (G) Service Description: The windows, power seats, and air
sidewall to sidewall. service description indicates the conditioning.
load index and speed rating of a
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit tire. If two numbers are given as Aspect Ratio: The relationship
number that indicates the tire in the example, 120/116, then of a tire's height to its width.
height‐to‐width measurements.
Vehicle Care 10-51
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords that is located between and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
may be made from steel or other DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑16.
reinforcing materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire,
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
alternate angles less than tire used on light duty trucks and
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, some multipurpose passenger
the tread. vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑16.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10‑53. Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9‑16.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
10-52 Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An
pressure for that tire. of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A a tire indicating the maximum
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and speed at which a tire can
weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and operate.
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
production options weight. Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire that
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown comes into contact with
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Load Limits on page 9‑16. Pressure on page 10‑53 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Occupant Distribution : bands, sometimes called wear
Designated seating positions. page 9‑16.
bars, that show across the tread
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10‑60.
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads information system that provides
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. consumers with ratings for a
Vehicle Care 10-53
tire's traction, temperature, and recommended inflation Overinflated tires, or tires that
and treadwear. Ratings pressure. See “Tire and Loading have too much air, can
are determined by tire Information Label” under Vehicle result in:
manufacturers using Load Limits on page 9‑16. . Unusual wear.
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the Tire Pressure . Poor handling.
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tires need the correct amount of . Rough ride.
Tire Quality Grading on air pressure to operate
page 10‑62.
. Needless damage from
effectively. road hazards.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Notice: Neither tire
number of designated The Tire and Loading
underinflation nor Information label on the vehicle
seating positions multiplied by overinflation is good.
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated indicates the original equipment
Underinflated tires, or tires tires and the correct cold tire
cargo load. See Vehicle Load that do not have enough air,
Limits on page 9‑16. inflation pressures. The
can result in: recommended pressure is the
Vehicle Maximum Load on the . Tire overloading and minimum air pressure needed to
Tire: Load on an individual tire overheating which could support the vehicle's maximum
due to curb weight, accessory lead to a blowout. load carrying capacity.
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight. . Premature or For additional information
irregular wear. regarding how much weight the
Vehicle Placard: A label vehicle can carry, and an
permanently attached to a . Poor handling. example of the Tire and Loading
vehicle showing the vehicle . Reduced fuel economy. Information label, see Vehicle
capacity weight and the Load Limits on page 9‑16.
original equipment tire size
10-54 Vehicle Care
How the vehicle is loaded Remove the valve cap from the Tire Pressure Monitor
affects vehicle handling and ride tire valve stem. Press the tire System
comfort. Never load the vehicle gauge firmly onto the valve to
with more weight than it was get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System
designed to carry. If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
matches the recommended levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
When to Check
pressure on the Tire and the air pressure in your tires and
Check the tires once a month Loading Information label, no transmit tire pressure readings to a
or more. further adjustment is necessary. receiver located in the vehicle.
Do not forget the spare tire, If the inflation pressure is low,
Each tire, including the spare
if the vehicle has one. See add air until the recommended (if provided), should be checked
Full-Size Spare Tire on pressure is reached. If the monthly when cold and inflated to
page 10‑79 for additional inflation pressure is high, press the inflation pressure recommended
information. on the metal stem in the center by the vehicle manufacturer on the
of the tire valve to release air. vehicle placard or tire inflation
How to Check pressure label. (If your vehicle has
Re-check the tire pressure with tires of a different size than the size
Use a good quality pocket-type the tire gauge. indicated on the vehicle placard or
gauge to check tire pressure. tire inflation pressure label, you
Proper tire inflation cannot be Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks should determine the proper tire
determined by looking at the tire. inflation pressure for those tires.)
Check the tire inflation pressure and keep out dirt and moisture.
As an added safety feature, your
when the tires are cold, meaning
vehicle has been equipped with a
the vehicle has not been driven tire pressure monitoring system
for at least three hours or no (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Vehicle Care 10-55
pressure telltale when one or The TPMS malfunction indicator is Federal Communications
more of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure Commission (FCC) Rules and
under‐inflated. telltale. When the system detects a with Industry Canada
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for Standards
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. See Radio Frequency Statement on
should stop and check your tires as page 13‑20 for information
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as regarding Part 15 of the Federal
to the proper pressure. Driving on Communications Commission (FCC)
a significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
Rules and with Industry Canada
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitor
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Operation
ability. of reasons, including the installation This vehicle may have a Tire
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent The TPMS is designed to warn the
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly. driver when a low tire pressure
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction condition exists. TPMS sensors are
pressure, even if under‐inflation has telltale after replacing one or more mounted onto each tire and wheel
not reached the level to trigger tires or wheels on your vehicle to assembly, excluding the spare tire
illumination of the TPMS low tire ensure that the replacement or and wheel assembly. The TPMS
pressure telltale. alternate tires and wheels allow the sensors monitor the air pressure in
TPMS to continue to function the tires and transmit the tire
Your vehicle has also been properly. pressure readings to a receiver
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
See Tire Pressure Monitor located in the vehicle.
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. Operation on page 10‑55 for
additional information.
10-56 Vehicle Care
displays, see Driver Information Notice: Tire sealant materials are

Center (DIC) on page 5‑25 and Tire not all the same. A non-approved
Messages on page 5‑39. tire sealant could damage the
The low tire pressure warning light TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
may come on in cool weather when damage caused by using an
the vehicle is first started, and then incorrect tire sealant is not
When a low tire pressure condition turn off as the vehicle is driven. This covered by the vehicle
is detected, the TPMS illuminates could be an early indicator that the warranty. Always use only the
the low tire pressure warning light air pressure is getting low and GM-approved tire sealant
located on the instrument cluster. needs to be inflated to the proper available through your dealer or
If the warning light comes on, stop pressure. included in the vehicle.
as soon as possible and inflate the TPMS Malfunction Light and
A Tire and Loading Information
tires to the recommended pressure Message
label shows the size of the original
shown on the Tire and Loading
equipment tires and the correct The TPMS will not function properly
Information label. See Vehicle Load
inflation pressure for the tires when if one or more of the TPMS sensors
Limits on page 9‑16.
they are cold. See Vehicle Load are missing or inoperable. When the
A message to check the pressure in Limits on page 9‑16, for an example system detects a malfunction, the
a specific tire displays in the Driver of the Tire and Loading Information low tire pressure warning light
Information Center (DIC). The low label and its location. Also see Tire flashes for about one minute and
tire pressure warning light and the Pressure on page 10‑53. then stays on for the remainder of
DIC warning message come on at the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
The TPMS can warn about a
each ignition cycle until the tires message also displays. The
low tire pressure condition but it
are inflated to the correct inflation malfunction light and DIC warning
does not replace normal tire
pressure. Using the DIC, tire message come on at each ignition
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
pressure levels can be viewed. For cycle until the problem is corrected.
on page 10‑58, Tire Rotation on
additional information and details
page 10‑59, and Tires on
about the DIC operation and
page 10‑46.
Vehicle Care 10-57
Some of the conditions that can

. One or more TPMS sensors TPMS Sensor Matching
cause these to come on are: are missing or damaged. The Process
malfunction light and the DIC
. One of the road tires has been message should go off when the Each TPMS sensor has a unique
replaced with the spare tire. The TPMS sensors are installed and identification code. The identification
spare tire does not have a the sensor matching process is code needs to be matched to a new
TPMS sensor. The malfunction performed successfully. See tire/wheel position after rotating the
light and the DIC message your dealer for service. vehicle’s tires or replacing one or
should go off after the road tire more of the TPMS sensors. Also,
is replaced and the sensor
. Replacement tires or wheels do the TPMS sensor matching process
matching process is performed not match the original equipment should be performed after replacing
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor tires or wheels. Tires and wheels a spare tire with a road tire
Matching Process” later in this other than those recommended containing the TPMS sensor. The
section. could prevent the TPMS from malfunction light and the DIC
functioning properly. See Buying message should go off at the next
. The TPMS sensor matching New Tires on page 10‑61.
process was not done or ignition cycle. The sensors are
not completed successfully
. Operating electronic devices or matched to the tire/wheel positions,
after rotating the tires. The being near facilities using radio using a TPMS relearn tool, in the
malfunction light and the DIC wave frequencies similar to the following order: driver side front tire,
message should go off after TPMS could cause the TPMS passenger side front tire, passenger
successfully completing the sensors to malfunction. side rear tire, and driver side rear.
sensor matching process. See If the TPMS is not functioning See your dealer for service or to
“TPMS Sensor Matching properly, it cannot detect or signal a purchase a relearn tool.
Process” later in this section. low tire condition. See your dealer There are two minutes to match
for service if the TPMS malfunction the first tire/wheel position, and
light and DIC message come on five minutes overall to match all four
and stay on. tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
10-58 Vehicle Care
The TPMS sensor matching 6. Proceed to the passenger side Tire Inspection
process is: front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. We recommend that the tires,
1. Set the parking brake.
including the spare tire, if the
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with 7. Proceed to the passenger side
rear tire, and repeat the vehicle has one, be inspected
the engine off. for signs of wear or damage at
procedure in Step 5.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry least once a month.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear
(RKE) transmitter's Q and " tire, and repeat the procedure in Replace the tire if:
buttons at the same time for Step 5. The horn sounds two
approximately five seconds. The
. The indicators at three or
times to indicate the sensor
horn sounds twice to signal the identification code has been
more places around the tire
receiver is in relearn mode and matched to the driver side rear can be seen.
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE tire, and the TPMS sensor . There is cord or fabric
message displays on the DIC matching process is no longer
screen. showing through the tire's
active. The TIRE LEARNING rubber.
4. Start with the driver side ACTIVE message on the DIC
front tire. display screen goes off. . The tread or sidewall is
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. cracked, cut, or snagged
5. Place the relearn tool against
the tire sidewall, near the valve deep enough to show cord or
10. Set all four tires to the fabric.
stem. Then press the button to recommended air pressure
activate the TPMS sensor. level as indicated on the Tire . The tire has a bump, bulge,
A horn chirp confirms that the and Loading Information label. or split.
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
Vehicle Care 10-59

. The tire has a puncture, cut, Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
or other damage that cannot System. See Tire Pressure
be repaired well because of Monitor Operation on
the size or location of the page 10‑55.
damage.
Check that all wheel nuts are
Tire Rotation properly tightened. See “Wheel
Nut Torque” under Capacities
Tires should be rotated every and Specifications on
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See page 12‑2.
Maintenance Schedule on
page 11‑3. { WARNING
Tires are rotated to achieve a Use this rotation pattern when
rotating the tires. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
uniform wear for all tires. The
parts to which it is fastened, can
first rotation is the most Do not include the spare tire in make wheel nuts become loose
important. the tire rotation. after time. The wheel could come
Any time unusual wear is Adjust the front and rear tires to off and cause an accident. When
noticed, rotate the tires as soon the recommended inflation changing a wheel, remove any
as possible and check the wheel pressure on the Tire and rust or dirt from places where the
alignment. Also check for Loading Information label after wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
damaged tires or wheels. See an emergency, a cloth or a paper
the tires have been rotated. See
When It Is Time for New Tires towel can be used; however, use
Tire Pressure on page 10‑53
on page 10‑60 and Wheel a scraper or wire brush later to
and Vehicle Load Limits on remove all rust or dirt.
Replacement on page 10‑64. page 9‑16.
10-60 Vehicle Care
Lightly coat the center of the maintenance affect how fast aging
wheel hub with wheel bearing takes place. Tires will typically
grease after a wheel change or need to be replaced due to wear
tire rotation to prevent corrosion before they may need to be
replaced due to age. Consult the tire
or rust build-up. Do not get
manufacturer for more information
grease on the flat wheel on when tires should be replaced.
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts. Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
When It Is Time for New mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
Tires a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
Factors, such as maintenance, Treadwear indicators are one way to
area away from direct sunlight to
temperatures, driving speeds, tell when it is time for new tires.
slow aging. This area should be free
vehicle loading, and road conditions Treadwear indicators appear when
of grease, gasoline or other
affect the wear rate of the tires. the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
substances that can deteriorate
or less of tread remaining. Some
rubber.
commercial truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators. See Tire Parking for an extended period can
Inspection on page 10‑58 and Tire cause flat spots on the tires that
Rotation on page 10‑59 for may result in vibrations while
additional information. driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
The rubber in tires ages over time.
raise the vehicle to reduce the
This also applies to the spare tire,
weight from the tires.
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple conditions
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
Vehicle Care 10-61
Buying New Tires GM recommends replacing all the

tires at the same time. Uniform { WARNING
GM has developed and matched tread depth on all tires will help to
specific tires for the vehicle. The maintain the performance of the Mixing tires of different sizes,
original equipment tires installed vehicle. Braking and handling brands, or types may cause loss
were designed to meet General performance may be adversely of control of the vehicle, resulting
Motors Tire Performance Criteria affected if all the tires are not in a crash or other vehicle
Specification (TPC Spec) system replaced at the same time. See Tire damage. Use the correct size,
rating. When replacement tires are Inspection on page 10‑58 and Tire brand, and type of tires on all
needed, GM strongly recommends Rotation on page 10‑59 for wheels.
buying tires with the same TPC information on proper tire rotation.
Spec rating. This vehicle may have a different
size spare than the road tires
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system { WARNING originally installed on the vehicle.
considers over a dozen critical When new, the vehicle included a
specifications that impact the Tires could explode during spare tire and wheel assembly
overall performance of the improper service. Attempting with a similar overall diameter as
vehicle, including brake system to mount or dismount a tire the road tires and wheels, so it is
performance, ride and handling, could cause injury or death.
traction control, and tire pressure all right to drive on it. The spare
Only your dealer or authorized tire was developed for use on this
monitoring performance. GM's TPC
tire service center should vehicle and will not affect vehicle
Spec number is molded onto the
tire's sidewall near the tire size. mount or dismount the tires. handling.
If the tires have an all‐season tread
design, the TPC Spec number will
be followed by MS for mud and
snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on
page 10‑47 for additional
information.
10-62 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading Information

{ WARNING label indicates the original { WARNING
equipment tires on the vehicle. See
Using bias-ply tires on the Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16 If different sized wheels are used,
vehicle may cause the wheel for the label location and more there may not be an acceptable
rim flanges to develop cracks information about the Tire and level of performance and safety if
after many miles of driving. Loading Information label. tires not recommended for those
A tire and/or wheel could fail wheels are selected. This
suddenly and cause a crash. Different Size Tires and increases the chance of a crash
Use only radial-ply tires with and serious injury. Only use GM
Wheels specific wheel and tire systems
the wheels on the vehicle.
If wheels or tires are installed that developed for the vehicle, and
are a different size than the original have them properly installed by a
If the vehicle tires must be replaced equipment wheels and tires, vehicle GM certified technician.
with a tire that does not have a TPC performance, including its braking,
Spec number, make sure they are ride and handling characteristics,
the same size, load range, speed stability, and resistance to rollover See Buying New Tires on
rating, and construction (radial) as may be affected. If the vehicle has page 10‑61 and Accessories and
the original tires. electronic systems such as antilock Modifications on page 10‑3.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure brakes, rollover airbags, traction
monitoring system could give an control, and electronic stability Uniform Tire Quality
inaccurate low‐pressure warning if control, the performance of these Grading
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are systems can also be affected.
Quality grades can be found
installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor
where applicable on the tire
System on page 10‑54.
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
Vehicle Care 10-63
For example: While the tires available on government course as a tire

General Motors passenger cars graded 100. The relative
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
and light trucks may vary with performance of tires depends
Temperature A
respect to these grades, they upon the actual conditions of
The following information relates must also conform to federal their use, however, and may
to the system developed by the safety requirements and depart significantly from the
United States National Highway additional General Motors Tire norm due to variations in
Traffic Safety Administration Performance Criteria (TPC) driving habits, service practices
(NHTSA), which grades tires standards. and differences in road
by treadwear, traction, and characteristics and climate.
All Passenger Car Tires Must
temperature performance. This
Conform to Federal Safety Traction – AA, A, B, C
applies only to vehicles sold in
Requirements In Addition To
the United States. The grades The traction grades, from
These Grades.
are molded on the sidewalls of highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
most passenger car tires. The Treadwear and C. Those grades represent
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The treadwear grade is a the tire's ability to stop on wet
(UTQG) system does not apply comparative rating based on the pavement as measured under
to deep tread, winter tires, wear rate of the tire when tested controlled conditions on
compact spare tires, tires with under controlled conditions on a specified government test
nominal rim diameters of specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), course. For example, a tire concrete. A tire marked C may
or to some limited-production graded 150 would wear one and have poor traction performance.
tires. a half (1½) times as well on the
10-64 Vehicle Care
Warning: The traction grade passenger car tires must meet alignment if there is unusual tire
assigned to this tire is based on under the Federal Motor Safety wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
straight-ahead braking traction Standard No. 109. Grades B and one side or the other. If the vehicle
tests, and does not include A represent higher levels of vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
acceleration, cornering, performance on the laboratory
need to be rebalanced. See your
hydroplaning, or peak traction test wheel than the minimum dealer for proper diagnosis.
characteristics. required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire Wheel Replacement
Temperature – A, B, C
is established for a tire that
The temperature grades are A is properly inflated and not Replace any wheel that is bent,
(the highest), B, and C, overloaded. Excessive speed, cracked, or badly rusted or
representing the tire's resistance corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
underinflation, or excessive loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and
to the generation of heat and its loading, either separately or in wheel nuts should be replaced.
ability to dissipate heat when combination, can cause heat If the wheel leaks air, replace it.
tested under controlled buildup and possible tire failure. Some aluminum wheels can be
conditions on a specified indoor repaired. See your dealer if any of
laboratory test wheel. Sustained Wheel Alignment and Tire these conditions exist.
high temperature can cause the Balance Your dealer will know the kind of
material of the tire to degenerate wheel that is needed.
and reduce tire life, and The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to Each new wheel should have the
excessive temperature can lead provide the longest tire life and best same load-carrying capacity,
to sudden tire failure. The grade overall performance. Adjustments to diameter, width, offset, and be
C corresponds to a level of wheel alignment and tire balancing mounted the same way as the
performance which all will not be necessary on a regular one it replaces.
basis. However, check the
Vehicle Care 10-65
Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel Used Replacement Wheels

nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor WARNING (Continued)
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
{ WARNING or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could
Replacing a wheel with a used
cause loss of control and a crash.
{ WARNING one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been Use another type of traction
Using the wrong replacement driven may be unknown. It could device only if its manufacturer
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel fail suddenly and cause a crash. recommends it for the vehicle's
nuts can be dangerous. It could When replacing wheels, use a tire size combination and
affect the braking and handling of new GM original equipment road conditions. Follow that
the vehicle. Tires can lose air, wheel. manufacturer's instructions. To
and cause loss of control, causing avoid vehicle damage, drive slow
a crash. Always use the correct and readjust or remove the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel Tire Chains traction device if it is contacting
nuts for replacement. the vehicle. Do not spin the
{ WARNING wheels.
Notice: The wrong wheel can If traction devices are used, install
If the vehicle has P265/65R18 or
also cause problems with bearing them on the rear tires.
P275/55R20 size tires, do not use
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration, tire chains. There is not enough
headlamp aim, bumper height, clearance. Tire chains used on a Notice: If the vehicle has
vehicle ground clearance, and tire vehicle without the proper amount P265/70R17 size tires, use tire
or tire chain clearance to the of clearance can cause damage chains only where legal and only
body and chassis. to the brakes, suspension, when necessary. Use chains that
(Continued) are the proper size for the tires.
Install them on the rear tires only.
10-66 Vehicle Care
Do not use chains on the front maintain lane position, and then
tires. gently brake to a stop, well off the WARNING (Continued)
Tighten them as tightly as road, if possible.
Have your dealer or an authorized
possible with the ends securely A rear blowout, particularly on a
tire service center repair or
fastened. Drive slowly and follow curve, acts much like a skid and
the chain manufacturer's may require the same correction as replace the flat tire as soon as
instructions. If the chains contact used in a skid. Stop pressing the possible.
the vehicle, stop and retighten accelerator pedal and steer to
them. If the contact continues, straighten the vehicle. It may be
slow down until it stops. Driving
too fast or spinning the wheels
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
{ WARNING
with chains on will damage the if possible. Lifting a vehicle and getting
vehicle. under it to do maintenance or
{ WARNING repairs is dangerous without the
If a Tire Goes Flat appropriate safety equipment and
Driving on a flat tire will cause training. If a jack is provided with
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
permanent damage to the tire. the vehicle, it is designed only for
while driving, especially if the tires
are maintained properly. If air goes Re-inflating a tire after it has changing a flat tire. If it is used for
out of a tire, it is much more likely to been driven on while severely anything else, you or others could
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a underinflated or flat may cause a be badly injured or killed if the
blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash. vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire is provided with the vehicle, only
that has been driven on while use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire severely underinflated or flat.
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
the accelerator pedal and grip the and wheel damage by driving slowly
steering wheel firmly. Steer to to a level place, well off the road,
Vehicle Care 10-67
if possible. Turn on the hazard The following information explains

warning flashers. See Hazard WARNING (Continued) how to use the jack and change
Warning Flashers on page 6‑4. a tire.
5. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
{ WARNING 6. Place wheel blocks on both
Tire Changing
Changing a tire can be sides of the tire at the Removing the Spare Tire and
dangerous. The vehicle can slip opposite corner of the tire Tools
off the jack and roll over or fall being changed. The jack and the wheel blocks are
causing injury or death. Find a located under a cover near the
level place to change the tire. To When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), passenger side rear seat.
help prevent the vehicle from use the following example as a
moving: guide to assist in the placement of
1. Set the parking brake firmly. the wheel blocks (A).
2. Put the shift lever in
P (Park).
3. For vehicles with
four-wheel-drive with a
N (Neutral) transfer case
position, be sure the Rear Seat (Passenger Side)
transfer case is in a drive Jack Cover
gear— not in N (Neutral).
1. Remove the jack cover
4. Turn off the engine and do A. Wheel Block by turning the two wing
not restart while the vehicle nuts one-quarter turn
is raised. B. Flat Tire counterclockwise and pulling the
(Continued) jack cover off.
10-68 Vehicle Care
3. Turn the wing nut (C) To access the spare tire:

counterclockwise to remove the
wheel blocks (A) attached to the
jack (E). Place the wheel blocks
where needed as indicated in
previously in this section.
The tools for changing a flat tire are
located in the passenger side
top-box storage unit.
To remove the tools:
1. Open the top door on the
A. Wheel Blocks passenger side top-box storage
unit. Use the ignition/door key to
B. Jack Knob A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
unlock it if it is locked. See
C. Wing Nut Top-Box Storage on page 4‑2 for Pointed Down)
D. Retaining Hook more information. B. Hoist Assembly
E. Jack 2. Remove the black pouch from C. Hoist Cable
the storage box.
F. Mounting Bracket D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
2. Turn the jack knob (B) on the E. Hoist Shaft
jack counterclockwise to release F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
the jack (E) from the mounting
bracket (F). G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle Extension(s)
J. Spare Tire Lock
Vehicle Care 10-69
1. Open the hoist shaft access If the spare tire does not lower to
cover on the bumper to access the ground, the secondary latch
the spare tire lock (J). is engaged causing the tire not
2. To remove the spare tire lock, to lower. See Secondary Latch
insert the ignition key, turn it System on page 10‑77 for more
clockwise and pull it straight out. information.
4. Insert the open end of the

extension (F) through the hole in
the rear bumper (G) (hoist shaft
access hole).
Be sure the hoist end (F) of the
extension connects to the hoist
shaft. The ribbed square end of
3. Assemble the two jack handle the extension is used to lower
extensions (I) and wheel the spare tire.
wrench (H), as shown. Do not use the chiseled end of
the wheel wrench. 6. Use the wheel wrench hook to
pull the hoist cable closer to
5. Turn the wheel wrench assist in reaching the spare tire.
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.
Continue to turn the wheel
wrench until the spare tire can
be pulled out from under the
vehicle.
10-70 Vehicle Care
tilt the retainer and pull it through 1. Do a safety check before

the center of the wheel along proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
with the cable and guide pin. Flat on page 10‑66 for more
8. Put the spare tire near the information.
flat tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
7. Tilt the tire with slack in the

cable to access the tire/wheel
retainer.
2. To remove the center cap, place

the chiseled end of the wheel
wrench in the slot on the wheel
and gently pry the cap out.
A. Jack
Separate the retainer from the
guide pin by sliding the retainer B. Wheel Blocks
up the pin while pressing down C. Jack Handle
on the latch. When the retainer D. Jack Handle Extensions
is separated from the guide pin,
E. Wheel Wrench
Vehicle Care 10-71
{ WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen Jacking Locations (Overall View) 4. Position the jack under the
all the wheel nuts. Turn the A. Front Position vehicle as shown.
wheel wrench counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not B. Rear Position
remove the wheel nuts yet.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle
when it is supported only by
a jack.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Front Position Rear Position 5. Remove all the wheel nuts.

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is 6. Take off the flat tire.
on a front tire of the vehicle, use on a rear tire of the vehicle, use
the jack handle and only one the jack handle (B) and both jack
jack handle extension. Attach handle extensions (C). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack the wheel wrench (D) to the jack
handle extension. Attach the handle extensions (C). Attach
jack handle to the jack (A). the jack handle (B) to the
Position the jack on the frame jack (A). Use the jacking pad (E)
behind the flat tire near the front provided on the rear axle. Turn
body mount, as shown. Turn the the wheel wrench (D) clockwise
wheel wrench clockwise to raise to raise the vehicle. Raise the
the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far vehicle far enough off the
enough off the ground so there ground so there is enough room
is enough room for the spare tire for the spare tire to clear the
to clear the ground. ground.
Vehicle Care 10-73
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with

{ WARNING the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel after mounting
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the the spare tire.
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose 10. Tighten each wheel nut by
after time. The wheel could come hand. Then use the wheel
off and cause an accident. When wrench to tighten the wheel
changing a wheel, remove any nuts until the wheel is held
against the hub.
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In 11. Turn the wheel wrench
an emergency, a cloth or a paper counterclockwise to lower the
towel can be used; however, use vehicle. Lower the jack
7. Remove any rust or dirt from the completely.
a scraper or wire brush later to
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces,
remove all rust or dirt. and spare wheel.
8. Install the spare tire.
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10-74 Vehicle Care
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

{ WARNING and Tools
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause { WARNING
the wheels to become loose or
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
come off. The wheel nuts should
equipment in the passenger
be tightened with a torque wrench
compartment of the vehicle could
to the proper torque specification
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
after replacing. Follow the torque
collision, loose equipment could
specification supplied by the
strike someone. Store all these in
aftermarket manufacturer when
the proper place.
using accessory locking wheel
12. Tighten the nuts firmly in a
nuts. See Capacities and
crisscross sequence as shown
Specifications on page 12‑2 for Notice: Storing an aluminum
by turning the wheel wrench
original equipment wheel nut wheel with a flat tire under your
clockwise.
torque specifications. vehicle for an extended period of
When reinstalling the regular wheel time or with the valve stem
and tire, also reinstall the center pointing up can damage the
Notice: Improperly tightened cap. Line the tab on the back of the wheel. Always stow the wheel
wheel nuts can lead to brake tab with the slot in the wheel. Place with the valve stem pointing
pulsation and rotor damage. To the cap on the wheel and press until down and have the wheel/tire
avoid expensive brake repairs, it snaps into place. repaired as soon as possible.
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the Store the tire under the rear of the
proper torque specification. See vehicle in the spare tire carrier.
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
Vehicle Care 10-75
1. Put the tire on the ground at the

rear of the vehicle with the valve
stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
Tilt the retainer down through

the center wheel opening.
A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve Stem

Pointed Down)
2. Tilt the tire. Separate the tire/
B. Hoist Assembly
wheel retainer from the guide
C. Hoist Cable pin. Pull the pin through the
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer center of the wheel.
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
3. Assemble the two jack handle
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
extensions (I) and wheel
H. Wheel Wrench wrench (H), as shown.
I. Jack Handle Extension(s)
J. Spare Tire Lock
10-76 Vehicle Care
To store the tools:

1. Return the tools to the tool bag
and place it back in the top‐box
storage unit.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and
jack together with the wing nut
by reversing Step 2 under
“Removing the Spare Tire and
4. Insert the open end of the Tools.”
extension (F) through the hole in 3. Replace the jack cover and
the rear bumper (G) (hoist shaft tighten the jack-cover wing nuts.
access hole). 7. Make sure the tire is stored
5. Raise the tire part way upward. securely. Push, pull (A), and then
Make sure the retainer is fully try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
seated across the underside of moves, use the wheel wrench to
the wheel and is centered in the tighten the cable.
wheel opening. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
6. Raise the tire fully against the 9. Close the hoist shaft access
underside of the vehicle by cover.
turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. The
cable cannot be overtighten.
Vehicle Care 10-77
Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the 3. Loosen the cable by turning the
secondary latch: wrench counterclockwise three
This vehicle has an or four turns.
underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a 4. Repeat this procedure at least
secondary latch system. It is two times. If the spare tire
designed to stop the spare tire from lowers to the ground, continue
suddenly falling off your vehicle. For with Step 5 under “Removing the
the secondary latch to work, the Spare Tire and Tools” under Tire
spare must be installed with the Changing on page 10‑67.
valve stem pointing down. See 5. If the spare does not lower, turn
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and the wrench counterclockwise
Tools” under Tire Changing on until approximately 15 cm (6 in)
page 10‑67. of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their
{ WARNING 1. Check under the vehicle to see if shortest ends, with the backs
the cable end is visible. If the facing each other.
Before beginning this procedure
read all the instructions. Failure to cable is not visible proceed to
read and follow the instructions Step 6.
could damage the hoist assembly 2. If it is visible, first try to tighten
and you and others could get the cable by turning the wheel
hurt. Read and follow the wrench clockwise until you hear
instructions listed next. two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the
cable.
10-78 Vehicle Care
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to

raise the jack until it lifts the
end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until
the spare tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in
place. The secondary latch has
released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
8. Attach the jack handle,
extension, and wheel wrench to 12. Lower the jack by
the jack and place it (with the turning the wheel wrench
wheel blocks) under the vehicle counterclockwise. Keep
A. Jack
toward the front of the rear lowering the jack until the
B. Wheel Blocks bumper. spare tire slides off the jack or
7. Place the bottom edge of the is hanging by the cable.
jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that the jack { WARNING
is balanced securely.
Someone standing too close
during the procedure could be
injured by the jack. If the spare
tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is
behind you or on either side of
9. Position the center lift point of you as you pull the jack out from
the jack under the center of the under the spare.
spare tire.
Vehicle Care 10-79
13. Disconnect the jack handle Have the hoist assembly inspected Notice: If the vehicle has
from the jack and carefully as soon as you can. You will not be four-wheel drive and a different
remove the jack. Use one hand able to store a spare or flat tire size spare tire is installed, do not
to push against the spare while using the hoist assembly until it has drive in four-wheel drive until the
firmly pulling the jack out from been inspected and/or replaced. flat tire is repaired and/or
under the spare tire with the To continue changing the flat tire, replaced. The vehicle could be
other hand. see “Removing the Flat Tire and damaged and the repairs would
If the spare tire is hanging from Installing the Spare Tire” under Tire not be covered by the warranty.
the cable, insert the hoist end Changing on page 10‑67. Never use four-wheel drive when
of extension, and wheel a different size spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
wrench into the hoist shaft hole Full-Size Spare Tire
in the bumper and turn the Your vehicle may have a different
wheel wrench counterclockwise Your vehicle, when new, had a size spare tire than the road tires
to lower the spare the rest of fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire originally installed on your vehicle.
the way. may lose air over time, so check its This spare tire was developed for
inflation pressure regularly. See Tire use on your vehicle, so it is all right
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the Pressure on page 10‑53 and
hoist shaft hole in the bumper to drive on it. If your vehicle has
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16 four-wheel drive and the different
clockwise to raise the cable for information regarding proper tire
back up if the cable is hanging size spare tire is installed, keep the
inflation and loading your vehicle. vehicle in two-wheel drive.
under the vehicle. For instruction on how to remove,
install or store a spare tire, see
“Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare” and “Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools” under
Tire Changing on page 10‑67.
10-80 Vehicle Care
After installing the spare tire on your Jump Starting Notice: Ignoring these steps
vehicle, you should stop as soon as could result in costly damage to
possible and make sure the spare For more information about the the vehicle that would not be
tire is correctly inflated. Have the vehicle battery, see Battery on covered by the warranty.
damaged or flat road tire repaired or page 10‑27.
Trying to start the vehicle by
replaced as soon as you can and If the vehicle's battery has run pushing or pulling it will not
installed back onto your vehicle. down, you may want to use another work, and it could damage the
This way, the spare tire will be vehicle and some jumper cables to vehicle.
available in case you need it again. start your vehicle. Be sure to use
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
Do not mix tires and wheels of the following steps to do it safely.
have a 12-volt battery with a
different sizes, because they will not negative ground system.
fit. Keep your spare tire and its
wheel together. If your vehicle has a
{ WARNING Notice: Only use a vehicle that
spare tire that does not match your Batteries can hurt you. They can has a 12-volt system with a
vehicle's original road tires and be dangerous because: negative ground for jump
wheels in size and type, do not starting. If the other vehicle does
. They contain acid that can not have a 12-volt system with a
include the spare in the tire rotation.
burn you. negative ground, both vehicles
. They contain gas that can can be damaged.
explode or ignite. 2. Get the vehicles close enough
. They contain enough so the jumper cables can reach,
electricity to burn you. but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they
If you do not follow these steps are, it could cause a ground
exactly, some or all of these connection you do not want.
things can hurt you.
Vehicle Care 10-81
You would not be able to start 3. Turn off the ignition on both
your vehicle, and the bad vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
grounding could damage the accessories plugged into the
electrical systems. accessory power outlets. Turn
To avoid the possibility of the off the radio and all the lamps
vehicles rolling, set the parking that are not needed. This avoids
brake firmly on both vehicles sparks and helps save both
involved in the jump start batteries. And it could save the
procedure. Put the automatic radio!
transmission in P (Park) or a 4. Open the hood on the other
manual transmission in Neutral vehicle and locate the
before setting the parking brake. positive (+) and negative (−)
If the vehicle has a transfer case terminal locations on that The remote negative (-) terminal
with a N (Neutral) position, be vehicle. is a stud located on the right
sure the transfer case is in a Your vehicle has a remote front of the engine, where the
drive gear, not in N (Neutral). positive (+) jump starting negative battery cable attaches.
Notice: If any accessories are left terminal and a remote See Engine Compartment
on or plugged in during the jump negative (−) jump starting Overview on page 10‑6 for more
starting procedure, they could be terminal. You should always use information on the location of the
damaged. The repairs would not these remote terminals instead remote positive (+) and remote
be covered by the vehicle of the terminals on the battery. negative (−) terminals.
warranty. Whenever possible, If the vehicle has a remote
turn off or unplug all accessories positive (+) terminal, it is located
on either vehicle when jump under a red plastic cover at the
starting the vehicle. positive battery post. To uncover
the remote positive (+) terminal,
open the red plastic cover.
10-82 Vehicle Care
5. Check that the jumper cables do

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
An electric fan can start up even add water to take care of that get a shock. The vehicles could
when the engine is not running first. If you do not, explosive gas be damaged too.
and can injure you. Keep hands, could be present.
clothing and tools away from any Before you connect the cables,
Battery fluid contains acid that here are some basic things you
underhood electric fan. can burn you. Do not get it on should know. Positive (+) will go
you. If you accidentally get it in to positive (+) or to a remote
your eyes or on your skin, flush positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
{ WARNING the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine
Using an open flame near a part or to a remote negative (−)
battery can cause battery gas to terminal if the vehicle has one.
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been { WARNING Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get a
blinded. Use a flashlight if you Fans or other moving engine short that would damage the
need more light. parts can injure you badly. Keep battery and maybe other parts
Be sure the battery has enough your hands away from moving too. And do not connect the
water. You do not need to add parts once the engine is running. negative (−) cable to the
water to the battery installed in negative (−) terminal on the dead
your new vehicle. But if a battery battery because this can cause
sparks.
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-83
8. Now connect the black 10. Now start the vehicle with the
negative (−) cable to the good battery and run the
negative (−) terminal of the engine for a while.
good battery. Use a remote 11. Try to start the vehicle that
negative (−) terminal if the had the dead battery. If it will
vehicle has one. not start after a few tries, it
Do not let the other end touch probably needs service.
anything until the next step. The Notice: If the jumper cables are
other end of the negative (−) connected or removed in the
cable does not go to the dead wrong order, electrical shorting
battery. It goes to a heavy, may occur and damage the
unpainted metal engine part or vehicle. The repairs would not be
6. Connect the red positive (+) to the remote negative (−) covered by the vehicle warranty.
cable to the positive (+) terminal terminal on the vehicle with the Always connect and remove the
of the vehicle with the dead dead battery. jumper cables in the correct
battery. Use a remote 9. Connect the other end of the order, making sure that the
positive (+) terminal if the negative (−) cable to the remote cables do not touch each other or
vehicle has one. negative (−) terminal, on the other metal.
7. Do not let the other end vehicle with the dead battery.
touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
10-84 Vehicle Care
To disconnect the jumper cables Towing

from both vehicles do the following:
1. Disconnect the black Towing the Vehicle
negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery. Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be towed
2. Disconnect the black with all four wheels off the
negative (−) cable from the ground. Care must be taken with
vehicle with the good battery. vehicles that have low ground
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) clearance and/or special
cable from the vehicle with the equipment. Always flatbed on a
good battery. car carrier.
Jumper Cable Removal 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) Consult your dealer or a
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle. professional towing service if the
Part or Remote Negative (−) disabled vehicle must be towed.
5. Return the remote positive (+) See Roadside Assistance Program
Terminal terminal cover, if the vehicle has (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
B. Good Battery or Remote one, to its original position. Roadside Assistance Program
Positive (+) and Remote (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
Negative (−) Terminals
To tow the vehicle behind another
C. Dead Battery or Remote vehicle for recreational purposes,
Positive (+) Terminal such as behind a motor home, see
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this
section.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Recreational Vehicle Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing

consider before recreational vehicle
Towing towing: Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and
Recreational vehicle towing means Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
. What is the towing capacity Single Speed Automatic
towing the vehicle behind another of the towing vehicle? Be
vehicle – such as behind a Transfer Case
sure to read the tow vehicle
motorhome. The two most common manufacturer's
types of recreational vehicle towing recommendations.
are known as dinghy towing and
dolly towing. Dinghy towing is . What is the distance that will be
towing the vehicle with all four travelled? Some vehicles have
wheels on the ground. Dolly towing restrictions on how far and how
is towing the vehicle with two long they can tow.
wheels on the ground and two . Is the proper towing equipment
wheels up on a device known as a going to be used? See your
dolly. dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
. Is the vehicle ready to be Notice: If the vehicle is towed
towed? Just as preparing the with all four wheels on the
vehicle for a long trip, make sure ground, the drivetrain
the vehicle is prepared to be components could be damaged.
towed. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
10-86 Vehicle Care
Two-wheel-drive vehicles and Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a

four-wheel drive vehicles with a Two Speed Automatic { WARNING
single speed automatic transfer Transfer Case
case should not be towed with all Shifting a four-wheel-drive
four wheels on the ground. vehicle's transfer case into
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle
no provisions for internal lubrication to roll even if the transmission is
while being towed. Four-wheel drive in P (Park). The driver or others
vehicles with a single speed could be injured. Make sure the
automatic transfer case have no parking brake is firmly set before
neutral position and will spin the the transfer case is shifted to
transmission when the rear N (Neutral).
wheels turn.
4. Shift the transfer case to
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into
Neutral” under “Four-Wheel
Use the following procedure to Drive” for the proper procedure
dinghy tow a four-wheel drive to select the Neutral position for
vehicle with a two speed automatic the vehicle.
transfer case:
5. Release the parking brake only
1. Position the vehicle being towed after the vehicle being towed is
behind the tow vehicle and shift firmly attached to the towing
the transmission to P (Park). vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set 6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF
the parking brake. and remove the key — the
3. Securely attach the vehicle steering wheel will still turn.
being towed to the tow vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-87
After towing, see “Shifting Out of with the rear wheels on the Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
Neutral” under “Four-Wheel Drive” ground, the transmission could Two Speed Automatic
for the proper procedure to take the be damaged. The repairs would Transfer Case
vehicle out of the Neutral position. not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Never tow the vehicle
Dolly Towing with the rear wheels on the
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off ground.
the Ground) – Two-Wheel-Drive Two-wheel-drive vehicles and
Vehicles and Four-Wheel Drive four-wheel drive vehicles with a
Vehicles with a Single Speed single speed automatic transfer
Automatic Transfer Case case should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have
no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. Four-wheel drive
vehicles with a single speed
automatic transfer case have no Use the following procedure to dolly
neutral position and will spin the tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from
transmission when the rear the front:
wheels turn. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive vehicle following the dolly
vehicle or a four-wheel drive vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
with a single speed automatic 2. Drive the front wheels onto the
transfer case, the vehicle must be dolly.
Notice: If a two-wheel drive towed with the rear wheels on the
vehicle or a four-wheel drive dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear 3. Shift the transmission to
vehicle with a single speed Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this P (Park).
automatic transfer case is towed section for more information. 4. Firmly set the parking brake.
10-88 Vehicle Care
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Use the following procedure to dolly

{ WARNING After towing, see “Shifting Out of tow the vehicle from the rear:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle's transfer case into Drive.” vehicle following the dolly
N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
Rear Towing
to roll even if the transmission is (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the
in P (Park). The driver or others dolly.
could be injured. Make sure the 3. Firmly set the parking brake.
parking brake is firmly set before See Parking Brake on
the transfer case is shifted to page 9‑42.
N (Neutral).
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Shift the transfer case to 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly
N (Neutral). See “Shifting into following the manufacturer's
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel instructions.
Drive.” 6. Use an adequate clamping
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly device designed for towing to
following the manufacturer's ensure that the front wheels are
instructions. locked into the straight position.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles and 7. For four-wheel drive vehicles
7. Release the parking brake only Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a
after the vehicle being towed is with a single speed automatic
Single Speed Automatic transfer case, shift the transfer
firmly attached to the towing Transfer Case
vehicle. case to the Two-Wheel High
position.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Vehicle Care 10-89
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles with a Appearance Care

Two Speed Automatic { WARNING
Transfer Case
Shifting a four-wheel-drive Exterior Care
Use the following procedure to dolly vehicle's transfer case into
tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle Washing the Vehicle
the rear: to roll even if the transmission is To preserve the vehicle's finish,
1. Attach the dolly to the tow in P (Park). The driver or others wash it often and out of direct
vehicle following the dolly could be injured. Make sure the sunlight.
manufacturer's instructions. parking brake is firmly set before Notice: Do not use petroleum
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the the transfer case is shifted to based, acidic, or abrasive
dolly. N (Neutral). cleaning agents as they can
3. Firmly set the parking brake. damage the vehicle's paint, metal,
See Parking Brake on 7. Shift the transfer case to or plastic parts. If damage
page 9‑42. N (Neutral). See “Shifting into occurs, it would not be covered
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel by the vehicle's warranty.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park). Drive.” Approved cleaning products can
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly be obtained from your dealer.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Follow all manufacturer
following the manufacturer's
instructions. After towing, see “Shifting Out of directions regarding correct
N (Neutral)” under “Four-Wheel product usage, necessary safety
6. Use an adequate clamping Drive.” precautions, and appropriate
device designed for towing to disposal of any vehicle care
ensure that the front wheels are product.
locked into the straight position.
10-90 Vehicle Care
Notice: Avoid using high sap, bird droppings, chemicals from Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
pressure washes closer than industrial chimneys, etc., can Parts
30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the damage the vehicle's finish if they Regularly clean bright metal parts
vehicle. Use of power washers remain on painted surfaces. Wash with water or chrome polish on
exceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) the vehicle as soon as possible. chrome or stainless steel trim,
can result in damage or removal If necessary, use non-abrasive if necessary.
of paint and decals. cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign For aluminum, never use auto or
Rinse the vehicle well, before chrome polish, steam, or caustic
washing and after, to remove all matter.
soap to clean. A coating of
cleaning agents completely. If they Occasional hand waxing or mild wax, rubbed to high polish, is
are allowed to dry on the surface, polishing should be done to remove recommended for all bright metal
they could stain. residue from the paint finish. See parts.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean your dealer for approved cleaning
chamois or an all-cotton towel to products. Cleaning Exterior
avoid surface scratches and water Notice: Machine compounding or Lamps/Lenses
spotting. aggressive polishing on a Use only lukewarm or cold water, a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish soft cloth, and a car washing soap
Finish Care may damage it. Use only to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Application of aftermarket clearcoat non-abrasive waxes and polishes Follow instructions under "Washing
sealant/wax materials is not that are made for a basecoat/ the Vehicle" later in this section.
recommended. If painted surfaces clearcoat paint finish on the
are damaged, see your dealer to vehicle.
have the damage assessed and To keep the paint finish looking new,
repaired. Foreign materials such as keep the vehicle garaged or
calcium chloride and other salts, ice covered whenever possible.
melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
Vehicle Care 10-91
Windshield and Wiper Blades Tires Notice: Chrome wheels and other
chrome trim may be damaged if
Clean the outside of the windshield Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to
the vehicle is not washed after
with glass cleaner. clean the tires.
driving on roads that have been
Clean rubber blades using lint-free Notice: Using petroleum-based sprayed with magnesium,
cloth or paper towel soaked with tire dressing products on the calcium, or sodium chloride.
windshield washer fluid or a mild vehicle may damage the paint These chlorides are used on
detergent. Wash the windshield finish and/or tires. When applying roads for conditions such as ice
thoroughly when cleaning the a tire dressing, always wipe off and dust. Always wash the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and any overspray from all painted chrome with soap and water after
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax surfaces on the vehicle. exposure.
treatments may cause wiper
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum Notice: To avoid surface damage,
streaking.
or Chrome do not use strong soaps,
Replace the wiper blades if they chemicals, abrasive polishes,
are worn or damaged. Damage Use a soft, clean cloth with mild cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
can be caused by extreme dusty soap and water to clean the wheels. that contain acid on aluminum or
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, After rinsing thoroughly with clean chrome-plated wheels. Use only
snow and ice. water, dry with a soft, clean towel. approved cleaners. Also, never
A wax may then be applied. drive a vehicle with aluminum or
Weatherstrips chrome-plated wheels through an
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
Apply silicone grease on clean cloth with mild soap and automatic car wash that uses
weatherstrips to make them last water. Rinse with clean water. After silicone carbide tire cleaning
longer, seal better, and not stick or rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, brushes. Damage could occur
squeak. See Recommended Fluids clean towel. A wax may then be and the repairs would not be
and Lubricants on page 11‑11. applied. covered by the vehicle warranty.
10-92 Vehicle Care
Steering, Suspension, and washing system can do this. If not Chemical Paint Spotting
Chassis Components removed, rust and corrosion can
Airborne pollutants can fall upon
develop.
Visually inspect front and rear and attack painted vehicle surfaces
suspension and steering system for Sheet Metal Damage causing blotchy, ring-shaped
damaged, loose, or missing parts or discolorations, and small, irregular
If the vehicle is damaged and dark spots etched into the paint
signs of wear. Inspect the power
requires sheet metal repair or surface.
steering for proper hook-up, binding,
replacement, make sure the body
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
check constant velocity joints,
material to parts repaired or Interior Care
rubber boots, and axle seals for
replaced to restore corrosion To prevent dirt particle abrasions,
leaks.
protection. regularly clean the vehicle's interior.
Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement Immediately remove any soils. Note
parts will provide the corrosion that newspapers or dark garments
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, that can transfer color to home
hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty. furnishings can also permanently
steel fuel door hinge unless the transfer color to the vehicle's
components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage interior.
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them Quickly repair minor chips and Use a soft bristle brush to remove
last longer, seal better, and not stick scratches with touch-up materials dust from knobs and crevices on the
or squeak. available from your dealer to avoid instrument cluster. Using a mild
corrosion. Larger areas of finish soap solution, immediately remove
Underbody Maintenance damage can be corrected in your hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect
Use plain water to flush dirt and dealer's body and paint shop. repellant from all interior surfaces or
debris from the vehicle's underbody. permanent damage may result.
Your dealer or an underbody car
Vehicle Care 10-93
Your dealer may have products for

. Never rub any surface Notice: To prevent scratching,
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners aggressively or with excessive never use abrasive cleaners on
specifically designed for the pressure. automotive glass. Abrasive
surfaces being cleaned to prevent . Do not use laundry detergents or cleaners or aggressive cleaning
permanent damage. To prevent dishwashing soaps with may damage the rear window
overspray, apply all cleaners directly degreasers. For liquid cleaners, defogger.
to the cleaning cloth. Cleaners use approximately 20 drops per
should be removed quickly. Never Fabric/Carpet
3.78L (1 gal) of water.
allow cleaners to remain on the A concentrated soap solution will Start by vacuuming the surface
surface being cleaned for extended leave a residue that creates using a soft brush attachment. If a
periods of time. streaks and attracts dirt. Do not rotating brush attachment is being
Cleaners may contain solvents that use solutions that contain strong used during vacuuming, only use it
can become concentrated in the or caustic soap. on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
interior. Before using cleaners, read . gently remove as much of the soil
Do not heavily saturate the
and adhere to all safety instructions as possible using one of the
upholstery when cleaning.
on the label. While cleaning the following techniques:
interior, maintain adequate
. Do not use solvents or cleaners . Gently blot liquids with a paper
ventilation by opening the doors containing solvents.
towel. Continue blotting until no
and windows. Interior Glass more soil can be removed.
To prevent damage, do not clean To clean, use a terry cloth fabric . For solid soils, remove as much
the interior using the following dampened with water. Wipe droplets as possible prior to vacuuming.
cleaners or techniques: left behind with a clean dry cloth. To clean:
. Never use a razor or any other Commercial glass cleaners may be
used, if necessary, after cleaning 1. Saturate a clean lint-free
sharp object to remove a soil
the interior glass with plain water. colorfast cloth with water or club
from any interior surface.
soda. Microfiber cloth is
. Never use a brush with stiff recommended to prevent lint
bristles. transfer to the fabric or carpet.
10-94 Vehicle Care
2. Remove excess moisture by Following the cleaning process, a Cleaners containing these
gently wringing until water does paper towel can be used to blot solvents can permanently change
not drip from the cleaning cloth. excess moisture. the appearance and feel of leather
3. Start on the outside edge of the or soft trim and are not
Instrument Panel, Leather, recommended.
soil and gently rub toward the Vinyl, & Other Plastic Surfaces
center. Rotate the cleaning cloth Do not use cleaners that increase
to a clean area frequently to Use a soft microfiber cloth gloss, especially on the instrument
prevent forcing the soil in to the dampened with water to remove panel. Reflected glare can decrease
fabric. dust and loose dirt. For a more visibility through the windshield
thorough cleaning, use a soft under certain conditions.
4. Continue gently rubbing the microfiber cloth dampened with a
soiled area until there is no mild soap solution. Notice: Use of air fresheners may
longer any color transfer from cause permanent damage to
the soil to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Soaking or saturating plastics and painted surfaces.
leather, especially perforated If an air freshener comes in
5. If the soil is not completely leather, as well as other interior
removed, use a mild soap contact with any plastic or
surfaces, may cause permanent painted surface in the vehicle,
solution followed by only club damage. Wipe excess moisture
soda or plain water. blot immediately and clean with a
from these surfaces after soft cloth dampened with a mild
If the soil is not completely cleaning and allow them to dry soap solution. Damage caused by
removed, it may be necessary to naturally. Never use heat, steam, air fresheners would not be
use a commercial upholstery spot lifters or spot removers. Do covered by the vehicle warranty.
cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small not use cleaners that contain
hidden area for colorfastness before silicone or wax-based products.
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
formation occurs, clean the entire
fabric or carpet.
Vehicle Care 10-95
Care of Safety Belts Floor Mats Use the following guidelines for
proper floor mat usage.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
{ WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or
mats were designed for the
vehicle. If the floor mats need
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. is not properly installed, it can replacing, it is recommended
It may severely weaken them. In interfere with the pedals. that GM certified floor mats be
a crash, they might not be able to Interference with the pedals can purchased. Non-GM floor mats
provide adequate protection. cause unintended acceleration may not fit properly and may
Clean safety belts only with mild and/or increased stopping interfere with the pedals. Always
soap and lukewarm water. distance which can cause a crash check that the floor mats do not
and injury. Make sure the floor interfere with the pedals.
mat does not interfere with the . Use the floor mat with the
pedals. correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
. Do not place anything on top of
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
10-96 Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Your dealer recognizes the

importance of providing
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
competitively priced maintenance
and repair services. With trained
the required maintenance for the technicians, the dealer is the place
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule for routine maintenance such as oil
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 to help protect against major repair changes and tire rotations and
expenses resulting from neglect or additional maintenance items like
Maintenance Schedule inadequate maintenance. It may tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3 also help to maintain the value of blades.
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the
Special Application Services Notice: Damage caused by
responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application improper maintenance can lead to
all required maintenance performed.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 costly repairs and may not be
Your dealer has trained covered by the vehicle warranty.
Additional Maintenance technicians who can perform Maintenance intervals, checks,
and Care required maintenance using genuine inspections, recommended fluids,
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have and lubricants are important to
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up‐to‐date tools and equipment for keep the vehicle in good working
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many condition.
Recommended Fluids, dealers have extended evening
Lubricants, and Parts The Tire Rotation and Required
and Saturday hours, courtesy
Recommended Fluids and Services are the responsibility of the
transportation, and online
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 vehicle owner. It is recommended to
scheduling to assist with service
Maintenance Replacement have your dealer perform these
needs.
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records keep the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14 condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions.
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use The Additional Required Services ‐ Refer to the information in the
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. Severe are for vehicles that are: Maintenance Schedule Additional
There may need to be more . Mainly driven in heavy city traffic Required Services ‐ Severe chart.
frequent checks and services. The in hot weather.
Additional Required Services ‐
Normal are for vehicles that: . Mainly driven in hilly or
{ WARNING
mountainous terrain. Performing maintenance work can
. Carry passengers and cargo
within recommended limits on . Frequently towing a trailer. be dangerous and can cause
the Tire and Loading Information serious injury. Perform
. Used for high speed or
label. See Vehicle Load Limits maintenance work only if the
competitive driving.
on page 9‑16. required information, proper tools,
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery and equipment are available.
. Are driven on reasonable road service. If they are not, see your dealer to
surfaces within legal driving
limits. have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
. Use the recommended fuel. See Service Work on page 10‑4.
Recommended Fuel on
page 9‑57.
Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
Required Services ‐ Normal chart.
Maintenance Engine Oil Change Tire Rotation and Required

When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Services Every
Schedule SOON message displays, have the 12 000 km/7,500 mi
Owner Checks and Services engine oil and filter changed within Rotate the tires, if recommended for
the next 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven the vehicle, and perform the
At Each Fuel Stop under the best conditions, the following services. See Tire
. Check the engine oil level. See engine oil life system might not Rotation on page 10‑59.
Engine Oil on page 10‑8. indicate the need for vehicle service
for more than a year. The engine oil
. Check engine oil level and oil
Once a Month and filter must be changed at least life percentage. If needed,
once a year and the oil life system change engine oil and filter, and
. Check the tire inflation
must be reset. Your trained dealer reset oil life system. See Engine
pressures. See Tire Pressure on
technician can perform this work. Oil on page 10‑8 and Engine Oil
page 10‑53.
If the engine oil life system is reset Life System on page 10‑10.
. Inspect the tires for wear. See accidentally, service the vehicle . Check engine coolant level. See
Tire Inspection on page 10‑58. within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
. Check the windshield washer last service. Reset the oil life . Check windshield washer fluid
fluid level. See Washer Fluid on system when the oil is changed.
level. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑24. See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑24.
page 10‑10.
. Visually inspect windshield wiper
blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. See Exterior
Care on page 10‑89. Replace
worn or damaged wiper blades.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
on page 10‑32.

. Check tire inflation pressures. . Check restraint system . Check ignition transmission lock.
See Tire Pressure on components. See Safety System See Ignition Transmission Lock
page 10‑53. Check on page 3‑19. Check on page 10‑31.
. Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Visually inspect fuel system for . Check parking brake and
Inspection on page 10‑58. damage or leaks. automatic transmission park
. Visually check for fluid leaks. . Visually inspect exhaust system mechanism. See Park Brake and
and nearby heat shields for P (Park) Mechanism Check on
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 10‑32.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on loose or damaged parts.
page 10‑14. . Lubricate body components. See
. Check accelerator pedal for
Exterior Care on page 10‑89. damage, high effort, or binding.
. Inspect brake system. Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect steering,
. Check starter switch. See Starter
Switch Check on page 10‑30.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
suspension, and chassis signs of wear, cracks, or other
components for damaged, loose, . Check automatic transmission damage. Check the hold open
or missing parts or signs of shift lock control function. See ability of the strut. See your
wear. See Exterior Care on Automatic Transmission Shift dealer if service is required.
page 10‑89. Lock Control Function Check on
page 10‑31.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2‑25.

Footnotes — Maintenance c) Do not directly power wash the

Schedule Additional Required transfer case output seals. High
Services — Normal pressure water can overcome the
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines seals and contaminate the transfer
and hoses for proper hook‐up, case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
routing, and condition. Check that decrease the life of the transfer
the purge valve, if the vehicle has case and should be replaced.
one, works properly. Replace as d) Or every five years, whichever
needed. comes first. See Cooling System on
b) Or every four years, whichever page 10‑16.
comes first. e) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.

Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional

Schedule Additional Required
Services — Severe Services Maintenance and Care
a) Check all fuel and vapor lines . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
and hoses for proper hook‐up, Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
routing, and condition. Check that components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
the purge valve, if the vehicle has 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
one, works properly. Replace as . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
needed. maintenance services may
performed once a year.
b) Or every four years, whichever be required. It is recommended
comes first. that your dealer perform these
services — their trained dealer
c) Do not directly power wash the technicians know your vehicle best.
transfer case output seals. High Your dealer can also perform a
pressure water can overcome the thorough assessment with a
seals and contaminate the transfer multi‐point inspection to recommend
case fluid. Contaminated fluid will when your vehicle may need
decrease the life of the transfer attention. The following list is
case and should be replaced. intended to explain the services and
d) Or every five years, whichever conditions to look for that may
comes first. See Cooling System on indicate services are required.
page 10‑16. Battery
e) Or every 10 years, whichever The battery supplies power to start
comes first. Inspect for fraying, the engine and operate any
excessive cracking, or damage; additional electrical accessories.
replace, if needed.

. To avoid break‐down or failure to . Trained dealer technicians have Lamps
start the vehicle, maintain a access to tools and equipment
battery with full cranking power. to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
. Trained dealer technicians have important to see and be seen on
the diagnostic equipment to test engineered for the vehicle.
the road.
the battery and ensure that the Fluids
connections and cables are
. Signs that the headlamps need
corrosion‐free. Proper fluid levels and approved attention include dimming, failure
fluids protect the vehicle’s systems to light, cracking, or damage.
Belts and components. See The brake lamps need to be
. Belts may need replacing if they Recommended Fluids and checked periodically to ensure
squeak or show signs of Lubricants on page 11‑11 for GM that they light when braking.
cracking or splitting. approved fluids. . With a multi‐point inspection,
. Trained dealer technicians can
. Engine oil and windshield your dealer can check the lamps
inspect the belts and washer fluid levels should be and note any concerns.
recommend replacement when checked at every fuel fill.
Shocks and Struts
necessary. . Instrument cluster lights may
come on to indicate that fluids Shocks and struts help aid in control
Brakes may be low and need to be for a smoother ride.
Brakes stop the vehicle and are filled. . Signs of wear may include
crucial to safe driving. steering wheel vibration, bounce/
Hoses
. Signs of brake wear may include sway while braking, longer
chirping, grinding, or squealing Hoses transport fluids and should stopping distance, or uneven
noises, or difficulty stopping. be regularly inspected to ensure tire wear.
that there are no cracks or leaks.
With a multi‐point inspection, your
dealer can inspect the hoses and
advise if replacement is needed.

. As part of the multi‐point Vehicle Care Windshield
inspection, trained dealer
technicians can visually inspect To help keep the vehicle looking like For safety, appearance, and the
the shocks and struts for signs new, vehicle care products are best viewing, keep the windshield
of leaking, blown seals, available from your dealer. For clean and clear.
or damage, and can advise information on how to clean and . Signs of damage include
when service is needed. protect the vehicle’s interior and scratches, cracks, and chips.
exterior, see Interior Care on
Tires . Trained dealer technicians can
page 10‑92 and Exterior Care on
page 10‑89. inspect the windshield and
Tires need to be properly inflated,
recommend proper replacement
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining Wheel Alignment if needed.
the tires can save money, fuel, and
can reduce the risk of tire failure. Wheel alignment is critical for Wiper Blades
ensuring that the tires deliver
. Signs that the tires need to be optimal wear and performance. Wiper blades need to be cleaned
replaced include three or more and kept in good condition to
visible treadwear indicators; cord
. Signs that the alignment may provide a clear view.
or fabric showing through the need to be adjusted include
pulling, improper vehicle . Signs of wear include streaking,
rubber; cracks or cuts in the
handling, or unusual tire wear. skipping across the windshield,
tread or sidewall; or a bulge or
and worn or split rubber.
split in the tire. . Your dealer has the required
equipment to ensure proper . Trained dealer technicians can
. Trained dealer technicians can
wheel alignment. check the wiper blades and
inspect and recommend the right
replace them when needed.
tires. Your dealer can also
provide tire/wheel balancing
services to ensure smooth
vehicle operation at all speeds.
Your dealer sells and services
name brand tires.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of
Engine Oil the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is
recommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 89021320).
Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
Windshield Washer
requirements.
Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Chassis Lubrication
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, in
Front Axle
Canada 89021672).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, in
Rear Axle
Canada 89021678).
Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Front Axle Propshaft Spline or
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345879, in
One-Piece Propshaft Spline
Canada 10953511).
(Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.)
Hood Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, in
Weatherstrip Squeaks
Canada 10953437).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C*
High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C
Oil Filter 89017524 PF48
Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110
Wiper Blades
Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑11 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System 15.9 L 16.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L† 6.0 qt†
Fuel Tank 119.2 L 31.5 gal
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range.
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active
Fuel Management™ 0 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Iron) (LMG)
5.3L V8 FlexFuel with Active
Fuel Management™ 7 Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)
(Aluminum) (LC9)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing

Customer Information 13-1
Courtesy Transportation
Customer Program (U.S. and
Customer Information
Information Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Collision Damage Repair Customer Satisfaction
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14 Procedure (U.S. and
Customer Information Service Publications Canada)
Customer Satisfaction Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Procedure (U.S. and Reporting Safety Defects important to your dealer and to
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Satisfaction Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
the United States with the sales transaction or the
Procedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3 Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Customer Assistance Offices operation of the vehicle will be
Reporting Safety Defects to resolved by your dealer's sales or
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4 the Canadian
Customer Assistance Offices service departments. Sometimes,
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 however, despite the best intentions
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Assistance for Text of all concerned, misunderstandings
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 can occur. If your concern has not
Telephone (TTY) Users (U.S.
and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Vehicle Data Recording and been resolved to your satisfaction,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Privacy
GM Mobility Reimbursement Vehicle Data Recording and STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Program (U.S. and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 with a member of dealership
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19 management. Normally, concerns
Roadside Assistance Program OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 can be quickly resolved at that level.
(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-20 If the matter has already been
Roadside Assistance Program Radio Frequency reviewed with the sales, service,
(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20 or parts manager, contact the owner
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency of your dealership or the general
Appointments (U.S. and Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 manager.
Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, case will generally be heard within
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will 40 days. If you do not agree with the
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's decision given in your case, you
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest may reject it and proceed with any
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. other venue for relief available
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: to you.
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and your You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making Program using the toll-free
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied telephone number or write them at
1-800-263-3777 (English), with your new vehicle. However, the following address:
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). if you continue to remain unsatisfied BBB Auto Line Program
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Council of Better Business
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you Bureaus, Inc.
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business 4200 Wilson Boulevard
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Suite 800
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights. Arlington, VA 22203-1838
representative: The BBB Auto Line Program is an Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive This program is available in all
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or 50 states and the District of
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may vehicle age, mileage, and other
be required to resort to this informal factors. General Motors reserves
. Dealership name and location. the right to change eligibility
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the limitations and/or discontinue its
present mileage. program is free of charge and your participation in this program.
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Satisfaction

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Procedure (Mexico)
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),
Limited wants you to be aware of 1-800-263-7854 (French),
its participation in a no-charge or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Did you get the Warranty Extension
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Plan? This plan is recommended by
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors to supplement the
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 warranty included with the new
the review of the facts involved by vehicle purchase.
an impartial third party arbiter, and Your inquiry should be accompanied
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification See your dealer for details.
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN).
Customer Assistance
designed so that the entire dispute Procedure
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final Owner satisfaction and goodwill are
decision, should be completed in very important to your dealer and
about 70 days. We believe our General Motors.
impartial program offers advantages Normally, any problem with the
over courts in most jurisdictions transaction, sale, or usage of the
because it is informal, quick, and vehicle must be handled by your
free of charge. dealer sales or service departments.
However, we recognize that STEP THREE Customer Assistance

despite the good intentions of all
parties involved, sometimes a
If your case is not resolved in a Offices (U.S. and Canada)
reasonable amount of time by your
misunderstanding may occur. dealer, please call the General Chevrolet encourages customers
If you have a problem that has not Motors Customer Assistance to call the toll-free number for
been satisfactorily handled through Center (CAC) and provide the assistance. However, if a customer
the normal means, we suggest the following information: wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
following steps: the letter should be addressed to:
. Name
STEP ONE United States
. Address
Explain your case to your dealer Chevrolet Motor Division
. Phone number Chevrolet Customer Assistance
service agent, service manager,
dealer sales agent, or sales
. Model year Center
manager, depending on your case. . Brand P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Make sure that they have all . Vehicle Identification www.Chevrolet.com
necessary information. They are Number (VIN)
interested in your continual 1-800-222-1020
satisfaction.
. Mileage 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
. Delivery date Telephone Devices (TTYs))
STEP TWO Roadside Assistance:
. Description of the problem 1-800-243-8872
If you are not satisfied, please
. Dealership name
contact the general manager or your From Puerto Rico:
dealership owner to ask for their . Dealership address
help. If they are not able to resolve 1-800-496-9992 (English)
your case, ask them to contact the See Customer Assistance Offices 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
right people at General Motors for (U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 or From U.S. Virgin Islands:
support, if needed. Customer Assistance Offices
(Mexico) on page 13‑5. 1-800-496-9994
Canada Mexico, Central America, and Mexico

General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries From Mexico City
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: (Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
CA1-163-005 Virgin Islands) 5329-0811
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, From Other Mexico Locations
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 S. de R.L. de C.V. 01-800-466-0811
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center
1-800-263-3777 (English) Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 United States and Canada
1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada 1-866-466-8190
1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800 Costa Rica
Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 00-800-052-1005
1-800-268-6800
Customer Assistance Guatemala
Overseas
Offices (Mexico) 1-800-999-5252
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit. To contact the Customer Assistance Panama
Center (CAC), use the phone 00-800-052-0001
numbers listed in this section.
Customer assistance is available Dominican Republic
Monday through Friday, 08:00 to 1-888-751-5301
20:00 hours, and Saturdays from
08:00 to 15:00 hours. El Salvador
All e-mail inquiries to the Customer 800-6273
Assistance Center (CAC) should be
sent to: cac.chevrolet@gm.com. Honduras
800-0122-6101

. Storage for online service and
Customer Assistance for maintenance records.
Chevrolet Owner Centre
Text Telephone (TTY) (Canada) chevroletowner.ca
. Chevrolet dealer locator for
Users (U.S. and Canada) Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner
service nationwide. Centre:
To assist customers who are deaf, . Exclusive privileges and offers.
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
. Chat live with online help
and who use Text Telephones
. Recall notices for your specific representatives.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY vehicle. . Use the Vehicle Tools section.
equipment available at its Customer . OnStar and GM Cardmember . Access third party enthusiast
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in Services Earnings summaries. sites and social media networks.
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: Other Helpful Links . Locate owner resources such as
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com lease-end, financing, and
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830. warranty information.
Chevrolet Merchandise —
. Retrieve your favorite articles,
www.chevymall.com
Online Owner Center quizzes, tips and multimedia
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ galleries organized into the
Manage your vehicle (U.S.) at pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do Features and Auto Care
chevrolet.com. Click on . FAQ Sections.
“Owners,” then “Manage My
Chevrolet/Owners Login.”
. Contact Us . Download the owner manual for
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Information and services
customized for your specific
. Find the
vehicle — all in one convenient Chevrolet-recommended
place. maintenance services for your
vehicle.
. Digital owner manual, warranty
information, and more.

. Location of the vehicle.
GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license
Reimbursement Program 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for plate number of the vehicle.
(U.S. and Canada) details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance
Program (U.S. and
. Description of the problem.
Canada) Coverage
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Services are provided up to 5 years/
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
This program is available to
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). comes first.
qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, In the U.S., anyone driving the
aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800. vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
required for the vehicle, such as person driving the vehicle without
Service is available 24 hours a day, permission from the owner is not
hand controls or a wheelchair/
365 days a year. covered.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance Roadside Assistance is not a part of
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance, the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information Chevrolet and General Motors of
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready: Canada Limited reserve the right to
Telephone (TTY) users, call make any changes or discontinue
1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and the Roadside Assistance program at
home telephone number. any time without notification.
. Telephone number of your
location.
Chevrolet and General Motors of

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to Canadian
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Purchased Vehicles
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
claims are made too often, or the properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian.
same type of claim is made many responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be
times. replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through
Services Provided this service.
. Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
jump start a dead battery.
Delivery of enough fuel for the registration is required.
vehicle to get to the nearest Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed
service station. Roadside Assistance
maps of North America are
. Lock‐Out Service: Service to . Impound towing caused by provided when requested either
unlock the vehicle if you are violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the
locked out. A remote unlock may . Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a
be available if you have OnStar. limit of six requests per year.
For security reasons, the driver
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is
must present identification or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three
before this service is given. chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
. Towing or services for vehicles
Road or Highway: Tow to the driven on a non-public road or
nearest Chevrolet dealer for highway.
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

. Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance: Must be over
Roadside Assistance This program expires two years
from the date of the invoice for the
250 kilometers from where your Program (Mexico) vehicle, regardless of vehicle
trip was started to qualify. As a new owner, your vehicle is mileage and changes in vehicle
General Motors of automatically enrolled in the ownership.
Canada Limited requires Roadside Assistance program. The
pre-authorization, original For more information about the
services are available at no cost renewal of this program at the end
detailed receipts, and a copy under the terms and conditions of
of the repair orders. Once of its term, contact the Chevrolet
the program. The Roadside Customer Assistance Center at
authorization has been received, Assistance program is not part of,
the Roadside Assistance advisor 01-800-466-0800.
or included, in the coverage
will help to make arrangements provided by the New Vehicle Services Provided
and explain how to receive Limited Warranty.
payment.
. Flat Tire Change: If unable to
Roadside Assistance provides change a flat tire, Roadside
. Alternative Service: If assistance to the driver and Assistance will provide towing
assistance cannot be provided passengers while driving the vehicle service to the nearest authorized
right away, the Roadside within your city of residence or on Chevrolet dealership. It is the
Assistance advisor may give any passable road in Mexico, the owner's responsibility for the
permission to get local United States, and Canada. repair or replacement of the tire.
emergency road service. You will Services are subject to the This service is limited to the
receive payment, up to $100, limitations described in the transfer of the vehicle to the
after sending the original receipt following pages. Program coverage repair facility.
to Roadside Assistance. varies by country.
Mechanical failures may be
. Emergency Fuel Delivery:
covered, however any cost for Roadside Assistance is available Delivery of enough fuel for the
parts and labor for repairs not 24 hours a day, 365 days of vehicle to get to the nearest
covered by the warranty are the the year. service station.
owner responsibility.

. Lock-Out Service: Service to service. When the vehicle is
. *Trip Interruption: This service
unlock the vehicle if you are not accessible to be towed, all is provided if you are prevented
locked out. maneuvers required to access it from further usage of your
. Battery Jump Start: Service to will be at the owner's expense. vehicle while traveling and it is
jump start a dead battery. not possible for the nearest
If the vehicle is in another city Chevrolet dealership to repair
. *Emergency Messages: outside of your residence, the vehicle the same day,
Transmission of urgent phone Roadside Assistance is limited requiring the vehicle to stay at
messages. to moving the vehicle to the the dealership for a night or
nearest dealer. If you would like more. If this happens, in addition
. *Emergency Calls: Call for the vehicle moved to a different
emergency services. to the previously listed services
dealer, you will be asked to and prior to confirmation by the
. *Dealership Location cover the difference in cost at dealership, you are entitled to
Assistance: Information the time of the move. choose one of the following
regarding addresses and If the vehicle cannot be received alternatives, within the limits of
telephone numbers for Chevrolet by the nearest Chevrolet dealer existing Roadside Assistance
dealers. due to scheduling conflicts, the program guidelines. If the costs
. Emergency Towing: Tow to the vehicle will be taken to a safe exceed the amount authorized
nearest dealer for warranty place where it will remain for up for these services, you must pay
service if the vehicle cannot be to 48 hours until it can be taken the difference at the time of
driven. to the dealer. If the storage costs service.
exceed the amount authorized, Roadside Assistance
If the vehicle is involved in an
the owner is responsible to pay will coordinate hotel
accident during the commission
the difference at the time of accommodations for all vehicle
of a crime, administrative
service. Contact Roadside travelers for up to two nights.
violation, or breach of traffic
Assistance for more information
regulations, Roadside
on authorized amounts.
Assistance will not provide
A rental car will be provided for

. *Complimentary Services Not Included in Roadside
up to two days and the vehicle Transportation for Vehicle Pick Assistance
must be returned to its original Up: Transportation to pick up
your vehicle after repairs are Roadside Assistance does not
destination, excluding vehicles cover or reimburse services for the
with a carrying capacity greater complete. Once the dealer has
reported that the vehicle has following:
than 3.5 tons.
been repaired, Roadside . Events caused by fraud or bad
Complimentary Transportation: If Assistance will provide bus or faith by the driver.
you prefer to continue your trip commercial airline one-way . Vehicle immobilization
to the intended destination service (subject to availability)
or return to your place of situations due to a major force
for the person designated by you
residence, and the trip requires or unforeseen circumstances,
to collect your vehicle at the
more than eight hours driving on such as natural phenomena
dealership's location if you or the
the road, transportation for the of an extraordinary nature,
designated person are not in the
driver and passengers by first earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,
same town or city as the
class bus or coach commercial and other cyclonic storms.
dealership.
airline will be provided to a . Vehicle immobilization situations
location chosen by Roadside *These services are not provided
arising from car accidents
Assistance, depending on for U.S. or Canada residents. All
caused by the driver of the
availability at the chosen services provided in the U.S. and
vehicle or third parties. This
destination. Restrictions apply Canada are at the owner's expense
means any occurrence that
based on vehicle specifications. and will be reimbursed by Roadside
causes physical injury to the
Assistance.
If you are on the road, taxi occupants and/or the vehicle
service to the nearest bus caused by external forces.
station or airport will be . Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,
provided. armed forces or police actions
which prevent timely delivery of
assistance services.

. Food service, beverages,
telephone calls, or other extra
Contacting Roadside Assistance Scheduling Service
costs. Accommodation costs Roadside Assistance services are Appointments
apply only to Mexico per the of no cost to you and available (U.S. and Canada)
terms and conditions of the 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance program. Costs are only incurred in situations When the vehicle requires warranty
that exceed the limits of the service, contact your dealer and
. Any damage to the vehicle program, some of which are listed request an appointment. By
without intent, derived from the previously in this section. scheduling a service appointment
services provided. and advising the service consultant
To contact Roadside Assistance by
. Cost of towing a trailer when of your transportation needs, your
phone, use the following numbers:
choosing a Chevrolet dealer that dealer can help minimize your
is nearest to the temporary Mexico inconvenience.
storage facility for the disabled 01-800-466-0800 If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
vehicle. into the service department
United States immediately, keep driving it until it
. Cost of all maneuvers required
to access the vehicle when it is 1-866-466-8901 can be scheduled for service,
not available to be towed. unless, of course, the problem is
Canada safety related. If it is, please call
. Cost of fuel provided. 1-800-268-6800 your dealership, let them know this,
Routine vehicle repair costs are and ask for instructions.
E-mail
not covered by the Roadside If your dealer requests you to bring
Assistance program. For more asistencia.chevrolet@gm.com the vehicle for service, you are
information, see your new vehicle Chevrolet reserves the right to make urged to do so as early in the work
warranty. any changes or discontinue the day as possible to allow for
Roadside Assistance program at same-day repair.
any time without notification.
Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options original receipts and can only be up

to the maximum amount allowed by
Program (U.S. and Warranty service can generally be
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
Canada) completed while you wait. However,
for U.S. customers, should you
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
To enhance your ownership arrange transportation through a
to minimize inconvenience by
experience, we and our participating friend or relative, limited
providing several transportation
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy reimbursement for reasonable fuel
options. Depending on the
Transportation, a customer support expenses may be available. Claim
circumstances, your dealer can
program for vehicles with the amounts should reflect actual
offer one of the following:
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty costs and be supported by original
Coverage period in Canada), Shuttle Service receipts. See your dealer for
extended powertrain, and/or information regarding the allowance
Shuttle service is the preferred
hybrid-specific warranties in both amounts for reimbursement of fuel
means of offering Courtesy
the U.S. and Canada. or other transportation costs.
Transportation. Dealers may provide
Several Courtesy Transportation shuttle service to get you to your Courtesy Rental Vehicle
options are available to assist in destination with minimal interruption
Your dealer may arrange to provide
reducing inconvenience when of your daily schedule. This includes
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
warranty repairs are required. one-way or round-trip shuttle service
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
within reasonable time and distance
Courtesy Transportation is not a that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
parameters of your dealer's area.
part of the New Vehicle Limited for an overnight warranty repair.
Warranty. A separate booklet Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
entitled “Limited Warranty and Reimbursement and must be supported by original
Owner Assistance Information” receipts. This requires that you sign
If the vehicle requires overnight
furnished with each new vehicle and complete a rental agreement
warranty repairs, and public
provides detailed warranty coverage and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
information. rental vehicle provider requirements.
your dealer's shuttle service, the
Requirements vary and may include
expense must be supported by
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card, Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts
etc. You are responsible for fuel may also be used for repair. These
usage charges and may also be
(U.S. and Canada) parts are typically removed from
responsible for taxes, levies, usage If the vehicle is involved in a vehicles that were total losses in
fees, excessive mileage, or rental collision and it is damaged, have prior crashes. In most cases, the
usage beyond the completion of the the damage repaired by a qualified parts being recycled are from
repair. technician using the proper undamaged sections of the vehicle.
It may not be possible to provide a equipment and quality replacement A recycled original equipment GM
like vehicle as a courtesy rental. parts. Poorly performed collision part may be an acceptable choice to
repairs diminish the vehicle resale maintain the vehicle's originally
Additional Program value, and safety performance can designed appearance and safety
Information be compromised in subsequent performance; however, the history of
collisions. these parts is not known. Such parts
All program options, such as shuttle are not covered by the GM New
service, may not be available at Collision Parts Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
every dealer. Please contact your related failures are not covered by
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
dealer for specific information that warranty.
parts made with the same materials
about availability. All Courtesy
and construction methods as the Aftermarket collision parts are also
Transportation arrangements will be
parts with which the vehicle was available. These are made by
administered by appropriate dealer
originally built. Genuine GM companies other than GM and may
personnel.
Collision parts are the best choice to not have been tested for the vehicle.
General Motors reserves the ensure that the vehicle's designed As a result, these parts may fit
right to unilaterally modify, appearance, durability, and safety poorly, exhibit premature durability/
change, or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine corrosion problems, and may not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM perform properly in subsequent
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
eligibility pursuant to the terms and covered by the GM New Vehicle
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle aftermarket collision parts. Some Move the vehicle only if its position
failure related to such parts is not insurance companies will not puts you in danger, or you are
covered by that warranty. specify aftermarket collision parts. instructed to move it by a police
When purchasing insurance, we officer.
Repair Facility recommend that you ensure that the Give only the necessary information
GM also recommends that you vehicle will be repaired with GM to police and other parties involved
choose a collision repair facility that original equipment collision parts. in the crash.
meets your needs before you ever If such insurance coverage is
need collision repairs. Your dealer not available from your current For emergency towing see
may have a collision repair center insurance carrier, consider switching Roadside Assistance Program (U.S.
with GM-trained technicians and to another insurance carrier. and Canada) on page 13‑7 or
state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be Roadside Assistance Program
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing (Mexico) on page 13‑9.
able to recommend a collision repair company may require you to have
center that has GM-trained insurance that ensures repairs with Gather the following information:
technicians and comparable Genuine GM Original Equipment
equipment.
. Driver name, address, and
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or telephone number.
Insuring the Vehicle Genuine Manufacturer replacement
. Driver license number.
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
Protect your investment in the GM you may be charged at the end of . Owner name, address, and
vehicle with comprehensive and the lease for poor quality repairs. telephone number.
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the If a Crash Occurs . Vehicle license plate number.
quality of coverage afforded by If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle make, model, and
various insurance policy terms. emergency services for help. Do not model year.
Many insurance policies provide leave the scene of a crash until all
reduced protection to the GM
. Vehicle Identification
matters have been taken care of. Number (VIN).
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs through the use of

. Insurance company and policy
number.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Publications
but you must live with the repair.
. Depending on your policy limits,
Ordering Information
General description of the
damage to the other vehicle. your insurance company may Service Manuals
initially value the repair using
Choose a reputable repair facility aftermarket parts. Discuss this with Service Manuals have the diagnosis
that uses quality replacement parts. the repair professional, and insist on and repair information on the
See “Collision Parts” earlier in this Genuine GM parts. Remember, engines, transmission, axle,
section. if the vehicle is leased, you may be suspension, brakes, electrical,
If the airbag has inflated, see What obligated to have the vehicle steering, body, etc.
Will You See after an Airbag repaired with Genuine GM parts, Service Bulletins
Inflates? on page 3‑26. even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost. Service Bulletins give additional
Managing the Vehicle Damage technical service information
Repair Process If another party's insurance needed to knowledgeably service
company is paying for the repairs, General Motors cars and trucks.
In the event that the vehicle requires you are not obligated to accept a
damage repairs, GM recommends Each bulletin contains instructions
repair valuation based on that to assist in the diagnosis and
that you take an active role in its insurance company's collision policy
repair. If you have a pre-determined service of the vehicle.
repair limits, as you have no
repair facility of choice, take the contractual limits with that company. Owner Information
vehicle there, or have it towed there. In such cases, you can have control
Specify to the facility that any Owner publications are written
of the repair and parts choices as
required replacement collision parts specifically for owners and intended
long as the cost stays within
be original equipment parts, either to provide basic operational
reasonable limits.
new Genuine GM parts or recycled information about the vehicle. The
original GM parts. Remember, Owner Manual includes the
recycled parts will not be covered by Maintenance Schedule for all
the GM vehicle warranty. models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Or write to: Reporting Safety

Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. Attention: Customer Service
Defects
RETAIL SELL PRICE: 47911 Halyard Drive
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Plymouth, MI 48170 Reporting Safety Defects
shipping fees. Prices are subject to change without to the United States
Without Portfolio: Owner notice and without incurring Government
Manual only. obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery. If you believe that your vehicle
RETAIL SELL PRICE: has a defect which could cause
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or
shipping fees. funds. Make checks payable in U.S. death, you should immediately
funds.
Current and Past Models inform the National Highway
Technical Service Bulletins and
Traffic Safety Administration
Manuals are available for current (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
and past model GM vehicles. General Motors.
ORDER TOLL FREE: If NHTSA receives similar
1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday complaints, it may open an
8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time investigation, and if it finds that
For Credit Card Orders Only a safety defect exists in a group
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit of vehicles, it may order a recall
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com. and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects
the Vehicle Safety Hotline to the Canadian to General Motors
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
http://www.safercar.gov; or If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
write to: believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors.
defect, notify Transport Canada Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Administrator, NHTSA immediately, and notify General
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. Chevrolet Motor Division
Motors of Canada Limited.
Washington, D.C. 20590 Chevrolet Customer
Call Transport Canada at
Assistance Center
You can also obtain other 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170
information about motor Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170
vehicle safety from Road Safety Branch
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
http://www.safercar.gov. 80 rue Noel
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1
(French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Care Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data in which crashes and injuries occur.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain Important: EDR data is recorded
crash or near crash-like situations, by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
This GM vehicle has a number of crash situation occurs; no data is
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will recorded by the EDR under normal
information about the vehicle’s driving conditions and no personal
performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The data (e.g., name, gender, age,
For example, the vehicle uses and crash location) is recorded.
computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and However, other parties, such as
control engine and transmission law enforcement, could combine
performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. the EDR data with the type of
conditions for airbag deployment personally identifying data routinely
and deploy airbags in a crash, and, The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as: acquired during a crash
if so equipped, to provide antilock investigation.
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating. To read data recorded by an EDR,
data to help your dealer technician special equipment is required, and
service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were needed. In addition to the vehicle
operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened. manufacturer, other parties, such as
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was law enforcement, that have the
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or special equipment, can read the
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal. information if they have access to
as radio presets, seat positions, and the vehicle or the EDR.
. How fast the vehicle was
temperature settings. traveling.
GM will not access this data or pressing the Q button and personal information or link with any
share it with others except: with the speaking to an advisor. See OnStar other GM system containing
consent of the vehicle owner or, Overview on page 14‑1. personal information.
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response Navigation System Radio Frequency
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of If the vehicle has a navigation
Statement
GM's defense of litigation through system, use of the system may This vehicle has systems that
the discovery process; or, as result in the storage of destinations, operate on a radio frequency that
required by law. Data that GM addresses, telephone numbers, and comply with Part 15 of the Federal
collects or receives may also be other trip information. Refer to the Communications Commission (FCC)
used for GM research needs or may navigation manual for information on rules and with Industry Canada
be made available to others for stored data and for deletion Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
research purposes, where a need is instructions. Operation is subject to the following
shown and the data is not tied to a two conditions:
specific vehicle or vehicle owner. Radio Frequency
1. The device may not cause
Identification (RFID)
OnStar® harmful interference.
RFID technology is used in some 2. The device must accept any
If the vehicle is equipped with an vehicles for functions such as tire
active OnStar system, that system interference received, including
pressure monitoring and ignition interference that may cause
may also record data in crash or system security, as well as in
near crash-like situations. The undesired operation of the
connection with conveniences such device.
OnStar Terms and Conditions as key fobs for remote door locking/
provides information on data unlocking and starting, and Changes or modifications to any of
collection and use and is available in-vehicle transmitters for garage these systems by other than an
at www.onstar.com (U.S.) or door openers. RFID technology in authorized service facility could void
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by GM vehicles does not use or record authorization to use this equipment.
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview The OnStar system status light is

next to the OnStar buttons. If the
status light is:
OnStar Overview . Solid Green: System is ready.
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 . Flashing Green: On a call.
OnStar Services . Red: Indicates a problem.
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Push Q or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a (1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to an
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system Advisor.
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Push X to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic . Make a call, end a call,
OnStar Additional Services. or answer an incoming call.
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
. Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
. Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation voice commands.
Requires the available Directions
and Connections service plan.
14-2 OnStar
Push Q to connect to a live OnStar Services Navigation

Advisor to: OnStar navigation requires the
. Verify account information or Emergency Directions and Connections
update contact information. With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get driving directions. Requires the built-in system can automatically Push Q to receive directions or
the available Directions and connect to help in a crash even if have them sent to the vehicle
Connections service plan. you cannot ask for it. navigation screen. Destinations can
. Receive On-Demand Push ] to connect to an also be forwarded to the vehicle
Diagnostics for a check on the Emergency Advisor. GPS from Google Maps™ or
vehicle’s key operating systems. technology is used to identify the MapQuest.com. The OnStar
vehicle location and can provide mapping database is continuously
. Receive Roadside Assistance. updated. Visit www.onstar.com for
critical information to emergency
Push ] to get a priority connection personnel. The Advisor is also coverage maps.
to an Emergency Advisor available trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
24/7 to: emergency situations.
. Get help for an emergency. 1. Push Q to connect to a live
. Be a Good Samaritan or
Security Advisor.
respond to an AMBER Alert. OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
. Get crisis assistance and
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
evacuation routes.
if the vehicle is equipped with these
services. OnStar can unlock the 4. Follow the voice-guided
vehicle doors remotely, if it is commands.
equipped with automatic door locks,
and can help police locate the
vehicle if it is stolen.
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands Repeat screen-based navigation system.

During a Planned Route When ready, the directions will be
1. Push X. System responds: downloaded to the vehicle.
Cancel Route “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destination Download: Push Q,
1. Push X. System responds: 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds
with the last direction given, then then request the Advisor to
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say download directions to the
“Cancel route.” System responds with “OnStar ready,”
then a tone. navigation system in the vehicle.
responds: “Would you like to After the call ends, push the “Go”
cancel route directions to your 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice button on the navigation screen to
destination?” commands. begin driving directions.
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: Get My Destination Destinations can also be
“OK, route canceled.” downloaded on the go. For
1. Push X. System responds: information about eNav, Destination
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Download, and coverage maps visit
commands.
2. Say “Get my destination.” www.onstar.com.
Route Preview System responds with miles to
1. Push X. System responds: the destination, then responds Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. with “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
2. Say “Route Preview.” System 3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three commands. the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. controlled from a cell phone through
Other Navigation Services the OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.
3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voice Available from OnStar See www.onstar.com for
commands. OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers coverage maps.
to send destinations from Google
Maps and MapQuest.com to their
Turn-by-Turn Navigation or
14-4 OnStar
Hands-Free Calling Store a Name Tag for Speed Verify Minutes and Expiration
Dialing
1. Push X. System responds: Push X and say “minutes” then
“OnStar ready.” 1. Push X. System responds: “verify” to check how many minutes
2. Say “Dial.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” remain and their expiration date.
“Please say the name or number 2. Say “Store.” System responds: OnStar Mobile App
to call.” “Please say the number you
would like to store.” With an iPhone® or
3. Say the entire number without Android™-based mobile device, an
pausing, including a “1” and the 3. Say the entire number without OnStar RemoteLink mobile app can
area code. System responds: pausing. System responds: be downloaded. The vehicle can be
“OK calling.” “Please say the name tag.” remote started, if equipped, or the
Retrieve My Number 4. Pick a name tag. “System doors can be unlocked from
responds: ”About to store <name anywhere there is cell phone
1. Push X. System responds: tag>. Does that sound OK?” service. It can also check the fuel
“OnStar ready.” level, tire pressure, and oil life.
5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again. It can connect to an OnStar Advisor
2. Say “My Number.” System System responds: “OK, storing anytime. For OnStar mobile app
responds: “Your OnStar <name tag>.” compatibility or further information,
Hands-Free Calling number is.” see www.onstar.com.
Place a Call Using a Stored
End a Call Number
Push X. System responds: “Call 1. Push X. System responds:
ended.” “OnStar ready.”
2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
OnStar 14-5
Diagnostics OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works

OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will Information Automatic Crash Response,
perform a vehicle check every Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
month. It will check the engine, Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
transmission, antilock brakes, and Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
major vehicle systems. It also Push Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
checks the tire pressures, if the eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
vehicle is equipped with the Tire can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
Pressure Monitoring System. If a account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
diagnostics check is needed receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
between e-mails, push Q, and an
may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
Advisor can run a check. vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
information. conditions, see www.onstar.com
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);
Reactivation for Subsequent contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
Owners (1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY
Push Q and follow the prompts to 1‐877‐248‐2080; or push Q to
speak to an Advisor as soon as speak with an Advisor. OnStar
possible after acquiring the vehicle. services require a vehicle electrical
The Advisor will update vehicle system, wireless service, and GPS
records and will explain the OnStar satellite technologies to be available
service offers and options available. and operating for features to
function properly. These systems
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
14-6 OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on The available dealer‐installed
your vehicle is in a place where page 13‑20 for information TTY system can provide in-vehicle
OnStar has an agreement with a regarding Part 15 of the Federal access to all of the OnStar services,
wireless service provider for service Communications Commission (FCC) except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
in that area, and the wireless rules and Industry Canada Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation.
service provider has coverage, Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.
network capacity, reception, and Onstar.com
technology compatible with OnStar’s Services for People with The website provides access to
service. Service involving location Disabilities account information, manages the
information about the vehicle cannot Advisors provide services to help OnStar subscription, and allows
work unless GPS signals are subscribers with physical disabilities viewing of videos of each service.
available, unobstructed, and and medical conditions. Get subscription plan pricing and
compatible with the OnStar sign up for OnStar Vehicle
hardware. OnStar service may not Push Q for help with: Diagnostics. Click on the “My
work if the OnStar equipment is not . Locating a gas station with an Account” tab on the home page.
properly installed or it has not been attendant to pump gas.
properly maintained. If equipment or OnStar Personal Identification
software is added, connected,
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., Number (PIN)
or modified, OnStar service may not that meets accessibility needs.
A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond . Providing directions to the the OnStar services, like Remote
OnStar’s control may prevent closest hospital or pharmacy in Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, urgent situations. Assistance. You will be prompted
tunnels, weather, electrical system to change the PIN the first time
design and architecture of the TTY Users when speaking with an Advisor. To
vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a OnStar has the ability to change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar
crash, or wireless phone network communicate to the deaf, and provide the Advisor with the
congestion or jamming. hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impaired current number.
customers while in the vehicle.
OnStar 14-7
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas

OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the new-vehicle . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
limited warranty. The manufacturer occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
of the vehicle furnishes detailed buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
warranty information. around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
underpasses, or parking
Languages garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
The vehicle can be programmed dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
to respond in French or Spanish. not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
Push Q and ask an Advisor. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Advisors can speak French or OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Spanish. have difficulty identifying the may come on. Push Q to try the
exact location. call again or try again after driving a
Potential Issues . In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
Some OnStar services are disabled can use the last stored GPS
after five days. OnStar cannot location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
perform Remote Door Unlock or responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Stolen Vehicle Assistance after the electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
vehicle has been off continuously and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
for five days. After five days, OnStar available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
can contact Roadside Assistance to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
and a locksmith to help gain access may not operate if the battery is
route or may ask for a call back
to the vehicle. discharged or disconnected.
after the vehicle is driven into an
open area.
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment Privacy

The OnStar system is integrated The complete OnStar Privacy
into the electrical architecture of the Statement may be found at
vehicle. Do not add any electrical www.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitive
equipment. See Add-On Electrical users of wireless communications
Equipment on page 9‑80. Added are cautioned that the privacy of any
electrical equipment may interfere information sent via wireless cellular
with the operation of the OnStar communications cannot be assured.
system and cause it to not operate. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept or access transmissions
and private communications without
consent.
INDEX i-1
A Airbag System (cont'd) Antilock Brake

What Will You See after an System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Accessories and
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
When Should an Airbag Appearance Care
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-28
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-22 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92
Add-On Electrical
Airbags Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Adding Equipment to the Assistance Program,
Additional Information,
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Adjustable Throttle and
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Servicing Airbag-Equipped CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Adjustments
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32 Audio System
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Alarm System Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-43
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Airbag System
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Automatic
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Antenna Dimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
How Does an Airbag
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Anti-theft Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Passenger Sensing
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-39 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
What Makes an Airbag
Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
i-2 INDEX
Automatic Transmission Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 C

Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Shift Lock Control Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
California
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Auxiliary Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Perchlorate Materials
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-29 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
B Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Capacities and
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Carbon Monoxide
Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-36
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Midgate® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Voltage and Charging Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-32 and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-35
Cargo
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Brake Cover Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Pedal and Adjustable Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20
INDEX i-3
Cautions, Danger, and Cleaning Courtesy Transportation

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92 Cover
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1 Cargo Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Check Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4, 13-5
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14 Text Telephone (TTY)
Ignition Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-31 Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Customer Information
Child Restraints Continuous Damping Service Publications
Infants and Young Control (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-16
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Customer Satisfaction
Lower Anchors and Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43 Coolant
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 D
Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-51, 3-52 Engine Temperature Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Danger, Warnings, and
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19
i-4 INDEX
Daytime Running Driving (cont'd) Electrical System (cont'd)

Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12 Fuses and Circuit
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14 Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Instrument Panel Fuse
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-16 Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Engine
Door Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34 Dual Automatic Climate Check and Service Engine
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 DVD Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Rear Seat Entertainment Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33 Coolant Temperature
Driver Information DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Driving E Cooling System Messages . . .5-35
Characteristics and E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59 Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Electrical Equipment, Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80 Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Electrical System Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-27 Engine Compartment Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
INDEX i-5
Engine (cont'd) Filter, Front Seats

Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Overheated Protection Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-59
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95 Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Fluid Filling a Portable Fuel
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-29 Automatic Transmission . . . . .10-11 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Four-Wheel Drive Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . 9-35, 9-39 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-57
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-23
Exterior Cargo Lamps . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Fog Lamps Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Requirements, California . . . . .9-57
Four-Wheel System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
F Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28, 9-35, 9-39 Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Fan Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Front Fog Lamp
Features Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
i-6 INDEX
Fuses Gauges (cont'd) Headlamps (cont'd)

Engine Compartment Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Daytime Running
Fuses and Circuit Warning Lights and Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument Panel Fuse General Information High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Heated and Ventilated Front
G Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heater
Gasoline GM Mobility Reimbursement Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Gauges High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Engine Coolant H Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Headlamps Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 How to Wear Safety Belts
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
INDEX i-7
I L Level Control
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47
Lighting
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
Entry/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Lights
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Antilock Brake System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Exterior Lamps Off
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
J Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
K LATCH System
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-37 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-3
Replacing Parts after a
Keyless Entry Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-14
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
i-8 INDEX
Lights (cont'd) M Messages (cont'd)

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Maintenance
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
Traction Control System Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37
Maintenance Schedule
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Object Detection System . . . . .5-37
Recommended Fluids
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47 Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-38
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Locks Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . 9-35, 9-39
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Midgate® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Messages
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Mirrors
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-39
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-23 Automatic Dimming
Battery Voltage and
Lower Anchors and Tethers Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
for Children (LATCH Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-35
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
INDEX i-9
N Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-34 P

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Navigation Park
OnStar®
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26
Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5
Vehicle Data Recording Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Parking
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
O Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Object Detection System Brake and P (Park)
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-32
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-28
Operation, Infotainment
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Passenger Airbag Status
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Ordering
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-28
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-16
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Perchlorate Materials
Outlets
Oil Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Personalization
Overheated Engine
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Protection
Engine Oil Pressure Phone
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-45
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36 Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
i-10 INDEX
Power R Recommended
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Radio Frequency
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Recommended Fluids and
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Records
Radios
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-26 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Recreational Vehicle
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24 Reimbursement Program,
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Pregnancy, Using Safety Remote Keyless Entry
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Privacy Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Radio Frequency Replacement
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Rear Seat Entertainment
Program Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Courtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13 Replacement Parts
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-43
Proposition 65 Warning, Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-52
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-34
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Replacing LATCH System
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20
INDEX i-11
Reporting Safety Defects S Seats (cont'd)

Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18 Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-4
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Restraints Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
How to Wear Safety Belts
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Retained Accessory Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-77
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Ride Control Systems Securing Child
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38 Restraints . . . . . . . . 3-49, 3-51, 3-52
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20
Roads Security
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Safety Defects Reporting
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-18
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Roof Service
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Accessories and
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-12
Running the Vehicle While Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14
Seats
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Maintenance, General
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
i-12 INDEX
Service (cont'd) Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-30 T

Publications Ordering Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-12 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Taillamps
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Shift Lock Control Function Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6
Check, Automatic Steps
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-18
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Power Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Shifting Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Storage Areas
Tires
Sidemarker Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35 Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65
Signals, Turn and Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Specifications and Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Top-Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-66
StabiliTrak Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-55
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43 System
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-54
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
INDEX i-13
Tires (cont'd) Towing (cont'd) U

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-50
Secondary Latch System . . . 10-77 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-79
Uniform Tire Quality
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Terminology and Traction
Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-50
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Control System (TCS)/
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54
Uniform Tire Quality StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-50
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Trailer
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Wheel Alignment and Tire Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-79
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35, 9-39 V
When It Is Time for New Transmission Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Top-Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40 Identification
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Transportation Program, Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Towing Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-63 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71 Truck-Camper Loading Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-62 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-41
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-85 Turn and Lane-Change Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Turn Signal Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
i-14 INDEX
Vehicle Care Wheels

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Alignment and Tire
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
When It Is Time for New
W Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Warning Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Windshield
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Winter
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-32
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

2k12avalanche PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2k12avalanche PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual - 2012 - crc 2nd edition - 11/7/11 Black plate (1,1)

2012 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1

2012 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M

This manual describes features that Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure

In Brief Passenger Sensing

Initial Drive See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote

Canceling a Remote Start Power Door Locks Midgate®

Power Seats Lumbar Adjustment Power Lumbar

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

Passenger Sensing Mirror Adjustment

Heated Mirrors Interior Mirror Steering Wheel

Throttle and Brake Pedal Interior Lighting

6: Turn the band up for more Climate Controls

A. Fan Control E. Air Conditioning

D. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window Defogger

If available, the Range Selection

Single Speed Transfer Case

N (Neutral): Vehicles with a two Vehicle Features

Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)

O : Press to turn the system on BAND: Press to choose between

b / g : Press to silence the vehicle Cruise Control [ : Press to disengage cruise

Driver Information 3 : Press to display the V : Press to set or reset certain

Rear Vision It operates at speeds less than Universal Remote System

Resetting the Oil Life System 3. Display OIL LIFE REMAINING

Roadside Assistance Roadside Assistance and OnStar Sign up today at:

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks If locked out of your vehicle, contact

Leaving children in a vehicle with With an active OnStar subscription,

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

If there is a decrease in the RKE when Q is pressed again within

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under Programming Transmitters to Battery Replacement

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

The vehicle cannot be remote Door Locks WARNING (Continued)

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Door Locks Delayed Locking See Vehicle Personalization (With

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

Doors WARNING (Continued)

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Rear Glass Removal and Although the rear glass can be

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Reinstalling the Rear Glass

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

3. Pull the rear glass out from the

Be sure to align the rear glass 5. Apply a firm downward pressure

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

3. Lower the Midgate until it is flat.

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Raising the Midgate

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Power Assist Steps The power assist steps Vehicle Security

The vehicle may have power assist

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

If the delayed locking feature is unlock button on the RKE

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows